Home

4 - GE Intelligent Platforms: Support Home

1. Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 128 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8323 2083H Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Data Type 11 See Table 6 19 Data Type Size 12 See Table 6 19 Variable Type 13 See Table 6 20 Length of Variable Name or Address 14 1 160r1 32 Variable Name or Address 15 30 Altemate Access Index 31 32 0 or more Number of Elements 33 See Table 6 20 VariableScope 34 See Table 6 54 Length of Write Data 35 1 to 2048 Length of Domain Name 36 0 32 Domain Name 37 52 characterstring Write Data or Buffer Address 53 133 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q T M Decimal Value 8 10 70 72 74 Command Number Identifies this as a Write Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Data Type Specifies the type of data to be written to the remote variable Data Type Size Specifies the size of the data elements to be written to the remote variable Variable Type Chooses the kind of variable access i e Named or Unnamed and the options which will be used for the access Length of Variable Name or Address When
2. Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event 9 a Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request CPU SRTP Service NACKed Establish session request Agent events b Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request Continued CPUNACKed Terminate session request c LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Request received with Connection machine in wrong state d LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Connection state machine failed action routine e LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming SRTP Service Agent could not attach to the SDM f LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Unsolicited message for task which is not connected to this board 10 LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Request state machine hadaninvalidstate eventsequence 11 LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming The number of bytes of data actually received is not equal to the size specified in the SRTP header Event a This event is logged whenever a COMM_REQ is received whose Message COMM_REQ Definition Block MDB contains a word that cannot be interpreted Entry 2 MDB events Entry 5 of the event contain the first 4 words of the MDB This is an applica tion error Check the values of all words associated with COMM REO instructions to be sure that they point to a valid MDB Each COMM REQ will receive a COMM REO Complete With Error status and no processing will be done on the MDB Event b This event is logged when th
3. 7 1 Station Manager Ladder Requests 6 6660 7 1 Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request 8100 7 2 Retrieve Tallies Request 8101 0 0 0 6 c eee eee eee ee 7 4 Retrieve Log Events Request 8102 6 c cece eee 7 6 Restart Ethernet Interface Request 8103 0 c eee eee eee 7 7 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 1 Definition of an Advanced Network esses 8 1 Using this Chapter srs rit roka AE eee eens 8 1 Configure a Station Screen 6 eens 8 2 Defining a Station ter cies seco Rae e EA QU nate ane th aT 8 3 Selecting a Station iie eL Reyes ee achete on ee Eg eres 8 4 Deleting a Station eah a eee eens 8 4 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xii 1994 Contents Section 1 Configuring a Series 90 70 PLC Station 8 5 Configuration Editor Main Menu for the Series 90 70 PLC 8 5 Saving Changes Before Exiting the Configuration Editor Main Menu 8 6 Meni Str ctut sie venceecerbeer te EDU Se a nei ee LS He 8 6 ISO Parameters Menu 0 eee ees 8 7 Data Link Parameters Screen 000 0000 o rarr eee ees 8 8 Network Layer Parameters Screen 00 0 0 cc cece eee eee 8 10 Network Layer RIB Table Screen 0 6 ccc 8 12 Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen 000s eee eee 8 14 Application Processes Scre
4. Data Type Data Type Code Data Type Size s Boolean 3 1bit Bit String 4 1 to 2048 bits Integer 5 1 to 32 bits Unsigned 6 1 to 32 bits Floating Point 7 4 octets Octet String 9 1 to 2048 octets VisibleString 10 1 to 2048 octets Note Data Type Size of integer and unsigned values is specified in bits Data Type and Data Type Size for Unnamed Variables are pre defined based on PLC memory location Data Type Size Defines the number of octets or bits in the data type The Data Type Size parameter should use the units and ranges shown in the table above Variable Type Specifies the kind of variable access i e Named or Unnamed and the options that will be used for the access The table below gives the valid values for the Variable Type parameter and their meaning Table 6 20 Variable Type Values Value Variable Type No Elements 0 Named Scalar Variable 1 1 Unnamed Scalar Variable Numeric Address 1 2 Unnamed Scalar Variable Symbolic Address 1 3 Unnamed Scalar Variable Unconstrained Address 1 4 Named Array Variable Array Size 5 Unnamed Array Variable Numeric Address Array Size 6 Unnamed Array Variable Symbolic Address Array Size 7 Unnamed Array Variable Unconstrained Address Array Size 8 Named Array VariableAlternate Access Elements Desired 9 Unnamed Array Variable Numeric AddressAlternate Access Elements Desired 10 Unnamed Array Variable Symbolic AddressAlternate Access Elements Desired 11 U
5. 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 Figure 9 2 Meaning of GEnet LAN Interface Status Inputs Bits 1 through 11 are reserved for future expansion Reserved Reserved Reserved Rserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Memory Access LAN OK Resource problem Initiate indication pending LAN Interface OK MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 E Bit 12 Memory Access is set to one 1 when a remote station on the network reads or writes data in the memory of the local PLC using the MMS Responder communication services This input will be held high for at least one full PLC scan and then it will be set to 0 Bit 13 LAN OK will be held at the value one 1 as long as the LAN Interface software is able to communicate on the network If the network should become inaccessible from this station due either to local or network problems this input will be set to zero 0 This bit will also be set to zero if the Station Manager NET OFF command is used of if the LAN Online Soft Switch is set to NO Bit 14 Resource Problem is set to one 1 whenever the LAN Interface software is expe riencing resource problems This is usually an indication that data from the network is being lost by the local station
6. CONST SYSID l 0004 l CONST TASK 100000000 4 Chapter 5 General PLC Application Programming 5 5 Rung 1 Input I1 triggers T1 which enables execution of the MOVE and COMM REO instructions T1 is used as a positive transition contact executing once when lI1 transitions from OFF to ON Rung 2 The MOVE UINT instruction moves a zero to the CRSW referenced in the COMM REO see rung 3 This clears the CRSW This rung also resets the outputs used to denote OK or FT fault by the COMM REO function block in rung 4 It is recommended that the CRSW be cleared and the COMM REO outputs be cleared each time before issuing a COMM REQ Rung 3 The BLKMV UINT instruction sets up the COMM REO parameters When the rung is activated the seven 7 constant operands are moved into the memory be ginning at the address indicated in the instruction R20 in this example The constant operands in this example are defined below Table 5 4 Block Move Instruction Operands BLKMV UIN T Parameter Loaded Memory Word Description Address Value IN1 R20 00001 The MDB length is one word IN2 R21 00000 Flag must be set to No Wait IN3 R22 00008 The Status Area is in the Register Table IN4 R23 00099 The Status Area is at R100 offset 99 into the Register Table IN5 R24 00000 Not used because of No Wait flag IN6 R25 00000 Not used becaus
7. Initiate lt Y Y lt lt lt Conclude Y Abort Y Cancel IEI UnsolicitedStatus Status GetNameList Identify Read ARR IR MR IR IRIR IRR I Write InformationReport GetVariableAccessAttributes Input Output InitiateDownloadSequence TerminateDownloadSequence TerminateUploadSequence RequestDomainDownload DeleteDomain GetDomainAttributes HR lt K lt pK lt lt x CreateProgramInvocation DeleteProgramInvocation MIRI pK x Kx lt Kf KI x K lt K IK KK lt K K Start Stop Resume Reset lt lt lt Kp Kl Kl K lt Kl Kl KL K lt KI Kl KL K lt lt K K lt lt GetProgramInvocationAttributes lt Y milji lll l lll S C A E N S C A L S P S S A STATE CHANGES ALLOWED NO STATE CHANGES ALLOWED LIMITED SERVICES PERMITTED SUPPORT SERVICES ALLOWED MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Capability Objects Acapability is a locally defined resource either physical or logical which can be identified by aname Capabilities are not further constrained by MMS Capabilities may be used to segment the functions of the VMD in some way meaningful to the application or to the process For example a capability conveyor could be defined for a conveyor an
8. Factory LAN System Manager CGSM gt Version 2 84 7 Layer Application DIB Dou Common Name Station Name Station Type RESP6 80019800000 STA1 SERIES_96 78 gt APPL 8e8G1 9800088 STA1 SERIES_98 76 gt RESP 86619688001 STAZ SERIES 98 8 gt RPPL8S888198BBBE1 STAZ SERIES_36 76 gt RESPO880190000903 STAZ SERIES 98 7 0 gt BPPL8088819808803 STAZ SERIES 98 78 C END OF LIST 1 Cursor Page Search through the list and view station details lt cAlt P Create Print File gt CAIlt U Views CALt K KEY HELP CALt H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 20 7 Layer Application DIB Screen The 7 Layer Application DIB Directory Information Base menu displays the network wide Directory Information Base for full 7 Layer communications This DIB is a table which contains directory information about every Application Process identified by Common Name that may be accessed by a GEnet Application Process Information is automatically placed into the 7 Layer Application DIB whenever an Application Process identified by Common Name is defined through the configuration of a station For each listed application the display shows the Common Name Station Name and Station Type In addition you may request more detail for any listed application by pressing the Alt V key The DIB may be examined using the Up Arrow Down Arrow PgUp PgDn Home and End keys The details about a specific DIB entry can
9. Using either of the addresses all or 01000000000 to access stations on the network is recommended only under controlled test conditions Execution of Station Manager commands on an operational network using these addresses may generate a great deal of traffic and might degrade network or node performance temporarily Compare this list with the nodes in the network If all expected nodes are not listed double check that each node is powered up is running the Field Network Test Utility and has its drop cable or transceiver cable connected Correct any deficiencies and repeat steps 1 and 2 until all nodes to be tested are in the response list This procedure assumes that all stations attached to the network remain either powered or not powered continuously from step 2 through step 6 Turning any node s ON or OFF or Restarting any node during this test will artificially inflate the error count Clear the error log and LLC and MAC tallies in all GE Fanuc test responder Interfaces inthe test This step cannot be performed for non GE Fanuc devices using the Station Manager This step can be done for all Interfaces at one time by executing the following REMote commands rem 010000000000 login system Login to all GE Fanucstations rem 010000000000 clear log Clearlogs of all GE Fanucstations rem 010000000000 clear tally Clear tallies of all GE Fanucstations Note Pressing Ctrl R will display the last command executed
10. Fuse FU1 on the LAN Controller board which protects the PLC Power Supply from overload from the externaltransceiver is blown This fuse is not field replaceable Correct the external fault and replace the LAN Controllerboard 122 LAN Controller Fault Restarted LANI F or 123 LAN Interface Hardware Failure Switched Off Network The MAC chip failed its internal loopback test Replace the LAN Controllerboard 124 LAN Controller Fault Restarted LANI F or 125 LAN Interface Hardware Failure Switched Off Network The MAC chip failed to initialize Replace the LAN Controller Board 126 LAN Controller Fault Restarted LANI F or 127 LAN Interface Hardware Failure Switched Off Network The MAC reported a babble fault more than 1518 bytes of data have been transmitted ina frame Replace the LAN Controller board 128 LAN Controller Fault Restarted LANI F Or 129 LAN Interface Hardware Failure Switched Off Network TheMAC reported a handshaking error in accessing the LAN Controller memory Replace the LAN Controller board 12a LANControllerFault Restarted LANI F or 12b LANInterface Hardware Failure Switched Off Network The MAC reported a broken chain of buffers in a transmit frame Since the LAN Controller does not chain buffers this should not occur Replace the LAN Controller board If this fault recurs please report it to GE Fanuc Same fault for bot
11. APPLICATION ENTITY MMS RESPONDER USER ELEMENT APPLICATION ENTITY SERIES 90 70 LADDER UE ACSE MMS AE ACSE MMS AE ASE ASE ASE ASE APPLICATION ASSOCIATION APPLICATION ASSOCIATION REMOTE REMOTE APPLICATION APPLICATION ENTITY ENTITY Figure B 7 Series 90 70 PLC Application Process Implementation B 8 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GE Fanuc CNC AP Implementation The next figure illustrates how the CNC looks as part of the OSI Application Process AP a45178 CNC PMC Application Process Application Process APPLICATION ENTITY APPLICATION ENTITY CNC USER ELEMENT PMC PROGRAM USER ELEMENT ACSE MMS AE ACSE MMS AE ASE ASE ASE ASE APPLICATION ASSOCIATION APPLICATION ASSOCIATION REMOTE REMOTE APPLICATION APPLICATION ENTITY ENTITY Figure B 8 CNC Application Process Implementation GFK 0868 Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 9 Locating Applications Applicationsare identified by an Application Common Name which resolves into an address where the application resides The common name is a string of characters which contains human readable text The address associated with this name consists of a set of entri
12. If you ever move your GSM station configuration files you must redefine the GSMCFG variable in AUTOEXEC BAT to specify the new location 7 Next you will be prompted to specify the type of network card installed in your PC a If you are going to use the GSM for local operation only enter 0 for no LAN interface installed b Ifyou are going to use the GSM for network operation only or for both network and local operation specify the type of PC network card installed in your PC Selections in the menu include the PC network card types listed in Table 3 1 Enter the number for the desired PC Network card type and press Enter This completes the installation of the software for Network GSM operation You must now set up the various DOS system files as explained below before the GSM will run properly Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 7 Setting Up DOS System Files After you have completed the GSM software installation procedure you will need to modify your DOS system files for proper operation of the GSM Refer to the appropriate section below for setting up your DOS system files Local GSM Operation Exclusively During the GSM installation for local operation two sample files were created in the C GSMdirectory These files are CONFIG GSM AUTOEXEC GSM These sample files contain the requirements for the files CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT located in the root directory 1 Toset up you
13. Ladder Programming Tips Ladder Programs for Network Testing ea LAN Interface Status Word 6 71 9 30 LAN Online E 2 Idrtry k 34 LEDs 2 3 2 10 2 11 lgrpmsk0 7 List All Configured Application DIBs Menu Bt List All Stations Screen 3 43 LISW 5 7 LLC See Data Link Imacaddyr Index lmaxdb 7 LOAD Station Manager Command 2 16 LOAD Command Station Manager Load Group Parameters Screen Load Source Load Source Parameters Load Source Download Mode LOAD GROUD LOAD MUITICAST ADDR LOAD TYPE b 20 Loader State 2 15 5 7 Loading a LAN Interface See Download ing Local Application DIB Screen B 30 Local Downloading Locating Applications B 10 LOG Command Station Manager Log Event Definitions 12e p 10 Log event format 9 8 LOGIN Command Station Manager 14 26 LOGOUT Command Station Manager 4 27 Irxringlen f LSAP 10 LTIME Command Station Manager ltxringlen laa Ixidtime M MAC Address p 15 MAC Address Structure of MAC Layer Tallies part of Tally 1 MAC ADDRESS B 20 maltacn 4 34 maltacnobj 1 34 8 17 Mapping MMS Services to ACSE and Pre sentation Services B 4 MAX APPL ASSOC B 19 MAX DATA BUE Index 5 Index Index 6 MAX MMS MESSAGE SIZE MAX NPDU SIZE MAX PDUSZ LOG MAX RESP ASSOC Maximum MMS Message Size Screen MDB 5 2 MDIB Command Station Manager 4 28 Memory Access S
14. Remote Application Common Name A character string indicating the remote Applica tion Common Name This is the name of the application process with which the Series 90 70 application process wishes to communicate Length of Application Context Name The number of characters in the Application Context Name Putting a 0 in this field will cause the default Application Context Name from the configuration parameters to be used Application Context Name Only required if length is not 0 A character string indicat ing the remote Application Context Name If the Length field is not 0 this field must be set to ISO MMS 7 layer ACSE Hesentation context Initiate Indication Service The Initiate Indication Service is used to indicate that a remote application wishes to estab lish an association with the Application Interface The PLC ladder program is notified of an Initiate Indication by the Initiate Indication Pending bit in the LAN Interface Status Word bit 15 The ladder program may issue an Examine Initiate Indication command prior to issuing the Initiate Response command but this is not required 6 12 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 s Examine Initiate Indication Command 8202 The Examine Initiate Indication command may be used to examine the request for an association made by a remote application Upon examining the Initiate Indication the local App
15. The Station Manager accepts several ASCII control characters for various functions The control characters accepted by the Station Manager are listed in the following table AII other control characters are ignored on normal command inputs Illegal control charac ters sent to the Station Manager result in a BEL character being sent to the terminal Table 4 6 Control Characters Control Character Usual Keyboard Function Function BS Ctrl H Backspace Deletepreviouscharacter DEL Delete Deletepreviouscharacter DC1 Ctrl Q Resume output to the display DC2 Ctrl R Recall previous command line DC3 Ctrl S Stop output to the display CAN Ctrl X Cancel the current input line CR Return Enter Terminate line and executecommand If a command line becomes too long to easily type on a single display line the character pair lt RET gt can be used to continue the command on the next line on the display The backslash character will not be used as a part of any argument MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 ACBCommand The ACB command has the form gt acb lt ACBaddr gt lt ACBaddr gt All where lt ACBaddr gt is of the form lt MMS Symbolic Address The possible Sym bolic Addresses for Series 90 70 Ethernet Interfaces are described in Chapter 6 This command displays the contents of a specific ACB Association Control Block
16. trtrantime dec 1500 RetransmitTimeout for the TransportLayer When this timer expires it causes re transmission of unacknowledged Connect Request CR Connect Confirm CC Data Transfer DT Expedited Data ED and Disconnect Request DR TPDUs This parameter is in units of 10 milliseconds The default value for this parameter is 15 seconds Range 1 65535 twindsize dec Window Size for the TransportLayer This parameter is the maximum window size allowed for the receipt of Data Transfer DT TPDUs Range 1 5 twindow dec 2500 Window Timeout for the TransportLayer When this timer times out an acknowledge AK TPDU is transmitted Its value should be less than that for the TransportLayer inactivity timer This parameter is in units of 10 milliseconds The default value for this parameter is 25 seconds Range 1 65535 SRTP Parameters vtsap hex 0004 TSAP for SRTP communication This parameter specifies the TSAP to be used by the SRTP Service Agent Value is 0004 vdpdisab dec Disable DDP operation When non zero this parameter dis ables the Distributed Directory Protocol DDP operation The default value is 0 DDP enabled DDP must be enabled touse Logicmaster 90 70 Ethernet vdptmout dec DDP Conflict Timeout This parameter specifies the maxi mum timeout to detect a duplicate DDP name assignment This parameter is in units of 100 milliseconds The default val
17. 78 4E COMM REQ received from the Series 90 70 ladder program was not al lowed because the Ethernet Interface has not yet received Soft Switches from the CPU or no Soft Switches are defined in the CPU System and Station Management Errors 90 5A Resourceerror unable to get a buffer etc 91 5B Invalid address ina station management transfer request 92 5C Zero length specified in a station management transfer request 99 63 Invalid command in Message Definition Block CommunicationErrors Codes 258 29c hex indicate errors that occur when an error condition oc curs ina Communication Servicerequest 600 258 Resourceerror unable to get a buffer 601 259 Invalidcommunicationservice command number 602 25A Invalid parameterlength 603 25B Invalid ApplicationProcessparameter 604 25C Unable to de activate currently activated Application Process 605 25D Unable to activate Application Process GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 27 9 28 Table 9 12 Extended Status Buffer Error Codes and Definitions Continued Error Code Description dec hex 606 25E Numberof elements parameter may not be zero 607 25F InvalidSymbolicAddressparameter Must be of the form R001 T12 ATI7 etc 608 260 Unable to define Variable Name Either the define request parameters are invalid or the Variable Name Table is full 609 261 InvalidNumeric Address Length parameter This parameter
18. 8205 This Conclude Request command can be used to request the orderly termination of an MMS Application Association Note The Conclude Request will not be allowed if there is an outstanding Status Indication ASW bit 11 Start Indication ASW bit 12 Stop Indication ASW bit 13 Reset Indication ASW bit 15 or Resume Indication ASWE bit 2 The PLC ladder program must respond to these indications before a Conclude Request can be allowed The COMM REO for the Conclude Request command is shown in the table below Table 6 10 Conclude Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 3 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8205 200DH Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Conclude Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Conclude Indication Service The Conclude Indication Service indicates that the remote application wishes to terminate the association This indication is detected by bit 6 of the ACB Association Status Word The PLC Application should respond to this indic
19. Data that requires more than two states or values e g numerical val ues requires multiple bits see Word Broadcast Address A LAN group address that identifies the set of all data stations on a Local Area Network Bridge A functional unit that interconnects two Local Area Networks LAN s that use the same logical link control protocol but may use different medium access control protocols BroadbandLAN A Local Area Network LAN consisting of more than one channel in which data is encoded multiplexed and transmitted with modulation of carriers Broadcast Sending of a frame that is intended to be accepted by all other data stations on the same Local Area Network Broadband Networks Handle medium to large size applications with up to several hundred stations as a typical number which might be attached Broadband technol ogy is used in larger networking systems and requires a headend remodulator Bus Network A Local Area Network in which there is only one path between any two data stations and in which data transmitted by any station is available to all other stations connected to the same transmission medium NOTE A bus network may be linear star or tree topology Byte A group of bits typically 8 bits operated on as a single unit A single alpha nu meric character typically occupies one byte See Octet Cancel Service MMS communication service which allows an application to cause the orderly termination of a service th
20. GEnet System Manager GSM Installing Starting Up and Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Using the GSM Sectionl Installing and Starting Up the GSM Appendix H Sample DOS system files Configuring Stations for a Basic Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Network Section2 Configuring Stations for a Basic Network ISO Parameters General Info Appendix B ISO Networking Concepts MMS Parameters Appendix B ISO Networking Concepts Configuring Stations for an Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for Advanced Network an Advanced Network Downloading a Station Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Section3 Downloading a Station Accessing the Station Manager Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Terminal Emulation Mode Section4 Accessing the Station Manager Chapter 4 The Station Manager Logicmaster Programming Using the Example PLC Ladder Procedure 7 Using the Example PLC Program Ladder Program Programming COMMunications Chapter 5 General PLC Application Programming REQuests Chapter 6 OSI COMMunication REQuest Chapter 7 Station Manager COMMunication REQuest Ethernet Interface Installing the Interface Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface Procedure 1 Installing the Interface Powering Up the Interface Procedure 2 Verifying Proper Power Up of the Interface Configuring the Module Procedure 3 Configuring the Interface Setting Soft Switch Configuration with the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator Field Network Tests Proc
21. LAYE APPL R7 ICATION LAYE R6 PRESENTATION LAYE R5 SESSION LAYE R4 TRANSPORT LAYE R3 NETWORK LAYE DATA R2 LINK LAYE R1 PHYSICAL 4 FUNCTION APPLICATION PROGRAMS NOT PART OF THE OSI MODEL PROVIDES ALL SERVICES DIRECTLY COMPREHENSIBLE TO APPLICATION PROGRAMS RESTRUCTURES DATA TO FROM STANDARDIZED FORMAT USED WITHIN THE NETWORK NAME ADDRESS TRANSLATION ACCESS SECURITY AND SYNCHRONIZE amp MANAGE DATA PROVIDES TRANSPARENT RELIABLE DATA TRANSFER FROM END NODE TO END NODE PERFORMS MESSAGE ROUTING FOR DATA TRANSFER BETWEEN NON ADJACENT NODES IMPROVES ERROR RATE FOR MESSAGES MOVED BETWEEN ADJACENT NODES ENCODES AND PHYSICALLY TRANSFERS MESSAGES BETWEEN ADJACENT NODES PHYSICAL LINK LAYE a41220 RS USER PROGRAM LAYE APPL R7 ICATION LAYE R6 PRESENTATION LAYE R5 SESSION LAYE R4 TRANSPORT LAYE R3 NETWORK LAYE DATA R2 LINK LAYE R1 PHYSICAL 4 ADJACENT NODES ARE NODES ATTACHED TO THE SAME PHYSICAL LINK Figure B 1 OSI Reference Model MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Protocols Used for GE Fanuc Control Devices The layers in the OSI model are abstract They allow network architects to break down the issues in transferring data on networks into mana
22. Print File Screen Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu Foreign Application Processes Screen Download Station Screen Access Station Manager Screen List All Stations Screen List All Configured Applications Menu 7 Layer Application DIB Screen Setup GSM Menu Station Manager Accessed Locally through the 9 pin Serial Port by a GSM in Local Station Manager Mode or an ASCII Terminal Station Manager Accessed Directly over the Network by a GSM in Network Station Manager Mode Station Manager Accessed Remotely over the Network by a GSM in Local Station Manager Mode using the REM Remote Command General Format for COMM REOs Message Types Time Sequence Association Status Word Extension Bits Configure a Station Screen Configuration Editor Main Menu MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 Contents 1 1 1 5 2 2 2 6 2 7 2 9 4 3 1 3 13 3 16 3 19 3 23 3 25 3 26 827 3 28 330 331 3 32 3 34 3 36 3 37 339 3 42 3 43 3 44 3 45 3 46 i 4 2 4 3 5 2 6 2 6 10 8 2 j 8 5 xvi Contents Figure 8 3 ISO Parameters Menu eig tag Ta epi le 8 7 Figure 8 4 Data Link Parameters Screen 0000 c coe ee eee eens 8 8 Figure 8 5 Network Layer Parameters Screen 00 0 000 c ccc eee eee 8 10 Figure 8 6 Network Layer RIB Table Screen 0 0 6 nen 8 12 Figure 8 7 Specifying Automatic or Static Ro
23. SPOR UN SU ee o lt lt lt Exception Log gt gt gt Event l l Empty C EL TS SS SS E Enry ae rs Appendix GEnet System Manager Data Link Error GFK 0868 J Codes The GEnet System Manager Data Link error codes are described in this appendix The NDIS error codes used by the Network GSM and by the NDIS Protocol Manager are also described Table J 1 GEnet System Manager Data Link Error Codes Error Code Description 1 Too many LSAPs 2 LSAPnotregistered 3 DLI task not registered 4 Out of buffers dliact routine 5 Out of buffers dlideact routine 6 Out of buffers dlisend routine 7 Out of buffers dligetbuf routine Restart GSM 8 Bad return code dxprec routine 9 Commanderror bus boot 10 Commanderror open window 11 Open load file error 12 Commanderror boot data 13 Commanderror end of file 14 Commanderror sense 15 Out of buffers GrantBuf routine 16 Bad type GrantBuf routine 17 Power on diagnostics error 18 Power on diagnostics timeout 19 MP400 busy DXPsend routine 20 Controller failed to enter run state 21 Inring failed 22 Hardwarereset failed 23 Send maintenance interface block timeout 24 Maintenance interface block response error 25 Send communication block timeout 26 Bad inputcommand 27 Received communication blockresponse timeout 28 Communication block status error 29 UnknownLSAP 30 Receive data timeout 31 Send data timeout J 1 i2
24. Some of the procedures require prior cable plant design and installation After completing the Installation Procedures you will gain an understanding of the parts of the network and how they fit together You will also have confidence that your equip ment is working properly GFK 0868 2 1 Ethernet Hardware Overview The Ethernet Interface consists of a controller board mounted in the Series 90 70 PLC rack It is connected to an external transceiver via a user provided transceiver cable The external transceiver is then connected to the Ethernet cable The figure below shows the l ayout of the Ethernet Controller board 244663 Oo c LEDS fe qd Q o Oo c RESTART 0O B C PUSHBUTTON A T T p E MODEL 70 n R CMM 741 REPLACEMENT BATTERY YX MopuLeoK CONNECTOR YO onune i XX statusox CURRENTLY 5 ON ORBLINK OK INSTALLED 3 PUSHTORESTART BATTERY L o Fm LANINTERFACE PUSH AND HOLD TOREQUEST O LANINTERFACE O o DOWNLOAD INOP SPIN ge WHENRUNNING SERIA e o9 DIAGNOSTICS o PORT o9 B BATTERY F CONNECTIONS IN
25. Table J 1 GEnet System Manager Data Link Error Codes Continued Error Code Description 32 fmallocerror 34 Deact error 35 Recv error 36 LSAPisactive 37 No actconfirm 38 No deact confirm 39 DeactLSAP error 40 Act error 41 Postbuffer error 42 Nosend confirm 43 Send error 44 ProgrammedI Otimeouterror 45 GPIO Ready error Restart LAN Interface 46 InvalidLANInterface type selection 47 49 Reserved see Table B 2 50 Error opening GEFNDIS driver 51 Error closing GEFNDIS driver 52 GEFNDIS device not open 53 GEFNDIS driver not bound to MAC driver 54 Error posting READ to GEFNDIS driver 55 READindicationerror from GEFNDIS driver 56 Error WRITING TX frame to GEFNDIS driver 57 WRITEconfirm error from GEFNDIS driver 58 NoWRITE confirm from GEFNDIS driver 59 Error during IOCTL READ to GEFNDIS driver 60 IOCTL READ confirm error from GEFNDIS driver 61 NoIOCTL READ confirm from GEFNDIS driver 62 Error during IOCTL WRITE to GEFNDIS driver 63 IOCTLWRITE confirm error from GEFNDIS driver 64 NoIOCTL WRITE confirm from GEFNDIS driver 65 NDISMAC failure Fatal Error Restart PC Additional NDISerror code may be displayed for Data Link Error Codes 54 56 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table J 2 NDIS Error Codes Error Code hexadecimal Description NDIS Error Codes 0000 000D and xxFF may be returned with Data Link Er
26. cnet nent nen eens 6 17 Table 6 10 Conclude Request COMM REQ seen 6 18 Table 6 11 Conclude Response COMM REQ 1 0 n 6 19 Table 6 12 Abort Request COMM REQ es eneen e e Ee a aE AN VEA EEA Hle 6 20 Table 6 13 Examine Association Options Data 0 00 6 es 6 21 Table 6 14 Parameter Conformance Building Blocks 0c ccc nee eens 6 21 Table 6 15 Remote Peer Services Supported 2 0 0 0 66 6 22 Table 6 16 Series 90 70 PLC Memory Organization 6c ene 6 25 Table 6 17 Series 90 70 PLC Symbolic Addresses 0 0 0 6 eee eens 6 26 Table 6 18 Read Request COMM REQ 0 n 6 28 Table 6 19 Data Type Values oie eret Gp C EG e HG a Et A eaa ie p a tace 6 29 Table 6 20 Variable Type Values pepe reei ti Eiei III ee 6 29 Table 6 21 Write Request COMM REQ ssssssssssses sehe 6 31 Table 6 22 InformationReport Request COMM REQ 6 e 6 34 Table 6 23 InformationReport Element Numbers sisse 6 35 Table 6 24 Examine InformationReport Indication Variable Data sssseeslsees 6 36 Table 6 25 Transfer InformationReport Indication Data COMM REQ sslssssse 6 37 Table 6 26 Information Report Data 6 oc lee 6 37 Table 6 27 Discard InformationReport Indication Data COMM REQ ssesss 6 38 Table 6 28 Start Request COMM REQ 6 cece en 6 40 Table 6 29 Examine Start Resume Indication Data eese 6 41 Table 6 30 Start Response
27. m Date and time Last Downloaded m Station s Load Group with values selected by the Load Group The Alt S key is used to search the list of stations for a specified entry When you press the Alt S key you select the data field and value to seek and select the search direction Press the Alt S key again to initiate the search or the Esc key to abort the search Press the Alt P key to create a list file STANAMES LIS of the configured stations Press the Esc key to exit the Show Stations screen and to return to the GSM Main menu List All Configured Application DIBs Menu 3 44 The List All Configured Applications DIBs Menu allows access to the 7 Layer and 3 Lay er miniMAP Application DIB screens The DIB screens display the contents of the net work wide Application DIBs Directory Information Bases Factory LAN System Manager CGSMD gt Version 2 84 Dounload Station Access Station Manager Configure a Station Configure Netuork uide Parameters List All Stations List All Configured Applications Setup GSM Application DIBs BETS ya Er ery a EXIT TO D 3 Layer miniMAP Application DIB Press Up Down Arrow to move the cursor and press Enter to select CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 19 List All Configured Applications Menu MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 7 Layer Application DIB Screen
28. tween nodes and performs the following services message addressing path set up between nodes and message routing Network Driver Interface Specification NDIS A multi vendor specification defining a common interface to the PC network card and application programs running on the PC such as the GSM or Logicmaster 90 70 Ethernet Network Management Agent NMA A component of the application layer Layer 7 that performs local station management functions as directed by a Network Manag er Network Service Access Point NSAP A set of octets which uniquely identify a partic ular station within a particular network Node The physical module that connects a station to the network The Ethernet Inter face is an example of a node It connects a station PLC or CNC to a network Facto ry LAN Numeric Address An absolute address of data as it is mapped into the physical devices PLC or CNC memory Octet A group of 8 bits operated on as a single unit See also Byte One Way Propagation Time See Transmission Path Delay Open System Interconnection OSI Defines international standards for communica tion systems development and implementation Refer to Appendix B Figure B 1 OSI Reference Model developed by ISO Defines a hierarchy of seven layers of communication protocol Open System Interconnection OSI Reference Model An international standard for network architecture which defines a seven layer model The intent is to provid
29. 08001901001f lt lt lt Field Network Test Utility gt gt gt After the station enters the network the Station Manager commands shown in the fol lowing table can be used to test the network Some of the commands have restrictions due to the limited resources available in this utility MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 4 5 Field Network Test Utility Commands Command Restrictions bps chbps chdate chsosw chtime clear clsosw date help or load log login net node ok rem report restart show sosw stopt stat tally test time Limitedto clear tally clear log clear heap and clear exs Only taskidentifiers b c and 1 are supported Only task identifiers b c and 1 aresupported Only task identifiers b c and l aresupported Monitor Commands are not in italics Modify Commands are shownin italics The Field Network Test utility is exited by restarting the Ethernet Interface This can be accomplished by entering the RESTART or LOAD commands pressing the Ethernet In terface Restart button or by cycling power on the Series 90 70 PLC Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 15 Section 3 Station Manager Command Descriptions Symbols are used to denote options or alternatives in the command parameters These symbols are used to help give a clear and complete description
30. 8 1 Tuning and RUM c Bale for Ad vdptmout 4 35 Verifying Proper Power Up of the Inter twindow r face 2 8 twindsize 4 35 8 14 Virtual Manufacturing Device VMD Ob 35 B 14 m TED TX RING LEN VMD Attributes TYPE SIZE VMD Command Station Manager VMD Logical Status B 15 U VMD Physical Status VMD Status Attributes B 14 Unconstrained Addresses ti p 4 35 Unnamed Variables Unsolicited Status Indication Service 6 56 W Unsolicited Status Request 8252 MMS COMM REQ WINDOW SIZE Updating Existing GSM Software WINDOW TIMEOUT USE CHECKSUM Write Confirm Service 6 33 USE CHECKSUMS Write Indication Service 6 32 Write Request Command 8323 MMS User Elements COMM REQ Using the GSM Access Station Manager Function Using the Monitor Commands X Using the Station Manager 4 8 Xircom Pocket Adapter GFK 0868 Index 11
31. Appendix G Ladder Programs for Network Testing G 3 G 4 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 CEGKOROEOK OR KCK OKCR KA OKOR OK AKA KK KAKA LAK A BRAK AR AKA RAK A EUR CE AR AE BEAK EEA AA KABA KAKA KABA SAE AAA Check key bits to determine the status of LAN communications RRR RRR ek kk SR KKK RK KEKE ER OR KORSRCECKDECARcE kCK hcK kcE cR Uk EERE K ch cR ck ck kcK kch kck ck IER AER AKER AK AER AKER K RK RY lt lt RUNG 4 gt gt LANIFOK LAN OK WAS UP yes eese E SS Ss SSS SS SSS Sasa SSS aS SS SS SS SSS SS secs Se se WAS UP 44 qp lt lt RUNG 5 gt gt LANIFOK WAS UP INF FL Pah Pe we SS Se SS a Sy See ee eo ee ees ise l INF_FL 4e s lt lt RUNG 6 gt gt LANIFOK LAN OK WAS UP LAN FL pes ques hipsspe E eee uie ey ese lt lt RUNG 7 gt gt FST SCN LANIFOK LAN OK HEALTHY lt lt RUNG 8 gt gt CLRASW COMMENT REBAR KE OE OK E GE OR Ok OR GE OE OE E GE E Ok E GEO OK E GER GE E GK E GK E GE OE QK E GR E GE E GK E AAAS GE E GE e Gk E GE E GE E ERASE E OK E GE E KR GER GRO REY Clear Association Status Word ASW and Association Status Word Extension ASWE on the first scan or when the LAN i f is sick ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck kc ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck cock kc ck ck ck ck ck cock ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck ck KKK KKK ck ck ck ck ck ock kk ck ko ck Sk ck ko Sk ko Sk ko ko ko k
32. CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 11 MMS Parameters Menu This menu selection is used to examine and modify m Variable Names wm Maximum MMS Message Size The sub menus are described below GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 3 Variable Names Screen 3 32 The Variable Names Screen selection is used to modify the Variable Name Table used by the Ethernet Interface In order to make applications simpler data in the Series 90 70 PLC can be accessed through a symbolic name called a Variable Name The names de fined in this menu are in the Virtual Manufacturing Device VMD Specific scope of MMS This means that the names are available without regard to what program is executing in the Series 90 70 PLC The Variable Names Screen is shown below CONFIGURE GEF81858b Configuration File Name CB88B8B8CG2 1GB SERIES_96 76 ISo0862 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 Variable Names TYPE REFERENCE ENTRY IURRIRBLE NAME DATA_TYPEBSIZE PFX LOCAT iU LU BOOLEAN LE H u CELLER BOOL REG 1 BOOLEAN 681 ZR 8080881 BOOL IO BOOLEAN 981 I 88865 BOOL IO1 BOOLEAN 661 I 66865 BIT_REG BIT STR 688 zR 88881 BIT REG 1 BIT STR 088 ZR 88881 BIT REG 2 BIT STR 685 ZR 8080881 BIT IO BIT STR 064 ZI 808865 SINTS INTEGER 688 ZR 66061 SINT16 INTEGER 918 R 88881 SINT32 INTEGER 826 ZR 88881 UINTS UNSIGNED 808 zR 8008801 UINT16 UNSIGNED 818 ZR 88881 WONTON A WNE e e m
33. DEV is used to identify non GE Fanuc devices It allows information about non GE Fanuc devices to be entered into the Application DIBs LOAD TYPE The type of station being configured For Series 90 70 PLCs this can be I50802 3 or MAP 3 0 MAC ADDRESS The 12 hex digit MAC address of the station being configured This will be either the Default MAC Address as delivered with your board or a Locally Ad ministered MAC Address in the case where you have specified the MAC address your self See the description on the structure of the MAC Address in Chapter 3 Each LAN Interface is delivered with a Default Station Address already set There are several ways to determine this value m Look on the label located on the LAN Interface m Use the Station Manager NODE command m Press the Restart button to see the MAC address appear on the Station Manager terminal screen be sure the Station Manager terminal is connected to the Interface The Default Station MAC Address is a globally administered address the global admin istration process assures that each default MAC address is unique Your organization may have its own scheme of how addresses are administered In this case you will not use the default address but will assign a different address from a set of numbers estab lished by your address administrator LOAD GROUP The number of the selected download group for the station The Load Group selects
34. Factory LAN System Manager CGSM gt Version 2 04 Download Station Access Station Manager Configure a Station Configure Netuork uide Parameters List All System Network Parameters List All Load Group Parameters Setup GSM Load Group Parameters GSM 882 4 SLOT TIME ELLIZ Agr uo EXIT TO DOS LOAD GRP LOAD MULTICAST ADDR 882 4 SLOT TIME E EE Gay HEX gt 1 aseaaaaeeees 8 8880 2 E 8 8888 3 CT ETT 8 80880 4 BBBBBODOBOBRO 8 0880 Slot Time for GSM in octet times 1 8192 Default 2000 7D HEX Edit parameter s gt on screen and press Alt U to update them CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 19 Load Group Parameters Screen The Load Group Parameters are defined as follows The following parameter may be entered for each of the five Load Groups LOAD MUITICAST ADDR Not used by local GSM The value for Load Group 0 de faults to 090060000000 hexadecimal Note The Slot Time data on this screen is not used by the Ethernet Interfaces Itis used only by 802 4 MAP Interfaces which share the GSM configurator 8 30 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Overview GFK 0868 Troubleshooting This chapter is a guide to troubleshooting and problem isolation for the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interfaces This chapter includes the sections listed below Overview Using t
35. Maximum Number of MAP Responder Associations 8 Default 8 Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CAI1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 11 Association Parameters Screen The Association Parameters limit the number of associations which a particular Applica tion Process may have at a given time This is useful to insure that resources are avail able to the other communication services when needed The Ethernet Interface will support a TOTAL of 8 simultaneous Associations including any SRTP associations such as Logicmaster 90 operating over Ethernet The Association Parameters are defined as follows MAX_RESP_ASSOC The maximum number of simultaneous Responder associations that may exist at one time Valid range of 0 to 8 Defaults to 8 Corresponds to Sta tion Manager Parameter assocresp MAX_APPL_ASSOC The maximum number of simultaneous Application Interface associations that may exist at one time Valid range of 0 to 8 Defaults to 8 Corre sponds to Station Manager Parameter assocappl There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esc key exit without saving any changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 19 Local Application DIB Screen 8 20 The Local Application DIB Directory Information Base Screen is used to select Applica t
36. OFF It is OFF if the module fails a diagnostic test or if a fatal failure is detected while the board is running BLINKING This LED is blinking if the module is running diag nostics or is in Soft Switch entry state If this LED and the STATUS OK LED are blinking to gether diagnostics have completed and the operator is being given a chance to enter Field Network Test ONLINE ON ONLINE is ON when the Ethernet Interface is con nected to and ready to communicate on the network OFF This LED is OFF when W the station is not communicating on the network due to disconnection or a disruption of the cable W the local station has malfunctioned or W the Ethernet Interface has been commanded not to enter the network or is in a state where network operation is inappropriate such as Soft Switch Entry state or local loading BLINKING Itis BLINKING when the module is transferring data on the network or loading over the network STATUS OK ON STATUS OK is ON if the module is running without exceptionconditions OFF This LED is OFF if the module is running and detects an event that calls for supervisory attention In this case you should connect the GSM and follow the instructions in Chapter 9 to obtain further information BLINKING This LED is BLINKING if the module is loading or looking for a load source for the Ethernet Interface software Restart Button GFK 0868 The Restart button serves two functions Restar
37. Q byte 20 14 Discrete Temporary T byte 22 16 Discrete Internal 76M byte 24 18 Special Contacts A 765A byte 26 1A Special Contacts B SB byte 28 1C Special Contacts C SC byte 30 1E System Fault 765 Read only byte 56 38 Genius Seamless G 96 GA etc byte 58 3A Boolean BCD Temporary byte 60 3C Report Fault bit 70 46 Discrete Input Table I bit 72 48 Discrete Output Table Q bit 74 4A Discrete Temporary T bit 76 4C Discrete Internal 76M bit 78 4E Special Contacts A SA bit 80 50 Special Contacts B SB bit 82 52 Special Contacts C SC bit 84 54 System Fault 765 Read only bit 86 56 Genius Seamless G GA etc bit 114 72 Discrete Input Override byte 116 74 Discrete Output Override byte 118 76 Discrete Temporary Override byte 120 78 DiscreteInternal Override byte 132 84 Discrete Input Transition byte 134 86 Discrete Output Transition byte 136 88 Discrete Temporary Transition byte 138 8A DiscreteInternal Transition byte 150 96 Discrete Input Override bit 152 98 Discrete Output Override bit 154 9A Discrete Temporary Override bit 156 9C DiscreteInternal Override bit 186 BA Discrete Direct byte 188 BC Report Fault byte 1 Refer to GEK 90486 1 GeniusI OSystem User s Manual The address ranges for these tables vary according to CPU model and user configuration All offsets are zero based GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests Note 6 25 Symbolic Addresses A Symbolic A
38. RUNG 5 gt gt HEALTHY READREQ 4 BLKMV4 BLKMV INT INT CONST IN1 Q RO00332 CONST IN1 Q R00339 00000 00000 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 00000 00000 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 00001 00000 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 00000 00000 CONST IN5 CONST IN5 00001 00000 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 00008 00000 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 00499 t4 00000 lt lt RUNG 6 gt gt HEALTHY READREQ 4 COMM 4 REQ SROO301 IN FT R00099 SYSID CONST TASK 00000000 END OF BLOCK LOGIC GFK 0868 Appendix G Ladder Programs for Network Testing G 8 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK PROGRAM BLOCK WRTREG LOCAL REGISTER L MEMORY SIZE BYTES 0 PROGRAM BLOCK SIZE BYTES 590 DECLARATIONS ENTRIES 4 HIGHEST REFERENCE USED NPUT 1 100021 OUTPUT 0 Q00014 INTERNAL M NONE TEMPORARY T NONE LOCAL REGISTER 1 NONE PROGRAM REGISTER P NONE REGISTER R R00338 ANALOG INPUT AI NONE ANALOG OUTPUT AQ NONE x m z x m X A x R X x Ak E x 2 An XOECKOES KC Kok E KE E KP TK OEC CC CR CAU OCCORRE ELE COGO CURE ORO a RC OCT ORO OUR CC ROC ROO CU G 5 START OF LD BLOCK WRTREG Write memory of remote node VARIABLE DECLARATIONS VARIABLE DECLARATION TABLE REFERENCE NICK
39. SYS DEVICE DOS EMM386 EXE RAM 1024 DOS HIGH UMB DEVICE GEFNDIS PROTMAN DOS 1I GEFNDIS rem rem rem rem rem rem The Ethernet Adapter and its device driver must first be installed into your computer Replace the string lt DIRECTORY gt in the following DEVICEHIGH command with the directory which contains the specified device driver for your Ethernet Adapter module DEVICEHIGH lt DIRECTORY gt ELNK16 DOS DEVICEHIGH GEFNDIS GEFNDIS DOS AJUTOEXEC BAT SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES rem Bind NDIS Drivers GEFNDIS netbind GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI protocol manager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS ELNK16 DOS MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM_RX_BUFS 8 Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne we Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary ELNK16 DOS DRIVERNAME ELNK16 GFK 0868 Appendix H Sample DOS System Files H 3 3Com Etherlink MC CONFIG SYS FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 DEVICE DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE DOS EMM386 EXE RAM 1024 DOS HIGH UMB DEVICE GEFNDIS PROTMAN DOS I GEFNDIS rem rem The Ethernet Adapter and its device driver must first be installed rem into
40. Select the station you want to delete See description above on Selecting a Station 2 Press Alt D The GSM will ask the operator to confirm deletion of the station and any configuration data saved for that station MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Section 1 Configuring a Series 90 70 PLC Station GFK 0868 This sections describes all the screens used to configure parameters for Series 90 70 PLCs Configuration Editor Main Menu for the Series 90 70 PLC Once a station has been defined in the Configure a Station Menu you may proceed to the Configuration Editor Main Menu by pressing Alt E to define that station s communica tions parameters in more detail Or you can return to this menu at any time in the fu ture to examine or modify these parameters The screen below is the Configuration Edi tor for the STATION TYPE SERIES 90 70 Note GEnet System Manager releases prior to 2 04 and Configuration Editors prior to 3 22 have a different menu hierarchy This manual reflects GSM changes first released in GSM 2 04 and Configuration Editor 3 22 Configuration File Name C8888CGO 0800 3o ET 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MMS Parameters System Parameters Print File Press Up Dn Arrow to move the cursor then press Enter to select CAlt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 2 Configuration Editor
41. The Client Server Model B 10 Application communication in the OSI model is peer to peer in the sense that there is no controlling master station polling information from slave devices Either peer in the association can initiate communication requests Since the processing requirements are different for the application initiating the communication and the application receiving the communication request a method known as the client server model is used to describe each communication exchange In the client server model the application which initiates a request for service is called the client the client generates requests The application from which the service is requested is called the server the server generates responses MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 The MMS services are for the most part acknowledged services In an acknowledged service the client issues a request for some service from the server application When the service has been completed either by performing the service or determining that the service cannot be performed a confirmation message is returned to the client giving the results of the service request The service is considered complete only when the confirmation is received From the standpoint of the server application service requests are begun when an indication arrives that the service is desired After performing the service the server issues a resp
42. This input will be held at the value of one 1 for as long as the resource problem occurs It is guaranteed to remain 1 for at least one PLC scan before transitioning to 0 Bit 15 Initiate indication Pending is set to one 1 when a remote station on the net work has requested the establishment of an association with the local application pro gram This input remains 1 until either the remote station gives up aborts the attempt or until the local application program responds to the initiate indication If more than one initiate indication is pending this input will remain 1 until all of the pending indica tions have either been aborted or been responded to by the application program Other wise this bit is zero 0 Bit 16 LAN Interface OK is conditionally set to one 1 by the LAN Interface software at the end of every window If the LAN Interface cannot access the PLC the Series 90 70 CPU will set this bit to zero 0 A ladder program should always test that this bit is one 1 before issuing a COMM REO to the LAN Interface This bit will be zero 0 if the LAN Interface is not in the Operational state e g if it is running the Loader or Field Network Test utilities or if the Backplane Online soft switch is NO When this bit is zero none of the other bits in the LISW are valid GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 31 Appendix A Glossary of Terms In communications networking a number of special terms are used Also ma
43. Using the Station Manager 4 6 The Station Manager commands are divided into two groups m Monitor commands m Modify commands The Monitor commands provide information about the station and the network Execut ing these commands will not affect the operation of the station or the network and they are available to anyone using the Station Manager See Table 4 1 for a list of Monitor commands The Modify commands perform functions that may change the operation of the station and the network These commands are secure and may only be executed when the se cure level of operation has been selected by logging in with the current password These commands will be printed in italics See Table 4 2 for a list of Modify commands The complete sets of Monitor commands and Modify commands are available when the Ethernet Interface is in the fully operational state Subsets of these commands are avail able when in the Soft Switch Entry and Field Network Test Utilities The Station Manager is a background task It only executes when communication pro cessing is not occurring Because of this the command response time is sensitive to the communication load of the station the greater the load the longer it takes for the com mands to execute MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Using the Monitor Commands Allof the Monitor commands can be executed from either the Monitor gt prom
44. Valid range of 1 to 97 percent Defaults to 39 percent Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter balloc4 The Station Manager Parameters are as follows PASSWORD The password that is used to modify the secure mode of the Station Man ager Case sensitive Consists of up to 8 characters Defaults to system lower case LSAP The Station Manager Link Service Access Point LSAP to be used to send and receive Station Manager REMote commands and responses Defaults to E8 hexade cimal Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter bremlsap PRIORITY The Link Layer priority used to send Station Manager REMote commands and responses Valid range of 0 to 7 Defaults to 0 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter brempri MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 The Distributed Directory Protocol Parameters are as follows DDP_DISABLE This parameter permits disabling of the Distributed Directory Protocol DDP Default is N DDP must not be disabled DDP Disable must be N to use Logicmaster 90 70 Ethernet with this station Corresponds to Station Manager pa rameter vdpdisab DDP_CONFLICT_TIMEOUT Specifies maximum timeout to detect a duplicate name assignment Units are 100 ms Valid range is 1 to 600 Default is 5 500 ms Corre sponds to Station Manager parameter vdptmout DDP_RESOLVE_RETRIES Reserved for future use Default to 0 Corresponds to Sta tion Manager parameter vdpret
45. WINDOW SIZE REF_TIMEOUT MEZ RETRAN_COUNT E GIVEUP_TIMEOUT INACTIUE TIMEOUT EQ RETRA N TIMEOUT WINDOU TIMEOUT USE CHECKSUM J RACK DELAV TIME NEZ SESSION TIMEOUT TSAP ELLE HEX Maximum Transport PDU size in log2 lt 7 12 Default 18 Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAlt U Update Parameters gt CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 8 Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen Transport Layer The Transport Layer parameter definitions are Enter the Station TSAP in the TSAP field and press Alt U to update TSAP The ISO Transport Service Access Point to be used for communications services Entered as a string of hexadecimal octets Defaults to 0001 hex Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter stsap The remaining parameters need not be modified for basic networks Refer to Chapter 8 for descriptions of other parameters Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 27 Application Processes Screen 3 28 The Application Processes Screen selection is used to examine and modify the names of the Ethernet Interface Application Processes along with certain addressing information The different communication services are accessed by establishing an association with the appropriate Ethernet Interface Application Process Each application has a default name assigned to it but you may reassign these names Devices establishing connecti
46. changes due to local application action These status values restrict the types of MMS services which can be acted upon and should be accurate at all times The COMM REQ format for the Set Local VMD Status command is shown in the table below Table 6 46 Set Local VMD Status COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 3 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8353 20A1H VMD Logical Status 7 See Table 6 47 VMD Physical Status 8 See Table 6 48 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Set Local VMD Status command VMD Logical Status Must have one of the values given in the table below Table 6 47 VMD Logical Status Values Value Meaning 0 STATE CHANGESALLOWED 1 NO STATE CHANGESALLOWED 2 LIMITED SERVICES AVAILABLE 3 SUPPORT SERVICESALLOWED ISO IS 9506 MMS version 1 only VMD Physical Status Must have one of the values given in Table 6 48 Table 6 48 VMD Physical Status Values Value Meaning 0 OPERATIONAL 1 PARTIALLY OPERATIONAL 2 INOPERABLE 3 NEEDS COMMISSIONING GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 57 The MMS provider will initialize the logical and physical VMD statuses based on its ability to communicate wi
47. gt TRANSFER SYNTAX_NAME BASIC ENCODING SYNTAX SYNTAX_OBJ_ID gt Abstract Syntax Object Identifier Default 1 9506 2 1 3 Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CAI1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 10 Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes Screen The Abstract and Transfer Syntax parameters are defined as follows SYNTAX_OBJ_ID The Object Identifier of the Abstract Syntax Defined as an object identifier A sequence of numeric values There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esc key exit without saving any changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Association Parameters Screen The Association Parameters Screen selection is used to specify the maximum number of associations that each Application Process can have established at one time The Association Parameters Screen is shown below Configuration File Name CO 8 CG 600 SERIES _96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 ISO Parameters MMS ISO Parameters Syst Data Link Parameters Netuork Layer Parameters Network Layer RIB Table Transport Session Layer Parameters Application Processes Abstract and Tra Association Parameters MAX RESP ASSOC Kj Local fipplicatio Prin NAX_APPL_ASSOC E
48. in Appendix H Note that the content is different for different PC network cards Please enter these commands individually into your existing CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT files using an editor If installing the GSM software on a PC with a monochrome monitor add the following command to the AUTOEXEC BAT file MODE CO80 2 When you selected the PC network card during the GSM installation the file PROTOCOL GSM was created This file contains default information about the communications driver of the PC network card If you used default hardware settings on your PC network card you will not have to edit this file Just copy it to C NGEFNDISNPROTOCOL INI Otherwise you must edit any non default information into the PROTOCOL GSM and then copy it into C GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI 3 Restart the PC so that the modifications to the AUTOEXEC BAT CONFIG SYS and PROTOCOL INI files will be used GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 9 When an NDIS Application Already Exists To set DOS system files when an NDIS network application already exists you need to understand more about how an NDIS application is setup The following files must be installed for an NDIS application PROTMAN xxx NDIS Protocol Manager Driver Extension varies GE Fanuc uses PROTMAN DOS Network Card Driver Provided by PC network card manufacturer Name varies PROTOCOL INI File listing each driver and operating parameters for each
49. network it supports all standard protocols and default conventions Also performance demands on the network are minimal Information Needed to Configure an Ethernet Station for a Basic Network GFK 0868 The most important information you will need to know before configuring a station is m Station Name m Station Type m Station MAC Address the default MAC address can be found on the label on the backplane connector of the Ethernet Interface The remaining configuration information is of 2 main types 1 ISO Parameters 2 MMS Parameters Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 17 3 18 ISO Parameters m PSAP and SSAP for the application m SAP for the Transport layer m NSAP for the Network layer This information further defines how communications are routed through the ISO pro tocol layers to the PLC We recommend that you use the defaults set by GE Fanuc Or if it is necessary for you to use settings other that the defaults you can obtain this informa tion from your network administrator MMS Parameters m Variables you want to define If Initiating Associations If the Ethernet station is to initiate associations with other stations information about the Application Processes for the other station s must be made available on this GSM before you can complete the configuration of this station The essential information about the other station s includes Common Name m PSAP m SSAP m T
50. zzzzzzzzzzzzkb Variable Name C1 32 characters Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update Pg Up Dn to change entry CAlt U Update Parameters gt CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 12 Variable Names Screen The PgUp and PgDn keys are used to scroll through the Variable Name entries The Variable Names Parameters are defined as follows ENTRY Each entry contains a variable which defines a specific range of addresses in Series 90 70 PLC memory Remote applications can then access specific memory locations by referencing these variable names in Read or Write requests The Vari able Name table holds up to 64 variables VARIABLE NAME The defined variable name Consists of 1 to 32 characters MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 DATA_TYPE The type of data specified by the variable name Tab and Shift Tab keys scroll between the choices Value is one of m Character string CHAR STR m Octet string OCTET STR m Floating point FLOAT PT m Unsigned integer UNSIGNED m Integer INTEGER m Bit string BIT STR m Boolean BOOLEAN TYPE_SIZE The number of octets or bits in the data type Valid range of 1 to 800 hexa decimal Entered as a hexadecimal number m For OCTET STR or CHAR STR specifies the number of OCTETS in the variable or variable array element m For BIT STR BOOLEAN UNSIGNED or INTEGER the specifi
51. 00000 e eee 5 1 Communications Commands isssseeeeeeeee eese 5 1 Station Manager Commands sssssseeeeeeeeeee 5 2 Programming COMMunication REQuests 0 eee eee eee 5 2 Using the COMM_REQ Instruction 1 0 0 0 000 e ee 5 3 Device Independent Area senean erechi ean E E eens 5 3 Message Definition Block 0 cece eee eens 5 4 Programming a COMM REQ 0 cence eee eee 5 5 The LAN Interface Status Word 0 000 000 eee 5 7 Location of the LAN Interface Status Word 00 c ee eee 5 7 Contents of the LAN Interface Status Word 0 000 c eee e eee 5 8 General Tips on Ladder Programming 6c rerna rnnr 5 9 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 00 cece cece eee ee 6 1 OSI Reference Model sigar destha ee eee ae sete seal 6 1 OSI Application Layer soseer oinin o cece ee 6 1 Message Flow in the OSI Model eese 6 2 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Application Processes 6 2 MMS Responder cns ext te e Ry E Cube ve Ned 6 2 Application Interface sssssesseseeeeee eee 6 3 Selecting the Application Process eese 6 4 Programming Communications COMM REOQs ssssssss 6 5 Association Control Block sssssssseeeeee eh 6 7 General Association Status Bits 0 0000 6 7 Request Completion punat 0 0 6 ita aE a Ea eee eens 6 8 Association Status Word 0 0 cece eee eee 6 9 Associatio
52. 10 minutes the Modify login will time out and you will have to login again This 10 minute timeout between commands can be changed if desired by using the CHLTIME command Note The security feature is intended to prevent inadvertent misuse of the Modify commands It is not a foolproof mechanism to prevent unauthorized changes For the greatest protection restrict the number of people who know the password restrict access to the Station Manager terminal and always log off when you leave the Station Manager To list the Monitor commands and Modify commands on the screen type HELP RET or RET MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 The following table provides a brief description of the Modify commands Table 4 2 Modify Commands Command Description chbps Changeserial port data rate chdate Change date chltime Changelogintimeout chsosw Change Soft Switch data chtime Change time clear Clear Extended Status buffer Error Log Tallies or Heap clsosw Clear Soft Switch values on Ethernet Interface load Force Ethernet Interface to be loaded logout Exitmodify mode net Disable Enablenodefromnetwork ok Turns on STATUS OK LED rem Send command to remote station report Reporttest results restart Restart the Ethernet Interface stopt Stop test command test Send test commands to station s trace Turn on specific task trace flags Date and Time The Station Manage
53. 2 IRL IS ISO K KB LAN LED LISW LLC LSAP MAC MAP MAP DIB MB MDB MDI miniMAPDIB MMS NDIS NMA NSAP OSI PC PDU PI PICS PLC PSAP PROM RAM MDI SAP SOE SRTP SSAP TPDU TSAP UE VMD VME MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 Inter Repeater Link ISO InternationalStandard InternationalOrganizationforStandardization 1024 Kilobyte 1024bytes LocalAreaNetwork LightEmitting Diode LANInterface Status Word Logical Link Control Link Layer Service Access Point Medium AccessControl ManufacturingAutomation Protocol MAPDirectory Information Base Megabyte 1 048 576bytes Message Definition Block Medium DependentInterface miniMAPDirectory Information Base ManufacturingMessageSpecification Network Driver InterfaceSpecification NetworkManagement Agent Network Service Access Point Open System Interconnection PersonalComputer IBM compatible Protocol Data Unit ProgramInvocation ProtocolImplementationConformanceStatement ProgrammableLogicController PresentationService Access Point Programmable Read Only Memory RandomAccessMemory Medium DependentInterface Service Access Point Signal Quality Error Service Request Transfer Protocol Session Service Access Point Transport Protocol Data Unit TransportService Access Point UserElement VirtualManufacturing Device Versa Module European GFK 0868 Glossary of Terms GFK 0868 Address Administration The assignment
54. 7 SMC EtherCard PLUS EtherCard PLUS Elite 16 EtherCard PLUS A H 8 Optimizing the GSM for Network Operation 5 000004 H 9 Appendix Pormse ioc se ve xvi Rer Eee ea Eae ee ake te keene I 1 Appendix GEnet System Manager Data Link Error Codes J 1 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May Xo 1994 Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 GFK 0868 Major Components of the GEnet 802 3 LANN The Main Tasks for Installing the Ethernet Communications System Ethernet Controller Board Ethernet Controller Installation in the Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Interface Installation in an Expansion Rack States of the Ethernet Interface GEnet System Manager GSM on 802 3 LAN GSM Main Menu GSM Menu Structure Configure a Station Screen Configuration Editor Menu ISO Parameters Menu Network Layer Parameters Screen Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen Application Processes Screen Local Application DIB Screen MMS Parameters Menu Variable Names Screen
55. 9 7 Report Event Condition Status 9 6 Alter Event Condition Monitoring 9 5 Trigger Event 9 4 Define Event Action 9 3 Delete Event Action 9 2 Get Event Action Attributes 9 1 Report Event Action Status 9 16 Define Event Enrollment 9 15 Delete Event Enrollment 9 14 Alter EventEnrollment 9 13 Report Event Enrollment Status 9 12 Get Event Enrollment Attributes 9 11 AcknowledgeEventNotification 9 10 Get AlarmSummary 9 9 Get Alarm EnrollmentSummary 10 8 Read Journal 10 7 Write Journal 10 6 InitializeJournal 10 5 ReportJournal Status 10 4 Create Journal 10 3 Delete Journal 10 2 Get Capability List 10 1 File Open 10 16 File Read 10 15 FileClose 10 14 File Rename 10 13 File Delete 10 12 File Directory 10 11 UnsolicitedStatus 10 10 Information Report 10 9 EventNotification 11 8 Attach to Event Condition 11 7 Attach to Semaphore 11 6 Conclude 11 5 Cancel 11 4 GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 23 L6 Memor y Access Services Overview Variables may be named or unnamed scalar or array Named Variables A Named variable is identified by a unique symbolic name that references the variable ob ject The Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Interface supports a Variable Name table with 0 to 64 Variable Names defined in the VMD specific scope each of which may be accessed by a remote application Domain Specific variables may also be defined Named variables are defined for a station through the GSM Configuration Edit
56. Alt E Alt F Alt H Alt K Alt L Alt P Alt U or F2 Alt V Alt S Tab or F9 Shift Tab or F10 Ins T Up Arrow J Down Arrow aa e PgUp Page Up PgDn Page Down Home End Return to previous menu Accept field contents move to nextfield Delete character to left of cursor Deletecharacter Abortprocedure Clear field contents Delete entry Enter Selected Configuration Editor from Configure a Station screen If in Station Manager Access enables logging to a file Display procedurehelp screen Display key help Display listof stations for selection Create printable file If in Station Manager Access and you have enabled Station Manager logging to a file Alt F Alt P will close the file Savecurrent menu data return to previous menu View contents of table entry Search for specified table entry Cycleforward through field entries Cyclebackward through field entries Character insertor replace mode Move to previous field Move to next field Move right one character in field Move left one character in field Display previous page or previous entry Display next page or next entry Display first page or first entry Display last page or last entry GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 15 GSM Menu Structure 3 16 The menu structure of the of the GEnet System Manager software is shown below In this chapter however we will a
57. Application Process The MMS Responder Common Name can only be changed via a GSM configuration change The Ethernet Interface can simultaneously maintain a total of up to eight associations The possible associations may be normally user limited to fewer than 8 on either or both of the two APs using the configuration parameters assocresp and assocappl The default for each is 8 though only a total of 8 across both APs is permitted Refer to Appendix F for a complete list of the configuration parameters with an explana tion of the use for each parameter 6 4 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Programming Communications COMM REQs Programming is required only for the Application Interface AP You should read and un derstand Chapter 5 on the PLC COMM REO instruction before continuing The specific commands necessary for programming the MMS services are described be low Before describing the message services in detail some command notation will be explained m Most COMM REOSs include a pointer to an Association Control Block ACB The ladder program must assign a unique 5 word ACB for each active association The ACB location is assigned by the ladder when it establishes the association and is thereafter used to tell the Ethernet Interface on which association the various COMM REOSs apply m When a parameter in a COMMunications REQuest COMM REQ requires multiple consec
58. Application Processes screen and then select the desired application processes from the Local Application DIBs Directory In formation Bases of the Ethernet station An Application Process is added to the Local Application DIB by selecting it from the 7 Layer Application DIB database The Configuration Editor Local Application DIB screen is used to do this Entries are placed in the 7 Layer Application DIB database when a station is configured In order to select an entry for the Local DIB the station which contains this Application Process must first be configured If this station is not a GE Fanuc Ethernet Interface the Station Type must first be defined as a Foreign Device in the Configure a Station Screen Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu To access the Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu 1 Select the GSM Configure Station Screen from the GSM Main Menu Enter a Station Name for the Foreign Device Select FOREIGN_DEV as the STATION_TYPE Enter the station MAC Address and comments if desired g e w I Press the AIt E key GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 35 3 36 The Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu will be displayed CONF IGURE Foreign Device Config Edit Version 3 18 Application Processes miniMAP Application Processes Esc Exit t Move Enter Select Alt U Update Figure 3 14 Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu MMS Ether
59. CHDATE and CHTIME commands GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 25 Table 4 9 Exception Log Event Definitions Log Event Cause 1 Powerup A log entry of this event will appear every time the Ethernet Interface is restarted or powered up System events Network Layer events Transport Layerevents Session Layer events Presentation Layer events ApplicationLayerevents PLC Driver events SRIP Service Agent events Invalid Message Definition Block MDB events MMS Service Agent events LLCevents MMS Providerevents Directory User Agent events Sea TP DANDUAKR WH LOGIN Command The LOGIN command has the form LOGIN The LOGIN command will be followed by a prompt of the form Password You should enter your password which will not be echoed If the password matches the current password for the Modify level you will receive a confirmation message and you will be allowed access to the Modify commands If the password does not match then an error message is displayed and the security level is not changed Please note that all characters which are typed after the password prompt except for the Enter key are assumed to be part of the password Specifically the delete and backspace characters do not have their usual meaning and are interpreted simply as password characters Passwords are limited to 8 characters and all characters after the eighth are ignored Unlike other inputs the password doe
60. Commands Command Restrictions bps chbps chdate chsosw chtime clear clsosw date help or load log login node ok restart show SoSw stat tally time Limitedto clear tally clear log and clear heap Only task identifiers b and c aresupported Only task identifiers b and c aresupported Only task identifiers b and c aresupported Monitor Commands are not in italics Modify commands shownin italics If the Soft Switch values are not defined or disagree with other evidence the problem must be satisfactorily resolved by one or more of the following actions 1 Setthe MAC address to the correct value via Logicmaster 90 Configurator 2 Ifnotconfigured via Logicmaster 90 use the CHSOSW Station Manager command described in this chapter 3 Adjust the GSM configuration for the GEnet Ethernet Interface 4 Download the Ethernet Interface from the GSM Other wise you will be continually placed back into this utility after each restart For proper usage of the CHSOSW command see the CHSOSW command description in this chapter The Soft Switch Entry utility is exited by restarting the Ethernet Interface This can be accomplished by entering the RESTART or LOAD commands pressing the Ethernet In terface Restart pushbutton or by cycling power on the Series 90 70 PLC GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 13 Field Network Test Utility 4 14 It is often useful to chec
61. ConcludeRequest 8205 200D S L ConcludeResponse 8206 200E S L AbortRequest 8207 200F S L Identify Request 8240 2030 S Status Request 8250 203A S Status Response 8251 203B S UnsolicitedStatusRequest 8252 203C S ExamineUnsolicitedStatusIndication 8253 203D R CancelMessage Request 8290 2062 S ExamineAssociationOptions 8300 206C L Get Remote Name List 8301 206D S Start Request 8304 2070 S Examine StartIndication 8305 2071 R Start Response 8306 2072 S Stop Request 8307 2073 S Examine Stop Indication 8308 2074 R Stop Response 8309 2075 S Reset Request 8310 2076 S Examine Reset Indication 8311 2077 R Reset Response 8312 2078 S ResumeRequest 8313 2079 S Examine Resume Indication 8314 207A R ResumeResponse 8315 207B S InformationReportRequest 8320 2080 S ExamineInformationReportIndication Vari 8321 2081 R able Read Request 8322 2082 S Write Request 8323 2083 S Transfer InformationReportIndication Data 8330 208A R DiscardInformationReportIndication Data 8339 2093 R Error Request Generic Negative Response 8350 209E S ExamineRejectIndication 8351 209F R Examine Last Error Information 8352 20A0 L Set Local VMD Status 8353 20A1 L Set Local ProgramInvocationState 8355 20A3 L Set Local ProgramInvocationProcessing 8356 20A4 L Note Refer to the Index to locate these commands in the manual MMS Ethemet Communicat
62. DATE command is shown below gt date Date 28 FEB 1990 EXS Command The EXS command has the form EXS This command is used to display the Extended Status Buffer maintained by the Ethernet Interface software The Extended Status Buffer maintains information about the service requests issued from the PLC ladder logic program See Chapter 6 for a complete discus sion of the form of the available service requests from the PLC ladder logic program Also see Chapter 9 for more information on using the Extended Status Buffer informa tion A typical EXS command is shown below gt exs lt lt lt Extended Status gt gt gt Last command 8201 2009H Last Sta Mgr cmd 0 0000H Software version 100 PROM version 100 Error code O 0000H Last MDB in error 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H The number in parenthesis is the hexadecimal equivalent of the decimal value See Chapter 9 for more details on Extended Status entries The Extended Status Buffer can be cleared using the CLEAR EXS command GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 23 HELP Command 4 24 The HELP command has the form HELP or T The HELP command or the single character command can be used to display a short reminder of the valid commands If you are logged in to use modify commands you will see the lt lt lt Modify Commands gt gt gt in the command list see Table 4 2 Modify Commands If you are not logged in you
63. Data ED TPDU data too large The size of the data is placed in event log Entry 3 d Disconnect Request DR TPDU data too large The size of the data is placed in event log Entry 3 Event 5 This event is logged by the Session Layer software when an unexpected event Session occurs Layerevents Entries 1 4 5 and 6 of the event log will be zero Entry 2 of the event log is an exception code which indicates what error has occurred for a received Session Protocol Data Unit SPDU Each event is de scribedbelow 0 Attempt to get a new FSM failed 1 Attempt to get system structure failed 2 Wrong FSM state for attempted operation 3 Bad SSAP on incoming Connect CN SPDU Event 6 This event is logged by the Presentation Layer software when an unexpected Presentation event occurs Entries 1 3 4 5 and 6 will be zero Entry 2 of the event log is an Layerevents exception code which indicates what event has occurred It may have the fol lowingvalue 00 Unknown PSAP on incoming connect request PDU GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 15 9 16 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event 7 This event is logged by the Application Layer software when an unexpected ApplicationLayer event occurs Entries1 and 6 of the event log will be zero For some events events Entries 3 4 and 5 will give more information on the event Ent
64. Definition NON EXISTENT The domain is ina NON EXISTENT state and no object is associated with this state LOADING The LOADING state is an intermediate state which occurs during the loading process READY The domain enters a READY state when it is successfully downloaded or otherwise created COMPLETE The COMPLETE state is entered when the domain has been successfully loaded but is not yet acknowledged as loaded and thereby READY INCOMPLETE The INCOMPLETE state is entered if an error occurs during loading which will cause the domain to be discarded If for instance the association which is being used to load the domain is lost during the download of the domain the domain is discarded and passes through the INCOMPLETE state IN USE The IN USE state is different from the READY state in that it indicates that one or more ProgramInvocations have been defined as using this domain For example a part program will be in the ready state if it is not the active part program and in the IN USE state if it is active Series 90 70 PLC Only The Series 90 70 PLC does not support domains GE Fanuc CNCs Only The MMS Deletable attribute specifies whether this object can be deleted using the MMS Delete Domain service The Sharable attribute specifies whether this domain can be used by more than one Program Invocation Most GE Fanuc control devices do not allow any sharing of domains CNCs supporting multiple tool paths allow limited sh
65. HELP gt Figure 3 21 Setup GSM Menu Changing the GSM Password Screen 3 46 When you select this function the GSM clears the screen and prompts for the following information Enter old password Enter new password Verify new password You are given three chances to enter the above information properly Please note that all characters which are typed after the password prompt except for the Return key are as sumed to be part of the password Specifically the delete and backspace characters do not have their usual meaning and are interpreted simply as password characters When this process is completed successfully or unsuccessfully control is returned to the GSM main menu Note The password is case sensitive MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Set Download Mode Screen This screen permits you to toggle the download mode between Local and Remote To Set the Download Mode 1 2 3 4 Enter the Set Download Mode Screen Press Tab to toggle the Mode Press Alt U to update Press Esc to return to the GSM Main Menu Set Station Manager Mode Screen This screen permits you to toggle the Station Manager mode between Local and Re mote To Set the Station Manager Mode 1 Be c om Exitto DOS Enter the Set Station Manager Mode Screen Press Tab to toggle the Mode Press Alt U to update Press Esc to return to the GSM Main Menu Note
66. ISO Draft International Standard In the case of MMS ISO 9506 distinguished from IS For ISO standards this represents the stage just preceding a final standard Distributed Directory Protocol A proprietary protocol used to identify Ethernet Inter faces on a network that are able to communicate using the SRIP protocol Used by Logicmaster 90 to locate Series 90 PLCs on the Ethernet network Domain In the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS the domain objects repre sent a subset of capabilities which can be used for a specific purpose One of the key aspects of domains is that they can be uploaded and downloaded in the network In the Series 15 CNC domain content is associated with parts of the CNC memory or with Part Programs Drop Cable The cable that connects a data station to a trunk coupling unit Data Terminal Equipment Examples computers terminals printers Distinct from DCE Data Communications Equipment Entity A single source or destination on the Local Area Network LAN in which data is transmitted and received Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 5 A 6 Ethernet Interface The general term used in this manual to identify the GEnet hard ware module with or without software that connects a PLC or CNC to a network In general the network might be either Ethernet 802 3 or MAP 802 4 See also LAN Interface Executive Window A part of the PLC scan that provides an opportunity for the LAN Interface to rea
67. LAN LED Operating An Exception Since Last After Being w o has Occurred Restarted Connected Exceptions MODULE OK ON ON ON ON ONLINE ON Blink ON Blink OFF OFF STATUS OK ON OFE ON OFE Slow Blink Blink ON every 2 seconds Fast Blink Blink every 0 5 seconds 1 ONLINE blinking indicates this node is sending or receiving data 2 When MODULE OK is ON and STATUS OK is OFF it is necessary to use the Station Manager NODE LOG and SOSW commands to distinguish among the possible causes MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 9 The Loader State The Loader State is indicated by the MODULE OK LED ON and the STATUS OK LED blinking The ONLINE LED may go on and off while the Ethernet Interface waits for a download to start The table below shows the LED patterns for the Loader State and describes the expected progression of the LEDs In the Loader State when the Ethernet Interface is requesting a local serial download a series of ipl ipl ipl messages will be output to the local serial port When the Ethernet Interface is requesting a network download a NODE command will indicate Software Load Utility There is no prompt character at the local Station Manager ter minal in this state Table 9 5 Loader State Ethernet Interface is Looking for Load Ethernet Interface is Receiving Load Network Load LED Local GSM GSM Over Local Load Downloade
68. LISW bit 100015 NITPND Initiate ind pending LISW bit 100016 LANIFO LAN Interface OK bit in LISW 5100017 ASSOCO ASW association OK bit 5100019 POS CNF ASW positive confirm bit 100020 EG CNF ASW negative confirm bit 5100021 ABRTIND ASW abort indication bit 5100035 RJCTIND ASWE reject indication bit 5100036 ERR IND ASWE error indication bit G 2 000004 HEALTHY LAN OK and LAN i f OK 000006 INITREQ Cause an Initiate Req COMM REQ 5000012 WRITERO Cause a Write Request COMM REQ 5000013 READREQ Cause a Read Request COMM REQ IDENTIFIER TABLE IDENTIFIER IDENTIFIER TYPE IDENTIFIER DESCRIPTION ASSOCI PROGRAM BLK Bring up LAN association RDREG PROGRAM BLK Read memory of remote node WRTREG PROGRAM BLK Write memory of remote node f PROGRAM BLOCK DECLARATIONS 4 ASSOC1 LANG LD Bring up LAN association B 4 4 RDREG LANG LD Read memory of remote node 4 4 4 4 WRTREG LANG LD Write memory of remote node 4 4 INTERRUPTS START OF PROGRAM LOGIC lt lt RUNG 5 gt gt M00001 INITREQ S NPS Se RS SS SEER ase lt lt RUNG 6 gt gt ALW ON 4 ar CALL ASSOC1 Wee Sat Sie Se E 3E lt lt RUNG 7 gt gt M00002 WRITEREO ia e a que a a a a a aac ee lt lt RUNG 8 gt gt ALW ON 4 fe CALL WRTREG x lt lt RUNG 9 gt gt M00003 READREO ix c D D E E C5
69. LO GIN command you must know the current password GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 7 Using the Monitor Commands to Troubleshoot the Network There are three Monitor commands that are especially useful to troubleshoot the network m The EXS command m The LOG command m The TALLY command EXS Command The EXS command displays the Extended Status Buffer This buffer maintains information about COMM_REQs issued to this Ethernet Interface rom the PLC ladder program of the local station LOG Command The LOG command displays a log of exception conditions occurring at the local station The events are counted time stamped and differentiated by an error code TALLY Command The TALLY command displays counts of transactions of the specific tasks Using the Modify Commands Hu n To use any of the Modify commands you must obtain the modify prompt using the LOGIN command To do this you must know the current password The factory default password is system lower case characters To log in type from the gt prompt LOGIN RET The password prompt will then be displayed Password Type in the current password and press Enter If the entered password matches the current Hu n password for the station the modify prompt is displayed The password is case sensitive Hu n One may execute all Monitor and Modify commands from the Modify prompt If no commands are executed within
70. MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event c 10a LANSevere Network Problem AttemptingRecovery LLCevents Repeated collisions caused the transmitter to fail 16 attempts to senda Continued frame If the LAN stays Offline it is likely caused by a damaged or 10b 10e 10f 110 111 unterminated trunk cable This report may occasionally be caused by extremely heavy network traffic Online operation should resume within 10 seconds after repair LAN Severe Network Problem AttemptingRecovery During attempted transmission either some external condition prevented transmission of a frame for at least one second MacErr or a late collision occurred Late Coll Use the TALLY L cmd to distinguish If MacErr is incrementing every 10 seconds the transceiver is likely hearing constant carrier on the network This can be caused by disconnection of the transceiver from the network or by a faulty connection of the transceiver to the network it can also be caused by test equipment attached to the network or to a remote failed transceiver Are other nodes reporting the same fault MacErr may occasionally be caused by extremely heavy network traffic LateColl indicates a protocol violation by a remote station the tx frame may be lost Online operation sho
71. MMS VMD The MMS objects called Capabilities ProgramInvocations Domains Variable Accesses and Operator Stations are described below GFK 0868 Appendix BISO Networking Concepts VMD Status Attributes The VMD has two attributes which describe the overall status of the VMD the Logical Status attribute and the Physical Status attribute The Logical Status attribute specifies the range of MMS services available at the VMD The Physical Status attribute specifies the overall operational state of the real device hardware implementing the VMD Note that this status is unrelated to the ability of the device to communicate on the OSI network Series 90 70 PLC Only Possible values of the VMD Logical Status attribute are STATE CHANGES ALLOWED NO STATE CHANGES ALLOWED LIMITED SERVICES PERMITTED and SUPPORT SERVICES ALLOWED ISO IS 9506 only When the Logical Status has the value STATE CHANGES ALLOWED all available MMS services for the device may be performed When the Logical Status has the value NO STATE CHANGES ALLOWED only those MMS services which do not change the state of any MMS object can be used These services for the Series 90 70 MMS Provider are m Abort m Conclude m Cancel m Status m GetNameList m Identify m GetCapabilityList m GetDomainAttributes m GetProgramInvocationAttributes m CGetVariableAccessAttributes m Read When the Logical Status has the value LIMITED SERVICES PERMITTED the only MMS services
72. Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 E The Power up State When power is cycled on the Series 90 70 PLC or whenever the Ethernet Interface is restarted power up diagnostics run Diagnostics running is indicated by the MODULE OK LED blinking fast while the other LEDs remain OFF If the Ethernet Interface de tects an error in the hardware it reports this error to the CPU then shuts down AII LEDs turn OFF if the Ethernet Interface fails a diagnostic test If this happens refer to the PLC Fault Table for detailed information Note TheRestart Load Pushbutton is not operable during the Ethernet Interface diagnostic phase nor is the Station Manager active The Ethernet Interface is in diagnostic phase when the MODULE OK LED is BLINKING and the ONLINE and STATUS OK LEDs remain OFE After diagnostics complete both the MODULE OK LED and STATUS OK LED blink slowly for 2 3 seconds The ON LINE LED is OFF during this time This LED se quence identifies the time you may enter the Field Network Test State by entering an F or f at the Station Manager terminal The table below shows the LED patterns for the power up diagnostics phase Table 9 2 Power Up State Running Wait for Field Wait for PLC amp Diagnostic LED Diagnostics Network Test CPU Handshake Failed 15 30 sec 2 3 sec to 60 sec MODULE OK Blink Slow Blink Slow Blink OFF ONLINE OFF OFF OFF OFF STATUS OK OFF Slow Blink OFF OFF 15 seconds for Et
73. Monitor Commands 0 6660 4 7 Using the Modify Commands 0 0066 c ccc eens 4 8 Station Manager Command Syntax 6666s 4 10 Task Identification oves Pere WA Aged E ee Wee a a Ea 4 10 Display Data Representation 0 60 cece eee eee 4 11 INumeric Values tte UL ee ue eek ee Ia eos 4 11 Character Strings Values 0 cece eee eee 4 11 Octet String Values is esee Reed ca nels ee BE a EE E ers 4 11 Object Identifier Values 2 eens 4 11 Station Manager in Utility Programs 0 6 66 4 12 Soft Switch Entry Utility eei eei a eraa eee eee eee 4 12 Field Network Test Utility 0 0 4 14 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May viii 1994 Contents Section 3 Station Manager Command Descriptions 4 16 Command Input Processing sassa sasesana neran eee eee 4 16 ACB Commiand eere edet eh ea tete ehe tha dete 4 17 BIS Commandi ya iira eat M er adus t bred ae omes 4 17 CAP Command d epe e ERR RA Ee 4 18 CHBPS Command sssseseseee en 4 18 CHDATE Command ssesseeee hn 4 18 CHLIIME Commarid 2 RAS eR RR HENRI E 4 19 CHSOSW Command stit ele Bees br uL RE BL eee 4 19 GHTIME Command eee edat RLENMCUARGIU ERIRAM oh eae 4 21 CLEAR Command el Re RR RAS 4 22 CLSOSW Command sssssseee en 4 22 DATE Command RR eye Rer RID NER rH ebd 4 23 EXS Commands shere ELE fein ieee MEE Ae eb ex PUES
74. N Defaults to N Value toggled by the Tab and Shift Tab keys The details about a specific DIB entry can be examined by pressing the Alt V key When the Alt V key is pressed the operator is prompted for which DIB entry to examine If no COMMON NAME is entered the top entry in the list is displayed The Alt S key is used to search the DIB for a specific entry When the Alt S key is pressed the user selects the data field and a value to seek and selects the search direc tion The Alt S key is pressed again to initiate the search or the Esc key is pressed to abort the search There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esc key exit without saving any changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 MMS Parameters Menu The MMS Parameters Menu selection is used to modify the MMS parameters The MMS Parameters Menu is shown below Configuration File Name C 8 CGQ 400 SERIES 98 78 IS0882 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MNS Parameters Syst MMS Paraneters Variable Names Prin Maximum MMS Message Size Press Up Dn Arrow to move the cursor then press Enter to select lt CAlt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 13 MMS Parameters Menu This menu selection is used to examine and modify m Variable Names wm Maximum MMS Message Size The
75. NGEFNDISNGEFNDIS DOS AJUTOEXEC BAT SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES rem Bind NDIS Drivers GEFNDIS netbind GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI protocol manager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS XIRCOMNET MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM_RX_BUFS 8 NE Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne we Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary XIRCOMNET DRIVERNAME XIRCOM GEK 0868 Appendix H Sample DOS System Files H 7 SMC EtherCard PLUS EtherCard PLUS Elite 16 EtherCard PLUS A CONFIG SYS FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 DEVICE DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE DOS EMM386 EXE RAM 1024 DOS HIGH UMB DEVICE GEFNDIS PROTMAN DOS I GEFNDIS rem rem The Ethernet Adapter and its device driver must first be installed rem into your computer Replace the string lt DIRECTORY gt in the rem following DEVICEHIGH command with the directory which contains rem the specified device driver for your Ethernet Adapter module rem DEVICEHIGH lt DIRECTORY gt SMCMAC DOS DEVICEHIGH GEFNDIS GEFNDIS DOS AJTOEXEC BAT SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES rem Bind NDIS Drivers GEFNDIS netbind GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI protocol m
76. Press Up Dn Arrow to move the cursor then press Enter to select CAIt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 6 ISO Parameters Menu Each sub menu is discussed next in the order in which they appear on the ISO Parame ters Menu For a basicnetwork you will only need to use the following screens Screens and fields not described here are described in Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network m Network Layer Parameters Screen m Transport SessionLayerParameters Screen m Application Processes Screen m Local Application DIB Directory Information Base Screen GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 25 Network Layer Parameters Screen 3 26 The Network Layer Parameters Screen selection is used to modify the Network Layer communications parameters For a basicnetwork the only parameter you need to define is the NSAP Network Service Access Point The Network Layer Parameters Screen is shown below CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CG0 400 SERIES_96 76 150802 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 Network Layer Parameters NSAP EELEDLDEELDLDLELLELDLE HEX PACKET PRIORITY H MAX_NPDU_SIZE FEEH CONFIG TIME BEG CHECK TIME LSAP gj HEX NPDU LIFETIME HOLDING TIME USE CHECKSUMS J QUERV URIT TIME BEEE OPTIMIZE fj ALL_END_SYSTEMS CES MAC_ADDRESS CELDLYATLLLDEE HEX LSAP ids HEX ALL_INTERMEDIATE_S
77. Range ee indicates an error within the copy of EEPROM data Occurrence of this error should be reported to GE Fanuc NA Event 3 NetworkLayer events This event is logged by the Network Layer Internet software when an unex pected erroroccurs Entries 1 4 5 are used by GE Fanuc NA support personnel to determine which software component raised the error Entry 2 of the event log is an error code which indicates what error has oc curred Each erroris described below Could not QAlloca buffer Internet scheduled with invalid event PDU Buffer pointer unexpectedlyNULL NSAP address unexpectedlyNULL Could not queue work item Foreign NSAP table overflow PDU discarded BuffAlloc failed Entry 4 contains the byte size of the buffer we attempted to allocate SREAreqcall failed Dequeue failed from Output Message Queue Vvo oada FN CO nternet header buffer unexpectedlyNULL may 9 Received NPDU with active Internet header and no data 11 Havereconstructed TPDU and have no place to send it 12 Could notcreate a buffer pool It is likely that system memory configuration parametersneed adjustment 13 Could not create a queue header It is likely that system memory configuration parametersneed adjustment 14 Request to set a timer failed 15 NSAPtoolong 16 Detected 2 stations on network with the same NSAP 17 GSMhas configured duplicate entries for the RIB table Entry 4 contains the GSM RIB table entry
78. Remote Peer Services Supported Service Word Offset Bit No Status 6 8 Get Name List 6 7 Identify 6 6 Rename 6 5 Read 6 4 Write 6 3 Get Variable Access Attributes 6 2 Define Named Variable 6 1 Define Scattered Access 6 16 Get Scattered Access Attributes 6 15 Delete Variable Access 6 14 Define Named Variable List 6 13 Get Named Variable Attributes 6 12 Delete Named VariableList 6 11 Define Named Type 6 10 Get Named Type Attributes 6 9 Delete Named Type 7 8 Input 7 7 Output 7 6 Take Control V 5 RelinquishControl 7 4 DefineSemaphore 7 3 DeleteSemaphore 7 2 ReportSemaphoreStatus 7 1 Report Pool Semaphore Status 7 16 Report Semaphore Entry Status 7 15 Initiate Download Sequence 7 14 Download Segment 7 13 Terminate Download Sequence 7 12 Initiate Upload Sequence 7 11 Upload Segment 7 10 Terminate Upload Sequence 7 9 Request Domain Download 8 8 Request Domain Upload 8 7 Load Domain Content 8 6 Store Domain Content 8 5 Delete Domain 8 4 Get Domain Attributes 8 3 Create ProgramInvocation 8 2 Delete ProgramInvocation 8 1 Start 8 16 Stop 8 15 Resume 8 14 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table 6 15 Remote Peer Services Supported Continued Service Word Offset Bit No Reset 8 13 Kill 8 12 Get Program Invocation Attributes 8 11 Obtain File 8 10 Define Event Condition 8 9 Delete Event Condition 9 8 Get Event Condition Attributes
79. Responses Positive or Negative Response Indicates whether the request for an association was accepted If this parameter is 0 then the request is accepted and a Positive Response is sent to the requesting application If this parameter is 1 then the request is rejected and a Negative Response is sent to the requesting application Problem Code Indicates the nature of the problem if the Positive or Negative Response parameter is 1 request was unsuccessful This field is ignored if a Positive Response is being sent Maximum Message Size Specifies the final negotiated value of the maximum message size for the association In NO CASE should the negotiated value be larger than the sug gested value received in the Examine Initiate Indication MDB nor should the value be larger than the Maximum MMS Message Size configured for this station If 0 is used the suggested Maximum Message Size will be accepted GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 15 Maximum Services Outstanding Calling Specifies the final negotiated value of the maximum services outstanding for the remote node If the negotiated value is larger than the suggested value received in the Examine Initiate Indication MDB or if zero is used the suggested value will be accepted Maximum Services Outstanding Called Specifies the final negotiated value of the maximum services outstanding for the local node If the negotiated value is larger than the suggested value
80. Station Manager Mode Figure 4 2 Station Manager Accessed Directly over the Network by a GSM in Network Station Manager Mode 4 2 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 GEnet a45347 802 3 LAN TRANSCEIVER ETHERNET INTERFACE STATION MANAGER SOFTWARE SERIES 90 70 PLC ETHERNET INTERFACE STATION MANAGER SOFTWARE SERIES 90 70 PLC MAC Address 080019010020 Must use the REM Remote Command to access Station Manager with MAC Address 080019010020 GEnet SYSTEM MANAGER in Local Station Manager Mode or an ASCII Terminal Figure 4 3 Station Manager Accessed Remotely over the Network by a GSM in Local Station Manager Mode using the REM Remote Command Accessing the Station Manager Using the GSM The Station Manager may be accessed by connecting the Ethernet Interface to a Work master or IBM PC Compatible computer running the GSM software in Local or Network Station Manager mode 1 Do either A or B below as desired D Local Connection Connect the COM1 RS 232 serial port on the device running the GSM to the 9 pin connector on the Ethernet Interface Refer to Appendix D for instructions on how to make the RS 232 cable E Network Connection Connect the Ethernet Interface on the device running the GSM to the Ethernet Network Power up the computer running the GSM into DOS See Chapter 3 The GEnet System
81. USE CHECKSUM J ficK DELAV TIME MEZ SESSION TIMEOLT TSAP LER HEX Maximum Transport PDU size in log2 12 Default 18 Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAlt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP CAIt U Update Parameters Figure 8 8 Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen Transport Layer The Transport Layer parameter definitions are MAX_PDUSZ_LOG2 The Maximum Transport Layer PDU Size negotiated for data transfers Specified as a power of 2 to get the actual size a value of 10 implies 21 or a size of 1024 octets Valid range of 7 to 12 Defaults to 10 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter tmaxpdu WINDOW SIZE The Maximum Window Size or Credit Allocation allowed for the re ceipt of Data Transfer DT TPDUs Valid range of 1 to 5 Defaults to 2 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter twindsize REF_TIMEOUT Establishes the period during which a source reference cannot be reas signed to another Transport connection Valid range 0 to 300 seconds Defaults to 0 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter treftime RETRAN COUNT Establishes the maximum number of re transmissions for Connect Request CR Connect Confirm CC Data Transfer DT Expedited Data ED and Disconnect Request DR TPDUs Valid range of 1 to 10 Defaults to 5 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter trtrancnt GIVEUP TIMEOUT Give Up Timeout for the Transport Layer This timer is s
82. You can also toggle the Station Manager Mode by pressing Alt M from the GSM Main Menu When the EXIT TO DOS menu item is selected the GSM clears the screen and returns control to the PC operating system GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 47 Chapter The Station Manager 4 This chapter describes how to access and use the Station Manager software which re sides on the Ethernet Interface Each command is also defined here The chapter is di vided into three sections m Section 1 Accessing the Station Manager m Section 2 Using the Station Manager m Section 3 Command Descriptions The Station Manager is a part of the communications software in the Ethernet Interface The Station Manager executes as a background function on the Ethernet module to pro vide interactive supervisory access to the interface The Station Manager is available when the Ethernet Interface is fully operational or when it is running either the Soft Switch Entry or Field Network Test utilities The Sta tion Manager is not available when running Power Up Diagnostics or the Loader Utility Station Manager Services The Station Manager provides the following services m An interactive set of commands to interrogate and control the Ethernet Interface m Access to observe internal statistics an exception log and configuration parameters m Password security for commands that change the Interface parameters or states The Stati
83. a3 Maximumnumberof Application Entities already active aa Invalidprimitiveforthis function call ab Pass through mode used incorrectly ac Invaligrimitive service pair for state ad Output message queue is full b4 MMS version number must 1 or 0 60 Maximum message size is smaller than the minimum value MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 9 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event 7 2 Invalid state event pair passed into state machine Entry 4 Application Layer contains the current state Entry 5 contains the current event events 3 Download segment was received for domain not in download Continued mode Entry 4 contains the UE type Entry 5 contains the UE ID 4 Domain was discarded Entry 5 contains an exception code used by GE Fanuc Automationsupportpersonnel 5 Invalid data data type or data type len on an incoming InformationReport indication Entry 4 contains the received data type Entry 5 contains the received data type length 6 Error during initialization of Application Interface 7 Invalid event caused scheduling of Application Interface Entry 4 contains the invalid event code Entry 4 contains the associated parametervalue 8 Attempted send from the local Application to the MMS Provider failed Entry 4 contains the status code returned by the MMS Provider Entry 5 contain
84. and Transfer Syntaxes Association Parameters Local Application DIB Prin Press Up Dn Arrow to move the cursor then press Enter to select CAlt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 3 ISO Parameters Menu Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network Each sub menu is discussed next in the order in which they appear on the ISO Parame ters Menu Data Link Parameters Screen The Data Link Parameters Screen allows you to modify the Data Link Layer communica tions parameters In most cases the values of these parameters will remain the default values The Data Link Parameters menu is shown below Configuration File Name CO 8Q CG 400 SERIES _96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 l Data Link Parameters ISO Param MMS TX_RING_LEN IE RX RING LEN Syst MAX_DATA_BUF ELE DISAB_TX_RTRY L RX GROUP ADDRESSES ADDRESS 8988019888801 HEX U888888888E8 HEX BBBBBBBOBBBB HEX 088888888888 HEX BBBBBBBOBBBB HEX 600808000G0 HEX BBBBBBBOBBBB HEX Prin Sanaun ce E Transmitter Ring Length 8 16 32 64 1285 Default 8 Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 4 DataLink Parameters Screen The Data Link Parameters are defined as follows TX_RING_LEN The maximum number of frames which can be queued for transmis sion on the net
85. application be re turned The COMM REO format for the GetRemoteName List command is shown in the table below Table 6 52 Get Remote Name List COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 44 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8301 206DH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Object Class 11 See Table 6 53 Object Scope 12 See Table 6 54 Length of Continue After Name 13 0 32 Continue After Name 14 29 characterstring Maximum Length of Name Buffer 30 0 1020 Length of Domain Name 31 0 32 Domain Name 32 47 characterstring Name Buffer Memory Type 48 See Table 6 16 Name Buffer Offset 49 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Get Remote Name List Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Object Class The class of MMS object for which a list is desired MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 6 53 Object Class Values Value Object Class 0 Named Variable 1 Scattered Access 2 Name
86. are Configure Station and Network Parameters Access is provided to one or more LAN Interface Configuration Editors The Configuration Editor is used to examine and modify the configuration information for each GEnet LAN Interface on the network There is a unique Configuration Editor for each type of LAN Interface The Configuration Editor is supplied with your LAN Interface Software and is integrated with the GSM during installation Station configuration is performed off line on the PC and results in a configuration file on the hard disk unique to each station Download the Configuration and Communications Software to the LAN Interface This function is used to download initial or revised new configuration parameters or LAN Interface software The download can occur either over a local serial cable or over the network Access the Station Manager software on the LAN Interface For this function the GSM becomes a simple terminal emulator that connects to the LAN Interface Station Manager either over a local serial cable or over the network The GSM also provides the following support functions List All Configured Stations List all Configured Applications Change GSM Password Set Download and Station Manager Communication Modes Local or Network 3 2 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Why Does a Station Have to be Configured and Downloaded GEnet Factory LAN Interfaces consis
87. as un derstood by the Ethernet Interface at the time the command is issued The command does not read the ACB from the PLC across the back plane If the command ACB ALL is issued the ACB content of all active associations are dis played This means that the Logicmaster display of the ACB location could differ from the Sta tion Manager display for two reasons 1 The Ethernet Interface is in the process of updating the PLC memory or 2 The Ethernet Interface is unable to update the PLC memory Atypical ACB command is shown below gt acb r16 i135 xyz R999999 r015 R0016 ASW 0001H ASWE 4000H Invoke ID 00000000H Prob code 0000H 10035 ASW 0421H ASWE 0000H Invoke ID 00000073H Prob code 0007H XYZ Invalid ACB location specified R999999 ACB address is out of range R0015 No ACB exists at the specified memory location There is one line of output per ACB Each line is preceded by the ACB location entered by the user The ACB locations are displayed in the order in which they were entered Error checking is done on the address entered to make sure that 1 The address formatis valid 2 The memory location is within the configured range for that memory type and 3 Anactual ACB exists at that memory location BPS Command The BPS command has the form BPS This command causes the current serial port data rate to be displayed A typical BPS command is shown below gt bps bps 9600 Chapter 4 The Station
88. default value is lt lt 000000000000 gt gt This value instructs the Ethernet Interface to use the factory set globally unique MAC address in its EEPROM Modificationfrom DefaultSetting If changed the Ethernet Interface will store the new Station Address in the EEPROM and use it instead of the factory default Load Source The load source field defines the load source for the GEnet LAN software DefaultSetting The default setting for this field is ALT This means that the GEnet Ethernet Interface module will try to obtain a load from the serial port and the network in that order The software will alternate between the two load sources until one is found Modificationfrom Default Setting You may wish to specify the load source The load source may be changed to LOC serial port only NET network only If the load source specified is not available for the module it will wait indefinitely for that load source tobe made available LAN Online This parameter tells the GEnet LAN Interface module whether to connect to the LAN afterinitialization DefaultSetting The default setting is YES This means that the module will connect to the LAN Modificationfrom Default Setting The value may be changed to NO This means that the module will not connect to the LAN Backplane This parameter tells the GEnet LAN Interface module whether or not to allow Online backplanecommunications DefaultSettin
89. elements Entered as a hexadecimal number Valid range 1 to FFFF hexadecimal For variables which are not arrays i e scalars this field should be set to 1 BIT OFF The bit offset relative to the starting address of this variable Entered as a hex adecimal number Valid range of 00 to OF hexadecimal Used only if the Data Type specifies a BIT STR or BOOLEAN data type for all other data types it must be 00 ARR Specifies if the variable is an array or a scalar variable Valid values of Y or N Y specifies that the variable is an array N specifies that the variable is a scalar Defaults to N Value toggled by the Tab or Shift Tab keys There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the MMS Parameters Menu m Esckey exit without saving changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 23 Maximum MMS Message Size Screen The Maximum MMS Message Size Screen is used to display the Maximum MMS Mes sage Size parameter The Maximum MMS Memory Size Screen is shown below Configuration File Name CO 8 CG 000 SERIES_96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 ISO Parameters MMS Parameters Syst MMS Parameters Variable Names Prin Ebeter Y E LETT MS HIE Maximum MMS Message Size L MAX_MMS_MESSAGE_SIZE Maximum MMS Message Size in octets 128 8024 Default 992 Edit parame
90. field specifies the PLC memory type for the status area see the table below for valid types GFK 0868 Chapter 5 General PLC Application Programming 5 3 Table 5 2 Values for the CRSW Memory Type Code Memory Type Decimal Hexadecimal 8 08 R Register Table 10 0a 96 AI Analog Input Table 12 Oc AQ Analog Output Table 16 or 70 10 or 46 I Discrete Input Table 180r72 12 or 48 Q Discrete Output Table CRSW Offset The CRSW Offset field specifies the offset into the memory type Note that the CRSW Offset is zero based For example segment 8 offset 0 corresponds to RI1 The CRSW will have one of the values listed in the table below Table 5 3 CRSW Interpretation CRSW Value Value Interpretation 80H COMM_REQ has been received and is being processed 40H COMM_REQ has completed without error 20H COMM_REQ has completed with error If the CRSW memory type offset is invalid the Ethernet Interface cannot indicate whether the command in the MDB succeeded or failed Idle Timeout Value This field is not used when the No Wait flag is specified Maximum Communication Time This field is not used when the No Wait flag is spe cified and should be set to 0 Message Definition Block The Message Definition Block MDB is a contiguous block of word oriented memory containing detailed information about the COMM_REQ command to be executed It always starts at
91. in the the table below At least one parameter label amp alue pair must be entered Using the CHSOSW command with the single parameter def causes all Soft Switch values to be set to their defaults If the Soft Switches have been determined to be invalid the Soft Switch Entry Utility is entered upon power up or restart Once in this utility you MUST correct the problem either with the Logicmaster 90 Configurator or with a CHSOSW command before exit ing Otherwise the Soft Switch Utility will automatically be re entered after a power up or restart MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 4 8 Soft Switch Default Values for the Ethernet Interface Soft Switch Default Value MAC address lt lt 000000000000 gt gt Loadsource AIT LANonline YES BP online YES Networkload address lt lt 090060000000 gt gt MMS enable Don t Care PGMR enable Don tCare A typical output from the CHSOSW command is shown below chsosw ldsrc loc lt lt lt Soft Switch Data gt gt gt MAC address lt lt 080019011234 gt gt default used Load source Serial Network Online Online after powerup Backplane Online Online after powerup Network load addr lt lt 090060000000 gt gt default used MMS Enable Don t Care Pgmr Enable Don t Care Updating please wait CHTIME Command The CHTIME command has the form CHTIME lt HH MM g
92. initiated by the lower layer to ad vise of the activation of a particular service Individual Address An LLC address that identifies a particular data station on a Local Area Network Information Field That part of a protocol data unit PDU that contains data as op posed to the address field and command field InitiatingStation The station from which an instance of communication a transaction originates Inter Repeater Link IRL A mechanism for interconnecting two and only two repeater units Invoke ID A number which uniquely identifies an outstanding ie not yet confirmed MMS request on a particular association IS ISO International Standard In the case of MMS ISO 9506 distinguished from DIS For ISO standards this represents the final version of a standard ISO Standards The International Organization for Standardization Jabber A transmission by a data station beyond the time interval allowed by the proto col LAN Interface A term used in this manual to identify the GEnet hardware module with or without software that connects a PLC or CNC to a network Reserved for cases where the authors wish to be explicitly inclusive of both Ethernet 802 3 and MAP 802 4 types See also Ethernet Interface Layer One ofthe seven layers of the Open Systems Interconnection OSI reference model Fach layer provides a set of hierarchically related services to the layer above Linear Topology A network topology in which
93. list From this list you select the desired station which is then displayed on the Configure a Station Menu The Up Arrow Down Arrow Pg Up Pg Dn Home and End keys may be used to move within the list You may also begin a search by pressing Alt S When the desired station is displayed at the top of the list press the Enter key to select that station The selected station name is then displayed on the Configure a Station Screen After selecting a station you may press Alt E to enter the Configuration Editor Deleting a Station Configuration File 1 Select the station you want to delete See description above on Selecting a Station 2 Press Alt D Structure of the MAC Address The MAC Address is a 12 digit hexadecimal number that identifies the station on the physical network This 12 digit number is organized as 6 octets each octet is repre sented by a pair of hexadecimal digits A typical default MAC Address is shown below Octet 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex No 0_8 0_0 1_9 0_0 5_3 1_2 Each octet of the MAC Address is an 8 bit binary number Thus the 12 digit hex address is really a 48 bit binary number The typical MAC Address shown above is represented as a binary number as follows Octet 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex 0 8 0 0 1 9 0 0 5 3 1 2 Binary 0000 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0101 0011 0001 0010 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 21 Another characteristic that is important especially for multi vend
94. lt lt RUNG 10 gt gt ALW ON 4 CALL RDREG ee ES END OF PROGRAM LOGIC MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK PROGRAM BLOCK ASSOCI LOCAL REGISTER L MEMORY SIZE BYTES 512 PROGRAM BLOCK SIZE BYTES 496 DECLARATIONS ENTRIES 6 HIGHEST REFERENCE USED NPUT 1 100048 OUTPUT 0 Q00006 INTERNAL M NONE TEMPORARY T NONE LOCAL REGISTER 1 NONE PROGRAM REGISTER P NONE REGISTER R R00250 ANALOG INPUT AI NONE ANALOG OUTPUT AQ NONE o 2 n C 5 x 8 d E id e Cr zy 5 2 e 2 x B un Cx 5 C E o 2 Cs ig e es s E e ny E KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK START OF LD BLOCK ASSOC1 Bring up LAN association Nl VARIABLE DECLARATIONS VARIABLE DECLARATION TABLE REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION 000001 WAS UP Detect 1st LAN OK amp LAN i f OK 5000002 INF FL Detect LAN i f failure after up 5000003 LAN FL Detect LAN OK failure after up R00250 INIT SW Initiate Req COMM REQ status wd IDENTIFIER TABLE IDENTIFIER IDENTIFIER TYPE IDENTIFIER DESCRIPTION GETSTAT COMMENT CLRASW COMMENT START OF BLOCK LOGIC lt lt RUNG 3 gt gt GETSTAT COMMENT
95. m ISO Parameters depending on application m MMS Parameters depending on application Note There is a quick way to verify that the Ethernet Interface will transition to the Operational State before you have assembled all the data for configuring the station To do this you can simply create a configuration file using the GSM default values and then download the station Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 13 Downloading a Station The software that handles the Ethernet Interface communication services must be loaded into each Interface on the network This software is loaded together with the configuration file for each station The software can be loaded into the Interface through the serial port locally or across the network When Must a Station Be Downloaded m When the Interface is initially configured m When you wish to reload the Interface with new parameters i e configuration was modified m When you wish to reload the Interface with a different software version m When an Ethernet Interface is replaced for any reason Note An Ethernet Interface must be configured on the GSM before it can be downloaded by the GSM See instructions immediately preceding Setting Up the GSM and the Ethernet Interface for the Download Start by deciding whether you will load locally or over the network Downloading re quires a physical connection communication cable between the Ethernet Interface and the GSM Th
96. must have the value of 4 610 262 Unable to send message or response Either an error in the message re quest or the message output queue is backed up 611 263 Unable to form a new association because the maximum number of associationshasalready beenestablished 612 264 No Initiate Indication is pending 613 265 Maximum Message Size parameter is smaller than the minimum maximum message size This parameter may be 0 to use the default maximummessagesize 614 266 Invalid Response Typeparameter This parameter must be 0 for Positive Response or 1 for Negative Response 615 267 Unable to build an MMS Initiate Request PDU This may be because the station is not configured to support associations the maximum message size was too small or too large or system resources are not currentlyavail able 616 268 Unable to send a message request because the maximum number of out standing message transactions for this association has been exceeded 617 269 The message transaction number matches the transaction number of a message whose response has not yet been received Transactionisstill pending 618 26A No message indication for this type of message is pending 619 26B Erroroccurred in the attempt to transfer data to from the Series 90 70 PLC 620 26C Can only make message responses in this state 621 26D InvalidACB Location parameter Either an invalid Series 90 70 location or the ACB Location is already in use by
97. number of the offending entry Entry 5 is 0 for an End System ES or 1 for an Intermediate System IS 9 14 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event 4 This event is logged by the Transport Layer software when an unexpected TransportLayer eventoccurs events Entries 1 4 5 and 6 of the event log will be zero For some errors Entry 3 of the event log will give the value of the bad Transport parameter Entry 2 of the event log is an exception code which indicates what error has occurred for a received Transport Protocol Data Unit TPDU Each error is described below 0 Invalid TPDU Entry 3 specified error that occurred 0 Length Indicator LI field is 255 which is invalid length 1 Bad NSAP 2 Bad TSAP Bad input TPDU type No state machine for Acknowledgement AK Expedited Ac knowledgement EA Data DT or Expedited Data ED TPDUs Invalid Gracefully close Request GR TPDU Unsupported Expedited Data ED TPDU UnsupportedExpedited Acknowledgement EA TPDU Invalid TPDUsize Bad parameter code The value of the code is placed in event log Entry 3 Length Indicator LI is too short or too long Mon ND OFF W v Checksum parameter not present b Data DT TPDU data too large The size of the data is placed in event log Entry 3 c Expedited
98. of LAN addresses locally or on a universal basis Address Field The part of a Protocol Data Unit PDU that contains an address Application Context Name ACN An ASCII string of up to 64 Characters used to de scribe the context of each application Application DIB Directory Information Base A directory of 7 Layer Application Pro cesses which supplies all addressing information needed to communicate with each 7 Layer Application Process The GSM maintains a 7 Layer Application DIB con taining the 7 Layer Application Processes defined by each configured station Each MAP 3 0 and Ethernet station contains a Local Application DIB which defines those Application Processes with which the station will initiate 7 Layer communications An Application DIB is sometimes referred to as a MAP DIB when using MAP com munications Application Entity AE That part of the Application Process AP that processes a par ticular set of OSI communication services is known as an Application Entity AE Each AE is uniquely addressable in the network Application Interface The Application Interface services respond to and initiate re quests to remote application processes via ladder logic programming and MMS mes sages See also Hands On Service Application Layer Layer 7 of the OSI Model The services provided by this layer direct ly support application programs Application Message A communication request or response sent between application entitie
99. of a Positive or Negative Response command The Association Status Word and Association Status Word Extension bits are summarized in the figures below Association Status Word The Association Status Word ASW bits are defined as follows Association Status Word 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Association OK Reserved Always 0 Positive Confirm Negative Confirm Abort Indication Conclude Indication Read Indication Write Indication Reserved Unsolicited Status Indication Status Indication Start Indication Stop Indication Information Report Indication Restart Indication Reserved GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 9 6 Association Status Word Extension The Association Status Word Extension ASWE bits are defined as follows Association Status Word Extension 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 e 5 4 3 2 1 Resume Indication Reject Indication Error Indication Figure 6 2 Association Status Word Extension Bits 6 10 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 MMS COMM_REQ Command Descriptions Association Services The Association Services allow the initiation the orderly conclusion and the abrupt con clusion of the association
100. of range 0 unspecifiederror 3 confirm error 1 invalidresult 0 unspecifiederror 11 concludeerror 1 unrecognizedservice 0 unspecifiederror 2 invalidInvoke Id 1 invalidservice error 3 invalidservice error 2 value out of range 4 value outof range 4 unconfirmed PDU 0 unspecifiederror 1 unrecognizedservice 2 invalidArgument 3 maximumrecursionexceeded 4 value outof range MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 Chapter Station Manager COMMunications 7 REQuests This chapter contains information about how to program COMMunication REQuests COMM REOS for the Station Manager commands supported through ladder logic These requests allow the ladder logic program within the PLC to retrieve some of the same information available through the Station Manager For more information on Station Manager commands and ladder logic programming refer to the following chapters in this manual m Chapter 4 describes the Station Manager commands supported locally over the serial port and remotely over the LAN m Chapter 5 provides general instructions on programming a COMM REQ Station Manager Ladder Requests There are four Station Manager commands implemented in the PLC ladder logic The table below lists these commands Table 7 1 Station Manager PLC Commands Station Manager Command Command Number decimal hexadecimal RetrieveExtended Status Buffer Request 08100 1FA4 Retrieve TalliesRe
101. of the Interface Before powering up the Ethernet Interface you may wish to connect the GEnet System Manager GSM locally to the Interface and select the Station Manager function from the GSM Main menu This allows you to observe the progress of the power up diagnos tics via the Station Manager software on the Interface The GSM is also used to perform other operations in subsequent Installation Procedures Refer to Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager for instructions on installing the GSM software on auser suppliedPC compatiblecomputer Note Altematively you can use a dumb terminal or another terminal emulation product on a PC However you will probably find it most convenient to use the GSM since you will be using the GSM for other configuration purposes in subsequent steps If you do not use the GSM configure the terminal for 9600 bps 8 bits no parity and 1 stop bit See Appendix D for instructions on making the serial cable Using the GSM Access Station Manager Function The Station Manager software on the Ethernet Interface is accessed by connecting the LAN Interface to a personal computer running the GSM software and selecting the Sta tion Manager function from the GSM main menu 1 There are two ways the GSM can be physically connected to an Interface Local Connection and Network Connection Note To observe the progress of Power Up Diagnostics described in this procedure and to invoke the Field Netwo
102. other 4 state machine id invalid 1 object access unsupported 1 application reference 2 object non existent 0 other 3 object access denied 1 application unreachable 4 object invalidated 2 connection lost 8 initiate 3 application reference invalid 0 other 4 context unsupported 1 version incompatible 2 definition 2 max segment insufficient 0 other 3 max services outstanding calling insufficient 1 object undefined 4 max services outstanding called insufficient 2 invalid address 5 service CBB insufficient 3 type unsupported 6 parameter CBB insufficient 4 type inconsistent 7 nesting level insufficient 5 object exists 9 conclude 6 object attribute inconsistent 0 other 3 resource 1 further communication required 0 other 10 cancel 1 memory unavailable 0 other 2 processorresource unavailable 1 invoke id unknown 3 mass storage unavailable 2 cancel not possible 4 capability unavailable 11 file 5 capabilityunknown 0 other 4 service 1 filename ambiguous 0 other 2 file busy 1 primitives out of sequence 3 filename syntax eror 2 object state conflict 4 content type invalid 3 pdu size 5 position invalid 4 continuation invalid 6 file access denied 5 object constraint conflict 7 file non existent 5 servicepreempt ff ff Bad data format at local station 0 other ff fe PLC transfer error at local station 1 timeout 2 deadlock 3 cancel GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests n addition to the above error codes that may be received or sent via COM
103. passing protocol is used Token Ring Network A ring network that allows unidirectional data transmission be tween data stations by a token passing protocol such that the transmitted data re turns to the originating station Token Passing Protocol Procedure In a Local Area Network using a token the set of rules that governs how a data station acquires uses and transfers the token Topology The pattern formed by the physical medium interconnecting the nodes of a network Transceiver See Medium Attachment Unit MAU Transceiver Cable See Attachment Unit Interface AUI Transmission Path Delay The time required for a bit to travel between the two most distant data stations in a bus network Transport Layer Layer 4 of the OSI Model The Transport Layer provides end to end control of a connection This layer allows processes to exchange data reliably and sequentially Transport Service Access Point TSAP A Transport Layer SAP Tree Topology A network topology that uses a cable emanating from a headend with no closed circuits Transmissions propagate throughout all branches of the tree and are received by all stations Trunk Cable A cable connecting trunk coupling units for the purpose of allowing com munication among data stations Trunk Coupling Unit TCU A physical device that connects a data station to a trunk cable by means of a drop cable NOTE The trunk coupling unit contains the means for inserting the station into
104. release CPU text buffers failed Entry 3 indicates thestatus returned from the MailboxUtilities 40 XBackplanedriver s attempt to send a message to the PLC failed Entry 3 indicates the status code returned from the CPU 41 Backplane driver could not find a state machine for an unsolicited message 42 Backplane driver could not find a state machine for a response message GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 19 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Code Possible Cause and Resolution Event 9 SRTP Service Agentevents This event is logged by the SRTP Service Agent when an unexpected event occurs Entry 2 of the logged event contains one of the following errorcodes 0 LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming The number of available connections between Logicmaster and the CPU has been exceeded Bad Local Application Request Discarded Request Invalid Transport Connect request was Acknowledged Bad Local Application Request Discarded Request Invalid Transport Expedited request made LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming The transaction with the given sysid was not found LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Backplane driver ready indication with the given transfer id was not found LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Message response indication with the given transfer id was not found LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Invalid next data indication from
105. remote node should keep information contained in an ESH NPDU issued by the local node Should be more 8 10 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 than twice the value of CONFIG_TIME Valid range of 0 to 65535 Defaults to 75 se conds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter nhldtime QUERY_WAIT_TIME The time interval in seconds the local node should wait for some remote node to provide a translation from NSAP address to MAC address and LSAP that was requested by the local node Valid range of 0 to 65535 Defaults to 45 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter nqwtime CHECK_TIME The number of seconds between checking the Routing Information Base RIB for expired entries and checking incoming segmented NPDUs for an NPDU whose lifetime expired in reassembly Valid range of 0 to 65535 Defaults to 10 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter ntick USE_CHECKSUMS Indicates whether or not checksums are to be used on NPDUs sent by the local node A Y specifies that checksums are used a N specifies that they are NOT used Defaults to N Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter nchksum where a 1 equates to Y and a 0 equates to N OPTIMIZE Indicates whether or not ISO 9542 optimization is to be used This means that when a RIB entry for an Intermediate System I5 expires and is removed any additional entry in the RIB for that IS s network address wi
106. the Ethernet Interface The next two fig ures illustrate typical cable connection of a personal computer Figure D 1 shows con nections to a personal computer with a 25 pin serial port and Figure D 2 shows connec tions to a personal computer with a 9 pin serial port PIN PIN 245181 RS 232 CABLE LI a RXD 3 2 TXD KS ETHERNET I 9 TxD 2 3 AxD L INTERFACE 0 MODULE 25 PIN gt 0 LI 0 SERIAL SERIALPORT F gt ON gt 0f GND 7 7 GND gt PORT PERSONAL o0 COMPUTER o 9 PIN 9 PIN 0 MALE FEMALE E gt 0 gt 0 0 0 THE PINS AND CONNECTOR MAY BE DIFFERENT FOR o SOME COMPUTERS OR TERMINALS BUT THE SIGNAL gt OR NAMES WILL BE THE SAME CONSULT THE MANUAL 25 PIN 25 PIN FOR YOUR COMPUTER OR ASCII TERMINAL FOR THE MALE FEMALE CORRECT SIZE CONNECTOR AND PIN NUMBERS Figure D 1 Serial Cable to Connect GSM 25 Pin Connector to Ethernet Interface MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 gt PIN a45182 RS 232 CABLE 9 PIN 2 TXD Ks ETHERNET SERIAL PORT ES 3 RXD KG INTERFACE ON Ea MODULE PERSONAL EEN SERIAL COMPUTER RES 7 GND E PORT 9 PIN 9 PIN 9 PIN 9 PIN MALE FEMALE MALE FEMALE THE PINS AND CONNECTOR MAY BE DIFFERENT FOR SOME COMPUTERS OR TERMINALS BUT THE SIGNAL NAMES WILL BE THE SAME CONSULT THE MANUAL FOR YOUR COMPUTER
107. the Example PLC Ladder Program 0 00 eee eee 2 22 Executing the Example PLC Ladder Program 0 000 00005 2 23 What to Do if the Program is Not Working 6 600s eee eee eee 2 25 Resuming Normal Operation After Using the Example Program 2 26 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager StationConfiguration 3 1 Whatisthe GSM isis pie ranki ere Re RE ADU p ER 3 2 Why Does a Station Have to be Configured and Downloaded 3 3 Connecting the GSM to the LAN Interface 0 cece eee eee 3 3 Section 1 Installing and Starting Up the GSM 3 4 Hardware Requirements 6 ccc eens 3 5 Installing the PC Network Card for Network GSM Operation 3 5 Installing the GEnet System Manager GSM Software 3 6 Setting Up DOS System Files cee 3 8 Local GSM Operation Exclusively 0 0 00000 c cece eee eee ee 3 8 Network GSM Operation or Both Local and Network 3 8 Untisual Proced res 062 isse Rete Ras ee nee Sea 3 12 Updating or Adding to Existing GSM Software 00005 3 12 Changing the PC Network Card 0 66 60 eee eee 3 12 Starting U p the GSM ocv crees ate atone ths ces ate are 3 13 Working Your Way through the GSM Menus 3 14 GSM Keyboard Functions 0 0 c eee eee eee 3 15 GSM Menu Structiite sisse eee ce eee eda a e e eee 3 16 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Com
108. the Variable Type parameter specifies one of the Named Variable types the Variable Name or Address parameter specifies the name value for the remote variable to be written When the Variable Type parameter specifies one of the Unnamed address Access types the Variable Name or Address pa rameter specifies the address value for the unnamed access Numeric Addresses are Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 31 always integer values Symbolic Addresses require intimate knowledge of the remote application in order to be interpreted correctly The Length of Variable Name or Address parameter specifies the number of octets in the name or address specification which determine where in the remote application the data to be written is located m For Named Variable access this is the number of characters 1 to 32 in the name of the variable in the remote node m For Numeric Addresses this value should be 4 m For Symbolic Addresses this value is the number of octets 1 to 16 in the Address value Variable Name or Address The name or address of the specific variable to be written Alternate Access Index Alternate Access allows portions of arrays to be written The Altemate Access Index is used to specify the beginning index of an alternate access for variable types 8 through 11 Number of Elements Specifies the number of items to be written Variable Scope Specifies the proper scope for the variable access If the Varia
109. the corresponding section in this chapter for further information The following tables are included to assist you in troubleshooting m LED Display Codes Tables 9 2 through 9 6 m Troubleshooting with ONLINE LED OFF Tables 9 7 m Troubleshooting with ONLINE LED ON Table 9 8 m Log Events Codes Tables 9 9 and 9 10 m Extended Status Buffer Codes Tables 9 11 and 9 12 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 The following information indicates the state of the Ethernet Interface 1 Power Up State The board is executing power up diagnostics m The MODULE OK LED is BLINKING fast or OFF m The ONLINE LED is OFF m The STATUS OK LED is BLINKING or OFF In the power up state the Station Manager and the Restart pushbutton are inoperative 2 Soft Switch Entry State Soft Switch configuration may be in some cases must be entered via the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator or the Ethernet Interface local Station Manager when the Ethernet Interface is not configured in the CPU m The MODULE OK LED is BLINKING slowly m The ONLINE LED is OFF m The STATUS OK LED is OFE A NODE command at the Station Manager will indicate Soft Switch Entry Utility The Station Manager prompt in this case is an asterisk 3 Field Network Test State Test frames may be exchanged with other nodes on the network using a factory set configuration m The MODULE OK LED is ON m The ONLINE L
110. through the Logicmaster 90 Configurator the normal case the CHSOSW Command will not be honored The Soft Switch data parameters must be entered as specified above The parameter label mac ldsrc lanonline bponline Idmac mms or pgmr must precede the new pa rameter value GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 19 4 20 The lt MAC_address gt parameter is the station s working MAC address This parameter is entered as an octet string A value of all 0 s for this parameter means that the perma nent globally administered station address Default Station Address is used This pa rameter may not be a multicast or a broadcast address See the sub section titled Struc ture of the MAC Address in Chapter 3 Section 2 The lt load_source gt parameter indicates the source of the communications software download This parameter should be one of the ASCII string values shown in the table below Table 4 7 Load Source Parameters Parameter Value Description AIT Altemate between all possible load sources LOC Load from local serial port NET Load from network Default Value The yes no parameter indicates whether the Ethernet Interface will initialize and enter the network or initialize the Backplane Communications with the CPU This pa rameter has a value of YES or NO The load addr parameter is the multicast address used by the Ethernet Interface for network loads This parameter is entere
111. to scroll through the Variable Name entries The Variable Names Parameters are defined as follows ENTRY Each entry contains a variable which defines a specific range of addresses in Series 90 70 PLC memory Remote applications can then access specific memory locations by referencing these variable names in Read or Write requests The Vari able Name table holds up to 64 variables VARIABLE NAME The defined variable name Consists of 1 to 32 characters DATA TYPE The type of data specified by the variable name Tab and Shift Tab keys scroll between the choices Value is one of m Character string CHAR STR m Octet string OCTET STR m Floating point FLOAT PT m Unsigned integer UNSIGNED m Integer INTEGER MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 m Bit string BIT STR m Boolean BOOLEAN TYPE SIZE The number of octets or bits in the data type Valid range of 1 to 800 hexa decimal Entered as a hexadecimal number m For OCTET STR or CHAR STR TYPE SIZE specifies the number of OCTETS in the variable or variable array element m For BIT STR BOOLEAN UNSIGNED or INTEGER the TYPE SIZE specifies the number of BITS in the variable or in the variable array element m For FLOAT PT only the value 4 should be used REFERENCE The memory reference within the Series 90 70 PLC Table 6 15 shows the possible values for the reference address COUNT The number of variable array
112. transferred to memory that is not bit oriented MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Signed and Unsigned Integers Signed and Unsigned Integers can be defined in Series 90 70 PLC memory as 8 bit or 16 bit quantities Signed Integers of 32 bits or Unsigned Integers of 31 bits are also supported Integers and arrays of integers must begin on a word boundary i e they must have a bit offset of zero Array elements use an integral number of words Thus for arrays of 8 bit integers in register memory each element occupies an entire register Bits in memory which exceed the type size are ignored for transfer to the network and are set to zero when written by the Ethernet Interface software Floating Point Single precision 4 octet Floating Point Values are transferred between the network and Series 90 70 PLC memory in the form required by the Series 90 70 for floating point operation Floating point values always occupy 4 octet 2 words They must begin on a word boundary i e the bit offset must be zero Octet Strings and Visible Strings Object Scope GFK 0868 Octet Strings and Visible Strings are mapped to consecutive octets in Series 90 70 PLC memory In word memory the first octet of an octet string resides in the least significant byte of the word while the second octet resides in the most significant byte Thus strings must be byte swapped if entered as numeric data S
113. uring the GEnet Ethernet Interfaces It also describes the methods for configuring the Ethernet Interface through either the Station Manager or the Logicmaster 90 70 Confi gurator The Ethernet Interface has a set of fundamental parameters stored in non volatile memory retentive when power is off This memory is called Electronically Eraseable Programmable Read Only Memory EEPROM These parameters are maintained indef initely with or without power This set of parameters is called Soft Switches Soft Switches specify basic parameters in software rather than using hardware jumpers or switches These parameters are required to support the loader and communications software of the Ethernet Interface Soft Switches are set to default values at the factory that are correct for most LAN installations Review the values in Table E 1 to determine if the factory default values are appropriate for your network Station Address The Station Address parameter defines the station s MAC address used on the network Unless your network is using local address administration this value should be left at the default value all zeroes This allows the factory assigned unique default station address which appears on the default station address label on the controller board to be used as the MAC address If you are using local address administration this Soft Switch parameter is used to set the station address to a valid locally administered individu
114. used to uniquely identify the station on the GSM hard disk STATION TYPE The type of device containing the LAN Interface m The value for this field is selected from a set of choices press the Tab key to view the choices The available choices depend on what products have been installed into the GSM system m Possible values include SERIES 90 70 S 15 XX S 16 XX FOREIGN DEV SERIES 90 70 is used for the Series 90 70 PLC Interfaces S 15 XX and S 16 XX are used for the Series 15 and Series 16 CNC OSI Ether net Interfaces FOREIGN DEV is used to identify non GE Fanuc devices It allows information about non GE Fanuc devices to be entered into the Application DIBs LOAD TYPE The type of station being configured MAC ADDRESS The 12 hex digit MAC address of the station being configured This will be either the Default MAC Address as delivered with your board or a Locally Administered MAC Address in the case where you have specified the MAC address yourself See the description on the structure of the MAC Address later in this sec tion Each LAN Interface is delivered with a Default Station Address already set There are several ways to determine this value m Look at the label located on the LAN Interface m Use the Station Manager NODE command m Press the Restart button to see the MAC address appear on the Local Station Manager terminal screen be sure the Station Manager terminal is connec
115. variables may have been sent from the remote application it may first issue an Examine Information Report Indication Variable command If the ladder program has no interest in the variable data it may issue a Discard Informa tionReport Indication Data command GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 35 6 Examine InformationReport Indication Variable Command 8321 6 36 The Examine Information Report Indication Variable command is used to examine the vari able specification in an InformationReport indication received from a peer application The variable name type and index information is returned by this service but the vari able data is not returned The current content of the variable specified can be placed into the local Series 90 70 PLC memory using the Transfer InformationReport Indication Data command described below No other InformationReport indications can be processed until the current indication has its data transferred using the Transfer InformationReport Indication Data command or a Discard Information ReportIndication Data command is issued An Examine InformationRe port Indication Variable command is not required prior to issuing a Transfer Information Re port Indication Data or Discard Information Report Indication Data command if the name of the variable is of no concern Since this is an unconfirmed service no response to the InformationReport is possible The format of the Examine InformationRepor
116. various MMS requests for configuration information such as Identify Status GetNameList and GetCapabilityList With the MMS Responder functions the Ethernet Interface processes indications from another remote station These indications are initiated by the remote application pro gram and the responses to them if any are sent from the local MMS Responder back to the remote application program The PLC ladder program gets an indication in the LAN Interface Status Word when ex ternal reads or writes occur via the MMS Responder The use of this indication by the PLC ladder program is optional The MMS Responder has the ability to handle user defined Variable Names Named Variables are defined in the configuration file produced by the user on the GSM and downloaded to the Ethernet Interface Remote access to memory in the MMS Respond er station may be through variable names or addresses Application Interface The Application Interface AP supports the MMS services that require PLC ladder logic The Application Interface AP allows the Series 90 70 PLC ladder program not only to respond but also to initiate requests to remote devices The Application Interface serves as a provider of MMS services between the ladder pro gram and the remote Application Process The Application Interface provides the following client services m Define Application Service m Association Services Initiate Conclude and Abort m Read Write and Informat
117. with a named variable in a Domain Specific scope Read Indication Service The Read Indication Service uses the Read Indication bit bit 7 of the Association Status Word to indicate that the remote application requested to read local PLC memory The Ethernet Interface reads the data and responds to this request The Read Indication is for information only no action need be taken by the local ladder program No Read Re sponse service is available to the local ladder program Read Confirm Service The Read Confirm Service uses the Positive and Negative Confirm bits in the Association Status Word of the ACB This service determines whether the read from the remote ap plication was successful When the Negative Confirm bit is set the Problem Code in the ACB is updated with the reason for the negative confirm The ladder program may but need not use the Ex amine Last Error Information command to learn more about the complaint If the Posi tive Confirm bit is set the read data will have been placed in the Read Data Buffer loca tions MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Write Request Command 8323 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use the Write Request command to generate an MMS Write request This service supports all three scopes of the MMS write service The COMM_REQ format of the Write Request is shown in the table below GFK 0868 Table 6 21 Write Request COMM_REQ s
118. word offset 6 from the start of the COMM REQ It will have at least one word containing the command number Other information in the MDB will vary for each command Refer to Chapter 6 for a description of the MDB format for communication commands Refer to Chapter 7 for a description of the MDB format for Station Manager commands MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Programming a COMM_REQ GFK 0868 The following ladder logic example shows how a typical COMM REO instruction is pro grammed 10001 Rung 1 T00001 Vasu N Sc ace MH ETT 0 71 sTOOO1 4 t Rung 2 Q00001 MOVE_ 4 R UINT CONST IN Q R00100 Q00002 00000 l 4 R LEN 001 4 Rung 3 T0001 4 BLKMV_ UINT CONST IN1 Q R00020 00001 CONST IN2 00000 CONST IN3 00008 CONST IN4 00099 CONST IN5 00000 CONST IN6 00000 CONST IN7 08103 4 Rung 4 COMM TO001 REQ Q00001 4 OK S Q00002 R00020 IN FT S
119. your computer Replace the string lt DIRECTORY gt in the rem following DEVICEHIGH command with the directory which contains rem the specified device driver for your Ethernet Adapter module rem DEVICEHIGH lt DIRECTORY gt ELNKMC SYS DEVICEHIGH GEFNDIS GEFNDIS DOS AJTOEXEC BAT SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES rem Bind NDIS Drivers GEFNDIS netbind GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI protocol manager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS ETHERLINKMC MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM_RX_BUFS 8 Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary NE Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne we ETHERLINKMC DRIVERNAME ELNKMC H 4 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GEK 0868 Western Digital EtherCard PLUS EtherCard PLUS Elite 16 EtherCard PLUS A CONFIG SYS FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 DEVICE DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE DOS EMM386 EXE RAM 1024 DOS HIGH UMB DEVICE GEFNDIS PROTMAN DOS 1I GEFNDIS rem rem rem rem rem rem The Ethernet Adapter and its device driver must first be installed into your computer Replace the string lt DIRECTORY gt in the following D
120. 0 n lgrpadr5 hex 000000000000 n lgrpadr6 hex 000000000000 n lgrpadr7 hex 000000000000 n Imacaddr hex 000000000000 LocalstationMAC address This field should be set to a validMAC individual station address or to the value zero to use the default address for the station To see the default sta tion address look at the sticker on the Ethernet Interface or use the Station Manager NODEcommand Refer to Chapter 3 in the section entitled Structure of the MAC Address for the definition of valid MAC address lmaxdb dec 1497 Maximum LLC buffer size The size for LLC receive buffer allocation This value will determine the largest possible receive frame for the LLC layer bbuff4must be at least 72 bytes greater than Imaxdb Irxringlen dec This parameter is used as a power of two 2 to get the size of Receive Ring on the MAC device This is the maximum number of received frames that may be queued for proces sing This parameter should be enlarged when a large number of frames are being received by the station to avoid losing receive frames and logging eventc entry 2 103 Range3 7 The default value of 5 corresponds to a ring size of 32 Itxringlen dec This parameter is used as a power of two 2 to get the ring length Size of the Transmit Ring on the MAC device This is the maximum number of frames that may be queued to the transmitter Range 3 7
121. 00 00 0c ccc II 4 40 Table 4 19 Network Layer Tallies Tally n ssssssseesssIRIIII II 4 41 Table 4 20 Presentation Layer Tallies Tally p 0 0 0 eee eee eee 4 41 Table 4 21 Session Layer Tallies Tally S 2 0 0 00 ccc eee eens 4 41 Table 4 22 Transport Layer Tallies Tally t ssssssssseesssRIRIII 4 42 Table 4 23 SRTP Service Agent Tallies Tally v lssssessssee II 4 42 Table 5 1 Format of the COMM REO Device Independent Area 5 3 Table 5 2 Values for the CRSW Memory Type ssssssssssssss III 5 4 Table 5 3 CRSW Interpretation 0 6 6 Ih le 5 4 Table 5 4 Block Move Instruction Operands 6666s 5 6 Table 5 5 The LAN Interface Status Word 2 0 0 6c eens 5 8 Table 6 1 Example Application Common Names sssseeeeee eee eee 6 4 Table 6 2 PLC Communications Commands ssseeeeeeeeee ee 6 6 Table 6 3 Association Control Block lsssssssseeeeee eee eens 6 7 Table 6 4 Initiate Request COMM_REQ 0 n 6 11 Table 6 5 Examine Initiate Indication COMM REQ 0 000 c ccc ee 6 13 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xviii 1994 Contents Table 6 6 Examine Initiate Indication Data 000 000 eee eens 6 13 Table 6 7 Initiate Response COMM REQ 1 en 6 15 Table 6 8 Examine Positive Initiate Confirm Data 00 ccc cece eens 6 17 Table 6 9 Generic Examine COMM REQ 1
122. 0001 CONST IN6 00000 CONST IN7 00000 GFK 0868 Appendix G Ladder Programs for Network Testing G 9 lt lt RUNG 7 gt gt WRT OK WRITERQ MAXWRT eq Semen lee COMM_ REQ SROO301 IN FT RO0099 SYSID CONST TASK 00000000 lt lt RUNG 8 gt gt FST SCN SUB 4 INT R00010 I1 Q RO0010 ROOOLO 12 lt lt RUNG 9 gt gt l l CONST PV CV 00006 l ole R00010 RUNG 10 POS CNF NEG CNF 4 ABRTIND 4 lt lt RUNG 11 gt gt 000014 4 SUB_ INT RO0010 I1 Q RO00010 CONST 12 00001 x END OF BLOCK LOGIC MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 WRITERQ gt UPCTR ALW_ON R R see eee ee ee ee eee ee 000014 NI ION NEN T T TER GFK 0868 Appendix H GFK 0868 Sample DOS System Files This appendix shows prototypes for the DOS system files CONFIG SYS AUTOEXEC BAT and PROTOCOL INI for each type of 802 3 Ethernet Interface supported by the GSM Note Also at the end of the appendix is a section on optimizing the GSM by adjusting parameters in the GEFNDIS section of the PROTOCOL INI file Sample DOS Initializatio
123. 03 The Initiate Response command is used to respond to the reception of an Initiate Indica tion which has been indicated by the Initiate Indication Pending bit bit 15 of the LAN Interface Status Word being 1 This response determines whether an association with a requesting remote application will be established or not The association will be estab lished by Sending a Positive Initiate Response The ACB to be used for this particular association is defined in this COMM REQ The COMM REO format for the Initiate Re sponse command is shown in the table below Table 6 7 Initiate Response COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 8 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8203 200BH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Positiveor Negative Response 9 0 1 Problem Code 10 See Table 6 60 Maximum MessageSize 11 0 64 Max Configured Maximum Services Outstanding Calling 12 0 6 Maximum Services Outstanding Called 13 0 6 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Initiate Response command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association This field is ignored for Negative
124. 0BaseFP can support up to 33 nodes at distances of up to 500 meters from a passive star 10BaseFL supports up to 2000 meters between a node and a repeater a multi port repeater would thus constitute a star Additionally 10BaseFB provides a means of interconnecting only repeaters by up to 2000 meters of the same fiber optic cable 10Broad36 10Broad36 uses 75 ohm coaxial cable and CATV lik e media components taps amplifiers headend translators etc to support hundreds of nodes at distances of up to 2800 meters Broadband cannot be connected to baseband via repeaters Broadband cable plant design and installation must be in accordance with IEEE 802 7 and requires special expertise GE Fanuc recommends you contract professional specialists for these services Consult your GE Fanuc sales representative or field service office for help in identifying local specialists The Ethernet Software As stated above the Ethernet Interface becomes fully functional only after additional soft ware is downloaded from the GEnet System Manager The downloaded software consists of The Station Manager The Station Manager provides On Line supervisory access to the Interface through either the serial port on the controller board or over the Ethernet cable These Station Manager services on the Ethernet Interface include m An interactive set of commands for interrogating and controlling the station m Unrestricted access to observe internal statistics
125. 106 Bad Remote Application Request Discarded Request An incoming frame was received that exceeded the size specified by the parameter Imaxdb For frame types other than TEST frames the frame was discarded for TEST frames the data within the frame was discarded and the frame was processed without data Check the remote sending station for correct frame length If the local station must correctlyreceive frames of large size it will be necessary to increase the parameters Imaxdb and bbuff4and possibly reallocate data memory via balloc1 balloc2 balloc3 and balloc4 Consult GE Fanuc if you need assistance Entries 3 4 and 5 taken together show the MAC address of the sending station 107 Bad Remote Application Request Discarded Request An unsolicited XID response frame was received This can be caused by a protocolerror in a remote station Entries 3 4 and 5 taken together show the MAC address of the sending station 108 Bad Remote Application Request Discarded Request An unsolicited TEST response frame was received This is usually caused when a remote station responds too slowly to a TEST Station Manager command from the reporting station Increase the value of the TEST sch parameter If the problem persists and the reporting station is not sending a TEST cmd then some remote station on the network is generating a protocolerror Entries 3 4 and 5 taken together show the MAC address of the sending station 9 22
126. 17 applssap 3 29 4 34 8 17 APT_OBJ_ID 8 37 arespaequal 4 34 arespapt arespcnam j aresppsap D 29 4 34 8 17 arespssap 4 34 Array Variables assocappl 4 34 Association Control Block ACB Association Parameters Screen Association Services Association Status Bits 6 7 Association Status Word Association Status Word Extension assocresp 4 34 Attachment of the Ethernet Interface to the LAN 15 AUI Transceiver Cable AUI Transceiver Port AUI Port for the Ethernet Interface D 4 AUI Port Pinouts AUTOEXEC BAT b 8 AUTOEXEC GSM 8 Automatic Routing B 13 B Backplane Online E J balloc1 Index 1 Index Index 2 balloc2 4 34 balloc3 balloc4 Basic Network Definition 3 17 Battery bbuff1 4 34 bbuffl 4 bbuff2 4 34 bbuff3 4 34 bbuff4 4 34 Bit String Data Boolean Data B 27 BPS Command Station Manager 14 17 bremlsap 4 34 8 26 brempri 4 34 B 26 BUFFER POOL C Cables AUI Transceiver Cable Serial GSM to Ethernet Interface D 2 Cancel Request Command 8290 MMS COMM REQ CAP Command Station Manager 4 18 Capabilities of the Ethernet Interface Capability Objects B 17 CFILES B7 Changing the GSM Password Screen Changing the PC Network Card CHBPS Command Station Manager CHDATE Command Station Manager 4 18 CHECK TIME B 11 CHLIIME Command Station Manager k 19 CHSOS
127. 2 NO YES 3 NO NO Event 2 This event is logged by the system when a catastrophic system erroroccurs System events Check for the value of the system error in Entry 2 of the log event and follow the instructions below System Error 01 This error indicates that incorrect software has been loaded into the Ethernet Interface Entry 3 indicates the lowest required RAM software version Entry 4 indicates the actual RAM software version The system cannot initialize with incorrect software Check that the proper Ethernet Interface software is being downloaded by the GSM If the Ethernet Interface PROM firmware has been recently upgraded be sure that compatible software is being downloaded This fault causes entry into the Soft Switch Entry Utility Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 11 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Code Possible Cause and Resolution Event 2 System events Continued System Error 02 This error indicates that the loaded Ethernet Interface software requires a higher revision of the PROM firmware than is installed on the Ethernet Interface Entry 3 indicates the lowest required PROM firmware version Entry 4 indicates the actual installed PROM firmware version Entry 5 indicates the actual loaded RAM software version The system cannot initialize with incorrect firmware Check that the proper PROM firmware is installed If the Ethernet Interface software has been r
128. 2048 bbuff3 dec 380 Buffer pool 3 buffer size Decimal Range 1 4096 bbuff4 dec 1569 Buffer pool 4 buffer size Must meet all the following qualifi cations bbuff4 mmaxmsgsz 168 bbuff4 tmaxpdu 150 bbuff4 Imaxdb 72 Decimal Range 1 8192 bstnmgrlsap hex E8 Station Manager LSAP for sending and receiving REMote commandsand responses bstnmgrpri dec Station Manager priority for sending REMote commands andresponses MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager Continued Parameter Format Default Description DataLink Layer Parameters Idrtry dec When ldrtry 1 retrying is disabled and the MAC layer will attempt only one transmission of a packet When Idrtry 0 up to 16 retries will be attempted lgrpadr0 hex 09002B000004 Eight Group receive addresses Multicast Group frames will be received only when addressed to the broadcast ad dress ffffffffffff or to one of these addresses A zero value indicates an unused entry The default value for the first entry is the All ES address also see nesmac lgrpadr1 hex 090019000001 Group Address for SRTP lgrpadr2 hex 000000000000 AvailableGroup Address lgrpadr3 hex 000000000000 n lgrpadr4 hex 00000000000
129. 294 ApplicationDomaindiscarded 661 295 ProgramInvocationstateerror 662 296 Invalid VMDstatus valuespecified 663 297 Common Name missing or invalid 664 298 Invalid ApplicationContext 665 299 InvalidNumericAddress 666 29A Inactive User Element 667 29B Context string inconsistent with context 668 29C Service has been negotiated off 670 29E Conclude positive Response COMM REO was not allowed because there are other outstanding MMS responses that must be processed before theassociation can be concluded GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 29 Table 9 12 Extended Status Buffer Error Codes and Definitions Continued Error Code Description dec hex 671 9F Start Resumargumentis too long 672 2A0 Resume argument not permitted in MMS DIS context 673 2A1 Start Resumeargumentcontainsillegalcharacter 674 2A2 Common name too long 675 2A3 Invalidvariablespecification 676 2A4 Invalid PIstate GEnet LAN Interface Status Word 9 30 The GEnet LAN Interface Status Word LISW is used to convey the health of the Ether net Interface and the network to the application program There are sixteen 16 dedi cated bits which are updated by the Ethernet Interface software at every Ethernet Inter face communication window once per sweep when the Ethernet Interface is configured The figure below shows the definition of the bits in the LISW 16 15
130. 32 Revision 35 50 characterstring Length of Vendor Name The octet length of the Vendor Name string Vendor Name An ASCII string representing the remote peer application s Vendor Name GE Fanuc Automation for example Unused octets will be set to 0 Length of Model Name The octet length of the Model Name string Model Name An ASCII string representing the remote peer application s Model Name Series 90 70 PLC for example Unused octets will be set to 0 Length of Revision The octet length of the Revision string Revision An ASCII string representing the remote peer application s VMD executive revision value CPU Microcode Version 2 01 for example Unused octets will be 0 In ISO IS 9506 there is an additional parameter returned with the Identify Confirm the list of abstract syntaxes supported ISO 9506 specifies that The abstract syntax defined in ISO 9506 shall not be included in this list Since that is the only abstract syntax that the Ethernet Interfaces support no other abstract syntaxes will be meaningful There fore we have chosen to omit this parameter from the information returned to the ladder program from any Identify Confirm MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Cancel Request Command 8290 The Cancel Request command is provided to allow an application to cause the orderly ter mination of a service that is pendi
131. 4 23 HELP Cominniand 2 wacom dle e EREREApeR ag RE RUE 4 24 LOAD Coniniand e ee ENSE e s 4 25 LOG Gommand emeei ne ceo RC e RR UR 4 25 LOGIN Command sssseseeese en 4 26 LOGOUT Command ssssseessee eh 4 27 EUME Command eee RR RARE RR eR owen Sua 4 27 MDIB Comimiard 1 oe et ues E Ms 4 28 NET Cormmiand ete o eet tee e eR RM 4 28 NODE Command ashire xn pH CS ERR SAECULA 4 29 OK Command eret ERU FERAE A I E Ces 4 29 PI Command 2 2 e n eet ta e de ee E de AUR 4 29 REM Coninmahd x beber eem Ed e dei d be dde sa 4 30 REPORT Command 2 2 ED E hE a oea be ei gae 4 31 RESTART Command sssssseese n 4 32 RIB Command iue esu RR RR RR ed 4 32 SHOW Command ssssseeeeeee et een eens 4 33 SOSW Comimand codd eee pud tr deer pe dee re 4 36 STATI Command 22 55h eee sehe pee ete e Ab ere 4 36 STOFT Command 223b eee packs ree one teg E CASE RUN Rd 4 37 TALLY Command vtero REESL FREI EDU ER RES 4 37 TESI Command ebbe RR eR eb rete edd 4 43 TIME C mmand Ju ves idees ee Wd x ee e ane Rp ra 4 44 TRACE Command i 2 RE URS 8b alg eternal bebe et egisse d 4 45 VAR Command 415 ox Le E P Eo ua 4 47 VMD Command tete e sa eee Re ORA RR Re 4 47 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May ix 1994 Contents Chapter 5 General PLC Application Programming eese 5 1 Commands Supported Through Ladder Logic
132. 68 MMS domain objects represent subsets of the VMD that can be used for a specific purpose This purpose might for example be a specific manufacturing process One of the key aspects of domains is that they can be uploaded and downloaded in the network This allows the domain to be transferred between two communicating MMS applications In VMDs having a file store domain content is often closely associated with a file In the Series 90 70 PLC domains are not supported In the CNC a domain might be a part program or some memory area such as parameter storage or a tool offset table Like all MMS objects domains have attributes Attributes describe the distinguishable parts of the object Constraints specify attributes which are only present under the specified circumstances The attributes of the domain object are shown in the table below Attributes which are present if the constraint is met are shown indented below the constraint Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 17 Table B 4 Domain Attributes Key Attribute Attribute Attribute Constraint Attribute Attribute Attribute Attribute Constraint Attribute Attribute Domain Name List of Capabilities State LOADING COMPLETE INCOMPLETE READY IN USE State LOADING COMPLETE INCOMPLETE AssignedApplication Association MMS Deletable TRUE FALSE Domain Content List of Subordinate Objects State IN USE List of Program Invocation References Upload i
133. 7 Table 9 1 Ethernet Interface Diagnostic Tools 0 0 0 6 eee eens 9 2 T ble9 2 Power Up Statens oii ee ene Gib had Oe oie hath oe ba rete GE PR bs 9 5 Table 9 3 Soft Switch Entry State 6 6 eee lee 9 6 Table 9 4 Field Network Test State 0 n 9 6 Table 9 5 Loader Staten roter iredi eiia peck eeu e ae epe began ees ARE AUC re bodes 9 7 Table 9 6 Operational State ceres seta deep a RP EPA eR YR HE RR ERO dea et 9 8 Table 9 7 Troubleshooting with ONLINE LED OFF sssssseeeeee e 9 9 Table 9 8 Troubleshooting with ONLINE LED ON 2 2 cnn eee eee 9 10 Table 9 9 Exception Log Event Definitions 066 eee 9 10 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xx 1994 Contents Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes ssssssssssssl le 9 11 Table 9 11 Negative Extended Status Buffer Values ssssseeseeeeeelee 9 27 Table 9 12 Extended Status Buffer Error Codes and Definition ssslllessess 9 27 Table B 1 Protocol Used for GE Fanuc Control Devices 0 eee B 3 Table B 2 MMS Service Mapping to ACSE and Presentation Services 000 00000 B 4 Table B 3 Effect of VMD Logical State and CNC Mode on MMS Services sess B 16 Table B 4 Domain Attributes ses tre ete a Soe ES E RR aD eee ee ALTE B 18 Jable B 5 Domain States eco rette ere pe pRIRE REC E E SUNT EDAM EUR CREER B 20 Table B 6 Program In
134. 8 8 1 Configure a Station Screen 8 2 Anumber of different GE Fanuc Ethernet Interface products may be present on the LAN Each GEnet Ethernet Interface must be configured using that product s Configu ration Editor before it can be downloaded Before entering the Configuration Editor you must first access the Configure a Station Screen from the GSM Main Menu The Configure a Station Screen allows you to perform 3 main functions m Define a Station m Select an Existing Station m Delete a Station The Configure a Station Screen shown below is used to specify the Station Type and to assign a logical name STATION NAME to the station The STATION NAME corre sponds to the unique MAC ADDRESS which physically identifies the station on the net work It is also used to modify certain configuration parameters for a station When the Edit configuration keys Alt E are pressed in this menu the GSM calls the Config uration Editor required for that specific Station Type of GEnet Ethernet Interface Configuration parameters are stored in files on the PC hard disk and downloaded to the GEnet Ethernet Interface using the GSM Downloader Pa Factory LAN System Manager GSM Version 2 84 Download Station Access Station Manager Configure Station STATION_NAME HEH STATION_TYPE MPE LOAD_TYPE TS0862 3 MAC ADDRESS EIEI LORD GROUP E ADDR E SLOT TIME gt COMMENTS LOAD_TYPE SELECTIO
135. 90 70 PLC Run Stop state to be changed appropriately with out any action by the local ladder program That is the Program Invocation object is as sumed to be the entire PLC The table below shows the effect of receipt of these PI In dications on the Series 90 70 CPU State in this default case If desired the local ladder program may create a different PI object To do so the ladder program would issue the Set Local PI Processing services to enable ladder program han dling of these Indications When the Set Local Program Invocation Processing command has been successfully completed Start Stop Reset and Resume indications will be given to the ladder program and the ladder program will be responsible for modeling the Pro gram Invocation and issuing the corresponding responses in accordance with MMS Note that the association cannot be concluded but can be Aborted while any Start Stop Reset or Resume Indication has not been responded to by the ladder program Default Resulting MMS Indication Prerequisite PI State Resulting PI State Series 90 70 CPU State Start Idle Running RUN Stop Running Stopped STOP Reset Stopped Idle STOP Resume Stopped Running RUN GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 39 L5 Start Request Command 8304 6 40 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use a Start Request command to initiate a MMS Start request The Start Request transitions the remote application ProgramInvocation from the IDL
136. B 4 the N 1 Layer passes the N 1 PDU down to the N Layer Once the PDU from the layer above is received it is referred to as a Service Data Unit SDU The N Layer again referring to Figure B 4 attaches Protocol Control Information PCI to the beginning and or end of the N SDU in order to form the N Layer Protocol Data Unit PDU Then the N Layer PDU is passed on to the N 1 Layer N 1 Layer N 1 Layer Figure B 4 Attachment of Protocol Control Information to form the Protocol Data Unit This approach leads to a series of headers that are attached to the data on the sending side and stripped from the data at the receiving side as shown in Figure B 5 N 1 PDU N 1 SDU Application Layer 7 Layer 6 Layer 5 Layer 4 Layer 3 Layer 2 PCI Protocol Control Information 245174 PDU Protocol Data Unit SDU Service Data Unit 245175 Data 7 PCI 6 PCI 5 PCI 4 PCI 3 PCI 2 PCI Layer 1 1 PCI Figure B 5 Attachment of Protocol Control Information throughout the ISO Stack B 6 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 OSI Application Layer When the OSI model is implemented in hardware software or otherwise using protocols that fit the model the implementation is termed a real open sys
137. B command is shown below gt mdib lt lt lt Application DIB gt gt gt Page 1 of 2 Comm name COMMON_NAME 1 APT obj 121 AE qual 0 PSAP lt lt 0001 gt gt SSAP lt lt 000000000001 gt gt TSAP lt lt 0001 gt gt NSAP lt lt 0800190100f8fe gt gt Comm name COMMON_NAME 2 APT obj 122 AE qual 0 PSAP lt lt 0002 gt gt SSAP lt lt 000000000002 gt gt TSAP lt lt 0001 gt gt NSAP lt lt 0800190100f8fe gt gt Comm name COMMON_NAME 3 APT obj 123 AE qual 0 PSAP lt lt 0003 gt gt SSAP lt lt 000000000003 gt gt TSAP lt lt 0001 gt gt NSAP 0800190100f8fe NET Command 4 28 The NET command has the form NET ON OFF This command causes the MAC to either exit the token passing ring when NET OFF is specified or to attempt to re enter the token passing ring when NET ON is specified This can be used to remove stations from the network without the need to physically disconnect them or restart the hardware A typical NET OFF command is shown below net off Interface off network Note If the lanonline Soft Switch is set to NO this command has no effect MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 NODE Command The NODE command has the form NODE This command causes the Ethernet Interface sign on message to be printed out on the screen When the Ethernet In
138. C GSM PROTOCOL GSM After installing the software these files will contain the requirements for the DOS sys tem files CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT located in the root directory and the PRO TOCOL INI file located in the GEFNDIS directory When the software installation is complete be sure to look in the GSM sample files to see the requirements to run the GSM software Then refer to the appropriate sub section below for setting up the DOS system files Before you setup your DOS system files for network operation you must first determine whether another NDIS network application has already been installed on your comput er To do this check your CONFIG SYS file for a PROTMAN xxx device definition If this definition is in CONFIG SYS then a network application does already exist In this case skip the section below and refer to the section Adding the GSM When an NDIS Application Already Exists If you do not find a PROTMAN xxx device definition in your CONFIG SYS file follow just the instructions immediately below When the GSM is the Only NDIS Application on the PC 1 To set up your DOS system files so the GSM software will run you must ensure that your CONFIG SYS file and AUTOEXEC BAT file contain certain commands Sample files showing the commands needed have been created for you during the installation procedure These sample files are named CONFIG GSM and AUTOEXEC GSM and are located in the GSM directory Sample contents are shown
139. CHTIME is used to change the time value A typical TIME command is shown below gt time Time 15 46 02 3 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 TRACECommand The TRACE command has the form TRACE lt task s gt lt minutes gt lt len_ref gt where lt task s gt is one or more task identifier letters from Table 4 3 or z to add PDU trace lt minutes gt is an optional parameter that specifies how long TRACE will remain active Default is 10 minutes This parameter is a character string that specifies an integer which can be 0 or a value from 1 to 32767 If 0 is specified then time out is not enforced Any non zero value specifies the duration in minutes after which the trace activity will auto matically cease Login will be maintained automatic logout will be inhibited until after the trace has terminated lt len_ref gt is an optional parameter that limits the amount of PDU z data to be dis played The PDU display format is a character string that specifies an integer value ranging from 1 to 32767 If omitted from the command line the value 48 will be substi tuted This parameter provides the flexibility to view the PDU in its entirety or just a portion of it Since each line of display consists of 16 bytes and if truncating of the PDU does take place always at the end of a line and trailed by on the next line the actual number of bytes disp
140. COMM REQ 0 n 6 42 Table 6 31 Stop Request COMM REQ 0 e n 6 43 Table 6 32 Examine Stop Reset Indication Data sssseeeeeeele eens 6 44 Table 6 33 Stop Response COMM_REQ 6 6 een 6 45 Table 6 34 Reset Request COMM REQ 0 eee eee eee eee 6 46 Table 6 35 Reset Response COMM_REO 0 eee eee eee eee 6 47 Table 6 36 Resume Request COMM REQ 0 0 eee eens 6 48 Table 6 37 Resume Response COMM REQ cece eee 6 50 Table 6 38 Set Local ProgramInvocation Processing COMM REQ ssssseeese 6 51 Table 6 39 Set Local ProgramInvocation State COMM REQ cece eee eee 6 52 Table 6 40 ProgramInvocation State Values lsseseeeeeeeeeee n 6 52 Table 6 41 Status Request COMM REQ ssssseeeeee en 6 53 Table 6 42 Status Response COMM REQ 6 n 6 54 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xix 1994 Contents Table 6 43 Status Buffer siss serret ER ee eee ede CR ee AE RAE eas 6 55 Table 6 44 UnsolicitedStatus Request COMM_REQO 6 cece eee eens 6 55 Table 6 45 Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication COMM REQ 00 cece cece enn nee 6 56 Table 6 46 Set Local VMD Status COMM REQ 2 sese 6 57 Table 6 47 VMD Logical Status Values 6 e e 6 57 Table 6 48 VMD Physical Status Values ssssssssseeesse e 6 57 Table 6 49 Identify Request COMM REQ 0 n 6 59 Table 6 50 I
141. DIB Screen 3 30 The Local Application DIB Directory Information Base Screen shown below permits you to select Application Processes for inclusion in the Local Application DIB You must include applications here to which the PLC will be initiating associations The Local Application DIB Screen is shown below CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CGO 400 Local Application DIB gt SELECTED Common Name Station Name Station Type gt E RESP08661 9600000 STA1 SERIES S8 78 gt N APPLO88G1 9800088 STA1 SERIES S8 78 gt N RESP88881S988B881 STAZ SERIES 98 78 gt N APPLO86019880081 STAZ SERIES 98 70 gt N RESPB8S88139888883 STA3 SERIES S98 70 gt N APPLO86019680063 STA3 SERIES 96 70 gt E END OF LIST 1 Ki out of a maximum of entries selected Application Selected CY ND Default N Press Tab to change selection and update Cursor Page Search through list and view Application Process details lt cAlt U Update Params gt CAIt U View CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 10 Local Application DIB Screen This screen has the same basic format as the GEnet System Manager 7 Layer Application DIB screen Information is placed into the 7 Layer Application DIB when an Application Process Common Name is defined when configuring a station The Local Application DIB Screen displays a list of all 7 Layer Application DIB entries that have been defined The Local Applicati
142. Discard InformationReport Indica tion Data command is shown in the table below Table 6 27 Discard InformationReport Indication Data COMM REG Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 3 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8339 2093H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI AQ I Q T M Decimal Value 8 10 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Discard InformationReport Indication Data command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association The ACB must match an association with a pending InformationReport indication MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Program Invocation Management Services PI Commands The Start Stop Reset and Resume commands permit the local ladder program to con trol the state of Program Invocation s in the remote application The Series 90 70 PLC has a single Program Invocation whose name is that of the Logic master 90 70 folder from which the PLC CPU was loaded This cannot be changed By default receipt of the MMS Start Stop Reset and Resume Program Invocation PI Indications cause the Series
143. Download When the conditions above have been satisfied initiate the download by selecting the Download Station function from the GSM Main Menu Local Downloading If the GSM was in the Local Download Mode when you selected Download Station you will be prompted for the STATION_NAME of the station to be downloaded Type in the name and press Enter The STATION_NAME parameter is the name that you assigned to the station when it was initially configured Then the download will proceed When the local download is complete the GSM changes automatically to Local Station Manager access At this time the Ethernet Interface MODULE OK LED should remain ON and the STATUS OK LED should stop blinking and remain ON The ONLINE LED should be ON if the station is connected to the Ethernet network A sign on message NODE command output should appear on the Station Manager screen of the GSM GFK 0868 Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 15 Network Downloading If the GSM was in the Network Download Mode when you selected Download Station the download will proceed automatically assuming that the Ethernet Interface is con nected to the Ethernet network and is Online When the network download is complete the GSM remains in the Download Server mode waiting for a download request from any other stations requesting to be down loaded At this time the Ethernet Interface MODULE OK LED should remain ON and the STATUS OK LED should stop BLIN
144. During PowerUp Problems During the Download 2 16 Program Invocation Management Ser vices 6 39 Program Invocation Objects Programming Communications COMM_REQs PROTMAN xxx B 9 Protocol Data Transfer PROTOCOL GSM PROTOCOL INI B 9 H 1 Protocols Used for GE Fanuc Control De vices B 3 PSAP pxferpei 4 35 pxfersynnam pxfersynobj Q QUERY WAIT TIME Quick Guide to the Manual 1 6 R RAM Required Read Confirm Service Read Indication Service Read Request Command 8322 MMS COMM REQ REF TIMEOUT Reject Indication Service 6 65 REM Command Station Manager Remote Operation of the Station Manag er 4 4 REPORT Command Station Manager 4 31 Request Completion Requirements for Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 5 Reset Indication Service Reset Request Command 8310 MMS COMM_REQ Reset Response Command 8312 MMS COMM REQ Restart Button RESTART Command Station Manager 4 32 Restart Ethernet Interface Request pop Station Manager COMM REO 7 7 Resume Indication Service Resume Request Command 8313 MMS COMM REQ Resume Response Command 8315 MMS COMM_REQ RETRAN_COUNT RETRAN_TIMEOUT Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request 8100 Station Manager COMM REQ Retrieve Log Events Request 8102 Sta tion Manager COMM REO Retrieve Tallies Request 8101 Station Manager COMM REO RIB Command Station Manager Rou
145. E state into a RUNNING state The COMM REO format for the Start Request is shown in the table below Table 6 28 Start Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 41 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8304 2070H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Length of ProgramInvocationName 11 1 32 ProgramInvocationName 12 27 characterstring Length of Start Argument IS only 28 0 32 Start Argument IS only 29 44 characterstring ProgramInvocationState Memory Type 45 See Table 6 16 ProgramInvocationState Offset 46 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Start Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Length of ProgramInvocation Name The number of octets in the ProgramInvocation Name ProgramInvocation Name Specifies the ProgramInvocation that is to be started Length of Start Argument The number of characters in the Start Argument The Start Argument parameter is optional and will not be sent if this parameter is set to zero Start Argument An optiona
146. ED may be ON OFF or BLINKING m The STATUS OK LED may be ON or OFE A NODE command at the Station Manager will indicate Field Network Test Utility The Station Manager prompt in this case is a dollar sign 4 Loader State The communications software must be loaded or is being loaded m The MODULE OK LED is ON m The ONLINE LED may be ON OF or BLINKING m The STATUS OK LED is BLINKING A NODE command at the Station Manager will indicate Software Load Utility There is no Station Manager prompt while in the loader If the Ethernet Interface is looking for a download from the serial port repeated ipl messages will be displayed at the Station Manager terminal 5 Operational State The communications software has been loaded and is running m The MODULE OK LED is ON m The ONLINE LED may be ON OFF or BLINKING m The STATUS OK LED may be ON or OFF A NODE command at the Station Manager will identify the node without indicating any of the other special states The default Station Manager prompt in this case is a greater than sign gt GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 3 The figure below shows the control flow upon restarting the Ethernet Interface This flow determines the state of the Interface Power Up Restart Pass Soft Switches OK Issue Station Manager Prompt Receive E Response RAM Software Loaded C
147. ES ES protocol NPDUs sent by this node EsIsSent Number of ES IS protocol NPDUs sent by this node EsEsRcvd Number of ES ES protocol NPDUs received by this node EsIsRcvd Number of ES IS protocol NPDUs received by this node EsEsErr Number of ES ES protocol ER NPDUs received by this node Table 4 20 Presentation Layer Tallies Tally p Tally Meaning PCprRevd Numberof CPR PPDUs received with no reason PCprSent Number of CPR PPDUs sent with no reason CprTRevd Number of CPR PPDUs received with TransientGroup CprPRevd Number of CPR PPDUs received with Permanent Group CprTSent Number of CPR PPDUs sent with TransientGroup CprPSent Number of CPR PPDUs sent with Permanent Group ArpSent Number of ARP PPDUs sent with no reason ArpEr Number of ARP PPDUs sent with Error Group Table 4 21 Session Layer Tallies Tally s Tally Meaning RfRevd Refuse RF SPDUs received with no reason specified RfSent RF SPDUs sent with no reason specified RfPRevd RFSPDUs received because of unknown SSAP or proposed protocol versionnot supported RfPSent RFSPDUS sent because of unknown SSAP or proposed protocol version notsupported RfTRevd RFSPDUS received because of no user attached to SSAP or congestion AbRcvd RESET TO 1 Count of the number of aborts received AbSent Count of the number of aborts sent AbPSent Count of the number of aborts sent because of protocol errors Chapter 4 The Stat
148. EVICEHIGH command with the directory which contains the specified device driver for your Ethernet Adapter module DEVICEHIGH lt DIRECTORY gt MACWD DOS DEVICEHIGH GEFNDIS GEFNDIS DOS AJUTOEXEC BAT SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES rem Bind NDIS Drivers GEFNDIS netbind GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI protocol manager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS MACWD_NIF MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM_RX_BUFS 8 Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne we Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary MACWD_NIF DRIVERNAME MACWD irg 3 ramaddress 0xd000 iobase 0x280 receivebufsize 1024 GFK 0868 Appendix H Sample DOS System Files H 5 Intel 82593 CONFIG SYS FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 DEVICE DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE DOS EMM386 EXE RAM 1024 DOS HIGH UMB DEVICE GEFNDIS PROTMAN DOS I GEFNDIS rem rem The Ethernet Adapter and its device driver must first be installed rem into your computer Replace the string lt DIRECTORY gt in the rem following DEVICEHIGH command with the directory which contains rem the specified device driver for your Ethernet Adapter module rem DEVICE
149. Editor Main Menu m Esc key exit without creating a file m Alt Pkey causes the print file to be created and stored on the disk then exits MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Section 2 Configuring Network Wide Parameters This section describes configuration of the Load Group and 802 4 parameters Configure Network Wide Parameters Menu The Network Wide Parameters Menu is used to examine and modify the download mul ticast address and slot time parameters for each Load Group As each station is config ured it is assigned to one of these load groups The Network Wide Parameters Menu is shown below Factory LAN System Manager GSM Version 2 04 Download Station Access Station Manager Configure a Station Configure Netuork uide Parameters List fill System Network Parameters List fill Load Group Parameters Setup GSM 882 4 Network Parameters EXIT TO DOS Press Up Down Arrow to move the cursor and press Enter to select CAlt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 18 Configure Network Wide Parameters Menu Note The 802 4 Network Parameters Screen is not used by the Ethernet Interfaces It is used only by 802 4 MAP Interfaces which share the GSM configurator GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 29 Load Group Parameters Screen The Load Group Parameters Screen is shown below
150. Ethernet network Session Layer Layer 5 of the OSI Model The Session Layer manages a logical connec tion session between two communicating processes or applications Session Service Access Point SSAP Octet string which uniquely defines each Session Layer user in a station Signal Quality Error SQE An indication from the MAU transceiver to the Ethernet Interface to indicate any of three conditions 1 improper signals received from the medium 2 collision detected or 3 SOE message test Slot Time in a CSMA CD network A bitrate dependent unit of time which in case of collision is used to determine the delay after which data stations may attempt to retransmit Slot time for all IEEE 802 3 10 Mbps implementations is 51 2 usec 512 bit times Slot Time in a Token Bus network The maximum time any data station must wait for a response from another station It must be the same value on all stations of the LAN or the medium access control protocol may fail SoftSwitches Basic system information setup by the Logicmaster 90 Configurator and transferred to the LAN Interface upon powerup or restart Star Topology A network topology in which stations are each connected to a central hub via the station s own dedicated link segment Start Services Communication services used to initiate control activity at a control de vice Station A computer PLC or other device that connects to a network Station Address Each station o
151. FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual GFK0868 May 1994 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility fo
152. FILLED Constraint Station Type ENTRY DISPLAY Attribute Input Buffer Attribute List of Output Buffer Attribute State IDLE DISPLAY LIST OF PROMPT DATA WAITING FOR INPUT STRING INPUT BUFFER FILLED OUTPUT BUFFERS FILLED Attribute Additional Detail The Operator Station Name attribute serves to identify the operator station The Station Type attribute indicates the abilities of the station All CNC operator stations are of type ENTRY DISPLAY The input buffer and lists of output buffer attributes contain the data input or displayed at the station The state attribute changes based on the state transitions shown in Figure B 14 There are no Operator Station objects for the Series 90 70 PLC Appendix B ISO Networking Concepts B 25 a45180 p Idle gt I 1 Display List of Prompt Data 6 a 2 3 Y Waiting for Output Input String Buffers from operator Filled 8 9 Input Buffer Filled Figure B 14 Operator Station State Diagram Transitions for the Operator Station State are as follows Line Description 1 Output Indication 2 Output Response 3 Output Response 4 Input Indication 5 D Putfunction finished displaying List of Prompt Data if any If present Input Time Out begins 6 Input Response due to a time out 7 E Get function finished entering the Input String into input buf
153. Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8310 2076H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Length of ProgramInvocationName 11 1 32 ProgramInvocationName 12 27 characterstring ProgramInvocationState Memory Type 28 See Table 6 16 ProgramInvocation State Offset 29 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Reset Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Length of ProgramInvocation Name The number of octets in the ProgramInvocation Name ProgramInvocation Name Specifies the ProgramInvocation which is to be restarted ProgramInvocation State The PLC address of the ProgramInvocation State This pa rameter is returned by the the MMS provider only when a Negative Response is given to the Reset request A Negative Response will cause this word to be set to the current PI state refer to Table 6 40 at the remote node Reset Indication Service 6 46 The Reset Indication Service uses the Reset Indication bit bit 15 in the ASW to inform the ladder program that a Reset Indication was received from the remote application See the discussion of PI Indications for important in
154. For GE Fanuc applications the LLC driver GEFNDIS DOS must also be installed For the GSM all these files and some others are located in the GEFNDIS directory But if an NDIS application has been installed previously other versions of the files described above except for GEFNDIS DOS will already have been placed in another location The steps below will explain what to do with these NDIS files to ensure proper network GSM operation 1 Tosetup your PC so the GSM software and another NDIS network application can both run you must ensure that your CONFIG SYS file and AUTOEXEC BAT file contain certain commands Sample files showing the commands needed when the GSM is the only application have been created for you during the installation procedure These sample files are named CONFIG GSM and AUTOEXEC GSM and are located in the GSM directory Sample contents are shown in Appendix H Note that the content is different for different PC network cards Since you are adding the GSM when a Network application already exists some of these commands may already exist so you will not need to add all of these com mands Edit your CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT as explained below 2 CONFIG SYS Include all entries from CONFIG GSM except the following command device gefndis protman dos i gefndis This file will already have a valid Protocol Manager protman xxx device definition from the existing network application and need not be changed This fi
155. Genius input module is configured for slot 6 with 1024 bits from the discrete input table 7611 through 7611024 an ethernet Interface added to the configuration will have its LISW location default to 7011025 through 9611040 This mechanism prevents overlap of a given area of memory GFK 0868 Chapter 5 General PLC Application Programming 5 7 Contents of the LAN Interface Status Word Unless the LAN Interface OK bit is set as described in the following table the other status inputs are invalid Table 5 5 The LAN Interface Status Word Bit Offset Definition Description 16 LAN Interface OK This bit is set to 1 by the Ethernet Interface software at the end of every window If the Ethernet Interface cannot access the PLC the CPU will set this bit to 0 15 InitiateIndica tion Pending This inputis set to 1 when a remote station on the network requests to initiate an association with the local application program This input remains 1 until the remote station gives up aborts the attempt or until the local application program responds to the Initiate Indication with a Positiveor Negative Initiate Response If multiple more than 1 Initiate Indications are pending this input will remain 1 until all of the pending indications have either been aborted or re sponded to Otherwise this bit is 0 14 Resource Prob lem This input is set to 1 whenever the Ethernet Interface soft ware experiences a
156. HIGH lt DIRECTORY gt 1I82593 DOS DEVICEHIGH NGEFNDISNGEFNDIS DOS AJTOEXEC BAT SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES rem Bind NDIS Drivers GEFNDIS netbind GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI protocol manager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS MLM NIF MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM_RX_BUFS 8 Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary NE Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne SNe we MLM NIF DRIVERNAME I82593 IOADDRESS 0x300 INTERRUPT 15 DMACHANO 6 DMACHAN1 7 INBUFFER K 8 OUTBUFFERS K 3 H 6 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Xircom Pocket Adapter CONFIG SYS FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 DEVICE DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE DOS EMM386 EXE RAM 1024 DOS HIGH UMB DEVICE GEFNDIS PROTMAN DOS 1I GEFNDIS rem rem rem rem rem rem The Ethernet Adapter and its device driver must first be installed into your computer Replace the string lt DIRECTORY gt in the following DEVICEHIGH command with the directory which contains the specified device driver for your Ethernet Adapter module DEVICEHIGH lt DIRECTORY gt PE2NDIS EXE DEVICEHIGH
157. If you are attempting to communicate with a remote station wait for its response before issuing additional COMM REOSs GFK 0868 Chapter 5 General PLC Application Programming 5 9 Chapter MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 This chapter provides an overview of the OSI Application Layer used by the GEnet Ethernet Interface It also provides the detailed information you need to program the communications services for your Ethernet Interface in the event that you wish to initi ate communications from the Series 90 70 PLC No PLC programming is required if ini tiation of services is by a remote host OSI Reference Model The communication services used by the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface is based on the Open Systems Interconnection OSI Reference Model developed within the International Standards Organization ISO This section provides an overview of the OSI Application Layer and the message flow that occurs when two devices are communicating over the LAN Refer to Appendix B for more information about the OSI Reference Model OSI Application Layer The OSI model is connection oriented This means that stations on a network can only transfer information after establishing a logical connection much like two people using the telephone system These connections are called associations The association like a telephone conversation can be initiated and concluded by either party Associations are allowed between two parties only The
158. KING and remain ON and the ONLINE LED should be ON Problems During the Download After the download the Ethernet Interface should transition to the Operational State This is indicated by the MODULE OK and the STATUS OK LEDs remaining ON If this is not the case refer to Problems During Power Up in Procedure 2 How to Issue the LOADCommand from the Station Manager If the Ethernet Interface is not already in the Loader State you must place it in the Loader State before attempting a download to it One way to do this is to issue the LOAD com mand to the Interface from the Station Manager as explained below 1 Goto the Setup GSM functions from the GSM Main Menu and set the Station Manager Mode to Local or Network depending on how the GSM is connected to the Interface 2 Select the Access Station Manager function from the GSM Main Menu 3 If you selected the Local Station Manager mode skip to step 4 If you selected the Network Station Manager mode the Station Name window will appear Enter the STATION_NAME of the station you wish to access and press Enter The STATION_NAME parameter is the name that was assigned to the station when it was initially configured on the GSM NOTE If the station cannot access the network you will not receive any response to this command You will need to correct that problem before proceeding further 4 Log on to the station Type login system and press Enter system is th
159. KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK 0 481 2 2m m 5 8 2 a E 2 y un 1 Ap 2 5 23 2 kj ry of remote node TAB LE SCRIPTION Request COMM_REQ status wd E IDENTIFIER DESCRIPTION START OF LD BLOCK RDREG Read memo VARIABLE DECLARATIONS VARIABLE DECLARATION REFERENCE NICKNAME REFERENCE DE R00251 READ SW Read Q00004 HEALTHY IDENTIFIER TABL IDENTIFIER IDENTIFIER TYPE NO IDENTIFIER TABLE ENTRIE START OF BLOCK LOGIC lt lt RUNG 3 gt gt READREQ MOVE_ INT l l CONST IN Q READ SW 00000 LEN 00001 S MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 lt lt RUNG 4 gt gt HEALTHY READREQ 4 4 BLKMV4 TBLKMV4 BLKMV INT INT WORD CONST IN1 Q R00301 CONST IN1 Q RO0308 CONST IN1 Q R00315 00049 00070 0004 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 00000 00016 3152 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 00008 00001 3030 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 00250 00000 0000 CONST IN5 CONST IN5 CONST IN5 00000 00006 0000 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 00000 00016 0000 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 08322 00002 0000 4 lt lt
160. M reference to cause something to happen Immediately after the toggle line there is a subprogram block call When a Discrete Internal point is toggled the subprogram block on the following rung performs its function Now toggle M1 to bring up an association with the application you selected 6 To check that the association has come up enter 1I on the display line and enter SHIFT F2 Reference Tables This will display the beginning of the Discrete Input 7oI table The following bits should be on I13 LAN OK bit in the LISW I16 Ethernet Interface bit in the LISW and I17 Association OK bit in the Association Status Word part of the Association Control Block Enter SHIFT F1 to go back to the program display 7 Now toggle M3 to issue a Read Request COMM REQ This will attempt to read R100 on the remote node using a Symbolic Address 8 Enter 500R and then enter SHIFT F2 to examine R500 This contains the value read from the remote node MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 9 Now move to R354 Enter some value different from what is in R500 This will be the value we write to the remote node Enter SHIFT F1 to display the program again 10 Toggle M2 to issue a Write Request COMM_REQ This will attempt to write the contents of R354 on the local PLC into R100 in the remote node using a Symbolic Address 11 Repeat steps 7 and 8 to see what value was read from the remo
161. MMS communication is not possible This error is usually accompanied by a System Error 385 indicating that systembuffer memory was not available Check system buffer pools to see that a buffer of required size is available adjust system buffer pool sizesand orallocationsifnecessary System Error 3e7 This error is caused by a request to release a buffer which is either still on a queue or not on an even boundary This is a catastrophic system software error and should be reported to GE Fanuc NA The Ethernet Interfaceisautomaticallyrestarted System Error bbbb This error occurs when the battery is disconnected or running low Entry 3 indicates what type of transition has occurred 0 Battery went from good to bad 1 Battery went from bad to good does not cause the STATUSLED to go OFF GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 13 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Code Possible Cause and Resolution Event 2 System events Continued System Error cccc This error occurs when the system detects an incorrect checksum in thesoftware or configuration data loaded into memory This is a cata strophic error The Ethernet Interface is restarted with entry into the software Load Utility Entry 3 indicates the correct checksum value Entry 4 indicates the actual computed value Entry 5 indicates the internal range number within the software range 0 indicates an error within the configuration data
162. M_REQ the following error codes may be received when data access errors occur on outgoing requests Table 6 61 Data Access Errors Class Hexadecimal Code Meaning 80H 0 Objectinvalidated Hardwarefault Temporarilyunavailable Object access denied Object undefined Invalidaddress Typeunsupported Typeinconsistent Object attribute inconsistent CO AND ATF WN FH Object access unsupported Object does not exist gt The table below shows the MMS Reject values and their meaning The Reject Class and Reject Code identify the type of error encountered Table 6 62 MMS Reject Values Class Code Meaning Class Code Meaning 1 Confirmed request 5 PDU error 0 unspecifiederror 0 unspecifiederror 1 unrecognizedservice 1 invalidPDU 2 unrecognizedmodifier 6 cancelrequest 3 invalidInvoke Id 0 unspecifiederror 4 invalidargument 1 invalidInvoke Id 5 invalidmodifier 7 cancelresponse 6 maximumservices outstanding exceeded 0 unspecifiederror 7 maximum segment length exceeded 1 invalidInvoke Id 8 maximumrecursion exceeded 8 cancelerror 9 value out of range 0 unspecifiederror 2 confirm response 1 invalidInvoke Id 0 unspecifiederror 2 invalidservice error 1 unrecognizedservice 3 value out of range 2 invalidInvoke Id 9 concluderequest 3 invalidresult 0 unspecifiederror 4 maximum segment length exceeded 1 invalidargument 5 maximumrecursion exceeded 10 concluderesponse 6 value out
163. Main Menu From this menu you can access the various sub menus and screens that allow you to enter or modify parameters values The parameters have been divided into three main categories ISO MMS and System Each of these categories may contain sub categories with corresponding screens Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 5 Saving Changes Before Exiting the Configuration Editor Main Menu The Configuration Editor Main Menu is the first displayed when entering the Configura tion Editor and it is the last displayed before exiting the Configuration Editor Typically after you have entered the Configuration Editor you will go into sub screens and enter or change values for the parameters included in them After you have made changes in a sub screen you must press Alt U to save them temporarily After you have finished making changes in the sub screens and back out to the Configu ration Editor Main Menu you must press Alt U again to save the changes to disk If you press Esc to exit the Configuration Editor Main Menu a prompt will appear to confirm the exit without saving Menu Structure The rest of this section is organized in the following fashion First an overview of the main menu selections is given This lists the sub categories and types of parameters that are found within each category Then each sub menu and screen that can be reached from the main menu is discussed There are a number of men
164. Manager 4 17 CAP Command The CAP command has the form CAP This command displays the MMS capabilities currently configured for the station A typ ical CAP command is shown below gt cap lt lt lt Capabilities gt gt gt BASEADDR Conveyor Belt HIGHADDR 11024 01024 R16384 CHBPS Command The CHBPS command has the form CHBPS 9600 2400 1200 300 where one of the data rate selection values is entered This command is used to change the data rate on the serial port of the Ethernet Inter face Any input or output from the serial port after the command has been successfully entered will use the modified data rate The data rate remains in effect until it is again explicitly changed or until the Ethernet Interface is restarted The default data rate is 9600 bps A typical CHBPS command is shown below chbps 1200 bps 1200 If the output device attached to the serial port is not set to the new data rate the BPS command message will be lost or garbled CHDATE Command The CHDATE command has the form CHDATE DD MMM YYYY an example date is 01 JAN 1989 This command is used to change the system date to the date specified in the command No date earlier than Jan 1 1989 may be entered If an invalid date is entered the current date is not changed Date changes remain in effect until the Ethernet Interface is pow ered up or restarted A typical CHDATE command is shown below chdat
165. Manager for installation of the GSM Set the PC default directory to the GSM directory by typing C gt ed gsm Start up the GSM by typing C GSM gt gsm Once the GSM Main Menu appears go into the Setup GSM functions to set the Station Manager Mode to Network or Local Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 3 6 From the GSM Main Menu cursor to the Access Station Manager function and press Enter A Local Mode If you are in Local Mode you will automatically go into the Station Manager of the locally connected Ethernet Interface Note When you enter the Local Station Manager or the Local Downloader the GSM automatically configures COM1 of the PC as follows 9600 bits per second 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit COMI will retain this configuration even after exiting the Local Station Manager or Local Downloader B Network Mode If you are in Network Mode you will be prompted to enter the Station Name or MAC address of the station you want to access Accessing the Station Manager Using an ASCII Terminal 1 Connect a serial cable from the ASCII terminal to the 9 pin connector of the Ethernet Interface Refer to Appendix D for instructions on making the cable 2 Setup the communication parameters of the terminal as follows 9600 bits per second 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit 3 Press the Enter key to see the Station Manager prompt character Remote Operation of the Station Manager The Station Manager comm
166. NAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION 000004 HEALTH 5000010 MAXWRT 5000011 WRT OK R00252 WRIT SW Write Request COMM REQ status wd IDENTIFIER TABLE IDENTIFIER IDENTIFIER TYPE IDENTIFIER DESCRIPTION NO IDENTIFIER TABLE ENTRIES START OF BLOCK LOGIC lt lt RUNG 3 gt gt HEALTH MAXWRT WRT OK deem qee ue Se de a oa ea a ee ne eae ee TUS TUSCE US 399 lt lt RUNG 4 gt gt WRITERQ 4 MOVE_ INT l l CONST IN Q WRIT SW 00000 LEN MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 lt lt RUNG 5 gt gt WRITERQ 4 bo penne n nd H BLKMV FBLKMV4 FBLKMV4 INT INT WORD CONST IN1 Q RO0301 CONST IN1 Q RO0308 CONST IN1 Q R00315 00128 00070 0004 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 00000 00016 3152 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 00008 00002 3030 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 00251 00000 0000 CONST IN5 CONST IN5 CONST IN5 00000 00006 0000 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 00000 00016 0000 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 08323 4 F 00002 0000 lt lt RUNG 6 gt gt WRITERQ 4 L BLKMV 4 INT CONST IN1 Q R00332 00000 CONST IN2 00000 CONST IN3 00001 CONST IN4 00000 CONST IN5 0
167. NAME STATION_NAME AP_COMMON NAME STATION_NAME AP_COMMON NAME STATION_NAME MMS Variable Names Screen REFERENCE VARIABLE NAME DATA_TYPE TYPE SIZE PFX LOC COUNT BIT OFF ARR MaximumMMS Message Size Screen MAX_MMS_MESSAGE_SIZE System ParametersScreen BUFFER_POOL_1 Size Allocation BUFFER_POOL_2 Size Allocation BUFFER_POOL_3 Size Allocation BUFFER_POOL_4 Size Allocation This form does not list all parameters that can be configured with the GSM It includes only those parameters that are commonly changed from their default values I2 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table l 2 Foreign Device Station Configuration Data Configure a Station Screen STATION NAM STATION TYP LOAD TYPE MAC ADDRESS Foreign Device Application Processes Screen GFK09868 COMMON_NAME APT_OBJ_ID AE QUAL PSAP SSAP TSAP NSAP Appendix I Forms 1 3 Ethernet Network Test Data Sheet ss nit Node Resp Node 1 Resp Node 2 Resp Node 3 Resp Node 4 Resp Node 5 Resp Node 6 Resp node 7 Acceptable Rate User s Node De N A scription lt lt lt Test Results gt gt gt E td Response Recvd Response W Em pee o I eo fo ie oe rm n LI SSS SS ee lt lt lt MAC Tallies gt gt gt mme EI a a px ee FES an Fe
168. NS io EMEN E Station Name or lt lt MAC Address gt gt of configured Station Press Alt L for List Enter new data or select station name from list and access Configuration Editor KAIt E Config Editor CAlt D Del Stn CAlt K KEY HELP gt CAL1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 1 Configure a Station Screen Note A form has been provided to assist you in recording configuration data Refer to Appendix I Forms MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Defining a Station 1 Type in or select desired values for the STATION NAME STATION TYPE fields etc See the description of screen fields below 2 Press Alt E to enter the Configuration Editor Field Definitions for the Configure a Station Screen STATION NAME A name 1 to 20 characters which is used to uniquely identify the station STATION TYPE The type of device containing the Ethernet Interface m The value for this field is selected from a set of choices press the Tab key to view the choices The number of choices will vary depending on your installation m Possible values include S 15 MA S 15 TA S 15 TL S 16 MA S 16 TA SERIES 90 70 FOREIGN DEV SERIES 90 70 is used for the Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Interfaces S 15 MA S 15 TA S 15 TTare used for the Series 15 MA TA TTCNC OSI Ethernet Interfaces S 16 MA and S 16 TA are used for the Series 16 MA TA CNC OSI Ethernet Interfaces FOREIGN
169. NSAP and FIRST HOP MAC ADDR to the NSAP and MAC Address of the nearest Router An example is End System B to End System C m Toaccess any End System on another sub network via a Router leave DESTINATION NSAP blank and set FIRST HOP NSAP and FIRST HOP MAC ADDR to the NSAP and MAC Address of the nearest Router An example is End System C to both End Systems A and B There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esc key exit without saving any changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit NETWORK 309949 END END SYSTEM SYSTEM B O ROUTER ROUTER __ SUB NETWORK SUB NETWORK 2 3 Figure 8 7 Specifying Automatic or Static Routing GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 13 Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen The Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen selection is used to modify the Trans port and Session Layers communications parameters The Transport and Session Layer Parameters Screen is shown below Configuration File Name CO 8 CG 600 SERIES_96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 ISO Parameters l MMS F S80 Parameters Transport Session Layer Parameters MAX_PDUSZ_LOGZ ILEZ OCTETS WINDOW_SIZE REF TIMEOUT 9 RETRAN COUNT E GIUEUP TIMEOUT INACTIUE TIMEOUT EE RETRAN TIMEOUT UINDOU TIMEOUT
170. OR ASCII TERMINAL FOR THE CORRECT SIZE AND PIN NUMBERS Figure D 2 Serial Cable to Connect GSM 9 Pin Connector to Ethernet Interface Display Terminal Settings When used as a local Station Manager terminal set the terminal to Wrap Around mode This prevents loss of information in the event a Station Manager command response exceeds the display line width of the terminal GFK 0868 Appendix D Communication PortsCharacteristics D 3 gt The AUI Port for the Ethernet Interface The Ethernet Interface is equipped with an AUI port for connecting to the network The IEEE 802 3 AUI Attachment Unit Interface is standard across a variety of different physical media Compatible transceivers can be purchased that support 10Base5 and 10Base2 coaxial cables as well as twisted pair and fiber optic cables The standard AUI makes your selection of transceiver and trunk cable medium transparent to the Ethernet Interface Your cables must meet the applicable IEEE 802 3 standards This section presents the information you need to specify the cables and related components required for Ethernet Communications Information in this section includes Attachment Unit Interface AUI port pinouts and AUI cable diagrams Ethernet AUI Port Pinouts The AUI port is located on the front edge of the Ethernet Interface This port is a 15 pin D type female connector It is used to connect the Ethernet Interface to the 802 3 transceiver Connector pinouts a
171. OS System Files for your PC Interface card are created using C see Appendix H MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 3 Create a directory for the GSM by typing C gt mkdir gsm 4 Change the default directory to the GSM directory by typing C gt cd gsm Note Do not simply copy all of the files from the GSM diskette Follow the installation procedure 5 With the GSM directory as the default place the LAN Interface software diskette into drive A or drive B If you use drive A type the instruction below C GSM gt a install If you use drive B type the instruction below C GSM gt b install The files that make up the Configuration Editor the Communications Software and the GSM executable software are now installed in the GSM directory 6 After the GSM files are installed the following message will be displayed Current GSMCFG pathname is C GSM CFILES Specify GSMCFG pathname Where GSMCEG is the GSM environment variable which specifies the location of the station configuration files you will later create with the GSM The environment variable must be specified in your AUTOEXEC BAT to take effect The current step however defines it only in the AUTOEXEC GSM sample file in the GSM directory Itis recommended that you use the default pathname which is C GSM CFILES when installing on drive C To accept the default pathname press Enter Note
172. PLC to a 802 3 CSMA CD network Transfer data to and from the PLC from another device This transfer can occur at high speeds and can come from a Host computer or from other control devices such as CNCs and other PLCs Communicate simultaneously to multiple devices The multiplexing capabilities of the Ethernet network along with Ethernet s high capacity allow the PLC to hold communications with several other devices at the same time Compatibility with other GE Fanuc devices as well as with devices from other vendors The GE Fanuc Series 90 70 PLC is compatible with the CNC Ethernet Interface and the CIMPLICITY Host Application It is also compatible with various Ethernet products available on DEC HP IBM and other computer platforms m Communicate from a Host computer or other control device The host can access data within the PLC without specific host knowledge about the PLC s internal data layout This is accomplished through the data naming that is inherent in MMS Data within the PLC can be rearranged without the need for reprogramming the host m Diagnose and maintain your system using diagnostic and station management tools You can find problems before they become serious and when communications software upgrades are desired you can use your network to download the software to the interface MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Attachment of the E
173. ProgramInvocationName 3 18 Characterstring LengthofStart ResumeArgument 19 0 32 Start Resum rgument 20 35 characterstring Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Length of ProgramInvocation Name The octet length of the ProgramInvocation Name ProgramInvocation Name The name of the ProgramInvocation to be started Any un used octets will be zero filled Length of Start Resume Argument The character length of the Start Resume Argu ment Start Resume Argument Application specific argument to be passed to the ProgramIn vocation being started Any unused octets will be zero filled The Start Resume Argu ment will not appear if MMS Version DIS 9506 is in use by the association GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 41 L5 Start Response Command 8306 The Start Response command is used to provide a response either positive or negative to a Start indication A positive response should indicate that the ap cessfully transitioned into the RUNNING state The COMM REO format for the Start Response is shown in the table below Table 6 30 Start Response COMM REG plication has suc Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8306 2072H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footno
174. Protocol Version 4 0 1 ParameterConformance Building Blocks 5 bitstring Remote Services Supported Bit String 6 12 bitstring Maximum Message Size The maximum message size Maximum Services Outstanding Local The Maximum Services Outstanding for the local ladder program Maximum Services Outstanding Remote The Maximum Services Outstanding for the remote application Data Structure Nesting Level The Data Structure Nesting Level parameter will return the value 1 if array support has been negotiated or zero otherwise Protocol Version The Protocol Version parameter is an identifying number of the proto col version Version number 0 identifies ISO DIS 9506 Version number 1 identifies ISO IS 9506 Parameter Conformance Building Blocks The bits of the Parameter Conformance Building Block parameter are described in the table below A value of 1 for the bit indi cates that the corresponding parameter is supported Table 6 14 Parameter Conformance Building Blocks Parameter Option Bit Arrays Structures Named Access Address Access Scattered Access Third Party wor OL NN OO Remote Services Supported Bit String The bits in the Remote Services Supported Bit String parameter describe the MMS services available in the remote peer as shown in the table below A value of 1 for the bit indicates that the corresponding service is sup ported Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 21 6 22 Table 6 15
175. SAP m NSAP If the other stations are GE Fanuc stations then this information will be made available to the GSM after you configure those stations If the other stations are not GE Fanuc stations then you will need to gather this informa tion for these stations and supply it to the GSM in the Foreign Device Configuration Screens It is best to configure the other stations first then the initiating station Once you have gathered the information discussed above you are ready to proceed to the Configure a Station screen and on to the other applicable configuration screens The rest of this section describes the screens and fields in which to enter this information MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Configure a Station Screen Anumber of different GEnet LAN Interface products may be present on the LAN Each GEnet LAN Interface must be configured using that product s Configuration Editor be fore it can be downloaded Before entering the Configuration Editor you must first ac cess the Configure a Station Screen from the GSM Main Menu The Configure a Station Screen allows you to perform 3 main functions W Create a Station Configuration File m Select an Existing Station Configuration File m Delete a Station Configuration File The Configure a Station Screen shown below is used to specify the Station Type and to assign a logical name STATION_NAME to the station The STATION_NAME
176. STALL NEW BATTERY BEFORE WPN UNPLUGGING OLD ETHERNET BATTERY USE CONNECTOR 1C697ACC701 SERIAL e OR o o o9 RS 232 EH DTE He S qmm L o 7GND DEFAULT o R o STATION KY l ADDRESS Aiia PUSH LABEL 3LIDEFROM o FRONTTO _OCK FROM eackto Il RELEASE H o nri ee M TRANSCEIVER cx CABLE MODULE lcesrocuna O LABEL 44A726758 117R01 O m m 4 W NUMBER 2 2 um LABEL Figure 2 1 Ethernet Controller Board The Ethernet Controller board has several user accessible elements Three LEDs are located at the top of the board The Restart pushbutton is located im mediately below the LEDs The battery and battery holder is located to the right of the LEDs The battery connectors are located on the controller board between the Restart button and the 9 pin connector to the serial port The 15 pin connector located beneath the serial port and facing downward is the transceiver port The Default Station Ad dress label is affixed on the outside of the plastic housing MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Board Indicators There are three LEDs on the Ethernet Controller board The table below describes the general meaning of each of the LEDs Table 2 1 Ethernet Controller Board Indicators Indicator Status Description MODULE OK ON MODULE OK is ON if the Ethernet Interface has passed diagnostics and its hardware is operating properly
177. SW command It cannot be performed re motely from the network After entering new Soft Switch information or correcting another fault the Ethernet Interface must be restarted to begin using these new values In the Soft Switch Entry State a NODE command to the Station Manager will yield a Soft Switch Entry Utility message following the station identification information also the Station Manager prompt is an asterisk Table 9 3 Soft Switch Entry State LED Soft Switch Entry State MODULE OK Slow Blink ONLINE OFF STATUS OK OFF Slow Blink Blink ON every 2 seconds The Field Network Test State The Field Network Test state is selected by entering a F or f in response to the prompt at the local Station Manager terminal at the end of power up diagnostics The f will not be echoed back A limited subset of Station Manager commands is provided in this state Refer to Chapter 4 Field Network Test Utility for a detailed description of the Field Network Test state and to Chapter 2 Installation Procedure 5 Testing the In terfaces on the Network for an application The table below shows the LED patterns for Field Network Test State In the Field Network Test State a NODE command to the Station Manager will indicate Field Network Test Utility The Station Manager prompt is a dollar sign Table 9 4 Field Network Test State Connected to LAN Not Connected to
178. Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 REPORTCommand The REPORT command has the form REPORT lt page gt where lt page gt is an optional page number which defaults to 1 This command causes the current results of the most recent TEST command to be re ported It can be used to get intermediate reports for long running tests Test results are maintained and may be displayed until another test is started or until the Modify secu rity level is exited A typical REPORT command is shown below report lt lt lt Test Results gt gt gt Page 1 of 1 Command test lt lt 080019010021 gt gt 1H 32H OH NULL Init node lt lt 08001901001f gt gt Frames sent 1H Nodes responding 1H Responding nodes Response recd Response w err No Response lt lt 080019000121 gt gt 1H OH OH Interpretation of Test Results The line of output that begins command lists all the parameters that were specified explicitly or implicitly in the preceding TEST command in the order lt mode gt lt cnt gt lt sch gt lt len gt lt pat gt These numbers are displayed in hexadecimal regardless of how you entered them The line beginning Init mode identifies the MAC address of the initiating node how many test command frames it sent and how many nodes responded Following this there is a list perhaps a list of one of the responding nodes MAC Ad dresses with the corresponding number of tes
179. Station Manager Parameter applcnam APT OBJ ID The Application Process Title APT Object Identifier Defaults to blank Optional and may be left blank Defined as an object identifier Consists of a se quence of numeric values m For MMS RESPONDER corresponds to Station Manager Parameter arespapt m ForAPPLICATION INTERFACE corresponds to Station Manager Parameter applapt 8 16 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 AE_QUAL The Application Entity AE Qualifier of the Application Process Defaults to 0 A decimal number ranging from 0 to 65535 m For MMS RESPONDER corresponds to Station Manager Parameter arespaequal m ForAPPLICATION INTERFACE corresponds to Station Manager Parameter applaequal PSAP The Presentation Service Access Point PSAP of the Application Process Each PSAP within a given station must be unique Entered as a string of hexadecimal oc tets m For MMS RESPONDER defaults to 01 hexadecimal For MMS RESPONDER corresponds to Station Manager Parameter aresppsap m ForAPPLICATION INTERFACE defaults to 02 hexadecimal For APPLICATION INTERFACE corresponds to Station Manager Parameter applpsap SSAP The Session Service Access Point SSAP of the Application Process Each SSAP within a given station must be unique Entered as a string of hexadecimal octets m For MMS RESPONDER defaults to 01 hexadecimal For MMS RESPONDER correspo
180. SuccMore The number of times a successful transmission was made with more than one retry FRtry The number of times the transmission failed despite using the max imum of 15 retries Table 4 18 MMS Provider Tallies Tally m Tally Meaning MsgSent Number of MMS PDU s sent MsgRcvd Number of MMS PDUs received RejSent Number of MMS Rejects sent RejRcvd Number of MMS Rejects received RegFail Number of times a registration with the communication service below failed BldFail Number of MMS requests that the MMS Provider failed to encode MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 4 19 Network Layer Tallies Tally n Tally Meaning DscGen NPDUsdiscarded due to protocol error syntax error checksum error dupli cate option incomplete NPDU or reason not specified DscCong Count of the number of packets discarded for inability to provide service DscAddr NPDUs discarded due to destination NSAP unknown DscLife Count of the number of packets discarded for transmit time exceeded DscUnsp NPDUs discarded due to unsupported option s DscReasm NPDUS discarded due to segmented NPDU reassembly error PduRcvd Count of the number of packetsreceived PduSent Count of the number of packets sent OctSent Number of octets sent by this node OctRcvd Number of octets received by this node EsEsSent Number of
181. System Memory Status gt gt gt Size Alloc Free Min 28 651 474 469 60 237 186 185 380 254 240 235 1569 53 19 19 4 36 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 STOPT Command The STOPT command has the form STOPT This command causes an active TEST sequence to stop at its next iteration and to print the results of the terminated test It is used to terminate a long running test before its completion A typical STOPT command is shown below stopt Test stopped by operator Page 1 of 1 lt lt lt Test Results gt gt gt Command test lt lt 0800190100fb gt gt 100H 32H OH NULL Init node lt lt 08001901001f gt gt Frames sent 87H Nodes responding 1H Responding nodes Response recd Response w err No Response lt lt 0800190100fb gt gt 87H OH OH TALLY Command The TALLY command has the form TALLY lt task s gt where lt task s gt is one or more task identification letters from Table 4 3 This command causes the current value of the tallies for the specified task or tasks to be displayed Some of these tallies simply indicate load and performance information about the station Others can indicate whether or not there are problems either within the station or within the network See Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for more information on using the tallies to help isolate and resolve problems An example TALLY command is shown below gt tally c lt lt l
182. T Init Node lt lt 08001901001f gt gt Frames sent 3e8H Nodes responding 4H Responding nodes Response recd Response w err No Response 08001901027d 3e8H OH OH lt lt 080019010163 gt gt 3e8H OH OH lt lt 080019010043 gt gt 3e8H OH OH lt lt 08001901012c gt gt 3e8H OH OH This TEST ALL command and report shows performance over the network between the initiating node and each responding node at a rate comparable to what an ap plication might experience For further information see the descriptions of the TEST and REPORT commands in Chapter 4 Verify that all GEnet Interfaces under test are included in the list either as the initiat ing node or as a responding node Also all GEnet Interfaces should report m 3e8H Responses received m OH Responses with error and m 0H No Responses A No Response will occur occasionally But on average a No Response should occur no more than once with the TEST command above executed with 40 000 frames instead of 1 000 frames Transcribe this report onto a clean copy of the Ethernet Network Test Data Sheet found in Appendix I Forms If you are testing a network with many nodes you may need more than one data sheet MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 6 When the TEST ALL command has completed and its results have been transcribed gather the accumulated error log and LLC and MAC tallies from all GEnet Interfaces by sending the f
183. Text similar to that shown below will be displayed on the terminal after the diagnostics are run The Soft Switch Entry Utility banner will appear only if the Ethernet Interface is in the Soft Switch Entry state The CHSOSW command may be used in any of the Ethernet Interface states IC697 PLC Factory LAN Interface Copyright c 1990 1994 All rights reserved PROM version 1 14 Ethernet MAC address 08001901001f Serial no 01393790 MAC default 08001901001f lt lt lt Soft Switch Entry Utility gt gt gt 7 A or other prompt character will be displayed on the terminal 8 To display the current values of the Soft Switches enter the command SOSW 9 Setthe values of the Soft Switches by entering the CHSOSW command Refer to Chapter 4 Station Manager for a detailed definition of the command syntax The new values of the Soft Switches will be displayed A typical CHSOSW command for the Ethernet Interface is shown below chsosw mac 020106000001 mms dc lt lt lt Soft Switch Data gt gt gt MAC Address lt lt 08001901001f gt gt default used Load source Serial Network Online Online after power up Backplane Online Online after power up Network doad addr lt lt 090060000000 gt gt default used MMS Enable Don t Care Pgmr Enable Don t Care Updating please wait 10 If the Soft Switch data displayed in the CHSOSW command is correct for the station press the LAN Interface Restart
184. The Name of the Domain in whose Scope the variable exists if the value of the Variable Scope parameter is Domain Specific MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 oC IS Transfer InformationReport Indication Data Command 8330 The Transfer InformationReport Indication Data command is used to move the data for the variable specified in an InformationReport indication received from a peer application into the memory of the local PLC and to free the LAN Interface resources used to buffer that data The InformationReport contains the value of a variable as known to the peer application No other InformationReport indications can be processed until the current indication has its data transferred using the Transfer InformationReport Indication Data service or a Discard InformationReport Indication Data service is issued The COMM REO format of the Transfer InformationReport Indication Data command is shown in the table below Table 6 25 Transfer InformationReport Indication Data COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 6 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8330 208AH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Maximum Length of Data Buffer 9 1 2 046 Dat
185. The default value of 3 corresponds to a ring size of 8 MMS Parameters maltacn str ISO MMS1 ApplicationContext Name string name for alternate MMS ApplicationContext Not GSM configurable maltacnobj objid UI Altemate MMS Application Context object identifier AppendixF Station Configuration Parameters F 3 F 4 Table F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager Continued Parameter Format Default Description mmaxmsgsz dec 992 Maximumapplication message size This parameter deter mines the maximum length of aMMS message that can be sent or received This parameter also determines the maxi mum message size which is negotiated between two applica tions if they indeed negotiate maximum message size This parameter must be 168 less than bbuff4 or smaller mmsacn str ISO MMS ApplicationContext Name string for MMS Application con text Not GSM configurable mmsacnobj objid 109506 2 3 MMS Application Context object identifier Network Layer Parameters ncfgtime dec 30 Configuration timer interval in seconds nchksum dec 0 Use checksums on outgoing NPDUs 0 means do not use checksums 1 means use checksums neslsap hex FE AllEnd Systems ES LSAP nesmac hex 09002B000004 AllEnd Systems ES MACaddress nhldtime dec 75 Holding timer for outgoing ES IS NPDUs in seconds nislsap hex FE AllInt
186. The install bat file on the diskette will copy the following files to the GSM directory stanames gsm mapdib gsm and minimap gsm These files create three pre defined stations stal sta2 and sta3 in the GSM Configuration files for these Example stations are copied into the GSM CFILES directory If previous versions of the gsm files named above exist in the GSM directory they are saved as bak prior to copying the pre defined files 3 Stations stal sta2 and sta3 if desired must be downloaded to the respective Ethernet Interfaces to establish the proper configuration information data in each node Refer to Procedure 4 Configuring and Downloading a Station You need at least 2 test stations one to initiate requests and one to respond If desired you may add a third station to allow multiple associations to a single station Loading the Example PLC Ladder Program If you have not already installed Logicmaster 90 70 into the PC do so at this time Refer to GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software User s Manual when installing the seri al or parallel versions of Logicmaster 90 70 software into the PC Refer to GFK 0780 Lo gicmaster 90 70 Ethernet User s Manual when installing the Ethernet version of Logicmas ter 90 70 software into the PC MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Install the Example Station Ladder into Logicmaster 90 70 as follows 1 The Example Statio
187. This is especially helpful when you are repeating similar commands Simply display the previous command change the desired part of the command and press Enter Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 19 2 20 This step can be done for individual Interfaces by executing the following set of RE Mote commands for each Interface to be tested rem lt node gt login system rem lt node gt clear log rem lt node gt clear tally where node is the 12 digit MAC address of the target node 4 To clear the error log and LLC and MAC tallies in the test initiator Interface issue the following commands clear log clear tally 5 Issue the desired TEST command to initiate the network test test 010000000000 1000 50 256 Tests all GE Fanuc stations on the network or test all 1000 50 256 Tests all stations on the network The TEST command causes the test initiator to broadcast 1000 test command frames of varying lengths and data patterns to all GE Fanuc nodes or all nodes of all types on the network All nodes receiving these commands are expected to send a similar test response back to the initiating node The initiating node counts all responses from each responding node This command will take about 10 minutes to complete When the command is com plete a report like the following should be displayed lt lt lt Test Results gt gt gt Page 1 of 1 Command test ffffffffffff 3e8H 32H 100H AL
188. W Command Station Manager k 19 CHTIME Command Station Manager 4 21 CLEAR Command Station Manager Client Ser ver Model CLSOSW Command Station Manager 14 22 COMM REQ See also MMS COMM REQ Station Manager COMM REOs COMM REQ Status Word COMMON NAME B 28 B 37 Communications Ports Characteristics D 1 Conclude Confirm Service Conclude Indication Service Conclude Request Command 8205 MMS COMM REQ Conclude Response Command 8206 MMS COMM REQ Conditions for Downloading a Station 2 14 CONFIG GSM CONFIG SYS B 8 H 2 CONFIG_TIME 8 10 Configuration Editor Configuration Editor Main Menu Configuration Editor Menu for Series 90 70 PLCs Configuration File for a Station Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager Configuration Parameters Station Manag ET Configure a Station Screen 3 19 8 2 Configuring a Non GE Fanuc Device 55 Bi Md a Series 90 70 PLC Station 8 5 Configuring a Station 2 13 Configuring a Station for a Basic Network 5 17 Configuring and Downloading a Station PE Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90 70 Connecting the GSM to the LAN Inter face GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Control Characters Station Manager CRSW CTRL K eys D Data Link Error Codes GSM Data Link Layer Parameters F 3 Data Link Parameters Screen 8 8 Data Link Tallies part of Tally 1 DATA TYPE 6 33 Da
189. YSTEMS CIS gt MAC_ADDRESS ELA HEX LSAP j HEX Network Service Access Point for this node Chexadecimal gt Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAlt U Update Parameters gt CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 7 Network Layer Parameters Screen The Network Layer Parameters are defined as follows Enter the Station NSAP in the NSAP field and press Alt U to update NSAP The Network Service Access Point for this node Entered as a hexadecimal string of octets Defaults to the combination of the station MAC Address and LSAP Corre sponds to Station Manager Parameter nsap The remaining parameters need not be modified for basic networks Refer to Chapter 8 for descriptions of other parameters MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen The Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen selection allows you to modify the Transport and Session Layers communications parameters For a basicnetwork the only parameter you need to define is the TSAP Transport Service Access Point The Transport and Session Layer Parameters Screen is shown below CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CGO 400 SERIES 38 7 8 150882 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MMS p ISO Parameters Transport Session Layer Parameters MAX_PDUSZ_LOGZ HERZ OCTETS gt
190. a N specifies that they are NOT used Defaults to N Value toggled by the Tab or Shift Tab keys Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter tchksum where a 1 equates to Y and a 0 equates to N ACK DELAY TIME Acknowledge Delay Timeout for the Transport Layer Valid range of 0 to 300 seconds Defaults to 0 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parame ter tlcack Session Layer The Session Layer parameters are defined as follows SESSION TIMEOUT Session Timeout for the Session Layer This timer establishes the maximum interval to wait before disconnecting the Transport connection It allows time for a connection ending Session PDU to reach its destination Valid range of 0 to 300 seconds Defaults to 25 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter stime TSAP The ISO Transport Service Access Point to be used for communications services Entered as a string of hexadecimal octets Defaults to 0001 hex Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter stsap There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esckey exit without saving any changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 15 Application Processes Screen The Application Processes Screen selection is used to examine and modify the names of the Ethernet Interface Application Processes The different communication services are accessed by establishin
191. a Buffer Memory Type 10 See Table6 16 Data Buffer Offset 11 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI AQ eI Q T M Decimal Value 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Transfer InformationReport Indication Data command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association The ACB must match an association with a pending InformationReport indication Maximum Length of Data Buffer The Data Buffer parameter specifies where the data from the InformationReport is to be stored If this buffer is not large enough to permit storing the reported data the data will be truncated to fit the available buffer The buff er length is expressed in units appropriate to the Data Buffer s memory type Data Buffer Specifies the location where the InformationReport data is to be stored The table below shows the format of this data Table 6 26 Information Report Data Parameter Description Word Offset UnitLength 0 Data 1 1023 GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 37 L6 Discard InformationReport Indication Data Command 8339 6 38 The Discard Information Report Indication Data command is used to discard the data for a variable specified in an InformationReport indication received from a peer application and to free the LAN Interface resources used to buffer that data The InformationReport variable data is lost The COMM REO format of the
192. ace m Configure a Station provides the means for setting the various parameters of the LAN Interface The Configuration Editor is a menu driven software package that is called from the GSM main menu There is a unique Configuration Editor for each type of LAN Interface For example there are different Configuration Editors for Series 15 and Series 16 CNCs The Configuration Editor is used to examine and modify the configuration parameters for a station These configuration parameters are stored in files on the PC hard disk and subsequently downloaded to the LAN Interface Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 13 m Configure Network wide Parameters allows a set of system wide parameters to be set such as the GSM Loader Multicast Address m ListAll Stations displays a list of all LAN interfaces known to this GSM m List all Configured Applications provides a listing of all Applications that have previously been configured under this GSM m Setup GSM provides for certain settings affecting the operation of the GSM such as local or network attachment The remainder of this chapter discusses various sub menus used to configure a LAN In terface for a basic network Working Your Way through the GSM Menus The GSM is a menu driven software package that is comprised of a single main menu and a number of sub menus Using the PC keyboard you can move easily through the menus The GSM uses the PC screen to display its inf
193. ace you are go loaded from the GSM ing to download Download Mode Download Mode Load Source The Load Source Soft Switch parameter must be compatible with the physical connection used to connect to the GSM The Load Source options are AIT Accepts either a local or a network down load wherever it finds the Download Server Factory Default LOC Accepts only a local download NET Accepts only a network download Loader State After putting the Ethernet In terface into the Loader State right column see instructions immediately below Initiating the Download The Ethernet Interface must be in the Loader State to receive a download a If the Interface is new from the factory it will automatically enter the Loader State when pow ered up Also unless overridden by the PLC CPU configuration set in Procedure 3 the MAC Address will be the default address shown on a label on the board see Figure 2 1 and the Load Source will be ALT b For a previously installed Interface if you are physically close to it press and hold the Restart Load Button on the front of the Inter face until the STATUS OK LED comes ON about 5 seconds If you are not physically close to the Ethernet Interface and it is not in the Loader State you can issue the Station Manager LOAD com mand to the Interface See the section below entitled How to Issue the LOAD Command from the Station Manager Initiating the
194. ach Interface in the network The configuration information consists largely of timing buffer and other parameters which normally assume the default values and are the same for each station on the net work There is however other configuration information such as the Local Application DIB Directory Information Base which may be unique for each Ethernet Interface Configuring a station also associates particular communications software with the MAC address of the station for subsequent downloading communications software for GE Fanuc CNC Ethernet Interfaces is different from GE Fanuc PLC Ethernet Interfaces Therefore a configuration file must be created for each Ethernet Interface Configuring a Station GFK 0868 The configuration procedure is performed offline on a personal computer It is not ex plained here but is found in Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager as described be low m Toinstall the GSM software on auser supplied PC Compatible refer to Chapter 3 Section 1 Installing and Starting Up the GSM m Toconfigure a station refer to Chapter 3 Section 2 Configuring a Station Chapter 3 will explain how to configure a station for a basic network Additional config uration information for more advanced networks is provided in Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network The type of parameters you may need to configure include m Station Name Type and MAC Address always required
195. ad Station Screen 660s 3 39 Downloading Locally Over the Serial Port 000000 3 39 Downloading Over the Network 66 c cee eens 3 40 Section 4 Accessing the Station Manager esse 3 42 Access Station Manager Screen ssssslsssslelseee 3 42 Section 5 Using the GSM Support Functions 3 43 List All StationsScreen sssssseeeeeee eee ees 3 43 List All Configured Application DIBs Menu 2 2 0 cece eee ee eee 3 44 7 Layer Application DIB Screen 0 6 666s 3 45 Setup GSM Menu iic esr sce e ee eee eee RE EUR Rn ROGER E ees 3 46 Changing the GSM Password Screen esses 3 46 Set Download Mode Screen 600 000s 3 47 Set Station Manager Mode Screen 0 06 ccc ee ees 3 47 Exit O POS ure pt REN iene ea eade er b eade tes tuas 3 47 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 51 63 kR 04 0 rre Wed VEL RR RETE 4 1 Section 1 Accessing the Station Manager ssss 4 2 Accessing the Station Manager Using the GSM 0006 4 3 Accessing the Station Manager Using an ASCII Terminal 4 4 Remote Operation of the Station Manager 00 0c cece eee ee 4 4 Accessing the Station Manager from the Local PLC 4 4 5 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May vii 1994 Contents Section 2 Using the Station Manager 00 e ee eeee 4 6 Using the
196. adder program that a Resume Indication was received from the remote application See the discussion of PI Indications for important information Examine Resume Indication Command 8314 The Examine Resume Indication command is used to examine a Resume indication re ceived at the application The purpose of the Resume is to transition the application from a STOPPED state to a RUNNING state The format of the Examine Resume Indication COMM REO is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8314 207AH The result of this command is that 72 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in Table 6 29 GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 49 L5 Resume Response Command 8315 6 50 The Resume Response command is used to provide a response either positive or nega tive to a Resume indication A positive response should indicate that the application has successfully transitioned into the RUNNING state The COMM REO format for the Resume Response is shown in the table below Table 6 37 Resume Response COMM REG Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8315 207BH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Point
197. al station address If you are not familiar with MAC address formats refer to Structure of the MAC Address in Chapter 3 Caution If you assign a new MAC address record its value Setting an improper MAC Address value or duplicating the address of another station can disruptother stations onthe network GFK 0868 E 1 Load Source The Load Source parameter tells the Ethernet Interface the source for its software down load m The default setting is ALT This cycles between local and network load sources starting with local This method selects the first available load source This parameter may also select local or network downloading exclusively See Table E 1 for more information LAN Online The LAN Online parameter tells the Ethernet Interface whether or not it should connect to the network after diagnostics The default setting is YES Backplane Online This parameter tells the Ethernet Interface whether or not to allow backplane commu nications after initialization The default setting is YES Network Load Address The Network Load Address parameter specifies the multicast address used by this sta tion to receive network download multicast messages This parameter is used only for network downloading The default value of zeroes means use the default network load address 090060000000 A network GSM which is ready to provide network downloading identifies itself on the network by sending a message to one o
198. an exception log and configuration parameters m Password security for commands that change station parameters or operation GFK0868 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 Communications Software This software consists of the 7 layer ISO protocol stack and interface software interfacing the protocol stack with the PLC Configuration File This configuration data consists largely of timing buffer addres sing and other parameters for each station on the network The GEnet System Manager GSM The GEnet System Manager is a menu driven software package that runs on a user pro vided IBM PC or equivalent running DOS 5 0 The GSM provides various management and configuration tools The GSM can be connected to the Ethernet Interface either with a serial RS 232 cable or over the Ethernet cable When used over Ethernet one GSM can conveniently access any of the Ethernet Interfaces on that cable The most essential GSM tools are m The Configuration Editor m The Downloader m Access to the Station Manager on the Ethernet Interface In addition the GSM has the following functions m Examine the list of configured Ethernet Interfaces m Examine and modify network wide configuration parameters W Create and examine the application Directory Information Bases DIBs The GSM also can create files containing these DIBs Note Typically there will be only one GSM on the network It will contain configuration information and communications sof
199. anager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS SMCMAC_NIF MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM_RX_BUFS 8 Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne Ne we SMCMAC_NIF DRIVERNAME irg 3 ramaddress 0xd000 iobase 0x280 receivebufsize 1024 SMCMACS H 8 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Optimizing the GSM for Network Operation There are two parameters in the GEFNDIS section of PROTOCOL INI which can be adjusted to optimize the operation of your GSM These parameters are described below Note Only experienced network personnel should change the values of these parameters Setting the parameters to values other than the defaults could cause unpredictable operation of the GSM NUM_RX_BUFS Number of RX frame buffers This is usually the number of simulta neous messages that can be received and processed by the GSM Defaults to 8 buff ers of size specified in MAX_RX_SIZE This parameter may be increased to handle additional test frame processing or network station management responses This parameter can be de
200. ands can be invoked over the network from other GEnet devices other Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Interfaces GE Fanuc CNC OSI Ethernet In terfaces Series Six PLC LAN Interfaces or remote GEnet System Managers by using the REM command When invoked remotely the Station Manager software processes the command as if it had been entered from a device attached to the serial port but auto matically directs output from the command over the LAN to the station which issued the request There is no indication on the local station serial device when a remote com mand is being processed Refer to Figure 4 2 for LAN configurations that use remote Station Manager operations Note Both the local console and any remote access share the same security level See the LOGIN and LOGOUT commands descriptions 4 4 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Accessing the Station Manager from the Local PLC The Station Manager Ladder COMMunication REQuests allow the ladder program within the local PLC to retrieve some of the same management information that is avail able through the Station Manager There are four Station Manager ladder requests m Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request m Retrieve Tallies Request m Retrieve Log Events Request m Restart Ethernet Interface Refer to Chapter 7 for a complete description of the COMM REOSs for these requests GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 5 Section 2
201. ange of possible values and the representation of the values for a variable Variables are stored in various parts of the memory of the GE Fanuc control devices MMS allows variables to be accessed in two different ways by variable name and by address Variable names allow remote applications to access data in GE Fanuc control devices without having an intimate knowledge of where and how the data is represented in the memory of the device Address access also called unnamed access allows the memory of the device to be directly accessed by applications that require such access Access to variable data by address makes the client dependent on design choices in the server application and should be used carefully and sparingly An example of a named variable is production_today that is an integer giving a count of the day s production Like all MMS objects variables have attributes The attributes of named variables and unnamed variables are shown in the following table Table B 8 Variable Access Attributes Unnamed Variable Object Key Attribute Address Attribute MMS Deletable FALSE Attribute Access Method PUBLIC Attribute Type Description Named Variable Object Key Attribute Variable Name Attribute MMS Deletable TRUE FALSE Attribute Type Description Attribute Access Method PUBLIC Constraint Access Method PUBLIC Attribute Address The Name or Address attribute serves to identif
202. another association 622 26E No Variable Name is specified in the request The Variable Name Length parameter is 0 623 26F The Variable Name Length specified is longer than the maximum Variable Name Length 624 270 The Variable Name Application Process Title or Application Context Namespecified has an invalid ASCII character s 625 271 Invalid Data Typeparameter This parameter must have the value of one of the data types specified in Chapter 6 Data Type Values 626 272 Invalid Data Buffer parameter The Data Buffer specified is not at all or is not entirely within the Series 90 70 PLC memory space 627 273 Invalid VariableTypeparameter This parameter must have one of the values specified in Chapter 6 Variable Type Values MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Ls Table 9 12 Extended Status Buffer Error Codes and Definitions Continued Error Code Description dec hex 628 274 Invalid Firstand orLastIndex Both index parameters must be non zero and the Last Index parameter must be greater than or equal to the First Indexparameter 629 275 Invalid parameter Length The parameter Length is longer than 4096 char acters 630 276 Invalid PLC Location parameter 631 277 No association exists for the specified ACB Location 632 278 No Addressparameter The Address Length parameter is 0 634 27A This command is not va
203. anuc Automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions At GE Fanuc automation we strive to produce quality technical documentation After you have used this manual please take a few moments to complete and return the Reader s Comment Card located on the next page iv MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Contents Chapter 1 Introductions 44 43a edd sin PORE RO dedo n Deel ordi 1 1 The Ethernet Communications System 666 cece cece eee eee 1 1 The Ethernet Interface iode LIRE A IRIS Sei 1 2 The GEnet System Manager GSM 000 000 cc eee e eee eee ee 1 4 How to Make it Work 0 cence A 1 5 Quick Guide to the Manual 0 ccc eee eens 1 6 Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface eese 2 1 Ethernet Hardware Overview eee 2 2 Board Indicators obere eben epe eb eDim 2 3 Restart Button sssr enmet amet Ra Ce RR CR ed edP ERR ERE URN 2 3 Battery oit ndisse iar ete ot ace ua ish iicet aedes odes crie d cete ied 2 4 SerialPort soc uL o aM pec a Me LM d 2 4 AUI Transceiver Port eeeseeeeeeeeeeee tee nee ANE 2 4 Default Station Address Label eese 2 4 Serial Number Label oc eet tr eh iS ola ade eee a A alae 2 4 Procedu
204. are m The Device Independent Area of the COMM REO is incorrectly programmed or m The Ethernet Interface s mailbox for receiving COMM REOs is full If the OK output is set then the COMM REO was successfully delivered to the Ethernet Interface Once this has occurred the PLC ladder program may look for the second level of feedback described below If the COMM REQ OK output is set the status code returned in the COMM REQ status word CRSW indicates whether the command was in the proper form and was requested in the proper sequence For example the CRSW set to hexadecimal 20 COMM REQ Complete With Error may mean a Write or Read was commanded when no association exists If the CRSW is set to 20 hex the Station Manager Extended Status command EXS can be used to determine why the COMM REQ was unsuccessful Once the CRSW has been set to hexadecimal 40 COMM REO Complete Without Error the PLC ladder program may look for the third level of feedback described below The ACB Positive and Negative Confirm bits indicate that a confirmation message has been received in response to a previous request The Problem Code word of the ACB gives further information about why a confirmation was negative This word is updated when a Negative Confirm is registered in the ACB The ACB Confirm bits are set when a confirmation message is received These bits will be pulsed for each confirmation message received and will remain set and then re
205. aring of domains The Upload in Progress attribute specifies the number of uploads currently in progress for the domain The Domain Content attribute is the information contained in the domain as downloaded Included in this content may be a list of subordinate objects which are objects defined in the domain specific scope of this domain Refer to the discussion of object scope earlier If the domain is IN USE it is associated with one or more ProgramInvocations The list of ProgramInvocation references contains the ProgramInvocations which use this domain if any Since there is only one ProgramInvocation in most GE Fanuc control devices this list will usually contain at most one ProgramInvocation MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Program Invocation Objects MMS Program Invocation objects are dynamic elements that can be thought of as executable tasks For the CNC there is a ProgramInvocation associated with each independent tool path For a Series 90 70 PLC there is a single PI In other manufacturing devices there may be one or more Program Invocations MMS provides services to control the executing state of the Program Invocations and to create and destroy them The attributes of the Program Invocation Objects are shown below Table B 6 Program Invocation Attributes Key Attribute Attribute Attribute Attribute Attribute Attribute Constraint Attribute A
206. at is pending execution Carrierband LAN The form of baseband LAN used by IEEE 802 4 Carrier Sense In a Local Area Network an ongoing activity of a data station to detect whether another station is transmitting Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection CSMA CD A bus network in which the medium access control protocol requires carrier sense and in which excep tion conditions caused by collision are resolved by retransmission Collision A condition that results from concurrent transmissions on the transmission medium Collision Domain A single CSMA CD network If two or more MACs are within the same collision domain and both transmit at the same time a collision will occur MACs separated by a repeater are within the same collision domain MACs sepa rated by a bridge are within different collision domains Command Dictionary Provides an alphabetical listing of the LAN Interface commands Command Field That part of a protocol data unit PDU that contains commands as opposed to the address field and information field MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Common Name A unique ASCII string of up to 64 characters used to describe an ap plication process Configuration File Communications configuration information retained on disk at the GSM for each LAN Interface in the network The configuration file is loaded into the LAN Interface together with the LAN I
207. ata in the Soft Switches are determined to be invalid on power up or restart of the Ethernet Interface or if certain other faults occur The Soft Switch Entry Utility runs a subset of the Station Manager commands It pro vides a unique prompt an asterisk The Station Manager commands shown in the following table can be used while in the Soft Switch Entry utility Some of the com mands have restrictions due to the limited services available in this utility All commands in the Soft Switch Entry Utility are accessible at the initial security level It is not necessary to login to use the Modify commands while in the Soft Switch Entry util ity A typical initialization message from the Soft Switch Entry utility is shown below IC697 PLC Factory LAN Interface Copyright c 1990 1994 All rights reserved PROM Version 1 14 Ethernet MAC address 08001901001f Serial no 01393790 MAC default 08001901001f lt lt lt Soft Switch Entry Utility gt gt gt Soft Switch Values Not Defined Just before the prompt is printed the reason for entry into the Soft Switch Entry Util ity is printed Some examples of entry reasons are soft switch values not defined MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 PROM software versions are incompatible or station MAC address in soft switches does not match downloaded configuration Table 4 4 Soft Switch Entry Utility
208. ation Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Length of ProgramInvocationName 11 1 32 ProgramInvocationName 12 27 characterstring ProgramInvocationState Memory Type 28 See Table6 16 ProgramInvocationState Offset 29 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Stop Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Length of ProgramInvocation Name The number of octets in the ProgramInvocation Name ProgramInvocation Name Specifies the ProgramInvocation which is to be stopped ProgramInvocation State The PLC address of the ProgramInvocation State This pa rameter is returned by the the MMS provider only when a Negative Response is given to the Stop request A Negative Response will cause this word to be set to the current PI state refer to Table 6 40 at the remote node Stop Indication Service The Stop Indication Service uses the Stop Indication bit bit 13 in the ASW to inform the ladder program that a Stop Indication was received from the remote application See the discussion of PI Indications for important information GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 43 L5 Examine Stop Indication Command 8308 The Examine Stop Indication command is used to examine a Stop indication received at the applicat
209. ation Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Data Buffer Memory Type 11 See Table6 16 Data Buffer Offset 12 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Identify Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Data Buffer The PLC address of where the remote peer application s identification in formation is to be put This buffer must be able to accommodate 102 octets of data See the Table 6 50 for data format GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 59 L6 Identify Confirm Service The Identify Confirm Service uses the Positive and Negative Confirm bits in the ACB This service determines whether the request for identification information was successful When the Negative Confirm bit is set the Problem Code in the ACB is updated with the reason for the negative confirm If the confirm is positive the identification information will have been placed in the location specified by the Identify Request The format for the returned data is shown in the table below Table 6 50 Identify Positive Confirm Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value Length of Vendor Name 0 1 32 Vendor Name 1 16 characterstring Length of Model Name 17 1 32 ModelName 18 33 characterstring Length of Revision 34 1
210. ation Manager 4 36 States of the Ethernet Interface 2 9 Static Routing 8 13 Station Address Station Configuration File Deleting Station Configuration File Selecting Station Configuration Parameters E Station Manager ACB Command Accessing 4 2 Zn Accessing the Station Manager Using an ASCII Terminal BPS Command OK Command 4 29 PI Command 4 29 REM Command 4 30 Remote Operation of 4 4 REPORT Command 4 31 RESTART Command RIB Command 41 32 Index 9 Index Index 10 Services SHOW Command TALLY Command 4 37 TEST Command 4 43 TIME Command TRACE Command Using the Station Manager VAR Command 4 47 VMD Command 4 47 Station Manager COMM REOs Restart Ethernet Interface Request 8103 7 7 Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Re quest 8100 NI Log Events Request 8102 7 6 Retrieve Tallies Request 8101 Station Manager Command Descriptions 4 16 Station Manager Command Lists 4 7 4 9 Station Manager Command Syntax 4 10 Station Manager Configuration Parame ters Station Manager Control Characters 4 16 Station Manager in Utility Programs Station Manager Ladder Requests STATION NAME b 20 STATION TYPE 5 20 Status Confirm Service 6 55 Status Indication Service 6 54 STATUS OK LED Status Request Command 8250 MMS COMM REQ Status Response Command 8251 MMS COMM REQ Status Services 6 53 st
211. ation sRevisionldentifier 1 13RAM 1 14PROM Machine Name s and VersionNumber s Series 90 70 OperatingSystem s N A MMSabstractsyntax MMS MMS Version Number Supported 0 1 MMS Companion Standard abstract syntaxes N A MMS Companion Standard Version Number Sup N A ported Calling MMS user indicate Yes or No Yes Called MMS user indicate Yes or No Yes ListofStandardized Names None GFK 0868 C 2 Table C 2 PICS Supported Services Service Service Description Server Client Description Server Client or Both or Both Initiate Both GetDomainAttributes Conclude Both CreateProgramInvocation Cancel Both DeleteProgramInvocation UnsolicitedStatus Both Start Both Status Both Stop Both GetNameList Both Resume Both Identify Both Reset Both Rename Kill GetCapabilityList Server GetProgramInvocationAtributes Server Read Both ObtainFile Write Both DefineEventCondition InformationReport Both DeleteEventCondition GetVariableAccess Attributes Server GetEventConditionAtributes DefineNamed Variable ReportEventConditionStatus DefineScattered Access AlterEventConditionMonitoring GetScattered Access Attributes TriggerEvent Delete Variable Access DefineEventAction DefineNamed ariableList DeleteEventAction GetNamed VariableListAtri butes DeleteNamed VariableList DefineNamed ype GetNamedTypeAttributes DeleteNamed ype Input Output TakeControl RelinquishControl DefineSemaphore DeleteSemaphore ReportSemapho
212. ation with the Conclude Response command 6 18 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Conclude Response Command 8206 The Conclude Response command is used to respond to a Conclude Indication from the remote device When the Conclude Indication is received bit 6 of the Association Status Word being set to 1 The COMM REO format for this command is shown in the table below Table 6 11 Conclude Response COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 4 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8206 200EH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Positiveor Negative Response 9 0 1 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Conclude Response command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Positive or Negative Response The Positive or Negative Response parameter is used to determine whether a positive or negative Conclude Response is sent If a negative response is sent value of 1 the problem code Further Communication Required 0901H is used and the association remains intact with the ACB still updat
213. be examined by pressing the Alt V key When the Alt V key is pressed you are prompted for which DIB entry to examine If a blank field is entered the top item in the menu is examined The Alt S key is used to search the DIB for a specified entry When the Alt S key is pressed you select the data field and value to seek and select the search direction The Alt Skey is pressed again to initiate the search or the Esc key is pressed to abort the search The Alt P key is used to produce a file MAPDIB LIS containing a printable form of the information in the DIB This file can then be typed or printed The Esc key is used to exit the 7 Layer Application DIB menu and to return to the Ap plication DIBs menu GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 45 Setup GSM Menu The Setup GSM screen shown below includes the following functions m Change the password that must be entered to access the GSM main menu m Set Download Mode Local or Network m Set Station Manager Mode Local or Network Factory LAN System Manager CGSMD gt Version 2 84 Dounload Station Access Station Manager Configure a Station Configure Netuork uide Parameters List All Stations List All Configured Applications Setup GSM GSM Setup Change Passuord Set Dounload Mode Set Station Manager Mode EXIT TO D Press lp Doun Arrow to move the cursor and press Enter to select CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE
214. being loaded is displayed along with the file block count The download may be aborted by pressing Alt A key or Esc key Once aborted the download may not be resumed but must be restarted from the beginning If an error occurs during the download process an error message is displayed on the screen to indicate the nature of the error Once the download is complete a message is displayed on the screen indicating that the download was successful Control is then transferred automatically to the Local Station Manager Terminal screen so you may view the LAN Interface initialization messages Downloading Over the Network 3 40 The Network Downloader uses a special download protocol to transfer information to the GEnet LAN Interfaces on the network that require a download The download pro tocol is described in this section 1 The Network Downloader transmits a download multicast message once per second when idle to a specified multicast address 2 The LAN Interface requiring a download receives the download multicast message and sends a Request for Load message to the Network Downloader Download multicast addresses are defined in the GSM System Network Parameters menu A Load Group number is assigned to each multicast address Each LAN Interface must define a Load Group number so it obtains its download using the correct multicast address Notes The Network Downloader will support up to five different Load Groups each with a u
215. below 1 Set the default directory to the GSM directory and then type C NGSM gsm 2 Proceed past the copyright notice by pressing any key The GSM will then prompt you for the main menu password The default password is gsm lower case After the correct password has been entered the GSM will then display its Main Menu If instead you get an error message you will need to carefully review your installation steps again Appendix J contains a listing of the GSM Data Link Error Codes Factory LAN System Manager GSM Version 2 84 Download Station Access Station Manager Configure a Station Configure Netuork uide Parameters List All Stations List All Configured Applications Setup GSM EXIT TO DOS Use Up Down Arrow to move the cursor and press Enter to select CALt K KEY HELP CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 3 2 GSM Main Menu The GSM Main Menu lists the functions available in the GSM software The functions are ordered generally by their frequency of use with the most used function listed first Use the Arrow keys to highlight the desired function and press Enter to select The func tions are summarized here and then described in more detail later in this chapter Downloadcommunications software and configuration information to the LAN Interface m Access Station Manager allows the PC to run in a terminal mode of operation for access to the Station Manager residing on a LAN Interf
216. between nodes in this tree The figure below shows a typical object identifier and its place in the object space The path to locate this object is denoted 2 1 1 a43014 OBJECT 1 Figure B 17 MMS Object Identifier The MAP directory service is used to resolve a common name to all required address information to locate that application If you are using a directory server the only address which must be present in the Series 90 70 PLC configuration is the address of the directory server In addition to or in place of a directory server it is possible to preconfigure the addresses of some remote applications into each Series 90 70 PLC configuration The efficiency of using such statically configured information must be balanced against the complexity of managing directory information in each node rather than centrally when a directory server is used MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Appendix Protocol Implementation Conformance C Statement PICS This section contains the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS for the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS the Network Management Agent NMA and the Directory User Agent DUA PICS for the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS Table C 1 PICS Series 90 70 PLC System ID Information Description Value Implementation sVendor Name GE Fanuc Implementation sModelName Series 90 70PLC Implement
217. between the local and remote applications Initiate Request Command 8201 The Initiate Request command is used to bring up an association with a remote device The result of this request will be a Positive or Negative Confirm or an Abort Indication The COMM REO for the Initiate Request command is shown in the table below Table 6 4 Initiate Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 73 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8201 2009H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 AssociationContext 9 0 or 10 Maximum Message Size 10 0 or 64 and up Maximum Services Outstanding Calling 11 0 6 Maximum Services Outstanding Called 12 0 6 Length of Remote Application Common Name 13 Remote ApplicationCommon Name 14 45 characterstring This entry uses 32 words of memory Length of Application Context Name 46 0 or1 64 ApplicationContext Name 47 78 characterstring This entry uses 32 words of memory Zharacters word 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 76 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Initiate Request command Association Control Block The PLC address allocated for the ACB for this association After the association is established th
218. ble MMS services for the device may be performed When the Logical Status has the value NO STATE CHANGES ALLOWED only those MMS services that do not change the state of any MMS object can be used When the Logical Status has the value LIMITED SERVICES PERMITTED only a few essential services are allowed When the Logical Status has the value SUPPORT SERVICES ALLOWED all services other than those that alter the state of a PI are permitted In Table B 2 in the section titled VMD Logical State a Y denotes that the service is available in the specified Logical Status Table B 2 also shows how the CNC communication mode Local or Remote affects which services may be performed See Chapter 5 for a description of Local and Remote Communication Modes Possible values of the VMD Physical Status are OPERATIONAL PARITALLY OPERATIONAL INOPERABLE and NEEDS COMMISSIONING Under normal operating conditions the Physical Status will be OPERATIONAL When an alarm condition or E Stop occurs the Physical Status changes to INOPERABLE until the alarm or E Stop is cleared If the OSI Ethernet Interface cannot successfully communicate with the CNC main processor the Physical Status is NEEDS COMMISSIONING GFK 0868 Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 15 Table B 3 Effect of VMD Logical State and CNC Mode on MMS Services MMS Service VMD Logical State CNC Communications Mode S C A N S C A L S P S S A Local Remote
219. ble Scope parameter specifies Domain Specific Scope the Domain Name parameter should specify the domain in which the desired variable access is defined Length of Write Data The buffer length expressed in units appropriate to the Write Data memory type Length of Domain Name Unless the Variable Type parameter specifies a named vari able has value 0 4 or 8 and the Variable Scope parameter specifies Domain Specific has the value 1 this parameter is ignored The Length of Domain Name parameter speci fies the number of characters in the name of the domain in the remote application in whose scope the variable to be written is defined Domain Name Used to specify the Name of the domain in the remote application associated with a named variable in a Domain Specific scope Write Data or Buffer Address When the amount of data to be sent is 162 octets or less this parameter contains the actual data to be transferred When the amount of data to be sent exceeds 162 octets word offset 53 contains a memory type see Table 6 16 and word offset 54 contains the PLC memory offset of where the actual data exists Write Indication Service 6 32 The Write Indication Service uses the Write Indication bit bit 8 of the Association Status Word to indicate that the remote application requested to write local PLC memory The Ethernet Interface writes the data and responds to this request The Write Indication is for information only no action
220. button to cause the new Soft Switch values to take effect If the values shown are not what you want repeat step 10 supplying the proper values Caution Softswitch values set by the CHSOS WStation Manager command will be over riddenby values configured in the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator the next time the LAN Interface board restarts Correct Results of Soft Switch Configuration m Ifthe values displayed from the CHSOSW command are not correct reenter the command with the desired parameters Enter the command SOSW to see the current Soft Switch values m If the Soft Switch LED pattern is displayed but no sign on message or prompt appears on the terminal check the construction and connections of the serial cable and verify that the terminal is operating at the 9600 bps data rate The sign on message can be repeated by pressing the LAN Interface Restart button GFK 0868 Appendix E Soft Switch Parameters E 5 Appendix Station Configuration Parameters The LAN configuration parameters allow the station to communicate in a variety of network environments This appendix describes the entire set of configuration parameters Most of these parameters can be changed in the configuration file on the hard disk using the GEnet System Manager GSM and then downloaded to the LAN Interface The parameters can also be viewed online using the Station Manager SHOW command You will notice that the parameter names shown here and used by t
221. c data on the Message Line third line from the top For GEnet Ethernet Interfaces the leftmost 16 digits of the long string of digits on the right half of the Message Line show the corresponding GEnet log Events and Entries 2 3 and 4 in that order This information can be used to refer directly to detailed fault descriptions in this chapter Table 9 10 without using a GSM For detailed information about these tools refer to the appropriate references in the table below Table 9 1 Ethernet Interface Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Tool Description Reference LEDs Visualobservation of Ethernet Interface Chapters 2 9 COMM REQ Status Word Access from PLC ladder program Chapter 5 LAN Interface Status Word Access from PLC ladder program Chapter 5 AssociationControlBlock Access from PLC ladder program Chapter 6 Log Access from Station Manager Chapters 4 9 Log Access from PLC ladder program Chapter 7 Extended Status Buffer Access from Station Manager Chapter 4 Extended Status Buffer Access from PLC ladder program Chapter 7 Tallies Access from Station Manager Chapter 4 Tallies Access from PLC ladder program Chapter 7 PLC Fault Table Ethernet Interface exceptionslogged with Chapter9 CPU AlsoGFK 0265 Using this Chapter This chapter contains five troubleshooting sections that correspond to the five main states of the Ethernet Interface If you have a problem first identify in which state the problem occurred Then go to
222. cation Program Invocation Count 0 4 DownloadSegmentRequest 18 DeleteProgramInvocation Response 5 DownloadSegmentConfirm More 19 DeleteProgramInvocationResponse Follows True 6 DownloadSegmentConfirm More 20 CreateProgramInvocationIndication Follows False Program Invocation Count gt 0 7 DownloadSegmentConfirm 21 CreateProgramInvocation Response or 8 TerminateDownloadSequenceRequest 22 DeleteProgramInvocationIndication Program Invocation Count gt 1 9 TerminateDownloadSequenceConfirm 23 DeleteProgramInvocation Response or or 10 TerminateDownloadSequence Request 24 DeleteDomainIndication Discard False 11 TerminateDownloadSequenceConfirm 25 DeleteDomain Response 12 TerminateDownloadSequenceConfirm 26 DeleteDomain Response 13 TerminateDownloadSequence Request 27 AbortIndication Discard True 14 CreateProgramInvocation IndicationProgram Invocation Count 0 GFK 0868 Prior to being created from the network or from some local action the domain is ina NON EXISTENT state There is no object associated with this state and this state should never be reported for a domain object Other intermediate states exist e g COMPLETE and INCOMPLETE which occur during download of a domain Refer to the following table for intermediate and concluding domain states Appendix B ISO Networking Concepts B 19 Table B 5 Domain States Domain
223. causes the Ethernet Interface to be restarted without causing the software to be reloaded It has the same effect as pressing the Restart pushbutton on the front edge of the Ethernet Interface quickly 2 3 seconds Any data transfer be tween the Series 90 70 PLC and the network at the time the RESTART command is en tered is permanently lost A typical RESTART command is shown below restart Restarting LAN Interface RIB Command 4 32 The RIB command has the form RIB lt page gt where lt page gt is an optional page number which defaults to 1 This command displays one page of information from the Network Layer Routing In formation Base RIB This gives the routing of NSAP s to Link Layer addresses This routing information is maintained dynamically by the Network Layer ES IS protocol However if static routing has been configured for this station on the GSM for a given NSAP the static routing will take precedence A typical RIB command is shown below gt rib lt lt lt RIB Table gt gt gt Page 1 of 1 Dest NSAP lt lt 08001901001234fe gt gt First HOP NSAP lt lt 08001901001234fe gt gt First HOP MAC Addr lt lt 08001901001234 gt gt First HOP LSAP feH Permanent Entry Dest NSAP lt lt 08001901001230fe gt gt First HOP NSAP lt lt 08001901001230fe gt gt First HOP MAC Addr lt lt 08001901001230 gt gt First HOP LSAP feH Permanent Entry MMS Ethernet Communications for the Ser
224. ceiver or transceiver cable Connect cable amp transceiver ONLINE Off not properly connected SOE not enabled on transceiver Set SOE ON on transceiver in ac cord with manufacturer s instruc tions LAN Online Soft Swtich set to Use LM90 configurator to set NO LAN Online Soft Switch to YES See Procedure3 MODULE OK On Operational Exception condition occurred Use the Station Manager LOG ONLINE On command as explained in STATUS OK Off Chapter 9 under the section Troubleshooting When STATUS OK LED is OFF MODULE OK Soft Switch Entry Invalid Soft Switch Data Soft Correct Soft Switch Data and Re BlinkingSlowly Utility Switch Data checksum invalid start or Reload Ethernet Interface System Software detected incom See Procedures3and or4 patibleMACaddressassignments Certain system errors MODULE OK Off Power Up Restart Fatal Error Inspect the Interface for loose components reseat the Interface andRestart Recheck Logicmaster 90 Configuration Examine PLC Fault Table for clues If the prob lem persists replace the Interface GFK 0868 Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 11 Procedure 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90 70 PLC Module Configuration Before you can use the Ethernet Interface with the Series 90 70 PLC you must define the Interface to the PLC This is called module configuration This is done through the Lo gicmaster 90 70 configurat
225. ch broadcasts to all nodes in the network Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 43 The TEST ALL command can be used to return a list of all the other stations on the net work For the MAP Interface the output from the TEST command shows the token passing order of stations in the logical ring The results of the last TEST command are maintained until the Modify security level is exited either by a timeout or by the LOGOUT command Also the REPORT command can be used to view the results of a test which has been completed or the current results of a test in progress Atypical TEST command is shown below Page 1 of 1 test 0800190100fb 100H Test initiated lt lt lt Test Results gt gt gt Command test lt lt 08001901001f gt gt 100H 32H 1H ALT Init node lt lt 08001901001f gt gt Frames sent 100H Nodes responding 1H Responding nodes Response recd Response w err No Response lt lt 0800190100fb gt gt 100H OH OH TIME Command 4 44 The TIME command has the form TIME This command causes the current system time to be displayed This time is used in gen erating time stamps for messages which require them This time is also used as a time stamp for events in the exception log displayed by the LOG command The initial value of the time on restart power up or load is read from the local PLC CPU If this is not available it is set to 00 00 00 0 midnight Time values are based on a 24 hour clock The Modify command
226. corre sponds to the unique MAC_ADDRESS which physically identifies the station on the net work It is also used to modify certain configuration parameters for a station When the Edit configuration keys Alt E are pressed in this menu the GSM calls the Configuration Editor required for that specific Station Type of GEnet Interface Factory LAN System Manager GSM Version 2 64 Download Station Access Station Manager Configure Station STATION NAME STATION TVPE LOAD TVPE MAC_ADDRESS LOAD_GROUP E lt ADDR EREE SLOT TIME gt COMMENTS LOAD_TYPE SELECTIONS EXIGE E a Station Name or lt lt MAC Address gt gt of configured Station Press Alt L for List Enter new data or select station name from list and access Configuration Editor CAI1t E Config Editor CAlt D Del Stm CAIt K KEY HELP CAl1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 3 4 Configure a Station Screen Note A form has been provided to assist you in recording Configuration data Refer to Appendix I Forms GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 19 Creating a Station Configuration File Type in or select desired values for the STATION NAME STATION_TYPE fields etc See the description of screen fields below 2 Press Alt E to enter the Configuration Editor Field Definitions for the Configure a Station Screen STATION NAME A name 1 to 20 characters which is
227. creased to free up PC memory usage MAX_RX_SIZE Maximum RX frame buffer size This is the largest frame which may be received by the GSM Incoming data frames which exceed this size will be ig nored A zero length response is returned when an incoming test frame is received which exceeds this size Defaults to 560 bytes for Network GSM use GFK 0868 Appendix H Sample DOS System Files H 9 Appendix I GFK 0868 Forms Data forms have been provided in this appendix for your convenience in recording test and configuration data for each station Table l 1 MMS Ethernet Station Configuration Data Configure a Series 90 70 MMS Station Screen STATION_NAME STATION_TYPE LOAD_TYPE MAC_ADDRES COMMENTS Data Link ParametersScreen TX_RING_LEN RX_RING_LEN NetworkLayer ParametersScreen NSAP LSAP FE Transport SessionLayer Screen MAX PDUSZ LOG2 WINDOW SIZE REF TIMEOUT RETRAN COUNT GIVEUP TIMEOUT INACTIVE TIMEOUT RETRAN TIMEOUT WINDOW TIMEOUT USE CHECKSUM ACK DELAY TIME SESSION TIMEOUT TSAP 0001 ApplicationProcesses Screen MMS RESPONDER COMMON NAME APT OBJ ID AE_QUAL PSAP SSAP APPLICATION INTERFACE COMMON_NAME APT OBJ ID AE_QUAL PSAP SSAP Association ParametersScreen MAX_RESP_ASSOC MAX_APPL_ASSOC Local Application DIB Screen AP_COMMON NAME STATION_NAME AP_COMMON
228. ction to the Ethernet Interface Series 90 70 PLC lad der logic commands use the COMMunication REQuest COMM_REQ and a block of words called the Message Definition Block MDB to communicate with the Ethernet Interface To successfully program communication commands you must understand how to per form each of the following steps 1 2 3 Program the COMM REO instruction Program the COMM REQ Function Block Use the COMM REQ Status Word and the LAN Interface Status Word to monitor the status of the COMM REQ commands of the Ethernet Interface and of the LAN COMM _ REQ FUNCTION 244134 BLOCK DEVICE COMM _ REQ LAN INTERFACE INDEPENDENT STATUS WORD STATUS WORD AREA CRSW LISW MDB COMMAND COMMAND MESSAGE DEFINITION BLOCK DETAILS Figure 5 1 General Format for COMM_REQs 5 2 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Using the COMM_REQ Instruction The COMMunication REQuest COMM_REQ ladder instruction opens a window be tween the Series 90 70 PLC CPU and the Ethernet Interface Information in the Message Definition Block MDB is transferred from the PLC CPU to the Ethernet Interface while the window is open The COMM REO function block has two parts Device Independent Area DIA and the Message Definition Block MDB Device Independent Area The Device Independent Area provides information about the Message Definiti
229. ctly 1 Power up the PLC This will initiate a series of diagnostic tests Upon power up the Module OK LED blinks On Line and Status OK LEDs are OFF 2 Observe the local Station Manager screen if connected If power up is successful then a Station Manager message similar to the following will be displayed normally within 15 seconds IC697 PLC Factory LAN Interface Copyright c 1990 1994 All rights reserved PROM version 1 14 Software version 1 13 MMS Ethernet MAC address lt lt 080019010177 gt gt Serial no 01913826 MAC default lt lt 080019010177 gt gt 3 Also the LEDs will have the following pattern upon successful power up At this time the Interface is in the Operational State LED Interface On Line Module OK ON On Line ON Status OK ON MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Problems During Power Up The Interface may not transition directly to the Operational State upon power up or restart It may stop in another state or a fault may have been detected Refer to the table below for possible states your Ethernet Interface can assume after completion of power up diagnostics LED Pattern Where Stopped Possible Cause Corrective Actions MODULE OK On LoaderUtility Interface requires a re load of Load the Communication Soft STATUS OK Blinking communicationssoftware ware See Procedure 4 MODULE OK On Operational Trans
230. d Applications m Setup GSM m Exit to DOS List All Stations Screen The List All Stations screen displays a list of all of stations that are configured in the GSM directory on the hard disk A typical List All Stations screen is shown below Factory LAN System Manager CGSMD gt Version 2 84 Station List gt Station Name Station Type Load Type MAC Address Comments STAL SERIES_96 70 180882 3 680019000000 STAZ SERIES_96 70 180882 3 680019000001 STAZ SERIES_98 78 ISOS882 3 888819888883 HOST1 FOREIGN DEU N 888819888884 C END OF LIST J Scroll Page Search through the list and view station details cAlt P Create Print File gt CAlt U Views CALt K KEY HELP CAL1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 18 List All Stations Screen This screen displays the following information about each station m Station Name m Station Type m Load Type m Station MAC Address Comments Use the Up Arrow Down Arrow PgUp PgDn Home and End keys to examine the list of configured stations The details about a specific station can be examined by pressing Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 43 the Alt V key When you press the Alt V key you are prompted for the name of the sta tion to examine If you enter a blank field the top item in the menu is examined The detailed information about a specific station additionally includes m Configuration File Name m Date and time Last configured
231. d VariableList 3 Named Type 4 Semaphore 5 EventCondition 6 Event Action 7 EventEnrollment 8 Journal 9 Domain 10 ProgramInvocation 11 OperatorStation Object Scope The scope over which the MMS object is defined Table 6 54 Object Scope Values Value Object Scope 0 VMDspecific 1 Domainspecific 2 Applicationassociationspecific Length of Continue After Name Should be set to the number of characters in the Con tinue After Name parameter If the Length of Continue After Name parameter is set to zero names are retrieved beginning with the first name in the list Continue After Name This string can be used to begin retrieving names from a point other than at the beginning of the list Names are stored in alphabetical order to facili tate getting a partial list Maximum Length of Name Buffer The list of names is returned in the Name Buffer parameter as a sequence of NULL terminated strings The Length of Name Buffer pa rameter should be set to the maximum number of octets that can be used to hold the Name Buffer parameter If the length specified is insufficient to return all of the data only the specified number of octets is returned and a truncation indication most signifi cant bit of the length is given Length of Domain Name Specifies the number of characters in the name for the do main in whose scope the requested Object Names should reside A zero 0 on this field indicates no domain name associa
232. d a second capability table could be defined for an index table in a Programmable Logic Controller PLC which was capable of controlling both devices Capabilities may be shared or overlapped as needed There are two capabilities that have special meaning to the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface BASEADDR and HIGHADDR The BASEADDR capability has special meaning when it appears in the capability list of a domain which is being downloaded This capability can be used to specify the beginning address at which the domain is to be loaded The form of the capability string is BASEADDR lt symbolic address gt where lt symbolic address gt is a valid Series 90 70 PLC symbolic address from Chapter 6 The HIGHADDR capability has special meaning when it appears in the capability list of the VMD see Chapter 4 the Station Manager CAP command It gives the highest configured value for each of the memory types Register R Analog Input AI and Analog Output AQ This allows a remote device to determine the size of those Series 90 70 PLC memory tables by examining the VMDs capability list The HIGHADDR capability also has special meaning when it appears in the capability list of a domain that has been downloaded This capability is used to specify the ending address of the domain The form of the capability string is HIGHADDR symbolic address In the CNC no capabilities are supported or allowed Domain Objects GFK 08
233. d and write PLC memory The window is executed automatically once per PLC scan Forward Channel Ina broadband LAN the channel assigned for data transmission from the headend to the data stations Frame A data structure that consists of fields predetermined by a protocol for the transmission of user data and control data Gateway A functional unit that connects a Local Area Network to another network us ing different protocols GEnet A trademark of GE Fanuc Automation used to designate members of a family of hardware and software products that connect GE Fanuc PLCs and CNCs to indus try standard Local Area Networks specifically IEEE 802 3 Ethernet and IEEE 802 4 MAP networks GEnet System Manager GSM A personal computer executing GSM software The GSM is used to create and modify configuration information and to load software and configuration information to each GEnet LAN Interface The GSM may com municate with the LAN Interface through a local serial port connection to the LAN Interface or across the network when a suitable PC network interface is installed Global Address Administration Address administration in which all LAN individual addresses are unique within the same or other Local Area Networks See also Lo cal Address Administration Group Address An LLC address that identifies a group of data stations on a Local Area Network GSM See GEnet System Manager Hands off Service A mode of application o
234. d as an octet string A value of all 0 s for this parameter means the default multicast load address lt lt 090060000000 gt gt is used This parameter may not be the broadcast address but must be a multicast address The mms and pgmr enable parameters define the type of communications software which can download the Ethernet Interface mms refers to full MMS communications software pgmr refers to the communications software downloaded by Logicmaster 90 software enable dc req prhb defines further conditions of the download where dc Don t Care req Required prhb Prohibited The default is Don t Care For example the command CHSOSW PGMR PRHB prohibits the Logicmaster 90 Net work Utilities from downloading this Ethernet Interface Only the GSM can download this interface In addition once the interface is downloaded Logicmaster 90 Ethernet Utilities will be prevented from connecting to this PLC system Refer also to the Logic master 90 Ethernet Communications User s Manual GFK 0780 The CHSOSW command does not require that every parameter be entered If a Soft Switch label amp alue pair is omitted one of two results occur depending on the current Soft Switch data If the current data is determined to be valid any parameters that are not entered are left unchanged However if the Soft Switch data is determined to be invalid all parameters omitted are set to their respective default values Default values are shown
235. data from the remote application is in the Status Buffer specified in the status re quest MDB The status data has the following format Table 6 43 Status Buffer Use Word Offset Value LocalDetail Octet Length 0 0 16 MostSignificant8 Bits VMD LogicalStatus 1 See Table6 47 LeastSignificant8 bits VMD PhysicalStatus See Table6 48 First 16 octets of Status Local Detail if itis present 2 9 DeviceSpecific Unsolicited Status Request 8252 The Unsolicited Status services are used to report status changes in the local VMD which may not otherwise be apparent to the remote application The two Unsolicited Status services are UnsolicitedStatus Request and Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication The UnsolicitedStatus Request command is used to send the local VMD status to the re mote peer The UnsolicitedStatus Request is an unconfirmed service The COMM REO format for the UnsolicitedStatus Request command is shown in the table below Table 6 44 UnsolicitedStatus Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 12 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8252 203CH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Length of Status Local Detail 9 0 16 Status Local Detail 10 17 Applicationsp
236. ddress is a character string which symbolically represents a memory location R24 for example Memory in the Series 90 70 PLC may be accessed by the use of Sym bolic Addresses The Symbolic Addresses defined for the Series 90 70 PLC are shown in the table below When referencing a symbolic address leading zeros are optional Unless specified other wise in the MMS request data from the Register Table and Analog I O tables are re turned as unsigned 16 bit integer scalar from all other tables as Boolean scalar Table 6 17 Series 90 70 PLC Symbolic Addresses Series 90 70 PLC Symbolic Address Description Data Type Size R00001 R65535 Registers Unsigned Integer 16 bits AI00001 A1I65535 AnalogInput Unsigned Integer 16 bits AQ00001 AQ65535 AnalogOutput Unsigned Integer 16 bits 100001 165535 Discrete Input Boolean 1 bit Q00001 Q65535 Discrete Output Boolean 1 bit 000001 065535 Discrete Output Alternate form Boolean 1 bit T00001 T65535 Discrete Temporary Boolean 1 bit M00001 M65535 Discrete Internal Boolean 1 bit G00001 G65535 GeniusSeamless Boolean 1 bit SA00001 SA65535 Special Contacts A Boolean 1 bit SB00001 SB65535 Special Contacts B Boolean 1 bit SC00001 SC65535 Special Contacts C Boolean 1 bit S00001 S65535 System Fault Read only Boolean 1 bit Unconstrained Addresses Unconstrained Addresses have no MMS defined structure beyond being a sequence of oc tets which must be
237. ddress only the screens generally used in the configura tion process not screens used for tuning advanced networks or entering special routing information in advanced networks The screens marked with an asterisk in the figure below are discussed in Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Net work GSM Main Menu Download Station Address Station Manager Configure a Station Configure Network Wide Parameters List All Stations List All Configured Applications Setup GSM System Network Parameters Menu Load Group Parameters 802 4 Network Parameters Application DIBs Exit to DOS 7 Layer Application DIB 3 Layer Application DIB Setup GSM Menu Change Password Set Download Mode Set Station Manager Mode Configure a Station Menu Press Alt E t Y Series 90 70 Ethernet Station Configuration Editor Menu Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu ISO Parameters MMS Parameters System Parameters Print File Variable Names Maximum MMS Message Size Data Link Parameters Network Layer Parameters Network Layer RIB Table Transport Session Layer Parameters Application Processes Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes Association Parameters Local Application DIB Figure 3 3 GSM Menu Structure Application Process mini MAP Application Process NOTE Scree
238. dentify Positive Confirm Data ssssssssssleles ee 6 60 Table 6 51 Cancel Request COMM REQ 0 en 6 61 Table 6 52 Get Remote Name List COMM REQ sese 6 62 Table 6 53 Object Class Values ers sia eiea i E E E E Ile 6 63 Table 6 54 Object Scope Values sirs Aiie a e E E a EE a E E E A A E EE O T 6 63 Table 6 55 Get Remote Name List Data sssssssssseeel ee 6 64 Table 6 56 Error Request COMM REQ 1 en 6 64 Table 6 57 Examine Reject Indication Data 0 6 6 eens 6 65 Table 6 58 Examine Last Error Information Data isses 6 66 Table 6 59 Define Application COMM REQ sssssssssse e lee 6 67 Table 6 60 MMS Error Values cse oe Re ede R9 RE pte re er e ya eh rec gna n 6 69 Table 6 61 Data Access Errors sol ea eaa e een 6 70 Table 6 62 MMS Reject Values st i A Ae e a Ile 6 70 Table 7 1 Station Manager PLC Commands 6666s 7 1 Table 7 2 Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request COMM REQ 066 cece eee eee 7 2 Table 7 3 Extended Status Buffer Data 0 0 00000 cece en 7 2 Table 7 4 Retrieve Tallies Request COMM REQ 0 cece n 7 4 Table 7 5 Tallies Structure and Offsets isssssssssssseeeeeee eee eee eee 7 5 Table 7 6 Retrieve Log Events Request COMM_REQ 2 nee eens 7 6 Table 7 7 EVent LOg Form t 221 emen tHe Berend Ran todo Pack arte IR eR eh bs 7 6 Table 7 8 Restart Ethernet Interface Request COMM_REQ 0 6 66 cence eens 7
239. e or the Maximum LLC Data Buffer Size by a margin sufficient to allow for protocol header overhead The Buffer Size of the Buffer Pools must be specified in increasing order as follows Buffer Size Pool 1 lt Buffer Size Pool2 lt Buffer Size Pool3 lt Buffer Size Pool 4 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 25 8 26 The ranges for the Buffer Pool Parameter values are BUFFER_POOL_1 Buffer Pool 1 memory allocation BUFFER SIZE Valid range of 1 to 1024 octets Defaults to 28 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter bbuff1 MEMORY ALLOCATION Valid range of 1 to 97 percent Defaults to 9 percent Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter balloc1 BUFFER POOL 2 Buffer Pool 2 memory allocation BUFFER SIZE Valid range of 1 to 2048 octets Defaults to 60 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter bbuff2 MEMORY ALLOCATION Valid range of 1 to 97 percent Defaults to 7 percent Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter balloc2 BUFFER POOL 3 Buffer Pool 3 memory allocation BUFFER SIZE Valid range of 1 to 4096 octets Defaults to 380 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter bbuff3 MEMORY ALLOCATION Valid range of 1 to 97 percent Defaults to 45 percent Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter balloc3 BUFFER POOL 4 Buffer Pool 4 memory allocation BUFFER SIZE Valid range of 540 to 8192 octets Defaults to 1569 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter bbuff4 MEMORY ALLOCATION
240. e 2 3 Table 3 1 802 3 Ethernet Cards for the PC 0 cc cece eee eee eee ees 3 5 Table 3 2 Default PC Hardware Settings for 802 3 Ethernet Cards 666 cece eee ee eee 3 6 Table 3 3 GSM Keyboard Functions Alt K 2 0 0 0 0 000 cece eee eens 3 15 Table 4 1 Monitor Commands 0 e en 4 7 Table 4 2 Modify Commands enn eee 4 9 Table 4 3 Task Identifiers e re e ee te e ee ute a eet ccd e E eit 4 10 Table 4 4 Soft Switch Entry Utility Commands 6 6 eee eens 4 13 Table 4 5 Field Network Test Utility Commands 6 c cnn rnnr 4 15 Table 4 6 Control Characters 2 0 0 eee en 4 16 Table 4 7 Load Source Parameters 0 0 en 4 20 Table 4 8 Soft Switch Default Values for the Ethernet Interface 666 4 21 Table 4 9 Exception Log Event Definitions 006 6 4 26 Table 4 10 Configuration Parameters 0 c cc ee 4 34 Table 4 11 Application Layer Tallies Tally a 2 0 0 66 4 37 Table 4 12 System Memory Tallies Tally b 2 0 0 6 eens 4 38 Table 4 13 PLC Driver Tallies Tallyc 0 eee i eee 4 38 Table 4 14 Distributed Directory Protocol DDP Tallies Tally d 0 0 00 e ee eee 4 38 Table 4 15 ACSE Tallies Tally e i pa a eee een eee 4 39 Table 4 16 Data Link Tallies part of Tally l 2 0 0 6 ccc eee eens 4 39 Table 4 17 MAC Layer Tallies part of Tally 0 0 6 6 nee eens 4 40 Table 4 18 MMS Provider Tallies Tally m 0
241. e 24 MAY 1990 Date 24 MAY 1990 4 18 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 CHLTIME Command The CHLTIME command has the form CHLTIME lt minutes gt where lt minutes gt is a login timeout value expressed in minutes which has a range of 0 to 32767 The CHLTIME command is used to change the login timeout value This change remains in effect until it is explicitly changed or until the next LOGOUT command is entered If the number of minutes specified is zero no timeout is enforced Atypical CHLTIME command is shown below chltime 5 Login timeout 5 min CHSOSW Command The CHSOSW command has the form CHSOSW lt soft switch data gt def where lt soft switch data gt is the parameter string mac lt MAC_address gt 1dsrc lt load_source gt lanonline lt yes_no gt bponline lt yes_no gt 1dmac lt load_addr gt mms lt enable gt pgmr lt enable gt enable dc req prhb and where lt yes_no gt yes no lt load_source gt alt net loc enable dc req prhd and CHSOSW def causes default values to be set The CHSOSW command causes new data to be placed into the Soft Switches EEPROM of the Ethernet Interface Notes 1 The changes made with either the Logicmaster 90 Configurator or the CHSOSW command will not take effect until the next Ethernet Interface restart 2 Ifthe PLC CPU has been properly configured
242. e MMS Service Agent encounters an unexpected MMS Service event Agentevents Entry 2 of the logged event contains one of the following error codes 1 2 LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Could not find the index into the Data Transfer Table LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Backplanedriver returned a bad status Entry 3 contains status code Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request CPU Nacked a request Entry 3 Major status Entry 4 Minor Status These are error codes returned by the CPU See Table 16 and 17 in GFK 0582B Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request Aread request returned an unexpected amount of data Entry 3 contains the actual data size Entry 4 contains the expected data size LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Unexpected More follows condition was indicated by the Backplane driver Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request Unexpected Unsolicited message type was received Entry 3 contains the message type code Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request CPUNACKed a request 3 times due to congestion Entry 3 contains the status code Entry 4 contains additional status data Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 21 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Code Possible Cause and Resolution Event c LLCevents This event is logged when the LLC layer encounters an unexpectedcondition E
243. e Series 90 70 PLC Executing the Example PLC Ladder Program GFK 0868 A complete understanding of the Ethernet Interface COMMunication REQuests COMM REOS is not necessary to execute the example ladder If you wish to know more details refer to Chapter 5 General PLC Application Programming A printout of the example ladder program is shown in Appendix G Ladder Diagram for Network Testing The example ladder program contains the following communication requests m nitiate Request in the ASSOCI program block m Read Request in the RDREG program block m Write Request in the WRTREG program block In the example program the communication parameters for these requests are held in the Block Move BLKMV INT function blocks This transfers the parameters to the ap Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 23 propriate registers The Block Move function blocks are followed by a single Commu nication Request COMM_REQ function block This transfers the communication com mand from the PLC CPU to the Ethernet Interface Before a Read or a Write request to a remote station can be executed an association must first be established between the local and the remote stations Once an association has been established the local station can Read the memory on the remote station Write a different value to that same memory location on the remote station then Read the re mote station s memory again The data returned by the t
244. e a network design framework to allow equipment from different vendors to be able to communicate Reference Appendix B Path The sequence of segments and repeaters providing the connectivity between two DTE s In CSMA CD networks there is one and only one path between any two DTE s Peer Another entity at the same level layer in the communication hierarchy Peer Peer Communication between stations at the same level or layer in the hierarchy Physical Address The unique address associated with a particular station on the Local Area Network LAN Physical Layer Layer 1 of the OSI Model This layer defines the electrical mechanical and timing aspects of the signal transmission over a medium GFK 0868 Appendix AGlossary of Terms A 9 A 10 Presentation Layer Layer 6 of the OSI Model The Presentation Layer is concerned with data format Program Invocation The MMS Program Invocation objects are dynamic elements which can be thought of as executable portions of a task Program Invocations have names which are used to identify them and internal states which describe what they are capable of doing Protocol A set of rules for exchanging messages between two communicating pro cesses Protocol Data Unit PDU Information that is delivered as a unit between peer entities of a local area network LAN and that contains control information address in formation and may contain data Read Services Communication services used to obtain
245. e association context that is to be used for this association The parameter may have one of the following values on the Ethernet Interface 0 MMS IS 9506 services over 7 layer ACSE Hesentation 10 MMS DIS 9506 services over 7 layer ACSE Hesentation Maximum Message Size The suggested maximum message size from the remote peer application Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 13 6 14 Maximum Services Outstanding Calling The suggested maximum number of out standing services on the association to be initiated from the remote peer application Maximum Services Outstanding Called The suggested maximum number of out standing services on the association to be permitted to the Series 90 70 PLC application Length of Remote Application Common Name The octet length of the remote Ap plication Common Name This name may be up to 64 characters for the 7 layer ACSE Presentation context Remote Application Common Name A character string indicating the Application Common Name of the remote peer application attempting to initiate this association Any unused characters max string length is 64 will be zero filled Length of Application Context Name The number of characters in the Application Context Name Application Context Name A character string indicating the Application Context Name MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Initiate Response Command 82
246. e command TRACE with no arguments shows what tasks are currently printing trace information the time remaining for an active trace and the active len_ref value The command TRACE causes all tracing to be dis abled Caution Once trace has been initiated from a remote Station Manager trace output continues to be sent to that remote Station Manager until terminated as described above Trace output continues even if the remote Station Manager is disconnected or logged into another station Be sure to stop your traces Detailing the interpretation of the trace data is beyond the scope of this document It requires expertise in the internal operation of the OSI protocols that is not needed by most users of the network Atypical TRACE command is shown below trace mz Trace enabled for mz minutes remaining 10 len_ref 48 If you attempt a trace of the Data Link layer when it is not allowed a response similar to the example above will be displayed then followed by the message Trace not allowed for Data Link layer in remote mode If other task letters were also specified in addition to the disallowed Data Link layer task the trace will be executed for them MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 VAR Command The VAR command has the form VAR lt page gt where lt page gt is an optional page number which defaults to 1 This command displays one page of VMD sp
247. e default station password If you are prompted to enter a password type system and press Enter again NOTE If the station cannot communicate over the link you re using you will not receive any response to this command You will need to correct that problem before proceeding further 5 Type load and press Enter This causes the station to request a load 6 Press Esc to exit the Station Manager and return to the GSM Main Menu Continue at the preceding section Initiating the Download MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Procedure 5 Testing the Interfaces on the Network This procedure shows you how to verify operation of the physical network to provide the necessary foundation for reliable communications This procedure will ensure that m The cable plant is functional m The physical connection of each node is functional m All transmission paths meet or exceed the expected low bit error rate When you are testing the network be sure there is an adequate explanation for any thing unusual Logging of exceptions should be the exception not the rule Properly setup GEnet nodes and networks can run for long periods weeks or months without logging exceptions Field Network Test Utility This section describes the use of the GEnet Field Network Test Utility that is built into the Ethernet Interface All software and configuration needed to perform these tests i
248. e hardware requires correspond ing GEnet LAN Interface Software This software is provided on floppy diskettes For PLC LAN Interfaces each diskette contains the GSM software as well as the Commu nications Software and Configuration Editor for your LAN Interface Select the size of diskette you wish to use For CNC LAN Interfaces each diskette contains the GSM software as well as the Com munications Software and Configuration Editor for one Station Type LoadType e g Series 15MA Series 15TT Series 16MA etc Select the diskette that is compatible with your Station Type LoadType Caution Preserve the original software diskette as a master Set the diskette write protection to avoid damage to the diskette copy the diskette and retain the original as master software Only working copies should be used for running the software During the installation of the GSM and LAN Interface software sample DOS system files will be created in the C GSM directory When the software installation is complete you will need to modify your DOS system files based on the sample files Refer to the sections on setting up the DOS system files after you have completed the GSM software installation Perform the steps described below to install the GSM software onto your hard disk 1 Power up the PC into DOS 2 Goto the root directory of the drive on which you want to install the GSM We recommend that you install the GSM on C because the sample D
249. e letter Station Manager Task ID ACSE Association Control Service Element GSM GEnet System Manager Station LLC Logical Link Control Download Manager MAC Media Access Control Terminal MMS Manufacturing Message Specification SDM System Data Manager Data may flow between the System task and any other function a e e 4 4 GP D P m OU Y Y Y m T 3 o Zz O LLLI Lll L22 802 3 LAN Configuration il Editor GEnet System Manager Figure B 2 Relationship between Tasks and Layers of GE Fanuc Control Devices Mapping MMS Services to ACSE and Presentation Services The primary application interface between a user and a GEnet Interface is via MMS services The MMS services map into ACSE and Presentation services as shown in the table below These services are used to control the establishment and the release of an ACSE Association and data transfer over this association Table B 2 MMS Service Mapping to ACSE and Presentation Services ACSE and Presentation MMS Services Services A Associate Initiate P Dataand A Release Conclude A Abort Abort P Data Allother services B 4 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 OSI Addressing GFK 0868 At each OSI layer there is something usually hardware software or a combination of the two that implements the protocols for that layer This entity is referred to as t
250. e of No Wait flag IN7 R26 08103 The Ethernet Interface command being sent is a Restart LANInterface Request This is the first word of the MDB In this example the MDB is one word long containing the command number 8103 For MDBs that have parameters and therefore are longer than one word multiple BLKMV UINT instructions are required Rung 4 The COMM REO instruction has 3 input parameters m The IN field points to the starting location of the COMM REO parameters R20 in this example m The SYSID field of the COMM REO defines the target rack and slot of the Ethernet Interface for the COMM REQ The first two digits of SYSID 00 in this example indicate the rack number the last two digits 04 in this example indicate the slot number of the Ethernet Interface It is required for all COMM REO instructions m The TASK field of the COMM REO indicates which mailbox task ID to use for the specified rack and slot This field should always be zero 0 for the Ethernet Interface The COMM REQ has two mutually exclusive outputs OK 7001 in this example and FT Q2 in this example The OK output is turned on if the COMM REQ was success fully sent to the Ethernet Interface The FT output is turned on if there were problems in processing the COMM REQ If the FT is ON it usually indicates that there are invalid data in the Device Independent Area of the COMM REQ It may also indicate that the 7 message VME mail input q
251. e offset the older the event Log Event Length The number of log events to be retrieved Only complete events will be returned It requires 176 words 352 bytes to hold the entire system exception log The maximum number of events in the log is 16 If the log is full 16 recorded events and a new event occurs the oldest event is dropped Each log event consists of 11 words worth of information See Chapter 9 for the format and interpretation of the log events Table 7 7 Event Log Format Word Description 1 Datestamp low 2 Date stamp high 3 Timestamp low 4 Time stamp high 5 Count 6 Low byte is event code High byteis event modifier Entry 1 7 11 Log entry data Entries 2 6 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Restart Ethernet Interface Request 8103 The COMM REO for the Restart Ethernet Interface Request is described below Table 7 8 Restart Ethernet Interface Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 1 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Table 5 21 CRSW Offset 3 Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8103 1FA7H 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q Decimal Value 8 10 12 70 72 Command Number Identifies this as a Restart Ethernet Interface Request command GFK 0868 Chapter 7 Station Manager COMMunications REQuests 7 7 Chapter T
252. e specific association is in subsequent ladder com mands by this ACB location Any command for this association must specify this ACB location in its MDB Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 11 Association Context Determines which of the 7 layer contexts will be used for the association For most applications a value of 0 is used The parameter may have one of the following values on the Ethernet Interface 0 MMS IS 9506 services over 7 layer 10 MMS DIS 9506 services over 7 layer Maximum Message Size The MMS maximum message size to be used on this associa tion If non zero it must be no less than 64 and no more than mmaxmsgsz If this param eter is 0 the default maximum message size is suggested The default size corresponds to the mmaxmsgsz configuration parameter Maximum Services Outstanding Calling The number of messages which can be si multaneously outstanding on the association If this is set to 0 the value of 6 is used If set to 6 or greater the value 6 is used Maximum Services Outstanding Called The number of messages which can be simul taneously outstanding from the remote peer application Specifying the value of 0 pre vents the remote peer from being able to initiate communication If set to 6 or greater the value 6 is used Length of Remote Application Common Name The number of characters in the Ap plication Common Name This name may be up to 64 characters for 7 layer communica tions
253. e states of the Ethernet Interface The states are distinguished by LED patterns and by unique Station Manager NODE command and prompt outputs a45163 Power Up Ec Certain Pass Exceptions Restart Detected a Soft Switches OK Issue Station Manager Prompt Restart Yes i Field Network Test Utility Receive E Response Done Loader Utility RAM Software Loaded Checksum Correct The operations above the line are executed from PROM The operations below the line are executed from the Configurationand CommunicationsSoftware downloaded by the user Figure 2 4 States of the Ethernet Interface Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface The Ethernet Interface will normally transition from the Power Up State to the Opera tional State without entering any other state If there is a problem with the Soft Switch data however the Ethernet Interface will tran sition automatically to the Soft Switch Entry State see Appendix E for instructions And if you have not previously downloaded a station configuration to the Interface the Interface will transition automatically to the Loader Utility see Procedures 5 and 6 for instructions Also the operator may manually cause the Interface to enter the Field Network Test Utility Powering Up the Interface 2 10 Follow the procedure below to verify that the Interface is operating corre
254. ecently upgraded be sure that compatible PROM firmware is installed in the Ethernet Interface This fault causes entry into the Soft Switch Entry Utility System Error 03 This error indicates that an outdated configuration data file has been loaded into the Ethernet Interface along with the software Entry 3 indicates the lowest required configuration data file version for the software Entry 4 indicates the actual loaded configuration data version Check that the proper configuration data file is being downloaded by the GSM If the Ethernet Interface software or the GSM itself has been recently upgraded it may be necessary to update the configuration data file for this station This fault causes entry into the Soft Switch Entry Utility System Error 04 This error indicates that an improper configuration file has been loaded for this station The MAC address within the configuration file does not match the MAC address supplied by the SoftSwitches The system cannot initialize with an improper configuration file Check that the properMAC address is set in the Soft Switches Also check that the station is configured with the proper MAC address in the GSM and that the proper configuration file is being downloaded by the GSM Entries 3 4 and 5 indicate the 12 digit MAC address obtained from the configuration file The MAC address obtained from Soft Switches may be displayed with the NODE and SOSW Station Manager commands This fault causes ent
255. ecific 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Unsolicited Status Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Length of Status Local Detail The number of octets in the Status Local Detail Status Local Detail The application specific Status Local Detail can be used to convey additionalinformation about the VMD The VMD Logical Status and the VMD Physical Status will be set by the Ethernet Interface software Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 55 L6 Unsolicited Status Indication Service The Unsolicited Status Indication Service uses the Unsolicited Status Indication bit bit 10 of the ASW to indicate that the remote application sent Unsolicited Status When indi cated the ladder program should issue an Examine Unsolicited Status Indication command Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication Command 8253 The Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication command requests that the unsolicited status information from a remote application be transferred into the memory of the Series 90 70 PLC This indication is detected by bit 10 of the ACB Association Status Word The COMM REO format for this command is shown in the table below Table 6 45 Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 6 Wai
256. ecific MMS named variables starting at the specified page Variable object attributes includes the variable name its associated data type type size base address etc See the Variable Names Screen in Chapter 3 for details A typical VAR command is shown below gt var lt lt lt VMD Specific Variable Names gt gt gt Page 1 of 1 Data Type Reference Bit Variable Name Type Size Pfx Locat Count Off Array VARIABLE NAME 1 09 10H R 0001H 20H OH 0 VARIABLE NAME 2 09 10H R 0021H 20H OH 0 VARIABLE NAME 3 09 10H R 0041H 20H OH 0 VMD Command The VMD command has the form VMD This command displays the current state of the MMS Virtual Manufacturing Device VMD A typical VMD command is shown below gt vmd lt lt lt VMD Status gt gt gt VMD Logical Status STATE CHANGES ALLOWED 0 VMD Physical Status OPERATIONAL 0 GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 47 Chapter General PLC Application Programming 5 This chapter contains general information on ladder logic programming for the Series 90 70 GEnet Ethernet Interfaces The following topics are discussed in this chapter m Commands supported through PLC ladder logic m Programming COMMunication REQuests m The COMM REQ Status Word CRSW m The LAN Interface Status Word LISW Commands Supported Through Ladder Logic There are two types of commands supported through the Series 90 70 PLC ladder logic communications commands and Station Manager comma
257. ects and Their Attributes GFK 0868 The Manufacturing Message Specification MMS defines a standard set of services in each manufacturing device implementing MMS These services are used to access parts of the manufacturing device Each part is known as an object The MMS services and objects work together to present a standard view of all manufacturing devices to the network By using MMS services an MMS application can change the state of a peer MMS application in clearly defined and predictable ways Details of how MMS objects interact are described below Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 11 Object Scope Each object in MMS has an associated scope The scope of a name is the range of visibility of the name MMS defines three scopes VMD wide scope domain wide scope and Application Association wide scope A name with a VMD wide or VMD specific scope can be seen by all objects in the VMD It exists for as long as the VMD exists A name with a domain wide or domain specific scope can be seen by all objects in a domain but not by objects outside the domain It exists for as long as the domain that contains it exists and ceases to exist when its containing domain is destroyed Similarly aname with an Application Association wide or AA specific scope can be seen by all objects defined on that association It exists for as long as the defining association exists and is destroyed when the defining association is destroyed Each object re
258. ed by the Ethernet Interface software Conclude Confirm Service The Conclude Confirm Service uses the Positive and Negative Confirm bits in the Associa tion Status Word of the ACB This service tells whether the remote application allowed the termination of the association If the Conclude Request received a positive confirm then the association ceases to exist and no further communication is possible using that association If the Negative Confirm bit in the ASW or the Error Indication bit in the ASWE are set this indicates that your Conclude Request was refused You may wish to examine the response message using the Examine Last Error Information command If you still wish to bring down the association you may do so with the Abort Request command GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 19 6 Abort Request Command 8207 The Abort Request command is used to abruptly conclude the association This results in the immediate termination of the ACSE Association using the ACSE A Abort service The COMM_REQ format for the Abort Request command is shown in the table below Table 6 12 Abort Request COMM_REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 3 Wait NdWNait Flag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8207 200FH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 As
259. ed connector disassemble it heat it above 100C 212F incinerate it or expose its cell contents to water Dispose of the battery as required by applicable ordinances or regulations When replacing the battery use only Catalog No IC697ACC701 Use of another battery could result in ignition or explosion of the battery Replacement batteries can be ordered from GE Fanuc Automation NA or any GE Fanuc Authorized Distributor The 9 pin serial port RS 232 interface is used to connect to the GEnet System Manager GSM The communication software on the distribution diskette may be loaded through this port A cable is needed to connect the GSM to the Ethernet Interface see Appendix D Communications Ports Characteristics The faceplate of the Interface must be open to connect the cable The serial port may also be used with a serial terminal for local Station Management AUI Transceiver Port The 15 pin AUI port provides the electrical and mechanical interface to the user pro vided IEEE 802 3 transceiver cable which connects the AUI Port to an external IEEE 802 3 compatible transceiver see Appendix D for the characteristics of the AUI Port The external transceiver is directly connected to the Ethernet cable Default Station Address Label The Default Station Address label lists the default station address to be used by this mod ule unless changed by the user Serial Number Label The Serial Number Label indicates the serial number
260. ed in the C GSM CFILEslirectory The Create Print File Screen is shown below CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CGO 400 SERIES_96 76 ISo0862 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MMS Parameters System Parameters Print File Create Print File PRINT FILE NA HnE HTELLISU NETT Name of file to store print data Default Pxxxxxx xxx in config directory Edit parameter on screen and press Alt P to create print file CAlt P Create Print File gt CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 13 Print File Screen The Print File Screen Parameter is defined as follows PRINT FILE NAME the name of the file to be created Consists of 1 to 14 characters Defaults to Pxxxxxxx xxx where xxxxxxx xxx is an ASCII encoding of the station s 48 bit MAC address May reference another disk drive for example A WC47 LIS There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the Configuration Editor Main Menu m Esc key exit without creating a file m Alt Pkey causes the print file to be created and stored on the disk then exits 3 34 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Configuring a Non GE Fanuc Device In order for Ethernet Interface applications to initiate communications with a non GE Fanuc directory information about the remote application must be available You must supply this information in the Foreign Device
261. ed in the MMS provider when changes due to local application action take place The COMM REO format of the Set Local ProgramInvocation State command is shown in the table below Table 6 39 Set Local Programinvocation State COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 2 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8355 20A3H ProgramInvocationState 7 See Table 6 40 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Set Local ProgramInvocation State command ProgramInvocation State Must have one of the values given in the table below Table 6 40 Programinvocation State Values Value Meaning 0 NON EXISTENT 1 UNRUNNABLE 2 IDLE 3 RUNNING 4 STOPPED 6 52 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Status Services The Status Services are used to interrogate the VMD status information of a remote VMD The Status Services are Status Request Status Response Status Indication Status Confirm UnsolicitedStatus Request UnsolicitedStatus Indication Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication and Set Local VMD Status Status Request Command 8250 The PLC ladder program requests the status information of a remote application b
262. edure 5 Testing the Interface on the Network Monitoring the Station and Chapter 4 The Station Manager Managing the Network Troubleshooting the Interface on Chapter 9 Troubleshooting the Network MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 Chapter Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 This chapter describes the basic features of the Ethernet Interface the installation of the interface and a procedure for the initial checkout of the interface on your Ethernet cable The chapter first provides a hardware overview of the Ethernet Interface It is then divided into six Installation Procedures each providing an overview of the proce dure explaining the steps to be performed and describing the expected results As you work through a procedure you may encounter references to the appendices and other chapters in this manual These references provide more detailed information about the subject under discussion The installation procedures described in this chapter are listed below m Procedure 1 Installing the Interface in the PLC Rack Required m Procedure 2 Verifying Proper Power Up of the Interface Required m Procedure 3 Configuring the Interface with the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator Required m Procedure 4 Configuring and Downloading a Station Required m Procedure 5 Testing the Interfaces on the Network Optional m Procedure 6 Using the Example PLC Ladder Program Optional
263. een the PLC application program and the LAN Interface Describes how to program the PIC to initiate COMMunication REQuests OSI COMMunication REQuest Defines the OSI service commands and pa rameter descriptions and explains how to program each communication re quest Station Manager COMMunication REQuest Explains how to use the COMM REO in the ladder logic application program to retrieve station management information Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network Describes the additional configuration parameters needed to configure and tune sta tions in an advanced network environment Troubleshooting Describes troubleshooting and problem isolation for the Ethernet Interface Appendix A Glossary of Terms Appendix B ISO Networking Concepts Appendix C Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS Appendix D Communications Port Characteristics Appendix E Soft Switch Parameters Appendix E Station Configuration Parameters Appendix G Ladder Diagrams for Network Testing Appendix H DOS System Initialization Files AppendixI Forms Appendix GEnet System Manager Data Link Error Codes iii Preface Related Publications GFK 0262 Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Installation and Operation GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software User s Manual GFK 0265 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software Reference Manual GFK 0780 Logicmaster 90 70 Ethernet User s Manual At GE F
264. eived an error GFK 0868 Chapter 7 Station Manager COMMunications REQuests 7 3 Retrieve Tallies Request 8101 The Retrieve Tallies request copies portions of the system tallies for the local station into a block of words specified in the request This request provides access by the ladder pro gram to all tallies except the MAC layer tallies Note By their nature the number and significance of system tallies change from version to version of software Care must be taken when processing tallies to be sure that the proper format is being used for the data retrieved The COMM REO for the Retrieve Tallies Request is described below Table 7 4 Retrieve Tallies Request COMM_REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wait NdWNait Flag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Table 5 21 CRSW Offset 3 Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8101 1FA5H Data Buffer Memory Type 7 See Table 6 41 Data Buffer Offset 8 Maximum Word Length 9 1 138 Initial Tally Value 10 0 138 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q Decimal Value 8 10 12 70 72 Command Number Identifies this as a Retrieve Tallies Request command Data Buffer PLC address of where the tally data is to be put Maximum Word Length The maximum number of words to be transferred Each tally in Table 7 5 requires one word of PLC memory Initial Tally Value One of the tally offsets fr
265. ement Numbers Variable Type No of Elements 0 Parametershould be 1 4 Number of Elements in the Array 8 Number of Elements Desired Variable Scope Should be set to 0 for VMD specific scope Reserved This parameter should be set to 0 InformationReport Data When the amount of data to be transferred is 172 octets or less this parameter contains the actual data to be transferred If the amount of data is more than 172 octets this parameter is ignored and the current content of the named variable whose attributes are specified in the request are reported The form of the variable attributes are exactly as described for the Read and Write Re quest commands The variable must exist in the local device for this request to be pro cessed successfully This is an unconfirmed service A COMM REO Complete Without Error status in the COMM REQ Status Word indicates that the request has been sent to the peer application InformationReport Indication Service The Information Report Indication Service uses the InformationReport Indication bit bit 14 in the Association Status Word to inform the local ladder program that an Information Report indication has been received from the remote application and is buffered on the Ethernet Interface To view the data from the remote application the ladder program must issue a Transfer Information Report Indication Data command If the ladder program does not know which of several possible
266. en 0 0000s 8 16 Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes Screen 1 6 6 66 eee ee 8 18 Association Parameters Screen esses 8 19 Local Application DIB Screen 6 eee eee 8 20 MMS Parameters Menu 0 eee eens 8 21 Variable Names Screen sociso criei ese nrii ndei aiia eee eee ee 8 22 Maximum MMS Message Size Screen 1 0 66 c eee eee 8 24 System Parameters Screen 6 eee eens 8 25 Print Pile Screen iacet eerie euro PR LER tem a e Ret Ge dins waked aves 8 28 Section 2 Configuring Network Wide Parameters 8 29 Configure Network Wide Parameters Menu 00000000000 8 29 Load Group Parameters Screen seeeeeeseeeee ees 8 30 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting sasse cenean ea a ov awa eon Rr iO d eae 9 1 OVerview mess Teka CBRN NES cete re rmi este 9 1 Using this Chapter oee e e ea nee eee ees 9 2 What to do if you Cannot Solve the Problem 0004 9 4 The Powertip State iesse morosa vU Raven ld tese idle dete s vb ea ee 9 5 The Soft Switch Entry State e reslis ioe eee eee 9 5 The Field Network Test State 0 0 00 0000 c occ c cece eee eee 9 6 The Loader State ned ok Gitar asain Rederiet sae oR 9 7 The Operational State 0 oianean A eee eee eee 9 8 Troubleshooting When STATUS OK LED is OFF 004 9 8 Troubleshooting When the STATUS OK LED is ON 9 9 Exception Log Event Error Codes 0 000 c eee e eee eens 9 10 Extended Status Buf
267. ence Response confims can indicate either success or failure of processing the request indica tion If processing was successful the response confirm is termed a positiveresponse confirm If the request service was not performed due to some error a negative re sponse confim is returned Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface Application Processes As stated before the Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface provides two Application Processes APs MMS Responder and Application Interface to perform communications services using the Manufacturing Message Specification The MMS Responder AP responds to remote device requests but cannot issue MMS commands The Application Interface AP can respond to or initiate MMS commands Ladder programming is required to take advantage of the Application Interface MMS Responder The MMS Responder AP supports the MMS Services that do not require Series 90 70 lad der logic No programming of the local PLC is necessary to use the MMS Responder ser vices MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 o IS The MMS Responder AP responds to remote device requests for association services read write access and start and stop of the PLC ladder program The MMS Responder AP provides the following services m Responder association services m Start Stop Reset and Resume the Series 90 70 PLC ladder program m Read and Write of the Series 90 70 PLC memoryand1 O m Response to
268. ens D 6 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xiv 1994 Contents AppendixE Soft Switch Parameters cece cece cece eee enn E 1 Station Address seruan ne de ege e AB SES E 1 Lo d Source eret te ee Fedele e e rr CRI s ld do itas E 2 EAN Online iere ea e te I RR er conte Ce ab de t n E 2 Backplane Online scene eR ver Shh ble ee eee E eben E 2 Network Load Address 000000 es E 2 Modify Soft Switch Settings 6 cece ee eee ee E 3 Configuring Soft Switch Parameters 6 666 E 4 Configuring Soft Switch Parameters Using the GSM E 4 Correct Results of Soft Switch Configuration 20005 E 5 AppendixF Station Configuration Parameters cece eee ences F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager F 1 AppendixG Ladder Programs for Network Testing 0 eee eeeee G 1 Sample Ladder Program ssssssseeeeeeee eee ees G 1 AppendixH Sample DOS System Files ccc cece eee eee eens H 1 Sample DOS Initialization Files 0 0 0 c cee eee H 2 3Com Etherlink TL oe rer e eed ud H 2 3Com Etherlink 16 eee ee eee es mee ee H 3 3ComEtherlink MCG ra Gig ld anges Sed EUR ice set ede H 4 Western Digital EtherCard PLUS EtherCard PLUS Elite 16 EtherCard PLUS A H 5 Mitel 82593 7 E reete rete ate reddo et e Ta aee ot H 6 Xircom Pocket Adapter 6 ccc eee H
269. ent IS only 28 0 32 Resume Argument ISonly 29 44 characterstring ProgramInvocationState Memory Type 45 See Table6 16 ProgramInvocationState Offset 46 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Resume Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Length of ProgramInvocation Name The number of octets in the ProgramInvocation Name ProgramInvocation Name Specifies the ProgramInvocation which is to be resumed Length of Resume Argument The number of characters in the Resume Argument The Resume Argument parameter is optional and will not be sent if this parameter is set to Zero Resume Argument An optional parameter used to pass application specific information to the Program Invocation being resumed ProgramInvocation State The PLC address of the ProgramInvocation State This pa rameter is returned by the the MMS provider only when a Negative Response is given to the Resume request A Negative Response will cause this word to be set to the cur rent PI state refer to Table 6 40 at the remote node MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Resume Indication Service The Resume Indication Service uses the Resume Indication bit bit 2 in the ASW Extension to inform the l
270. eplace Invalid UEID Maximum Associationsexceeded Task scheduled with no work to do No transition was taken by the FSM Noactionforstate eventpair Unknown sysid OALLOC failed memory resource problem BUFFALLOC failed memory resource problem AP Titlemismatch MMS parse attempt failed MMS build failed Unexpected user PDU Errorreturn from LDATA_ACKrequest Unexpected service from LLC Unexpected service from SDM miniMAPservice invalid MAP Interface only miniMAPinternal error MAP Interface only miniMAP PDU abandoned for no Association MAP Interface only Received partial data from lower layer Parameter on incoming initiate response is inappropriate Entry 4 describes which parameter is in error 1 Maximum message size is too large Entry 5 contains the maximum size that is currently configured on this station see the Maximum MMS Message Size Menu description in Chapter 3 and Entry 6 contains the message size negotiated by the called station 2 Maximum message size is too small Entry 5 contains the smallest supported value for this parameter not configurable and Entry 6 contains the message size negotiated by the called station Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 25 9 26 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event e 3 MMS version number was negotiated upwards The nego MMS Provider tiated version number must be e
271. epresent a group of temperature inputs for a particular application For unnamed array variables the referenced PLC memory table is treated as an array So if R1 the start of the register table is specified as an unnamed array variable the variable access will treat the register table for the number of elements registers specified as an array If only a portion of the array is to be accessed the appropriate alternate access variable type should be specified The Alternate Access Index parameter in the COMM REQ describes the first element of the array to be accessed The Number of Elements param eter describes the number of array elements to be accessed For example supplying R01 as the VariableName Address parameter in a COMM REO with the Variable Type parameter equal to 10 see Table 6 20 the Alternate Access Index parameter equal to 4 and the Number of Elements parameter equal to 7 would refer to registers 5 through 11 Register 5 is the first register returned since indexing in MMS begins at the value 0 GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 27 L6 Read Request Command 8322 The Read Request command is used to send an MMS Read message This service sup ports all three scopes of the MMS read service The COMM REO format of the Read Request is shown in the table below Table 6 18 Read Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 49 Wait NOWai
272. er Offset 8 Positiveor Negative Response 9 0 1 Problem Code 10 See Table 6 60 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Resume Response command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Positive or Negative Response A value of 0 indicates that a positive response should be generated A value of 1 indicates that an error response should be issued Problem Code An encoded value of the problem as specified in the MMS service speci fication This field is ignored if a Positive Response is being sent MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Set Local ProgramInvocation Processing 8356 The Series 90 70 PLC ladder program can use the Set Local ProgramInvocation Processing command to control the interpretation given to the MMS service indications Start Stop Reset and Resume Unless this command is executed the Ethernet Interface will intercept these MMS ser vice indications and will start and stop the PLC as appropriate In this case the receipt of those indications does not cause the ASW bits to be indicated and all processing of the service request is performed by the Ethernet Interface This is necessary since some ser vices cause the PLC logic scan to be stopped If the application needs more control over the effect
273. er cable should be connected to an external IEEE 802 3 compatible transceiver which is attached to the Ethernet network SQE must be enabled on the transceiver 7 Set the CPU Run Stop switch to STOP 8 Continue with Procedure 2 Verifying Ethernet Interface Power Up Ethernet Interface Installed in Series 90 70 PLC Rack a45344 nv cuo zE Au 3 Amzzmir m o LT X TRANSCEIVER 35 CABLE GROUND WIRE 802 3 TRANSCEIVER Figure 2 2 Ethernet Controller Installation in the Series 90 70 PLC 2 6 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Ethernet Interface Installed in Expansion Racks Installation of the Ethernet Interface in the expansion racks is shown in Figure 2 3 Ex pansion racks are connected to the CPU through an 18 twisted pair cable called the I O cable with one end connected to the lower connector on a Bus Transmitter Module installed in the CPU rack in slot 2 and the other end connected to the top connector on a Bus Receiver Module BRM installed in slot 1 in an expansion rack Each additional rack is then connected in a daisy chain through I O cables connected to the top and bottom connectors on the BRMs The total cable length from the CPU rack to the last expansion rack may be a maximum of 50 feet 15 meters I O cables are available in various lengths from 2 to 50 feet 0 6 to 15 meters Additionally a s
274. eral category of the error that was detected Error Code Identifies the specific problem given the Error Class Additional Error A 4 octet integer not otherwise constrained Length of Description Buffer The octet length of the Description Buffer Description Buffer An optional string of bits giving diagnostic information Any un used octets will be zero filled 6 66 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 CO Define Application Command 8200 The Define Application Service is used by the ladder program to specify an Application Common Name which is the name of the OSI 7 layer Application Interface running on the Series 90 70 PLC Upon Ethernet Interface restart the AP for the Series 90 70 PLC application is always defined by the configuration parameter applcnam This command overrides the configu ration parameter applcnam until the next restart occurs This command does not perma nently change the configuration parameter applenam The COMM REO format for the Define Application command is shown in the table be low Table 6 59 Define Application COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 35 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8200 2008H Reserved 7 Length of Application Common Name 8 1 64 ApplicationCo
275. ering up Ethernet Software Event Log Format Station Manager COMM REQs Examine Association Options Command 8300 MMS COMM REQ Examine InformationReport Indication Variable Command 8321 MMS COMM REQ Examine Initiate Indication Command 8202 MMS COMM REQ Examine Last Error Information Com ms 8352 MMS COMM REQ Examine Positive Initiate Confirm Com mand 8204 MMS COMM REO 6 17 Index 3 Index Index 4 Examine Reject Indication Command 8351 MMS COMM_REQ Examine Reset Indication Command 8311 MMS COMM_REQ Examine Resume Indication Command 8314 MMS COMM REQ Examine Start Indication Command 8305 MMS COMM REQ Examine Stop Indication Command 8308 MMS COMM REQ Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication Command 8253 MMS COMM REQ Example Ladder Program Example PLC Ladder Program Using the 222 Exception Log Event Codes 4 26 Exit to DOS EXS Command Station Manager Extended Status Buffer Data 7 2 Extended Status Buffer Error Codes Extended Status Buffer Negative Values 927 F Field Network Test State Field Network Test Utility b 17 Invoking Field Network Test Utility Commands 4 15 FIRST_HOP_LSAP FIRST_HOP_MAC_ADDR FIRST_HOP_NSAP Floating Point B 29 Foreign Device Application Processes Screen Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu Forms G Gateway B 1 GE Fanuc CNC AP Impleme
276. ermediate Systems IS LSAP nismac hex 09002B000005 AllIntermediate Systems IS MAC Address nmaxpdu dec 1497 Maximum network PDU size for the Network Layer noptmiz dec 0 Use ISO 9542 optimization 0 means do not use optimization 1 means use optimization npdulife dec 10 Lifetime of outgoing ES ES NPDUs in half seconds npriority dec 7 LLC data packet priority for ISO services This parameter specifies the LLC priority at which the Network Layer data packets are sent on the LAN Range 0 to 7 nqwtime dec 45 Query configuration wait timeoutin seconds nsap hex 49 lt MAC Network Service Access Point This parameter specifies the addr gt 01 NSAP to be used for the communication services 1 20 octets ntick dec 10 Seconds between checking clock Presentation Layer Parameters pacsepci dec 7 ACSE Presentation ContextIdentifier Not GSM configur able pacsesynnam str ISO ACSE Syntax Name Not GSM configurable 8650 ACSE1 pacsesynobj objid 22101 ACSE Syntax Name Object Identifier pmmspci dec 5 MMS Presentation ContextIdentifier Not GSM configur able pmmssynam str MMS PCI MMS Syntax Name Not GSM configurable pmmssynobj objid 109506 21 MMS Syntax Name Object Identifier pxferpci dec 9 Transfer Syntax Presentation ContextIdentifier Not GSM configurable pxfersynnam str BASICEN Transfer Syntax Syntax Name Not GSM configurable CODING pxfersynobj objid 211 Transfer Syntax Syntax Name Object Identifier MMS Etheme
277. ervice Access Points SAPs They are all entered as a string of hexadecimal octets PSAP Presentation Service Access Point SSAP Session Service Access Point TSAP Transport Service Access Point NSAP Network Service Access Point Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 37 3 38 Note The Foreign Device Configuration Editor must also be exited using the AJt U key for the entries to be placed or updated in the 7 Layer ApplicationDIB Once entries have been entered in the 7 Layer Application DIB they can be selected for inclusion in the Local Application DIB of a GEnet Ethernet Interface MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Section 3 Downloading a Station This section describes only the activities at the GSM associated with downloading a sta tion For a complete procedure on downloading communication software and configu ration information to a station see Chapter 2 Procedure 4 Download Station Screen The Download Station screen provides a means to download LAN Interfaces via local serial port or the network depending on selection in the System Network Parameters Menu After a configuration file has been created and saved the communication soft ware and configuration file must be loaded into the desired station The GSM Down loader Screen is used to load the station Factory LAN System Manager CGSM gt Version 2 84 Dounl
278. ervices Memory Pool Allocation Parameters Menu Structure B 6 Menus GSM B 14 Message Definition Block 5 2 Message Flow in the OSI Model Miscellaneous OSI Services 6 59 mmaxmsgsz 4 34 MMS COMM REQ Command Descrip tions MMS COMM REOs Abort Request Command 8207 6 20 Cancel Request Command 8290 6 61 Conclude Request Command 8205 6 18 concia Response Command 8206 6 19 Define Application Command 8200 7 Discard InformationReport Indication Data Command 8339 6 38 Error Request Command 8350 Examine Association Options Com mand 8300 Examine InformationReport Indication Variable Command 8321 Examine Initiate Indication Command 8202 Examine Last Error Information Com mand 8352 Examine Positive Initiate Confirm Com mand 8204 Examine Reject Indication Command 8351 Examine Reset Indication Command 8311 6 47 Examine Resume Indication Command 8314 Examine Start Indication Command 8305 e 41 Examine Stop Indication Command 8308 5 24 Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication Command 8253 Get Remote Name List Command 8301 C ner Command 8240 6 59 InformationReport Request Command 8320 Initiate Request Command 8201 mitate Response Command 8203 6 15 Read Request Command 8322 6 28 Reset Request Command 8310 6 46 Reset Response Command 8312 6 47 MN Request Command 8313 6 48 ead Res
279. ervices available through the ladder program are listed in the PLC Commu nication Command table Table 6 2 The table contains information which identifies the specific service type associated with the corresponding command number Command codes in the ACTion column are L Local S Send R Receive m Some of these PLC commands are processed locally with no message sent to the remote station These commands are of the form Define or Examine m Other PLC commands are used to send either a request or response MMS message These commands are of the form Request or Response m Still other PLC commands are used to receive either an indication or confirmation MMS message These commands are of the form Examine Indication or Examine Confirmation Commands with an entry S L in the ACTion column Table 6 2 are used to send a MMS request or response if the OSI 7 Layer or Explicit miniMAP context MAP Interface only is being used Those same commands used with the Implicit miniMAP context MAP Interface only are processed locally GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 5 Table 6 2 PLC Communications Commands PLC Communication Command Command Number ACTion DEC HEX DefineApplication 8200 2008 L Initiate Request 8201 2009 S L ExaminelnitiateIndication 8202 200A R Initiate Response 8203 200B S L Examine InitiateConfirm 8204 200C R
280. es the number of BITS in the variable or in the variable array element m For FLOAT PT only the value 4 should be used REFERENCE The memory reference within the Series 90 70 PLC Table 6 16 shows the possible values for the reference address COUNT The number of variable array elements Entered as a hexadecimal number Valid range 1 to FFFF hexadecimal For variables which are not arrays i e scalars this field should be set to 1 BIT OFF The bit offset relative to the starting address of this variable Entered as a hex adecimal number Valid range of 00 to OF hexadecimal Used only if the Data Type specifies a BIT STR or BOOLEAN data type for all other data types it must be 00 ARR Specifies if the variable is an array or a scalar variable Valid values of Y or N Y specifies that the variable is an array N specifies that the variable is a scalar Defaults to N Value toggled by the T b or Shift Tab keys Note The subject Configuration file must have been saved to disk by pressing ALI U from the Configuration Editor Main Menu before you can print it GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 33 Print File Screen The Print File Screen selection is used to create a file which contains a copy of the Ether net Interface s configuration By default the file created can be printed using DOS com mands to produce a hard copy of the configuration The print file will be sav
281. es which are mostly interpreted as strings of bits and are more obscure for the human reader These strings of bits represent the address information for each OSI protocol in order to reach the destination application Many of these addresses are Service Access Point SAP selectors which identify how the information is to be routed through the layers to the proper layer entity above In the upper protocol layer there are also items called object identifiers which are used to specify an object in the OSI environment Objects are located in a hierarchical tree and are unambiguously identified by a path between nodes in this tree Figure B 9 shows a typical object identifier and its place in the object space The path to locate this object is denoted 2 1 1 a43014 f NU 1 Figure B 9 MMS Object Identifier The OSI directory service is used to resolve a common name to all required address information to locate that application If you are using a directory server the only address which must be present in the GE Fanuc control device configuration is the address of the directory server In addition to or in place of a directory server it is possible to preconfigure the addresses of some remote applications into each device configuration The efficiency of using such statically configured information must be balanced against the complexity of managing directory information in each node rather than centrally when a directory server is used
282. et Interface As a result bit oriented data such as Boolean and bit string must be manipulated in memory which has a unit type of bit see Chapter 6 That same data may be redefined in units of words or octets and transferred to memory that is not bit oriented Bit String Data B 28 Bit String Data is mapped to consecutive bits of Series 90 70 PLC memory exactly like arrays of boolean values As with Boolean Data only those bits in the word s of Series 90 70 memory memory which are required to contain the bit string data are modified or accessed Arrays of bit strings are packed in such a way that the first bit at the second element immediately follows the last bit of the first element For example a two element array of two bit bit strings at bit offset 0 in a register would be mapped as shown in the figure below Series 90 70 PLC Memory Words MSB LSB Ex ps pea pe RP IL First Bit Element 1 bit string Last Bit Element 1 bit string First Bit Element 2 bit string Last Bit Element 2 bit string All other bits unaffected Figure B 16 MMS Bit String Data Memory Mapping Note The Series 90 70 CPU does not provide a Read Modify Write capability to the Ethernet Interface As a result bit oriented data such as Boolean and bit string must be manipulated in memory which has a unit type of bit see Chapter 6 That same data may redefined in units of words or octets and
283. f a GEnet LAN Interface that provides basic association read and write functionality without the need for user programming Uses the Responder Application Process Hands on Service A mode of application of a GEnet LAN Interface that provides great er control in the handling of associations and focuses on the user s application pro gram in the associated PLC relay ladder diagram or CNC PMC Uses the Applica tion Interface Application Process Headend In a broadband LAN a device that received signals from each data station and retransmits them to all data stations NOTE The retransmission may require a shift of carrier frequencies Host Refers to a remote computer that communicates with a PLC or CNC on a net work IEEE 802 The IEEE 802 LAN series of standards are as follows IEEE 802 Overview and Architecture MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 IEEE 802 2 The Logical Link Control LLC sublayer of OSI Data Link Layer common above all IEEE 802 Medium Access Control MAC sublayers IEEE 802 3 CSMA CD Ethernet MAC and Physical Layer standard IEEE 802 4 Token Bus MAP LANs MAC and Physical Layer standard IEEE 802 5 Token Ring IBM MAC and Physical Layer standard Identify Services Used to interrogate the identity of a remote application Indication In the OSI Reference Model one of four primitive types of interchange be tween entities of adjacent layers An Indication is
284. fer If present Input Time Out stops 8 Input Response 9 Input Response MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 MMS Variable Mapping Series 90 70 PLC Only Boolean Data GFK 0868 This section describes how the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS data types are represented in the Series 90 70 PLC memory MMS variables are bound directly to locations in the Series 90 70 PLC memory Access to variables result in access to the corresponding locations in the Series 90 70 memory without requiring or allowing any intervention by the Series 90 70 ladder logic program Each variable in MMS has an associated type which describes the meaning of the bits that constitute the value of the variable This appendix describes the correspondence between each MMS data type supported by the Series 90 70 PLC and its representation in memory Along with the type information size information is needed to specify the memory limits of values The size information for a type is specified in units appropriate to the type The table below summarizes the type and sizes supported by the Series 90 70 PLC Table B 11 MMS Variable Types and Size Minimum Maximum Type Encoding Length Units Length Length Boolean 3 bit 1 1 Bit String 4 bit 1 1024 Signed Integer 5 bit 8 32 Unsigned Integer 6 bit 8 31 Floating Point 7 octets 4 4 Octet String 9 octets 1 4096 VisibleStr
285. fer Negative Values 00 0c cece eens 9 27 Extended Status Buffer Errors 0 00 000000 c cece cece eee ee 9 27 GEnet LAN Interface Status Word 9 30 Appendix A Glossary of Terms 202 ciduis duets ha RRPRR ER TE PR ERR A 1 Commonly Used Acronyms and Abbreviations 22005 A 1 Glossary of Terms cerei eti epe ERU ERE ee eR EA CCP LEE AP A 3 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xiii 1994 Contents AppendixB ISO Networking Concepts 0 cece cece cee cece eee B 1 OSI Reference Model 55e peers eese eb Oe Shears hee ada B 2 Protocols Used for GE Fanuc Control Devices 0 00005 B 3 Implementation of the OSI Model in GE Fanuc Control Devices B 4 Mapping MMS Services to ACSE and Presentation Services B 4 OSI Addressing assi eese kettle N ES aee B 5 Protocol Data Transfer 5er ck eere ek n ee ti een a aa B 6 OSI Application Layer sssssssssee e B 7 Locating Applications sssssssseee e B 10 The Client Server Model ssssseeeee en B 10 MMS Objects and Their Attributes sees B 11 Object SCcOD6 sate dedos ove e rede edo suec sea hid ited ois anes sed B 12 The Virtual Manufacturing Device VMD Object B 12 Capability Objects tlenie iena aei eee eens B 17 Donain Objects esce inue ot eee Dee te ee etas B 17 Program Invocation Objects sssssssssss
286. ference in MMS includes the scope in which the name should be sought This allows scope information to become part of resolving the name so that identical names in different scopes can be unambiguously accessed Objects of the same kind in the same scope must have different names in order to be accessible The Virtual Manufacturing Device VMD Object The Manufacturing Message Specification MMS defines a standard view of all manufacturing devices that is how these devices are seen from other devices on the network This standard behavior must be implemented in each real manufacturing device in order for useful MMS communication to take place The MMS view of the manufacturing device is expressed in terms of a hierarchy of objects Objects are simply parts of the manufacturing device which have attributes which can be seen from the outside The internal representation of an object is of no importance so long as the object attributes reflect accurately the behavior defined by MMS This separates the standard behavior of the device from implementation concerns while allowing a precise definition of its required behavior MMS communication takes place between Virtual Manufacturing Devices VMDs The VMD object is an abstraction used by MMS to describe the standard behavior of a real device or a part of a real device The MMS VMD and its associated real manufacturing device are closely associated but not identical Since the VMD is only concerned wi
287. for this associa tion Maximum Services Outstanding Calling The final negotiated maximum number of services allowed to be outstanding from the local Series 90 70 PLC application on this association Maximum Services Outstanding Called The final negotiated maximum number of services allowed to be outstanding from the remote peer application on this association All Examine commands except for the Examine Initiate Indication and the Examine Un solicited Status commands have the same format This format is shown in the table be low Table 6 9 Generic Examine COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 82xx Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Examine Data Buffer Memory Type 9 See Footnote 1 Examine Data Buffer Offset 10 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Conclude Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Examine Data Buffer The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this associa tion Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 17 L5 Conclude Request Command
288. formation MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Examine Reset Indication Command 8311 The Examine Reset Indication command is used to examine a Reset indication received at the application The purpose of the Reset is to transition the application from a STOPPED state to an IDLE state The format of the Examine Reset Indication COMM_REQ is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8311 2077H The result of this command is that 38 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in Table 6 32 Reset Response Command 8312 The Reset Response command is used to provide a response either positive or negative to a Reset indication A positive response should indicate that the application has suc cessfully transitioned into the IDLE state The COMM REO format for the Reset Re sponse is shown in the table below Table 6 35 Reset Response COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wait NOWNait Flag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Table6 16 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8312 2078H Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Positiveor Negative Response 9 0 1 Problem Code 10 See Table 6 60 1 Quick Reference Mem
289. from the CPU the Program Invocation name is null GE Fanuc CNCs Only For the CNC the PI state reflects the execution state of the part program associated with the PI If the part program is running the PI state is RUNNING If a feed hold is asserted the PI state is stopped In a TT model control there can be three Program Invocations The coordination PI is created automatically during OSI Ethernet initialization There can be up to two PIs one for each path for which a part program has been selected A special domain called the coordination domain is used to synchronize MMS services to the two paths The Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 23 coordination PI always contains the coordination domain When a Program Invocation is created that contains the coordination domain in its list of domains a special relationship is established between the coordination PI and the path PI s Issuing an MMS Start Stop Reset Resume command to the coordination PI will result in the MMS service being automatically propagated to the path PI s This coordination PI represents a mechanism by which the host can alter the state of the two path PIs simultaneously with one MMS service Variable Objects MMS variable objects allow the remote MMS application to access typed data values defined in the VMD A variable is an element in the VMD which is capable of providing when read or accepting when written a typed data value A type specifies the r
290. fter all of the Ethernet Interface executive program and data has been loaded is broken into the four fixed size block pools Each pool receives a percentage of the available memory This parameter specifies the percentage of available memory to be allocated to pool 1 For example a value of 10 in this field would assign ten percent of the available memory after loading to pool 1 The total of the parameter values for pa rameters balloc1 balloc2 balloc3 and balloc4must not exceed 100 Ifitis less than 100 some available memory will not be used Decimal Range 1 97 balloc2 dec Buffer pool 2 memory percent Decimal Range 1 97 balloc3 dec 45 Buffer pool 3 memory percent Decimal Range 1 97 balloc4 dec 39 Buffer pool 4 memory percent Decimal Range 1 97 bbuff1 dec 28 Buffer pool 1 buffer size The buffers used by the Ethernet Interface software are allocated into four fixed size block pools This parameter specifies the size in bytes of fixed size block pool 1 buffers One of the pools must be set to sufficient size to contain the largest frame specified in the Imaxdbparameter Clearly the larger the buffer size set in the pools the smaller the number of available buffers The memory usage is most efficient if the buffer sizes are 4 less than a multiple of 16 This parameter must be in the decimal range 1 1024 bbuff2 dec 60 Buffer pool 2 buffer size Decimal Range 1
291. g The default setting is YES This means that the module will allow all formsofbackplanecommunications Modificationfrom DefaultSetting The value may be changed to NO This means thatthe module will only allow diagnostics mail traffic This setting will riot permit application data transfer with the Series 90 70 CPU NetworkLoad The multicast address to be used by the LAN Interface to load across the LAN Itisin Address the same format as the Station Address DefaultSetting The default value is lt lt 000000000000 gt gt This value instructs the LANInterface to use the default network load address lt lt 090060000000 gt gt as its loadaddress Modificationfrom DefaultSetting If changed the Ethernet Interface will look for a network load from the specified multicast address This MUST be a multicast address GFK 0868 Appendix E Soft Switch Parameters E 3 Configuring Soft Switch Parameters The Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface supports two methods for setting Soft Switches m The Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator software package which passes the data to the Series 90 70 PLC CPU m The Ethernet Interface Station Manager CHSOSW command Note The CHSOSWcommand can only be used when the Ethernet Interface is not con figured in the local PLC by the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator Logicmaster 90 70 is the primary method for configuring soft switches This manual does not describe Soft Switch configuration through
292. g an association with the appropriate Ethernet Interface Applica tion Process The Application Processes screen is shown below Configuration File Name CO 8 CG 400 SERIES_96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 Application Processes gt MMS_RESPONDER COMMON NAME IDIGSZELEFELZLIT APT OBJ ID E AE_QUAL MEE PSAP ZELLE HEX SSAP GEM HEX APPLICATION INTERFACE COMMON NAME CARE APT OBJ ID ME QUAL MENEZ PSAP CECCECEH HEX SSAP ELEN HEX ACN ISO MMS RCN OBJ ID gt ALTERNATE_MMS ACN ISO HHS1 ACN ODIID c gt Application Common Name 1 64 characters Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 9 Application Processes Screen The Application Processes parameters are defined as follows For MMS_Responder and Application Interface processes six parameters may be de fined these parameters are described below For MMS and Alternate MMS processes only the ACN_OBJ_ID parameter may be modified COMMON_NAME The Common Name of the Application Process Each Common Name MUST be unique on the entire network Consists of 1 to 64 characters m For MMS RESPONDER defaults to RESP MAC ADDRESS For MMS RESPONDER corresponds to Station Manager Parameter arespcnam m ForAPPLICATION INTERFACE defaults to APPL MAC ADDRESS For APPLICATION INTERFACE corresponds to
293. ge dropped 5 Retrying VME mailboxinitialization Entry 5 contains additional information related to the event type Entry 5 Interpretation 1 Ethernet Interface task ID to which message was sent 2 Index into Data Transfer table of transaction 3 Ethernet Interface task ID to which message was sent 4 Number of messages dropped so far 5 Number of open attempts so far 31 Backplane Driver scheduled with illegal event Entry 4 contains the event code received 32 Illegal COMM REO from application program was discarded Entry 4 contains the command code received 33 COMM REO received outside of normal system operation e g while in the Soft Switch editor 34 Backplane Driver initializing withoutSoftSwitches from the CPU This will occur if the LAN Interface is not configured in the PLC via the Logicmaster 90 70 Configuration Software 35 Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface CPUcommunicationstimeout during restart or load 36 Bad Local Application Request Discarded Request A COMM REQ received from the Series 90 70 ladder program was not allowed because the Ethernet Interface has not yet received soft switches from the CPU Entry 4 shows the COMM_REQ command number 37 LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming A task that has not registered with the Backplane driver is attempting to send messages to the PLC 38 ABackplane driver user s attempt to send a message to the PLC failed Entry 3 indicates the error codereturned 39 Anattemptto
294. ge from 0 to ffH 255 If a value is supplied for the pat parameter each test frame will contain len bytes of data and each byte of test data will be pat However if the pat parameter is omitted and a non zero len value is supplied a special testing byte sequence is used In this test sequence successive test frames are sent with an alternating data pattern 00H 55H aaH ffH and a counting pattern and an incremental frame length of 1 byte up to len bytes For example the data for the first six test frames would consist of OOH len 1 55H 55H len 2 aaH aaH aaH len 3 ffH ffH ffH ffH len 4 OOH 01H 02H 03H 04H len 5 OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH OOH len 6 This command causes one or more LLC test frames to be sent to the specified address Test frames are output at frequency lt sch gt until lt cnt gt frames have been sent The op tional lt len gt and lt pat gt parameters can be used to specify the form of user data sent on the test frames A lengthy TEST command can be terminated by using the STOPT command Caution Care should be exercised in invoking the TEST command ona network in a production environment Invoking the TEST command increases the load on all nodes especially the initiating node Be especially cautious if you are using values of lt sch gt smaller than the default or values of lt len gt larger than the default Also be careful if you are using the ALL synonym whi
295. geable parts ISO has defined protocols to implement the functions at each layer In GE Fanuc control devices the ISO protocols used at each layer are listed in Table B 1 below Table B 1 Protocol Used for GE Fanuc Control Devices Layer Protocol Options MMS ISO 9506 OIW agreements on operation with IS and DIS based systems NIST 500 177 Chapter 20 Annex A ACSE ISO 8649 ISO 8650 Presentation ISO 8822 Kernel ISO 8823 Session ISO 8326 Kernel Full Duplex ISO 8327 Version 2 Transport ISO 8072 Class4 ISO 8073 Network ISO 8473 I5C8348 Add 1 ISO 9542 Link ISO 8802 2 Type1 LLC ISO 8802 3 MAC Physical ISO 8802 3 AUI 10 Mbps baseband or broadband Appendix B ISO Networking Concepts B 3 Implementation of the OSI Model in GE Fanuc Control Devices In GE Fanuc control devices each OSI layer is implemented as one or more tasks Theses tasks implement the protocols defined for the layers of the OSI model Figure B 2 shows the relationship among the tasks in a GE Fanuc device and layers of the OSI model 245172 p T 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 222 2 22 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 PLC or CNC Responder icati Ethernet Interface Card Backplane Driver c AP AP 7 Application a 6 Presentation p 5 Session s 4 Transport t 3 Network n Station Manager y Download Client AUI Italics Task in PROM Normal Task in RAM lower cas
296. h reports Itis remotely possible that error codes 120 12b may occur due to a transient system fault Because of this possibility an attempt is made to recover without manual intervention by restarting the LAN Controller thus rerunning power up diagnostics Ifa hardware fault is detected the LAN Controller will be held in reset To prevent repeated restarts and to protect the network the LAN IF will instead Switch Offline from the Network rather than Restart if this fault occurs within 5 minutes of startup 9 24 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued 9 Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event e This event is logged by the MMS Provider software when an unexpected event MMS Provider occurs events 0 H 00 0709 CENDAN eernrrnernern or CQ Ne C me M Oo Entry 1 of the event log will be zero Entry 3 of the event log specifies a module code which can be used by GE Fanuc NA support personnel to determine which software component raised the exception For some events Entries 4 5 and 6 give more information about the event Entry 2 of the event log is an exception code which indicates what error has occurred Each event is described below Duplication of a sysid Unable to allocate a protocol machine Unable to allocate a work queue entry Error return from a sys r
297. he provider of the layer service For example the network layer provider software implements the ISO network layer protocols Each layer may also have one or more users of the services provided by the layer For example the ISO transport provider is a network layer user In the OSI model each layer is a user of the layer below it A OSI layer provider may have more than one user To distinguish an individual user OSI uses the term Service Access Point or SAP The SAP is simply the point at which a user can access the service of a layer provider Each layer SAP has a selector that distinguishes it This selector is also referred to as a SAP address since it is used to address the desired user In some sense each layer SAP provides a socket into which a layer user can be plugged Figure B 3 illustrates how SAPs are used in GE Fanuc control devices to select the OSI protocols to be used a45173 Application Interface Presentation Layer Transport Layer Station Manager Network Layer LSAP LSAP Data Link Layer Figure B 3 Service Access Points for the OSI Layers To address a protocol provider it is necessary to proved the SAP selectors for all of the layers below it For example the session layer is addressed by a unique LSAP NSAP and TSAP sequence Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 5 Protocol Data Transfer Data passed down the protocol stack is referred to as a Protocol Data Unit PDU As shown in Figure
298. he first time or as an update you receive all three parts the Configuration Editor the Communications Software and the GSM Software Normally you will install all three parts of this software when you purchase it the first time If you receive an update or are adding a new GEnet product you may install all or part of this software as appropriate To install a specific part follow the instructions below 1 Toinstall only the LAN Interface Configuration Editor type C NGSM a install c 2 Toinstallorily the LAN Interface Communications Software type C NGSM a install x 3 Toinstallonly the GSM Software type C NGSM a install g 4 To install all 3 components type C NGSM a install Changing the PC Network Card If you change the PC network card type for any reason follow the instructions below 1 Power down the PC Remove the existing PC network card Follow the manufacturer s instructions to install the new PC network card 2 Power up the PC Change directory to the GSM directory C gt ed gsm 3 Run the LANIFSET utility C GSM gt lanifset 4 This utility accesses the same menu as found in step 7 of the section Installing the GEnet System Manager GSM Software Complete the remaining steps of that section MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Starting Up the GSM To start up the GSM software on the PC follow steps listed
299. he remote device but had trouble handling the data in the response Refer to the section titled MMS Error Encodings at the end of this chapter for Problem Code values General Association Status Bits An association is established when either a positive Initiate confirm is received or a posi tive Initiate response COMM REO is issued At this point bit 1 in the Association Status Word Association OK bit will be set It should remain ON for the life of the associa tion When the association is aborted or concluded locally or remotely the Association OK bit will normally be turned OFF and the ACB will no longer be updated Note If the local Ethernet Interface is restarted either using the Restart pushbutton or a Station Manager RESTART command the Association OK bit is NOT turned off although the association is aborted and the ACB will no longer be updated GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 7 L6 Request Completion When the Series 90 70 PLC ladder program initiates COMM REOSs feedback on the command is given in three ways 1 The COMM REO OK and FT fault outputs indicate whether or not the COMM REQ was successfully sent from the Series 90 70 CPU to the Ethernet Interface These outputs are mutually exclusive If the FT output of the COMM REO is set then the PLC CPU was not able to deliver the COMM REO to the Ethernet Interface The two most common reasons for the FT output to be ON
300. he station manager are abbreviated from the corresponding names on the GSM Chapters 3 and 8 show both sets of names when describing the GSM Configuration Editor menus Also notice that the values shown here and by the Station Manager may be different from those shown on the GSM e g Irxringlen and tmaxpdu Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager GFK 0868 The table below lists the configuration parameters as viewed via the Station Manager Table F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager Parameter Format Default Description ApplicationLayer Parameters alsap hex FE LLC Service Access Point LSAP forISO Ethernet services This parameter specifies the LSAP to be used for the MMS Ethernet communications services The LSAP value should be hexadecimalFE applapt objid EJ ApplicationInterface APT objectidentifier applcnam str APPL lt MAC Common Name for the Application Interface This parame addr gt ter is a character string of up to 64 characters applaequal dec 0 ApplicationInterface AP Application Entity qualifier Range 0 65535 applpsap hex 00000002 Presentation Service Access Point PSAP for the Application Interface This parameter is an octet string of up to 4 octets applssap hex 0001 Session Service Access Point SSAP for the Application In terface This parameter is an octet string of up to 16 octets arespapt objid Responder APT objectidentif
301. hecksum Correct Loader Utility Yes i p Field Network eal Test Utility a45163 Certain Exceptions lt Restart gt Detected a Restart The operations above the line are executed from PROM Operational The operations below the line are executed from the Configurationand CommunicationsSoftware downloaded by the user Figure 9 1 Determining the State of the Ethernet Interface What to do if you Cannot Solve the Problem If after using the troubleshooting guide you still cannot solve your problem call GE Fa nuc Automation Please have the following information available when you call m The Name and Catalog Number marked on the product on hinged door in front of controller board m The PROM version printed in the output from the NODE command m The Software version printed in the output from the NODE command m Description of symptoms of problem Depending on the problem you may also be asked for the following information The ladder logic application program running at the time the problem occurred A listing of the configuration parameters for the station that failed A description of the network configuration number of stations length of trunk cable number of taps or transceivers and the manufacturer and model of all devices connected to the network at the time of failure 9 4 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s
302. hernet Interface 30 seconds for MAP Interface The PLC Fault Table can be especially helpful in detailing faults that are detected in the Power Up State In the Power Up State the Station Manager is not operational The Ethernet Interface has likely failed and is far less able to report such failures in detail See GFK 0265 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software Reference Manual for information on the PLC Fault Table Note If all LEDs go out after completing power up diagnostics then power up diagnostics has failed Refer to the PLC fault table for more information The Soft Switch Entry State GFK 0868 The Soft Switch Entry State is indicated by the MODULE OK LED blinking slowly every 2 seconds while the other LEDs remain OFE The Soft Switch Entry state is automatical ly entered when the Soft Switch data in the Ethernet Interface is invalid and has not been set up by the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator The Soft Switch Entry state is also entered when certain configuration faults that preclude full operation are detected A limited subset of Station Manager commands is provided in this state Refer to Chapter 4 Soft Switch Entry Utility for further description of the Soft Switch entry state Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 5 The operator must correct the fault forcing entry into this state before the Ethernet In terface may proceed In most cases this may be done by using the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator or the Station Manager CHSO
303. his Chapter What to do if you Cannot Solve the Problem The Power Up State The Soft Switch Entry State The Field Network Test State The Loader State The Operational State Troubleshooting When the STATUS OK LED is OFF Troubleshooting When the STATUS OK LED is ON Log Event Error Codes Extended Status Buffer Errors GEnet LAN Interface Status Word LISW There are several tools to assist you in diagnosing problems with the Series 90 70 Ether net Interface and the network The Ethernet Interface LEDs provide an immediate visual summary of the operational state of the Ethernet Interface The COMM REQ Status Word LAN Interface Status Word and Association Control Block are used within the PLC ladder program to view the LAN Interface status The Ethernet Interface Station Manager Exception Log Extended Status Buffer and TALLY command provide detailed information about the Ethernet Interface via a GEnet System Manager GSM or terminal m The Series 90 70 PLC Fault Table provides a record of exceptions logged by the PLC the Ethernet Interface and other Series 90 70 modules The PLC Fault Table may be accessed through the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator or Programmer software Refer to the Series 90 70 Programmable Controller Reference Manual for more information Also when displaying a PLC Fault Table entry on the Logicmaster 90 70 striking lt CTRL F gt will display an additional line of numeri
304. icationspecific 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Status Response command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Positive or Negative Response Indicates whether the request for status was accepted If this parameter is 0 then the request is accepted and a Positive Response is sent to the requesting application If this parameter is 1 then the request is rejected and a Nega tive Response is sent to the requesting application Problem Code Indicates the nature of the problem if the Positive or Negative Response parameter is 1 request was unsuccessful Length of Status Local Detail This is the number of octets in the Status Local Detail Status Local Detail Can be used to convey additional information about the VMD sta tus to the requesting application The VMD Logical Status and the VMD Physical Status will be set by the Ethernet Interface software assuming a Positive Response MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Status Confirm Service GFK 0868 s The Status Confirm Service uses the Positive and Negative Confirm bits in the Association Status Word of the ACB This service determines whether the request for status in formation from the remote application was successful If the request was successful the status
305. ier arespaequal dec 0 Responder AP ApplicationEntity qualifier Range 0 65535 arespcnam str RESP lt MAC Common Name for the Responder This parameter is a addr gt character string of up to 64 characters aresppsap hex 00000001 Presentation Service Access Point PSAP for the Default Responder This parameter is an octet string of up to 4 oc tets F 1 F 2 Table F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager Continued Parameter Format Default Description arespssap hex 0001 Session Service Access Point SSAP for the Default Respond er This parameter is an octet string of up to 16 octets assocappl dec Maximum number of simultaneous associations for the Ap plicationInterface communicationservices This parameter identifies how many total Application Interfaceassociations may exist at the same time The sum of the active assocappl and associesp parameters must be less than or equal to 8 8 is the maximum number of total simultaneous associations that may exist at a time Range 0 8 assocresp dec Maximum number of simultaneous associations for the Re spondercommunicationservices This parameter identifies how many total Responder associations may exist at the same time The maximum number of simultaneous associa tions that may exist at a time is 8 Range 0 8 System Parameters ballocl dec Buffer pool 1 memory percent The available memory a
306. ies 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 SHOW Command The SHOW command has the form SHOW lt parm name gt PARMS lt task s gt where lt parm name gt is the name of one of the configuration parameters from the tables included in the CHSOSW command and the LOG command or PARMS is entered just as shown and lt tasks s gt is a set of one or more task identifier letters from the Table 4 3 The SHOW command has one of two forms If the argument to the SHOW command is the string PARMS then task identification letter s are also required The list of configu ration parameters for the specified task s is displayed A typical SHOW PARMS command is shown below gt show parms t lt lt lt Transport Parameters gt gt gt tchksum tflowctrl tgiveup tinactive tlcack tmaxpdu treftime trtrancnt trtrantime twindow twindsize If a configuration parameter name is entered with the SHOW command the current value of that parameter is displayed Valid configuration parameter names are listed in the tables below A typical SHOW command is shown below gt show arespcnam arespcnam Station_24 Responder GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 33 Configuration Parameters Table 4 10 Configuration Parameters Parameter Description alsap applaequal applapt applcnam applpsap applssap arespaequal arespapt arespcnam aresppsap arespssap assocappl assocresp ApplicationLayer Configuratio
307. ime 14 35 8 15 Stop Indication Service Stop Request Command 8307 MMS COMM REQ Stop Response Command 8309 MMS COMM REQ STOPT Command Station Manager stsap 4 35 8 15 Symbolic Addresses SYNTAX OBJ ID System Memory Tallies Tally b System Parameters F 2 System Parameters Menu 8 24 System Parameters Screen I Tallies Structure and Offsets Station Man ager COMM REO TALLY Command Station Manager 14 37 Task Identification tchksum 4 35 B 15 10Base5 D 6 Terms Glossary TEST ALL Station Manager command D 21 TEST Command Station Manager TEST Station Manager command 2 17 pif pa ci Interfaces on the Network 2 17 Ei o the Network Ladder Programs res tflowctrl tgiveup 4 35 B 14 Time 14 9 TIME Command Station Manager tinactive P tlcack 4 35 8 15 tmaxpdu 4 35 8 14 TRACE Command Station Manager 4 45 Transceiver Transceiver Cable See AUI Transceiver Description Transfer InformationReport Indication Data Command 8330 MMS COMM REQ Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen GFK 0868 Index Transport Layer Parameters Transport Layer Tallies Tally t VAR Command Satin Narag penne esp uu Variable Names Screen 5 32 E22 Troubleshooting Jal Variable Objects trtrancnt 4 35 8 14 VARIABLE NAME 22 B 22 trtrantime 4 35 vdpdis ab 4 35 TAP E27 ET vdpretry eas e vanced Networks
308. ime Twice the time required for a bit to travel between the two most distant data stations in a bus network NOTE In a network using carrier sense each frame must be long enough so that a collision or jam signal may be detected by the transmitting station while this frame is being transmitted Its minimum length is therefore determined by the round trip propagation time Router A device similar to a bridge that allows access to multiple LANs Routers re quire the first three Layers of the OSI Model Scalar Anarray or variable which has only one element MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Segment A continuous medium layer connection between or among Medium De pendent Interfaces ina CEMA CDLAN NOTE Medium Dependent Interfaces connected by a repeater are on separate seg ments Server A data station that provides specific services to other data stations on a Local Area Network EXAMPLE File server print server mail server Service Access Point SAP The access means by which a pair of entities in adjacent layers provide services Service Request Transfer Protocol SRTP A proprietary protocol that encodes Series 90 Service Requests the native language of the Series 90 PLC CPUs to provide general purpose communications with a Series 90 PLC SRIP is presently available over802 3 Ethernet networks SRIP is also used by Logicmaster 90 to communicate over an
309. ing 10 octets 1 4096 Arrays of any of the above types are supported Arrays are limited to a single dimension subscript Boolean Data is mapped to a single bit in the Series 90 70 PLC memory Arrays of boolean values are mapped to contiguous bits within the Series 90 70 memory Boolean data may begin at any bit offset within the memory word of the Series 90 70 Only those bits which have been mapped to the MMS variable will be modified on access to the memory word All other bits will be unaffected Boolean Array Data is mapped into words in word memory in a way that facilitates the transfer of data between register and I O memory The first element of the boolean array element 0 is placed in the Least Significant Bit LSB of the register memory assigned to the array The second element is placed in the next most significant bit and so on If the bit offset defined for the array is zero the elements are placed into the register as shown in the table below When written to I O memory the first array element is placed in the lowest I O location the next higher element into the next higher I Olocation etc Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 27 Series 90 70 PLC Memory Words MSB LSB 2 1 Boolean Array Element 1 Boolean Array Element 2 Figure B 15 MMS Boolean Data Memory Mapping Note The Series 90 70 CPU does not provide a Read Modify Write capability to the Ethern
310. ingle power supply can power two racks within current limits when connected by an available cable three feet 1 meter in length The I O bus in an expanded system must be terminated by installing an I O bus Termi nator plug on the bottom connector of the BRM This Terminator plug contains a resistor pack configured for proper I O bus termination If there are more than two racks in an expansion system the intermediate expansion racks must not have the Terminator plug installed Install no more than four 4 LAN Interfaces in a single Series 90 70 PLC system BACKS a44725 NOTE P C B TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL S lm INTERCONNECTING d 9 CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET MAXIMUM uf ALL RACKS MUST BE AT ONE SAME GROUND POTENTIAL METER RACK 1 8 RACKS MAXIMUM NOTE R A 12V POWER SUPPLY MIN NEEDED IN RACK THAT ETHERNET CONTROLLER BOARD IS IN Li GROUND TRANSCEIVER CABLE TO 802 3 RACK 6 TRANSCEIVER RACK 7 VO TERMINATOR LAST RACK LEGEND CPU SERIES 90 70 CPU BRM BUS RECEIVER MODEL BEM711 BTM BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL BEM 713 PS POWER SUPPLY LAN ETHERNET CONTROLLER CMM741 Figure 2 3 Ethernet Interface Installation in an Expansion Rack GFK 0868 Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 7 Procedure 2 Verifying Proper Power Up
311. interpreted by the receiving device The Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface reserves this unnamed variable access type for future use Any attempt to access Series 90 70 memory through the Ethernet Interface with Unconstrained Address will for now result in a Negative Response with an error class see Table 6 60 of 7 access and an error code of 1 object access unsupported The Series 90 70 ladder programs may issue communication requests e g Read Re quests using an Unconstrained Address It will be up to the remote device to interpret the specified address 6 26 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Scalar Variables A Scalar Variable contains 1 element only An element may be as simple as a single bit it may consist of a 32 bit integer stored in 2 adjacent registers or it may be a string of octets spanning several dozen words Regardless of its size a scalar variable must be accessed as a whole it cannot be subdivided or split The Number of Elements parameter in a COMM REO that accesses a scalar variable must be 1 Array Variables An Array Variable refers to a collection of related elements For array variables the vari able definition describes which PLC memory locations are to be treated as an array Both Named and Unnamed variables may be referenced as array variables For exam ple array variable TempInputs may be defined as input points 100 through 200 and r
312. ion The purpose of the Stop is to transition the application from a RUN NING state to a STOPPED state The format of the Examine Stop Indication COMM REO is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8308 2074H The result of this command is that 38 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 32 Examine Stop Reset Indication Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value Invoke ID 0 1 0 65 535 Length of ProgramInvocationName 2 1 32 ProgramInvocationName 3 18 characterstring 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Length of ProgramInvocation Name The octet length of the ProgramInvocation Name ProgramInvocation Name The name of the ProgramInvocation to be stopped Any unused octets will be zero filled 6 44 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Stop Response Command 8309 The Stop Response command is used to provide a response either positive or negative to aStop indication A positive response should indicate that the application has success fully transitioned into the STOPPED state The COMM REO for the Stop Response is shown in the table below Table 6 33 Stop Response COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wa
313. ion Layer t TransportLayer v SRTP Service Agent y System Data Manager 4 10 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Display Data Representation The data that is displayed by the Station Manager is formatted in one of several ways depending on the type of data being input or output Numeric Values Numeric values are displayed as decimal values with the hexadecimal equivalent printed in parenthesis beside it An exception is baud rate which are printed only in dec imal Hexadecimal values are represented with a H as their last character An example of numeric output is shown below stime 2500 09c4H When numeric values are entered they may be entered as either a decimal value or as a hexadecimal value Hexadecimal values must be entered using the trailing H either upper or lower case as their last character Character Strings Values Character strings are delimited by double quote characters An example of character string output is shown below arespcnam Station 24 Responder Octet String Values Octet strings represent each successive octet as a pair of hexadecimal digits enclosed in double angle brackets lt lt gt gt Examples of octet string output are shown below stsap lt lt 0001 gt gt MAC address lt lt 080019010842 gt gt Object Identifier Values Object identifiers are displayed as a sequence of decimal values se
314. ion Manager 441 4 42 Table 4 22 Transport Layer Tallies Tally t Tally Meaning CrCong Incomingconnections refused due to congestion CrConfg Incoming connections refused due to negotiation failure reference number problems oraddressing problems CrRefCfg Incoming connections refused due to negotiation failure reference number problems oraddressing problem CrProErr Incoming connections refused due to protocol error CrUnsuc Timeouts waiting for connection confirm or outgoing connections refused due to protocol error PduProEr Invalid TPDUs other than Connect Request received PduRefP Disconnect Request or Error TPDUs received in response to a TPDU other than a Connect Request sent from local node ChkFail Incoming TPDUs with bad checksum fields Timeout Timeouts waiting for a response to a TPDU which was sent PduSent Count of the number of TPDUs sent PduRcvd Count of the number of TPDUs received ReTrans Count of the number of TPDUs re sent CrdtZero Number of Acknowledgement TPDus sent that reduced the foreign credit to zero OpenCon Count of the number of open connections Table 4 23 SRTP Service Agent Tallies Tally v Tally Meaning PDUsent Total Number of SRTP PDU s sent PDUrcv Total Number of SRTP PDU sreceived ConnRq Number of SRTP Connection requests received ConnRsp Number of SRTP Connection responses sent DataReq Number of SRTP Data request PDU s received DataRsp N
315. ion Processes for inclusion in the Local Application DIB The Local Application DIB Screen is shown below Configuration File Name C8888CGO8 0800 Local fipplication DIB gt SELECTED Common Name Station Name Station Type gt EM RESP 86619800008 STAL SERIES 98 78 gt N APPL08801908008868 STAL SERIES 98 78 gt N RESP8880190800801 STAZ SERIES 98 78 gt N APPL888819888881 STAZ SERIES 98 78 gt N RESP888819888863 STA SERIES 98 78 gt N RAPPL888819888863 STA SERIES 98 78 gt C END OF LIST 1 EE out of a maximum of entries selected Application Selected CY N Default N Press Tab to change selection and update Cursor Page Search through list and view Application Process details CAIt U Update Params CAIt U View CAIt K KEY HELP CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 12 Local Application DIB Screen This screen has the same basic format as the GEnet System Manager 7 Layer Application DIB screen Information is placed into the 7 Layer Application DIB when an Application Process Common Name is defined when configuring a station The Local Application DIB Screen displays a list of all 7 Layer Application DIB entries that have been defined The Local Application DIB may be examined using the Up Arrow Down Arrow PgUp PgDn Home and End keys SELECTED specifies whether that 7 Layer Application DIB entry has been selected for inclusion in the Local Application DIB Valid values are Y and
316. ion Report Services m Status Unsolicited Status and Identify Services m Start Stop Reset and Resume Services m Cancel Message Services GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 3 6 Selecting the Application Process The GEnet Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Interface allows two separate Application Com mon Names to be defined one for each Application Process Example Application Com mon Names are shown in the table below The Application Process used on an association will be the one whose Application Com mon Name was used when the association was initiated Associations originating from the local PLC ladder program are always from the Applica tion Interface AP Table 6 1 Example Application Common Names Application Process Station Manager Parameter Example Name MMS Responder arespcnam CELL_16_PLC ApplicationInterface applcnam MATERIAL IN Using the example Application Common Names from the table above a remote applica tion would choose the Application Process in the Series 90 70 PLC as shown below m MMS Responder An association from a remote Application Process AP to CELL 16 PLC will use the MMS Responder services of the Ethernet Interface m Application Interface An association between MATERIAL IN and a remote AP will use the Application Interface The Series 90 70 PLC ladder program or GSM Configuration Editor may define the Com mon Name for the local Application Interface
317. ion of the application in a Series 90 70 PLC is primarily to control the manufacturing process To minimize the communication burden on the application many of the MMS services requested of a Series 90 70 UE are handled entirely by the Ethernet Interface software Since the Ethernet Interface knows all object names and attributes it can provide this information to requesting clients without intervention from the Series 90 70 PLC application Only the services which require application action are passed by the Ethernet Interface software to the Series 90 70 PLC application Naming and Addressing Applications are identified by an Application Common Name which resolves into an address where the application resides The common name is a string of characters which contains human readable text The address associated with this name consists of a set of entries which are mostly interpreted as strings of bits and are more obscure for the human reader These strings of bits represent the address information for each OSI protocol in order to reach the destination application Many of these addresses are Service Access Point SAP selectors which identify how the information is to be routed through the layers to the proper layer entity above In the upper protocol layer there are also items called object identifiers which are used to specify an object in the OSI environment Objects are located in a hierarchical tree and are unambiguously identified by a path
318. ion software The Logicmaster 90 70 configuration software allows you to specify the modules and I O that will reside in your Series 90 70 PLC rack s Refer to GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software User s Manual for configuration information If you are using the Ethernet version of Logicmaster 90 refer also to GFK 0780 Logicmaster 90 70 Ethernet User s Manual Note The Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator is distinct from the GEnet System Manager GSM Configuration Editor The Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator defines a module in the Series 90 70 PLC to the PLC CPU The GSM Configuration Editor defines the Ethernet Interface to other nodes in the network 2 12 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Procedure 4 Configuring and Downloading a Station For the Ethernet Interface to become a fully Operational station you must perform two GSM operations W Create a station configuration file for the Ethernet Interface m Download the configuration file to the Ethernet Interface Each Interface requires configuration information and communications software in or der to operate The configuration information must be created and stored in a file using the GSM Configuration Editor for that type of interface This configuration file is down loaded to the Interface along with the communications software The file is retained on the PC hard disk for a permanent record of the configuration for e
319. ions for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Association Control Block The Ethernet Interface uses a group of 5 words called the Association Control Block ACB to provide information to the ladder program about an association There is one unique ACB for each active association for the Application Interface AP The PLC memory type and offset for the ACB is established in the local Initiate request or re sponse COMM REO and is thereafter referenced in every COMM REO for that associa tion The format of the ACB is specified in the table below Table 6 3 Association Control Block Parameter Description Word Offset AssociationStatus Word 0 AssociationStatus Word Extension 1 Invoke ID of confirmedtransaction 2 InvokeID continued 3 Problem Code 4 Association Status Word Indicates the current state of this particular association and any indications or confirmations received which may require action by the ladder pro gram See also Figure 6 2 Association Status Word Extension Indicates additional information regarding the Association See also Figure 6 3 Invoke ID Indicates the MMS Invocation Identifier of the most recent request which is confirmed by the Positive or Negative Confirm Bit in the Association Status Word Problem Code Indicates the reason for a received negative confirmation If the Prob lem Code is ff xx the Ethernet Interface received a Positive Response from t
320. is may be either the local RS 232 cable described in Appendix D or an Ethernet network connection The Network Download Mode is recommended if you have an Ethernet Interface installed in the device running the GSM because the time to download is less than 30 seconds A download in Local Download Mode takes 5 minutes or more due to the low er data rate of the RS 232 link Downloading requires cooperation between the Ethernet Interface and the GSM Both must be in appropriate states and both must be using the same download communica tion facility ie local or network Before attempting the download make sure you have fulfilled the conditions in the follow ingtable Note The MAC Address and Load Source Soft Switches of the Ethernet Interface are normally determined by the PLC CPU Configuration as set in Procedure 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90 70 PLC Module Configuration MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Load Source The Download Mode must be set so that it is compatible with the physical connection to be used Set the Download Mode to local or network as appropriate us ing the Setup GSM function in the GSM Main Menu Feature GSM Ethernet Interface MAC Address You must configure a station The MAC Address of the station must match the with the MAC Address of the MAC Address of the configuration to be down Ethernet Interf
321. it NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8309 2075H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Positiveor Negative Response 9 0 1 Problem Code 10 See Table 6 17 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M Decimal Value 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Stop Response command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Positive or Negative Response A value of 0 indicates that a positive response should be generated A value of 1 indicates that an error response should be issued Problem Code An encoded value of the problem as specified in the MMS service speci fication This field is ignored if a Positive Response is being sent GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 45 L6 Reset Request Command 8310 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use a Reset Request command to initiate a Reset MMS message Reset transitions the MMS Server ProgramInvocation from a STOPPED state into an IDLE state The COMM REO for the Reset Request is shown in the table below Table 6 34 Reset Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 24 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See
322. k 7 Station Manager PASSWORD DDP Parameters DDP_DISABLE NI DDP_CONFLICT_TIMEOUT E DDP RESOLUE RETRIES E LSAP BE PRIORITY E Number of octets in Pool 1 X1 10245 Default 28 Edit parameters on screen and press lt U to update then CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 16 System Parameters Screen Memor y Pool Allocation Parameters The Memory Pool Allocation fields define the buffer pools used by the Ethernet Inter face The Ethernet Interface RAM memory available after all the Ethernet Interface executive software and configuration information has been loaded is broken into four fixed size pools The MEMORY ALLOCATION parameter specifies the percentage of available memory to be allocated to each pool For example a value of 10 in this field would assign 10 per cent of available memory to be allocated to this pool The total of the MEMORY AL LOCATION for all buffer pools cannot exceed 100 percent If the total is less than 100 percent some of the available memory will not be used Buffers are used to hold messages which are sent or received on the network and to save state information regarding the communications software IN ALL CASES there must be buffers available and of sufficient size to contain the messages sent or received This means that the size of the largest buffer pool must exceed such parameters as the Maxi mum MMS Message Size the Maximum TPDU Siz
323. k the proper operation of the network before all of the station configuration parameters are finalized The Field Network Test utility provides access to a subset of the Station Manager commands that allow the station to operate as a mem ber of the network without requiring any software or configuration data to be loaded Installation Procedure 5 in Chapter 2 provides detailed instructions for checking the operation of a node across the physical network to all other nodes The Field Network Test utility can be entered only during a brief interval at the end of power up diagnostics When power up diagnostics are completed the character is displayed on the Station Manager terminal and a three second opportunity to enter the Field Network Test Utility begins If the character F or f is entered at the local Station Manager terminal during this three second window the Field Network Test utility will be entered Any character except F or f is ignored After three seconds the window for entering the Field Network Test utility closes and system initialization proceeds Note that these characters are not echoed back A typical invocation of the Field Network Test utility is shown below F or f character is entered within 3 seconds IC697 PLC Factory LAN Interface Copyright c 1990 1994 All rights reserved PROM Version 1 14 Ethernet MAC address 08001901001f Serial no 01393790 MAC default
324. k to make sure that you select an address that fits into your local administration scheme 3 22 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Configuration Editor Menu for Series 90 70 PLCs GFK 0868 Once a station has been defined in the Configure a Station Menu you may proceed to the Configuration Editor Menu by pressing Alt E to define that station s communica tion parameters in more detail Or you can return to this menu at any time in the future to examine or modify these parameters The screen below is the Configuration Editor for the STATION_TYPE SERIES_90 70 and LOAD_TYPE ISO 802 3 Note GEnet System Manager releases prior to 2 04 and Configuration Editors prior to 3 22 have a different menu hierarchy This manual reflects GSM changes first released in GSM 2 04 and Configuration Editor 3 22 CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CGO 400 SERIES_96 76 IS0862 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MMS Parameters System Parameters Print File Press Up Dn Arrow to move the cursor then press Enter to select CAIt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 3 5 Configuration Editor Menu From this menu you can access the various sub menus and screens that allow you to enter or modify parameters values The parameters have been divided into three main categories ISO MMS and System Each of these categories may contain sub catego
325. l parameter used to pass application specific information to the Program Invocation being started ProgramInvocation State The PLC address of the ProgramInvocation state This pa rameter is returned by the MMS provider only when a Negative Response is given to the Start Request A Negative Response will cause this word to be set to the current PI state refer to Table 6 40 at the remote node MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Start Indication Service The Start Indication Service uses the Start Indication bit bit 12 in the ASW to inform the ladder program that a Start Indication was received from the remote application See the discussion of PI Indications for important information Examine Start Indication Command 8305 The Examine Start Indication command is used to examine a Start indication received at the application The purpose of the Start is to transition the application from an IDLE state to a RUNNING state The format of the Examine Start Indication COMM REQ is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8305 2071H The result of this command is that 72 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the COMM REQ The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 29 Examine Start Resume Indication Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value Invoke ID 0 1 0 65 535 Length of ProgramInvocationName 2 1 32
326. layed will be rounded up to the next multiple of 16 from lt len_ref gt There is of course a performance penalty for displaying large PDUs when they occur frequently The identifier disables all tracing and should only be used by itself This command causes a diagnostic trace of the specified task or tasks to be displayed at the terminal where the TRACE command is invoked This trace information shows each protocol exchange at the selected task and can be used by protocol experts to diagnose problems at the node or in a remote host The format of the display is the same at both the local and the remote terminal The TRACE command issued last either locally or remotely determines where the dis play takes place Tracing of the Data Link layer 1 is not allowed if the TRACE command is issued at a re mote terminal Caution Enabling trace output has severe performance penalties for the communications software This command should only be used in debugging problems It should NEVERbe left enabled in operational nodes The trace output is enabled for only the tasks specified with the most recent TRACE command trace output is disabled for all tasks not specified GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 45 4 46 Trace output is generated by the selected tasks until either the TRACE command is is sued again to disable tracing or to select a new set of tasks or the timeout specified for the TRACE command has expired Th
327. ldtime 4 35 E 11 nislsap 4 35 B 11 nismac 4 35 8 11 nmaxpdu 4 35 8 10 NODE Command Station Manager 4 29 noptmiz 4 35 NPDU_LIFETIME npdulife 4 35 j npriority 4 35 nqwtime 4 35 8 11 NSAP 5 26 nsap ntick 1 35 8 11 Numeric Addresses Index O Object Scope B 12 B 29 Octet Strings and Visible Strings OK Command Station Manager ONLINE LED Operational State Operator Station Objects CNC Only B 25 OPTIMIZE 8 11 Optimizing the GSM for Network Opera tion EE OSI Addressing OSI Application Layer 6 1 OSI Reference Model 6 1 P PACKET PRIORITY pacsepci pacsesynnam pacsesynobj 4 35 PASSWORD PC Network Card Changing B 12 H 1 PC Network Card Installing B 5 PC Network Cards 3Com B 5 Intel SMC V stern Digital Xircom 3 5 PI Command Station Manager PI Commands PICS for the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS C PLC Driver Tallies Tally c PLC Module Configuration 2 12 pmmspci 4 35 pmmssynnam 4 35 pmmssynobj Ports AUL D AUI 22 4 Serial 2 4 Index 7 Index Index 8 Power Up Problems 2 11 Power up State Powering Up the Ethernet Interface 2 8 E10 Presentation Layer Parameters F 4 Presentation Layer Tallies Tally p Presentation Services B 4 Print File Menu B 24 Print File Screen 5 34 PRINT FILE NAME B 34 PRIORITY Problems
328. le will also already have one or more PC network card device definitions from the existing net work application If a valid definition exists for the PC network card selected for the Network GSM that definition need not be changed 3 AUTOEXEC BAT Include the SET GSMCFG command in this file but not the NETBIND command set cfiles C NGSMNCFILES assuming default directory rem Bind NDIS drivers rem gefndis netbind This command is a call to an NDIS driver binding utility Since an NDIS application already exists that application must have a call which does the same thing although it may not be obvious by looking at AUTOEXEC BAT When the PC is started bind ing must occur only once If installing the GSM software on a PC with a monochrome monitor add the following command to the AUTOEXEC BAT file MODE CO80 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 4 PROTOCOL INI Do not copy PROTOCOL GSM to PROTOCOL INI the existing network application will already have a PROTOCOL INI file and you would destroy its contents The PROTOCOL GSM file created during GSM installation contains a separate sec tion for defining the operating parameters of each NDIS device the Protocol Manag er driver PROTMGR the GSM application driver GEFNDIS and all network card drivers name varies The location of the existing PROTOCOL INI file is specified by the i parameter in the Protocol Manager pr
329. lication Process should normally follow with an Initiate Response command The COMM REO format for the Examine Initiate Indication command is shown in the table below Table 6 5 Examine Initiate Indication COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 3 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8202 200AH Examine Data Buffer Memory Type 7 See Table6 16 Examine Data Buffer Offset 8 1 Max Configured 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Examine Initiate Indication command Examine Data Buffer The Series 90 70 address where the data to be examined is to be put The result of this command is that 140 octets of data will be placed at the address speci fied in the MDB The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 6 Examine Initiate Indication Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value AssociationContext 0 0 2 Maximum MessageSize 1 64and up MaximumsServicesOutstanding Calling 2 0 6 MaximumsServicesOutstanding Called 3 0 6 Length of Remote Application Common Name 4 0 64 Remote ApplicationCommon Name 5 36 characterstring Lengthof Application Context Name 37 1 64 ApplicationContext Name 38 69 characterstring Association Context Th
330. lid for the specified Application Process 636 27C No message indication of this message type is pending to examine 637 27D Invalid Examine request No indications or initiate confirm pending to examine 638 27E NoStatus parameter The Status Length parameter is 0 639 27F Invalid Status Length parameter The Status Length parameter must be 1 640 280 Invalid command for the state of the association For example ifa Conclude Request has been made the ladder logic cannot make any Mes sage requests It may make message Response requests 642 282 Specified ApplicationProcess has not been activated The specified ApplicationProcess must have an APT defined The applcnampara meter must be defined Also the applapt parameter must not be equal to 0 643 283 No Application Process Title is specified in the Initiate Request 645 285 The Maximum message size specified in an Initiate response is larger than that proposed in the indication 650 28A No Program Invocation was specified in a Start Stop Restart or Resume 651 28B Invalidmemory type in Read or Write 653 28D The Domain Name contains an invalid character or is too long 654 28E Invalid Scope parameters in Read Write or InformationRequest 656 290 Data buffer size too small for Read Write or Information Reportrequest 658 292 Data buffer for Read or Write does not existin PLC memory 659 293 Invalid object class in GetNameL ist 660
331. linking indicates this node is sending or receiving data 2 When MODULE OK is ON and STATUS OK is OFF it is necessary to use the Station Manager NODE LOG and SOSW commands to distinguish among the possible causes Troubleshooting When STATUS OK LED is OFF If the Ethernet Interface is in the Operational State and the STATUS OK LED is OFF and the MODULE OK LED is ON then the Ethernet Interface has detected an exception condition and has made an entry in the Exception Log Each new not repeating log event is also sent to the PLC Fault Table where it can be viewed using Logicmaster 90 70 Software The format of a log event as displayed by the Station Manager is shown below Entry Date Time Event Count 1 2 3 4 5 6 dd mmm yyyy hh mm ss s xx XXXX xx XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX Date The Date column contains the system date of the last occurrence of the logged event Time The Time column contains the system time of the last occurrence of the logged event Event The Event column gives the kind of event which occurred Table 9 10 lists the possible values for events MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 9 Count The Count column contains a repetition count for the event If events which are identical occur regularly they might otherwise flood the log with useless entries Instead of recording each repeated event in detail the log simply keeps the time of the latest event and a cou
332. lity User Elements The part of the AP which uses the ASEs of one or more AEs is known as a User Element UE The UE is part of the AE and is the initiator of requests and responses and the recipient of indications and confirms from other applications Thus there are two UEs in the Series 90 70 PLC the Application Interface UE and the MMS Responder UE And there are two UEs in the CNC the CNC UE and the PMC UE GFK 0868 Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 7 In GE Fanuc control devices the purpose of the UEs is to transfer MMS service requests to peer applications in the network to control some manufacturing process The following figure illustrates the general relationship between the parts of the OSI Application process a45176 APPLICATION PROCESS APPLICATION ENTITY APPLICATION ENTITY USER ELEMENT 1 USER ELEMENT 2 APPLICATION APPLICATION APPLICATION APPLICATION SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE SERVICE ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT APPLICATION ASSOCIATION APPLICATION ASSOCIATION REMOTE REMOTE APPLICATION APPLICATION ENTITY ENTITY Figure B 6 Application Process Concept Series 90 70 PLC AP Implementation The next figure illustrates how the Series 90 70 PLC looks as part of the OSI Application Process AP 245177 MMS RESPONDER APPLICATION INTERFACE Application Process Application Process
333. ll also be removed if Y is specified Y specifies that optimization is used a N specifies that optimization is NOT used Defaults to N Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter noptmiz where a 1 equates to Y and a 0 equates to N ALL END SYSTEMS ES MAC ADDRESS The All End Systems ES MAC Address to be used by the Network Layer Entered as a hexadecimal string of octets Defaults to lt lt 09002B000004 gt gt Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter nesmac ALL END SYSTEMS LSAP The All End Systems ES Link Service Access Point to be used by the Network Layer Entered as a hexadecimal octet Defaults to FE Corre sponds to Station Manager Parameter neslsap ALL INTERMEDIATE SYSTEMS IS MAC ADDRESS The All Intermediate Systems IS MAC address to be used by the Network Layer Entered as a hexadecimal string of octets Defaults to lt lt 09002B000005 gt gt Corresponds to Station Manager Pa rameter nismac ALL_INTERMEDIATE_SYSTEMS LSAP The All Intermediate Systems IS Link Service Access Point to be used by the Network Layer Entered as a hexadecimal octet De faults to FE Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter nislsap There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esckey exit without saving any changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 11 Network Layer RIB Table Screen The ISO Net
334. ltransceiver cable connections Make sure the slide lock on the Ethernet Controller board is locked Replacethe transceiver cable with a known good cable Verify that theSeries 90 70 PLC power supply is properly grounded Makesure that the Ethernet Controller board ground safety wire is securelyfastened Replacethe transceiver with a known good transceiver If all stations are experiencing the problem the cable plantis probably at fault Recertify the cable plant If the problem still exists call GE Fanuc Automation forsupport GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 9 Table 9 8 Troubleshooting with ONLINE LED ON LED Indicators Possible Cause and Resolution The ONLINE LED is ON but there is no networkactivity There are several possible causes if a station cannot transfer data on the net work These causes are described below with the appropriate action to be taken Ensure that the Series 90 70 PLC power supply is properly grounded PLC Access Problem To verify that the Ethernet Interface can access the PLC issue successive TALLY C Station Manager commands If the PlcSweeptally is not increasing there are no windows being provided by the PLC Ifany of the tallies PlcAbtMyAbt or Timeout are incrementing there may bea hardware problem with the Series 90 70 PLC backplane interface Check the PLC Fault Table for entries for the Ethernet Interface Make sure to set the S
335. mation Protocol MAP specification MAP is a Connec tion oriented protocol that is stations residing on a network are able to transfer information only after establishing a logical connection much like two people using the telephone system Manufacturing Message Specification MMS A message format or language speci fied in internationally recognized standards which details how application informa tion is transferred MAP DIB MAP Directory Information Base See also Application DIB MAP Directory Information Base MAP DIB Each MAP station has a MAP DIB which is a directory of all application Processes with which the station will initiate MAP communications See also Application Directory Information Base MAP Interface A GEnet MAP 3 0 LAN controller board with associated modem See also LAN Interface Distinct from MMS Ethernet Medium Access Control MAC Ina local area network LAN the part of the protocol that governs access to the transmission medium independently of the physical char acteristics of the medium but taking into account the topological aspects of the net work in order to enable the exchange of data between data stations miniMAP A simplified version of MAP To achieve faster performance miniMAP passes MMS messages directly over a Type III Link Layer bypassing OSI layers 3 7 Net work through Application The GEnet MAP Interface supports miniMAP operation as specified in the MAP 3 0 specificati
336. mber of times the CPU sent a message MyAbt Count of the number of times the Ethernet Interface aborted a data transfer Write Count of the number of times the Ethernet Interface successfully wrote to theSeries 90 70 PLC memory Read Count of the number of times the Ethernet Interfacesuccessfully read from theSeries 90 70 PLC memory Timeout Count of the number of times the Ethernet Interface timed out waiting for a response from the CPU Regs Count of the number of registers configured in the PLC AnlInput Count of the number of Analog Input words configured in the PLC AnOutput Count of the number of Analog Output words configured in the PLC uCode The microcode revision level of the firmware in the Series 90 70 CPU Table 4 14 Distributed Directory Protocol DDP Tallies Tally d Tally Meaning RegSnt Numberof DDP Register requests sent UnregSnt Number of DDP Unregister requests sent RegRcv Number of DDP Register requests received UnregRcv Number of DDP Unregister requests received RslvSent Number of DDP Resolve name requests sent RslvRcvd Number of DDP Resolve name requests received RslvRsp Number of Resolve name responses sent NameConf NumberofNameconflict adviseindicationsreceived BrwseSnt Number of Browse requests sent BrwseRcv Number of Browse requests received MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 4 15 ACSE Tallie
337. menus that are used in configuring and managing your GEnet Ethernet Interfaces The chapter is divided into 5 sections Section 1 Installing and Starting Up the GSM Section 2 Configuring a Station for a Basic Network Section 3 Downloading a Station via the GSM Section 4 Accessing the Station Manager Section 5 GSM Support Functions There is additional GSM related information in Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Sta tions for Advanced Networks Note The GSM is used to maintain a variety of GEnet LAN Interfaces Parts of this chapter are written so as to reflect this generality Thus you may see occasional references to LAN Interfaces other than the type s you use RS 232 LINK SERIES 90 70 WITH a45341 802 3 LAN INTERFACE GSM LOCAL l In I 802 3 LAN TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER GSM NETWORK L un Figure 3 1 GEnet System Manager GSM on 802 3 LAN GFK 0868 3 1 What is the GSM The GEnet System Manager GSM is a menu driven software package that runs on a user provided personal computer PC The GSM is used to perform management func tions for GEnet LAN Interfaces The GSM software operates under the MS DOS envi ronment The primar y GSM functions
338. mmends that you purchase rather than make transceiver cables GEK 0868 Appendix D Communication PortsCharacteristics D 5 gt Transceiver Description Depending on your particular application any of several types of user supplied transceivers may be used Make sure the transceiver supports SQE The two most commonly used in industrial environments are 10Base5 and 10Base2 A typical configuration for each unit is shown in Figures D 3 and D 4 a44666 BNC 9 4 BNC 10BASE2 CONNECTOR 4 T COAXIAL CABLE 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE MALE s CONNECTO uma PWR soc e C ar O RCV O T SM ao NOTE SQE must be ON Figure D 4 10Base2 Transceiver Configuration NOTE SQE must be ON a44667 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE MALE CONNEGTOR CONNECTO EA d EM LU i 0 PWR soc e EL E XMT O m RCV O cP O 10BASES COAXIAL RC TAP Figure D 5 10Base5 Transceiver Configuration Note Transceivers must be 802 3 compatible and must have the SOE option Enabled Caution PLC power must be OFF when connecting or disconnecting the transceiver D 6 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Appendix Soft Switch Parameters E This appendix describes the parameters and settings that may be modified when config
339. mmonName 9 40 characterstring 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Define Application command Length of Application Common Name The number of octets in the common name Application Common Name A character string indicating the Application Common Name Any character from the ISO 646 Printable Character set may be used GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 67 L6 MMS Error Encodings The table below shows the allowed values for the MMS Error Services The Error Class and the Error Code are encoded in the Problem Code parameter of Response COMM REOs by using the formula PC EC 256 ER Notice that the Problem Code encoding simply consists of placing the hexadecimal value of the Error Class in the most significant octet and the hexadecimal value of the Error Code in the least significant octet of the Problem Code word 6 68 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Note Using values other than those shown in the following table will result in a reject of the error that is sent Table 6 60 MMS Error Values Class Code Meaning Class Code Meaning 0 VMD state 6 time resolution 0 other 0 other 1 vmd state conflict 1 unsupportable time resolution 2 vmd operational problem 7 access 3 domain transferproblem 0
340. munications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May vi 1994 Contents Section 2 Configuring a Station for a Basic Network 3 17 Definition of a Basic Network sees 3 17 Information Needed to Configure an Ethernet Station for a Basic Network 3 17 Configure a Station Screen 2 1 eee eens 3 19 Creating a Station Configuration File 0 cece eee eee eee 3 20 Selecting a Station Configuration File 0 cece eee eee 3 21 Deleting a Station Configuration File 0 cece eee eee 3 21 Structure of the MAC Address 0 00000 o cece cece eee ee 3 21 Configuration Editor Menu for Series 90 70 PLCs sese 3 23 Saving Changes Before Exiting the Configuration Editor Main Menu 3 24 ISO Parameters Menu 0 0 eee eens 3 25 Network Layer Parameters Screen 0 00 6c cece cece 3 26 Transport Session Layer Parameters Screen 0 00 eee 3 27 Application Processes Screen 1000 6606 c eee ees 3 28 Local Application DIB Screen 0 000s 3 30 MMS Parameters Menu 0 eee ees 3 31 Variable Names Screen 600 000s 3 32 Print File Screen 2 eoe xe ee e e a ves ea eed 3 34 Configuring a Non GE Fanuc Device esses 3 35 Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu 000 e eee 3 35 Foreign Application Processes Screen 660 c cece cece 3 37 Section 3 Downloading a Station cece eee eee 3 39 Downlo
341. n Files 3Com Etherlink Il CONFIG SYS FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 DEVICE DOS HIMEM SYS DEVICE DOS EMM386 EXE RAM 1024 DOS HIGH UMB DEVICE NGEFNDISNPROTMAN DOS I NGEFNDIS rem rem The Ethernet Adapter and its device driver must first be installed rem into your computer Replace the string lt DIRECTORY gt in the rem following DEVICEHIGH command with the directory which contains rem the specified device driver for your Ethernet Adapter module rem DEVICEHIGH lt DIRECTORY gt ELNKII DOS DEVICEHIGH GEFNDIS GEFNDIS DOS AJTOEXEC BAT SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES rem Bind NDIS Drivers GEFNDIS netbind GEFNDIS PROTOCOL INI protocol manager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS ETHERLINKII MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM RX BUFS 8 Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware P configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example i interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters E The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary ETHERLINKII DRIVERNAME ELNKIIS DMACHANNEL 1 INTERRUPT 263 IOADDRESS 0x300 MAXTRANSMITS 8 H 2 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 3Com Etherlink 16 CONFIG SYS FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 DEVICE DOS HIMEM
342. n Parameters LSAP for Application Layer APs Application Entity Qualifier for Application Interface AP ApplicationInterface AP object ID Commonname for Application Interface AP PSAP for Application Interface AP SSAP for Application Interface AP Application Entity Qualifier for Responder AP Responder AP object ID Responder AP common name PSAP for Responder AP SSAP for Responder AP Maximum Number of associations to Application Interface AP Maximum Number of associations to Responder AP ballocl balloc2 balloc3 balloc4 bbuff1 bbuff2 bbuff3 bbuff4 bremlsap brempri SystemMemory Configuration Parameters Buffer pool 1 percent Buffer pool 2 percent Buffer pool 3 percent Buffer pool 4 percent Buffer pool 1 buffer size Buffer pool 2 buffer size Buffer pool 3 buffer size Buffer pool 4 buffer size Remotecommand LSAP Remotecommandpriority ldrtry lgrpmsk0 7 Imacaddr Imaxdb Irxringlen Itxringlen lxidtime DataLink Configuration Parameters Retry option Group RX addresses 0 7 Station MAC address Maximum LLC buffer size Size of receive ring Size of transmit ring XID frame response timeout mmsacn mmsacnobj maltacn maltacnobj mmaxmsgsz MMS ProviderConfigurationParameters MMS Application Context Name MMS Application Context Name Object ID MMS Companion Standard ACN MMS Companion Standard ACN Object ID MMS Maximum Message Size 4 34 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC U
343. n Progress The domain name is used to identify the domain within the VMD This allows MMS services to manipulate the domain object Each domain represents a subset of capabilities in the VMD These capabilities are associated with the domain as attributes Domains have a state attribute which describes the readiness of the domain Figure B 12 shows the possible states for the domain In this and succeeding state diagrams states are illustrated as boxes and transitions as arrows NON EXISTENT 4 e 242793 1 As 9 D1 D9 2 Y 8 27 Nn LOADING a 1 TET Y 27 D2 INCOMPLETE Sy 13 a COMPLETE s 27 1 10 A 25 12 27 D3 gt D8 ty 27 Y la 24 READY e 18 14 16 NET Y D4 m m D7 by ay A 19 lt q IN USE 2 21 2 22 A 2 z Y D 5 Figure B 12 Domain State Diagram MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 D6 GFK 0868 Transitions of the Domain State Diagram are as follows Line Description Line Description 1 InitiateDownloadSequencelndication 15 CreateProgramInvocation Response 2 InitiateDownloadSequence Response 16 CreateProgramInvocationResponse 3 InitiateDownloadSequenceResponse 17 DeleteProgramInvocationIndi
344. n Status Word Extension sees 6 10 MMS COMM_REQ Command Descriptions n sasea nassar anrr 6 11 Association Services cu ia ne UAE EA I Yu Ad E E 6 11 Initiate Request Command 8201 2 6 11 Initiate Indication Service 6 eee cece 6 12 Examine Initiate Indication Command 8202 0 0 c cece eee 6 13 Initiate Response Command 8203 2 6 eee 6 15 Initiate Confirmation Service 0 cece eee eee 6 16 Examine Positive Initiate Confirm Command 8204 6 17 Conclude Request Command 8205 0 00 c cece eee eee 6 18 Conclude Indication Service 0 eee cece eee eee 6 18 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May x 1994 Contents Conclude Response Command 8206 000 cece eee eee ee 6 19 Conclude Confirm Service 0000 eens 6 19 Abort Request Command 8207 2 6 ene 6 20 Abort Indication Service 0 cee cece eee eee 6 20 Examine Association Options Command 8300 000005 6 21 Memory Access Services 6 eens 6 24 OVERVIEW peada en acid neve E ase Pulte del s ele oeque eee aah ed 6 24 Read Request Command 8322 6 66 eee ee 6 28 Read Indication Service 6 6 eee eee eens 6 30 Read Confirm Service 0 0 rele depre ey ebbe re enn 6 30 Write Request Command 8323 6666s 6 31 Write Indication Service 0 eee eee eens 6 32 Write Confirm Service ryoka
345. n ladders are installed into Logicmaster 90 70 as a folder named mmsv1 Set the PC default directory to the Logicmaster 90 70 drawer directory that contains the example ladder folder 2 With the Logicmaster 90 70 drawer as the default directory insert the GEnet Ethernet Interface software diskette into the A drive and type C LM90 gt a install d2 The install bat file on the diskette will create the folder subdirectory if necessary within the default directory and then copy the ladder files into the folder subdirectory 3 The sample folder may need changes depending upon your hardware m The default configuration assumes a CPU 771 with 256K of memory m The default configuration assumes a certain location of the Ethernet Interface in the Series 90 70 PLC rack You should compare the example configuration supplied and make changes with the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator where needed Note Keep the Ethernet Interface Status Word LISW location at I1 in order for this demonstration program to work correctly Zoom into the slot containing the LAN controller board and change the Station Address field to be 080019000001 for station 1 080019000002 for station 2 or 080019000003 for station 3 4 The example ladder must be loaded into the Series 90 70 PLC logic memory of stations stal sta2 and sta3 if desired Refer to GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software User s Manual when loading a ladder program into th
346. n state between IDLE and RUNNING STOPPING The STOPPING state is a transition state between RUNNING and STOPPED RESUMING The RESUMING state is a transition state between STOPPED and RUNNING RESETTING The RESETTING state is a transition state between STOPPED and IDLE The MMS Deletable attribute specifies whether the ProgramInvocation can be deleted by the MMS DeleteProgramInvocation service The Reusable attribute indicates whether or not the ProgramInvocation will return to the IDLE state after completing execution Associated with each invocation of a ProgramInvocation is an argument string This string is the Execution Argument attribute Series 90 70 PLCs Only The Series 90 70 application can use service requests to change the scope and the state of the ProgramInvocation Unless changed explicitly by the application the ProgramInvocation scope will be the entire PLC and its state will be RUNNING while the Series 90 70 PLC is solving the relay ladder application and STOPPED while the Series 90 70 processor is set to a stopped position When the Ethernet Interface is restarted it will automatically retrieve the name of the current Series 90 70 ladder logic program same as the folder name defined by Logicmaster 90 The Ethernet Interface then uses that as the name for its Program Invocation object that is visible to the network If there is no program in the PLC or if the Ethernet Interface is unable to retrieve the program name
347. n the network must have a unique MAC address which is different from all other stations on the network This is a12 hexadecimal digit MAC address Station Manager A part of the basic LAN Interface communications software that executes as a background activity on the LAN Interface The Station Manager pro vides interactive supervisory access to the LAN Interface module The Station Man ager may be accessed locally via the serial port or remotely over the LAN Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 11 A 12 Stop Services Communication services used to suspend control activity at a control de vice Symbolic Address Character string which symbolically represents a memory location in the PLC or CNC Tally Counters kept by the LAN Interface to indicate load and performance informa tion Token In a token passing Local Area Network a specified group of bits serving as a symbol of authority passed successively from one data station to another to indicate the station temporarily in control of the transmission medium NOTE All information is conveyed by frames Some frames contain a token and no user data others contain data and no token Token Bus A medium access control technique for a bus The stations form a logical ring around which a token is passed When a station receives the token it may transmit data The station must then pass the token on to the next station in the log ical ring Token Bus Network A bus network in which a token
348. n vene pibute erp e nea Pee 6 33 InformationReport Request Command 8320 6 00008 6 34 InformationReport Indication Service eeeeeeeeeeses 6 35 Examine InformationReport Indication Variable Command 8321 6 36 Transfer InformationReport Indication Data Command 8330 6 37 Discard InformationReport Indication Data Command 8339 6 38 Program Invocation Management Services 0 cece eee ee 6 39 Pl Commards 13 42 00 Steg cag dert beta A ves 6 39 Start Request Command 8304 6 eee eee 6 40 Start Indication Service 6 eee eee 6 41 Examine Start Indication Command 8305 0 c cece eee 6 41 Start Response Command 8306 6 eee eee 6 42 Stop Request Command 8307 0 eee ee eee 6 43 Stop Indication Service 6 eee ene 6 43 Examine Stop Indication Command 8308 eee eee 6 44 Stop Response Command 8309 6 eee eee 6 45 Reset Request Command 8310 2 eee eee 6 46 Reset Indication Service essi pee e eae ens 6 46 Examine Reset Indication Command 8311 0 e eee eee 6 47 Reset Response Command 8312 00 0000 c cece eee eee 6 47 Resume Request Command 8313 0 6 eee eee 6 48 Resume Indication Service 0 cece eee eee 6 49 Examine Resume Indication Command 8314 000000 6 49 Resume Response Command 8315 22 eee 6 50 Set Local ProgramInvocation Proce
349. nd the GEnet System Manag er Software but also Logicmaster Configuration and depending on your applications Program ming Software The figure below illustrates what the tasks are for each part of the system User supplied Series 90 70 PLC 949940 IBM PC LSS v TIT L ILI TL Ig TD gg EthernetInterface m GSM Software Logicmaster Software Install GSM Software Install Interface in PLC Power Up PLC Install Logicmaster Software Use Configuration Access Use LM90 Editor to Create Station Manager Configuration Configuration to Run Package to Perform Files for Stations Field Network Test ModuleConfiguration Use Downloaderto Download Configuration Files and Executive Software to Interface Access Station Manager on Interface to Monitor andManageNetwork Fully Operational Station Use LM90 Programming Package Needed only if 90 70 PLC DOR E willinitiate communications REQuest Figure 1 2 The Main Tasks for Installing the Ethernet Communications System GFK0868 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 5 Quick Guide to the Manual 1 6 As you can see from Figure 1 2 the tasks to install the Ethernet Communications System take three paths 1 GEnet System Manager GSM Tasks 2 Logicmaster Configuration and Programming Tasks 3 Ethernet Interface Tasks The table below breaks down these tasks and identifies where in the manual they are described Tasks Where to go in the Manual
350. nds Communications Commands It is not necessary to perform any ladder logic programming if your Host Computer ini tiates all communications i e if only the Responder Application Process is used on the GEnet Ethernet Interface However if you wish to initiate communications to other MMS devices from the Series 90 70 PLC you will need to know how to program these functions See the beginning of Chapter 6 and Appendix B for a discussion of Applica tion Processes The Communications commands provide the communications services between the PLC ladder logic and a remote station The application interface initiates communications services using the COMM REQ command in the ladder logic program See Chapter 6 for a complete description of each communication command available for the Ethernet Interface GFK 0868 5 1 Station Manager Commands The Station Manager Ladder requests allow the ladder logic application within the PLC to retrieve some of the same management information that is available through the Sta tion Manager There are four Station Manager ladder requests Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request Retrieve Tallies Request Retrieve Log Events Request Restart Ethernet Interface Refer to Chapter 7 for a complete description of the COMM_REQs for these requests Programming COMMunication REQuests Anumber of terms are used throughout this manual which have special meaning Com mand refers to a ladder logic instru
351. nds to Station Manager Parameter arespssap m ForAPPLICATION INTERFACE defaults to 02 hexadecimal For APPLICATION_INTERFACE corresponds to Station Manager Parameter applssap ACN The Application Context Name of the Application Process m For MMS corresponds to Station Manager Parameter mmsacn m For ALTERNATE_MMS corresponds to Station Manager Parameter maltacn ACN_OBJ_ID The Application Context Name ACN Object Identifier of the Applica tion Process Defined as an object identifier A sequence of numeric values For MMS defaults to 1 0 9506 2 3 m For MMS corresponds to Station Manager Parameter mmsacnobj m For ALTERNATE_MMS corresponds to Station Manager Parameter maltacnobj There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esckey exit without saving any changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 17 Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes Screen 8 18 This screen selection is used to modify the Abstract and Transfer Syntax definitions The Abstract Syntaxes Screen is shown below Configuration File Name CO 8 CG 600 SERIES_96 78 1S08 2 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MMS ISO Parameters syst Data Link Parameters l Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes P MHs SYNTAX_NAME MMS PCI SYNTAX_OBJ_ID MEHE 3 gt ACSE SYNTAX_NAME ISO 8658 ACSE1 SYNTAX_OBJ_ID HESSE
352. need be taken by the local ladder program No Write Response service is available to the local ladder program MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Write Confirm Service The Write Confirm Service is provided by the Positive and Negative Confirm bits in the Association Status Word of the ACB This service determines whether the write to the remote application was successful When the Negative Confirm bit is set the Problem Code in the ACB is updated with the reason for the negative confirm The ladder program may but need not use the Ex amine Last Error Information command to learn more about the complaint If the Posi tive Confirm bit is set the write data will have been written to the remote application GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 33 6 InformationReport Request Command 8320 6 34 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use an InformationReport Request command to initi ate an Information Report MMS message This service is used to inform the peer MMS application of the value of a variable The Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface supports the InformationReport of only Named Variable objects This is an unconfirmed service The COMM REO format of the InformationReport Request is shown in the table below Table 6 22 InformationReport Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 128 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 N
353. net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Foreign Application Processes Screen To define Application Processes for a Foreign station select Application Processes from the Foreign Device Configuration Editor Menu The screen below will appear This screen allows you to place Application Process definitions in the 7 Layer Application DIBs shown below CONF IGURE Foreign Device Config Edit Version 3 18 r Application Processes ENTRY COMMON NAHE APT_ORJ ID c gt AE_QUAL ME PSAP SSAP TSAP NSAP Application Common Name lt 1 64 characters Esc Back up f Move PgUp PgDn Page Figure 3 15 Foreign Application Processes Screen Ten Application Processes may be defined for the station The PgUp and PgDn keys are used to page through the Application Processes entries The Application Processes Parameters are defined as follows COMMON_NAME The Application Common name 1 64 char The COM MON_NAME is referenced by the PLC ladder program when using the Initiate Re quest command APT_OBJ_ID The Application Process Title Object Identifier This field is optional and may be left blank Itis defined as an object identifier Itis a sequence of decimal nu meric values AE_QUAL The Application Process Application Entity AE Qualifier 0 65535 It de faults to 0 The next four parameters are all Application Process S
354. network card in your PC be sure to do the following 1 Install the network card into the computer according to the manufacturer s instructions Setup the hardware as described in the table below these are the default settings of the card If you do not use the default settings you will need to record your settings for later use in the section Setting Up DOS Files Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 5 Table 3 2 Default PC Hardware Settings for 802 3 Ethernet Cards Vendor Vendor Model Restriction Hardware Settings 3Com EtherlinkII 3C503 I O base address 0x0300 IRQ3 3Com Etherlink16 3C507 I O base address 0x0300 IRO3 3Com Etherlink MC N A ELNKMC SYS v 2 0 min SMC V stern Digital EtherCard PLUS I Obase address 0x0280 IRQ3 Memory Address 0D00H SMC V stern Digital EtherCard PLUS Elite 16 I Obase address 0x0280 IRQ3 Memory Address 0D00H SMC W stern Digital EtherCardPLUS A I Obase address 0x0280 IRO3 Memory Address 0D00H Intel Intel 82593 I O base address 0x0300 IRO15 Xircom Xircom Pocket Adapter None PE2NDIS EXE v 1 44 min 2 Install the device driver software provided with your network card 3 Runany diagnostic software provided by the manufacturer of the network card to ensure that the card is working properly Installing the GEnet System Manager GSM Software 3 6 To become fully operational your GEnet LAN Interfac
355. ng for execution The COMM REO format for the Cancel Request is shown in the table below Table 6 51 Cancel Request COMM REG Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8290 2062H Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 OriginalInvoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Cancel Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Original Invoke ID Specifies the particular transaction which the PLC ladder program wishes to cancel The COMM REQ Complete With Error code in the CRSW will appear if the original transaction has already completed Otherwise the ACB Positive or Negative Confirm bit willturn on upon the completion of the particular service which was canceled A suc cessfully canceled service will return a negative confirm GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 61 L6 Get Remote Name List Command 8301 6 62 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use a Get Remote Name List command to ask that all Object names of a desired object class and scope in a remote peer
356. nique load multicast address and IEEE 802 4 slot time This feature is not applicable to Ethernet IEEE 802 3 networks and so the default Load Group 0 is sufficient 3 When the Network Downloader receives a Request for Load message from a LAN Interface it loads the necessary files into the LAN Interface across the LAN While the station is being downloaded the name of the current file being loaded is dis played along with the file block count If an error occurs during the download process an error message is displayed on the screen to indicate the nature of the error If an error occurs in the Data Link software or hardware an error code is displayed on the screen Appendix J lists the error codes that can be displayed along with their de scriptions When the download is complete a message is displayed on the screen indicating that the download was successful MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 The Downloader transfers three files to the LAN Interface in this order m XFM LAN Interface communications software m CXxxxxx xxx LAN Interface configuration file m GO Commands the LAN Interface to start execution of loaded software Before the LAN Interface is downloaded the GSM Downloader will check the GSM Sys tem Files to see if the configuration file needs to be updated The System Files consist of the System Slot Time and the Application DIBs If any of these file
357. nits of 10 milliseconds The default value for this parameter is 15 se conds Range 1 65535 tinactive dec 6000 Inactivity Timeout for the TransportLayer This timer esta blishes the maximum time that the Transportconnection will be maintained without receiving a TPDU This parameter is in units of 10 milliseconds The default value for this parameter is 60 seconds Range 1 65535 tlcack dec 0 LocalAcknowledgeTimeout for the TransportLayer This timer is reserved for future use tmaxpdu dec 10 Maximum PDU size for the TransportLayer This establishes the maximum TPDU size negotiated for data transfers This parameter is used as a power of 2 to get actual size A value of 10 implies a size of 1024 octets Range 7 12 treftime dec 0 Reference Timeout for the TransportLayer This parameter establishes the period during which a source reference cannot be reassigned to another Transportconnection Range 0 65535 This parameter is in units of 10 milliseconds trtrancnt dec 5 Retransmit Counter for the TransportLayer This counter establishesthe maximum number ofre transmissions for Connect Request CR Connect Confirm CC Data Transfer DT Expedited Data ED and Disconnect Request DR TPDUs Range 1 10 GFK 0868 AppendixF Station Configuration Parameters F 5 F 6 Table F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager Continued Parameter Format Default Description
358. nnamed Array Variable Unconstrained AddressAlternate Access Elements Desired Length of Variable Name or Address When the Variable Type parameter is set to the value 0 4 or 8 a variable name is used The Length of Variable Name parameter is the length of Variable Name in characters An example of a variable name would be the variable name REGISTER with the Length of Variable Name parameter equal to 8 which might be used to access a Series 90 70 PLCs Register table Refer to the discussion Named Variables earlier in this chap ter for more information When the Variable Type parameter is set to a value other than 0 4 or 8 an address is used The Address parameter contains the Numeric Address or Symbolic Address The Address parameter may be up to 16 octets in length An example of a Symbolic Address would be the address R12 which would be used to access Series 90 70 PLC Register 12 Table 6 17 specifies the valid Symbolic Addresses for the Series 90 70 PLC Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 29 An example of a Numeric Address would be address 0000 0008H which would be used to access Register 1 in the Series 90 70 PLC The Length of Address parameter is the length of the address in octets or characters for the Symbolic Address For Numeric Addresses the length should be 4 octets Variable Name or Address The name or address of the specific variable to be read It consists of either a character string which i
359. ns are discussed ONLY in Chapter 8 Screen is not applicable to Series 90 70 MMS Ethernet 245342 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Section 2 Configuring a Station for a Basic Network Aside from possibly using the GSM to access the Station Manager for field network test ing the first major GSM operation you will perform in bringing up your network is con figuring a station Within the GSM there are various configuration screens There are screens for configur ing stations for tuning a network for ultimate performance and for routing communica tions through network routers If your network is a basic network as is usually the case you will need to use only a few of these screens to configure stations See definition of a basic network below These basic configuration screens are discussed in this section Note The configuration screens not discussed in this chapter are used for configuring and tuning more advanced networks These screens are discussed in detail in Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an AdvancedNetwork Even if you are configuring an advanced network you may wish to begin with this section and then proceed to Chapter 8 later Definition of a Basic Network A basic network is a network in which communications are limited to IEEE 802 3 stations that are interconnected directly or through a repeater or bridge If a host is part of the
360. nsport layer is unable to attach to SDM Channel B Normal MMS communication is not possible This is an internal software error and should be reported to GE Fanuc NA System Error 385 This error occurs when a request is made for memory and no memory of the requested size or larger is available The size of the request is stored in Entry 3 of the log event This error can be caused by Misconfiguredmemory pool sizes or percentages Misconfiguredparameter Imaxdb causing excessive LLC demands formemory on the Ethernet Interface True exhaustion of memory resources due to insufficient processing capacity at the station excessively long PLC scan time or excessive network traffic addressed to the station System software error System Error 386 This error is caused by a request to release a buffer which is not a recognizable buffer from the system This is a catastrophic system software error and should be reported to GE Fanuc NA The Ethernet Interfaceis automatically restarted System Error 389 This error occurs when the system is unable to allocate a buffer for CRC calculation use Further background CRC checking cannot be performed Entry 3 indicates the required buffer size Check the system buffer pools to see that a buffer of required size is available adjust system bufferpoolsizesand orallocationsifnecessary System Error 398 This error occurs when the MMS Object Manager is unable to allocate a VMD machine Normal
361. nt c Entry 2 10b BufProb A received LLC frame was lost due to the inability of the LLC software to acquire asystem buffer This may indicate a memoryconfiguration problem or a temporary overload of traffic at the station UnrecPdu Number of 802 3 frames received and discarded because the LLC control fieldisinvalid TstRcvd Number oftest frames received TstResp Number of test frame responses sent PadErr Number of frames received which had a padding and the padding was more than 48 bytes Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 39 4 40 Table 4 17 MAC Layer Tallies part of Tally I Tally Meaning SQEErr Number of times the SQE test failed MisdPack The number of packets a receiver lost due to a lack of receive buff ers FrameErr The number of incoming packets that did not contain a multiple of eight bits SuccOne The number of times a successful transmission was made with ex actly one retry CrcErr The number of incoming packets detected with a CRC error RbufErr The number of times the next buffer was unavailable while receiv ing a chained data packet LateColl The number of times a collision occurred after the slot time of the channel had elapsed LostCarr The number of times the carrier was lost during a transmission BsyCarr The number of times the transmitter had to wait because it sensed a busy carrier signal NoRtry The number of times a successful transmission was made with no retries needed
362. nt for this node Chexadecimal Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CAI1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 5 Network Layer Parameters Screen The Network Layer Parameters are defined as follows NSAP The Network Service Access Point for this node Entered as a hexadecimal string of octets Defaults to 49 lt MAC_Address gt 01 Corresponds to Station Manager Pa rameter nsap LSAP The Link Service Access Point Entered as a hexadecimal octet Defaults to FE Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter alsap PACKET_PRIORITY The Link Layer Priority at which the Network Layer data packets are sent on the LAN Valid range of 0 to 7 Defaults to 7 Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter npriority MAX_NPDU_SIZE The maximum Network Layer data packet size Valid range of 256 to 8196 octets Defaults to 1497 octets Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter nmaxpdu NPDU_LIFETIME The lifetime in one half second intervals of a NPDU being sent out onto the network by the local node Valid range of 0 to 65535 Defaults to 5 seconds 10 one half second intervals Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter npdulife CONFIG_TIME The time interval in seconds between End System Hello ESH NPDUs sent by this node Valid range of 0 to 65535 Defaults to 30 seconds Corre sponds to Station Manager Parameter ncfgtime HOLDING_TIME The amount of time in seconds that a
363. nt of the number of repetitions of the repeated event Log entries are retained on restart and reloads of the Ethernet Interface Entry The Entry columns contain detailed information about the event and is subdi vided into 6 entries Entry 1 Entry 6 Troubleshooting When the STATUS OK LED is ON Sometimes problems can occur even when the STATUS OK LED is ON indicating nor mal operation In this case follow the troubleshooting procedure below Table 9 7 Troubleshooting with ONLINE LED OFF LED Indicators Possible Cause and Resolution The ONLINE This indicates that an attempt to send a frame resulted in a local fault indica LED is OFF tion This usually results from a hardware problem If this occurs follow the procedurebelow Check to be sure the LAN ONLINE Soft Switch is set to YES By issuing the SoftSwitch Station Manager command checking the Network Online field Check to be sure the drop cable is securely fastened to the controller board connector and to the transceiver Makesure the transceiver is securely fastened to the Ethernet network trunk cable Issuea TALLY L Station Manager If either the MacErr or the SQEErr tally is non zero the local station may be experiencinganunstable network In this case follow the procedure below If this station is the only one experiencingproblems Verify that the SOE jumper is enabled on the transceiver connected to the Ethernet Interface Re tightenal
364. ntation GEFNDIS directory GEnet System Manager a GEnet System Manager Data Link Error Codes 1 Get Remote Name List Command 8301 MMS COMM REQ GIVEUP TIMEOUT Glossary of Terms A 1 A 3 GSM 1 1 GSM functions B 2 GSM Keyboard Functions 3 15 GSM Main Menu 3 13 GSM Menu Structure GSM Menus 3 14 GSM Software Updating 3 12 GSM Support Functions GSM Using Local Connection GSM Using Network Connection GSM Hardware Requirements 3 5 GSM Installing and Starting Up b 4 H Hardware Requirements for the GSM B 5 HELP Command Station Manager HOLDING_TIME How to Make it Work Identify Confirm Service 6 60 Identify Request Command 8240 MMS COMM_REQ Implemenation of the OSI Model in GE Fanuc Control Devices INACTIVE_TIMEOUT InformationReport Indication Service 6 35 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 InformationReport Request Command 8320 MMS COMM REQ Initialization Files Sample DOS H 2 Initiate Confirmation Service Initiate Indication Service Initiate Request Command 8201 MMS COMM_REQ Initiate Response Command 8203 MMS COMM REQ Initiating the Download Installing and Starting Up the GSM Installing the Ethernet Interface in the PLC Installing the PC Network Card B 5 Integers B 29 Intel 82593 Introducton ISO Networking Concepts ISO Parameters Menu ISO Protocols Implemented K Keyboard Functions GSM L
365. nterface executive software Confirmation In the OSI Reference Model one of four primitive types of interchange between entities of adjacent layers A Configuration is returned to the higher layer upon completion of a requested service Connection A logical communication link established between two end points and used to transfer information Connectionless Service A protocol in which peer entities can communicate without first setting up a logical connection Connection Oriented Service The set of services by which peer entities establish use and terminate connections with one another MMS applications are able to transfer information only after establishing a logical connection CSMA CD See Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Data Communications Equipment DCE Examples Modems and transceivers Dis tinct from DTE Data Terminal Equipment Data Link Layer In Open Systems Interconnection architecture the layer Layer 2 that provides services to transfer data over a physical link between open systems Con sists of the LLC and MAC sublayers Directory Information Base DIB A table that holds the addressing information of the remote stations which the local application may initiate communications with The DIB performs the same function as a telephone book Directory User Agent DUA A component of the application layer Layer 7 that man ages addressing information for other application layer components DIS
366. nterface serial port used to connect to the GSM and the AUI port used to connect to the network transceiver What this Appendix Contains Information pertaining to the Serial Port for Local GSM communications m Serial Port Pinouts m Serial Cable Diagrams Information pertaining to the Attachment Unit Interface AUI Port for Ethernet communications AUI Port Pinouts m AUI Cable Diagram m Transceiver Unit Description gt Serial Port for Local GSM Communications This section presents the information you need to construct a cable for serial communications between the Ethernet Interface and the Local GSM or other serial terminal Information in this section includes serial port settings pinouts and cable diagrams Serial Port Settings The serial port COM1 must be set to 9600 bps 8 bits no parity and 1 stop bit Serial Port Pinouts Serial Cable D 2 The serial port is located on the front edge of the Ethernet Interface The serial port is a 9 pin D type female connector that presents an RS 232 DTE Interface It is used to con nect the Ethernet Interface to the local GEnet System Manager GSM Connector pin outs are shown in Table D 1 Table D 1 Pinouts of the Serial Port Pin Number Signal Description 1 Shield ChassisGround optional 2 TXD Transmit Data output 3 RXD Receive Data input 7 Common SignalGround allothers Unused A serial cable is needed to connect the GSM to
367. ntry 2 of the logged event contains the error code as shown below 102 LAN Transceiver Fault Attempting Recovery Either the Transceiver or Transceiver cable failed or became disconnected Reattach the cable or replace the Transceiver or cable If SQEErr is incrementing but LostCarr is not the Transceiver SOE test switch may be setincorrectly Transceivers used on GEnet must have the IEEE 802 3 SQE_TEST enabled Use the TALLY L cmd to distinguish whether the SQE test done on each transmitted frame failed SOEErr or the transceiver lost carrier while transmitting LostCarr Online operation should resume within 10 seconds after repair 103 LAN Data Memory Exhausted Check Parms Resuming The MAC device discarded a receive frame because there was no buffer to receive the frame into More input buffers should be allocated to the MAC by increasing the parameter Irxringlen The TALLY L cmd will distinguish whether there were simply no receive buffers MisdPack or an excessively long frame that required chaining of multiple buffers RbufErr 105 LAN Controller Tx Underflow AttemptingRecovery During transmission the MAC was unable to get data from memory quickly enough This indicates a LAN Controller design flaw it should not occur This error may cause loss of both tx and rxmessages that are in process since the MAC must be reinitialized done automatical ly Online operation should resume within 10 seconds after repair
368. ny of these terms are referenced by acronyms For example a Programmable Logic Controller PLC computer or other device that connects to a network is called by the general name station This appendix contains a concise alphabetized listing of conventional communications terms and where applicable their associated acronyms Most of these terms but not necessarily all are used in this manual Commonly Used Acronyms and Abbreviations This is a listing of acronyms and their derivation that are commonly used throughout this manual GFK 0868 ACB AssociationControl Block ACN ApplicationContext Name ACSE Association Control Service Element AE ApplicationEntity AP ApplicationProcess ASCII American National Standard Code for InformationInterchange ASE ApplicationService Element ASW Association Status Word ASWE Association Status Word Extension AUI Attachment Unit Interface BCD Binary Coded Decimal BPS Bits Per Second COMM REO COMMunicationREQuest CPU Central ProcessingUnit CSMA CD Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection DCE DataCommunicationsEquipment DDP DistributedDirectory Protocol DIB Directory Information Base DIS ISO DraftInternationalStandard DOS Disk Operating System DTE Data TerminalEquipment DUA Directory User Agent EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory GSM GEnet System Manager H Hexadecimal T O Input Output IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers A 1 A
369. o 2 lt lt RUNG 9 gt gt FST_SCN 4 ee a MOVE_ INT LANIFOK CONST IN Q ASSOCOK 00000 LEN 00002 lt lt RUNG 10 gt gt INITREQ 4MOVE 4 INT l l CONST IN Q INIT SW 00000 LEN 00001 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 lt lt RUNG 11 gt gt INITREQ 4 ed T BLKMV BLKMV INT INT CONST IN1 Q R00200 CONST IN1 Q R00207 00073 00070 CONST IN2 CONST IN2 00000 00016 CONST IN3 CONST IN3 00008 00000 CONST IN4 CONST IN4 00249 00000 CONST IN5 CONST IN5 00000 00000 CONST IN6 CONST IN6 00000 00000 CONST IN7 CONST IN7 08201 00010 lt lt RUNG 12 gt gt INITREQ 4 SROO200 IN FT l R00099 SYSID l CONST TASK 00000000 END OF BLOCK LOGIC Appendix G Ladder Programs for Network Testing G 6 NPUT OUTPUT INTERNAL TEMPORARY LOCAL REGISTER PROGRAM REGISTER REGISTER ANALOG INPUT ANALOG OUTPUT KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK PROGRAM BLOCK RDREG LOCAL REGISTER L MEMORY SIZE BYTES PROGRAM BLOCK SIZE BYTES DECLARATIONS ENTRIES HIGHEST REFERENCE USED NONE 000013 ES NONE NONE LA NONE LE NONE R00345 NONE I SAQ NONE K
370. o Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8320 2080H Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Variable Type 9 0 4 or 8 Length of VariableName 10 1 32 VariableName 11 26 characterstring Altemate Access Index 27 28 Number of Elements 29 VariableScope 30 0 Reserved 31 0 Reserved 32 47 0 InformationReportData 48 133 data 1 Quick Reference Decimal Value 8 10 Memory Type R AI AQ 12 AI Q T M 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an InformationReport Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Variable Type Must contain the value 0 4 or 8 as shown in Table 6 20 Length of Variable Name The length of the variable name in characters Variable Name Specifies the variable whose value is to be reported Alternate Access Index Specifies the beginning index into the array from which data is to be reported This parameter is only used when the Variable Type parameter has a val ue of 8 Number of Elements Must accurately specify the number of elements to be trans ferred Refer to the table below for use of this parameter MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table 6 23 InformationReport El
371. oad Station Access Station Mana Local Downloader Configure a Station STATION_NAME SE Configure Netuork u List All Stations List A11 Configured Applications Setup GSM EXIT TO DOS Station Name or lt lt MAC Address gt gt of Station to load Press filt L for List Input station name and press Enter to start Local Downloader CAIt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 3 16 Download Station Screen Downloading Locally Over the Serial Port If you have selected Local Download Mode in the GSM Setup menu you will be prompted for the name of the station to be downloaded This is the same 20 character name you used when you configured the station from the Configure a Station menu Note that the station must be previously configured As an alternate method of identify ing the station to be downloaded you may enter its MAC address or you may select the station name from a list by entering Alt L After you enter the STATION NAME the GSM will download the communications soft ware and configuration file over the serial link It takes 5 minutes or more to serially GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 39 load a station but it is necessary only to perform the procedure when you are perform ing a software or configuration upgrade to your LAN Interface There are 3 files that are downloaded to the LAN Interface While the station is being downloaded the name of the current file
372. of the End System with which you wish to communicate Entered as a blank or an even numbered string of hexadecimal digits FIRST_HOP_NSAP The Network SAP of the first hop The first hop is either the near est Router or if there is no Router the end system with which you wish to communi cate See the section immediately below titled Specifying Automatic or Static Rout ing Entered as a blank or an even numbered string of digits FIRST HOP MAC ADDR The MAC Address of the first hop Entered as a blank or as 12 hexadecimaldigits FIRST HOP LSAP The Link SAP of the first hop Defaults to FE and cannot be changed 8 12 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Specifying Automatic or Static Routing 1 To use ES IS automatic routing use the default settings DESTINATION_NSAP FIRST_HOP_NSAP and FIRST HOP MAC ADDRall blank 2 Static fixed Routing is selected whenever FIRST HOP NSAP is not blank To use Static Routing set all fields as follows m Toaccess a specific End System that is on your local sub network i e a Router is not needed set DESTINATION NSAP and FIRST HOP NSAP to the NSAP of that End System and FIRST HOP MAC ADDR to the MAC Address of that End System In the figure below an example is End System A to End System B m Toaccess a specific End System on another sub network via a Router set DESTINATION NSAP to the NSAP of the End System and FIRST HOP
373. of the command and are not part of the command The use of these symbols is briefly described below Arguments to commands are often given symbolic names which are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt For example lt PAGE gt is an argument to many commands The com mand specification for lt PAGE gt is described as a number which specifies the page number of the display It is important to remember to enter the argument and not its symbolic name For example to see the second page of the 7 Layer Application DIB one should enter MDIB2 not MDIB PAGE Optional arguments are surrounded by square brackets for example REPORT lt PAGE gt Again the brackets should not be entered as part of the command Sometimes there are several alternatives for an argument The alternatives are listed in the command description separated by a vertical bar 1 and enclosed in braces 1 For example when using the CLEAR command only one of the alternatives should be selected CLEAR EXS LOG TALLY HEAP Command Input Processing 4 16 Anything in a command description that is not one of the constructs discussed above should be entered exactly as it is shown All data entered for the command is converted to lower case unless it is enclosed in double quotes To use a double quote character within an argument string the double quote should be entered twice for example This string would contain one character
374. of these services the Set Local Pro gramInvocation Processing command can be used to enable application handling of these services The COMM REO format of the Set Local ProgramInvocation Processing command is shown in the table below Table 6 38 Set Local Programlnvocation Processing COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 2 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8356 20A4H ProgramInvocationProcessing Option 7 0 or not 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Set Local ProgramInvocation Processing com mand ProgramInvocation Processing Option If this value is specified as zero default Pro gram Invocation processing will occur that is the MMS Start Stop Reset and Resume services will affect the solution of the PLC logic If this value is non zero these MMS services will be indicated to the application where it must be handled GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 51 L5 Set Local Programinvocation State Command 8355 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use a Set Local ProgramInvocation State command to change the state attribute of the currently executing MMS ProgramInvocation PI ob ject This allows the PI state to be accurately reflect
375. of this controller board MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Procedure 1 Installing the Ethernet Interface in the PLC This section describes the physical installation of the Ethernet Controller board into the Series 90 70 PLC rack For information on the installation procedures for the rack 90 70 CPU Power Supply and other Series 90 70 modules refer to GFK 0262 Series 90 70 Pro grammable Controller Installation and Operation User s Manual Equipment Required to Perform the Installation Procedures In addition to the Ethernet Controller board make sure you have the items listed below before you begin m A Series 90 70 PLC rack m A Series 90 70 CPU m Anoperating Logicmaster 90 70 system serial parallel or network version m AWorkmaster or IBM compatible personal computer m The GEnet Ethernet Interface software diskette m A copy of the data sheet applicable to your Ethernet Controller board and cable plant m A certified IEEE 802 3 compatible transceiver and Ethernet cables m A serial cable for the RS 232 connector on the Ethernet Controller board see Appendix D Note The Ethernet Interface requires a power supply that can provide 5 Vdc and 12 Vdc Use one of the following power supplies IC697PWR711 IC697PWR721 IC697PWR731 Ethernet Interface Installation The Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Interface installation is summarized here 1 Readand rec
376. oft Switch parameter bponlineto YES Replace the digital controller board with a known good board Possible Application Error To verify that the application requests are being seen and to determine how they are being processed enter the EXS Station Manager command to look at the Extended Status Buffer If no commands show up for any of the communication services and there are no log entries of event a and no evidence of problems accessing the PLC call GE Fanuc Automation for support If the Extended Status Buffer shows commands being issued look at the error code in the Extended Status Buffer If this value is not zero it indicates that the requests are receiving a COMM REQ Complete With Error status Use Table9 12 to determine the type of error and correct the error by changing the request If after this errors are still being returned call GE Fanuc for support Exception Log Event Error Codes The error codes below appear in the Event column of a log event To view the log issue the LOG command from the Station Manager Table 9 9 Exception Log Event Definitions Log Event Cause 1 o0 a FM oo doom WN A Powerup A log entry of this event will appear every time the Ethernet Interface is Restarted or powered up System events Network Layer events Transport Layerevents Session Layer events Presentation Layer events Application Layer events PLCdriver events SRIP Service Agen
377. ollowing commands to each station Transcribe all non zero results to the Data Sheet rem node log rem node tally 1 7 Getthe exception log and LLC and MAC tallies from the initiator by issuing the following commands log tally 1 Transcribe all non zero results to the Data Sheet The LOG response from each node including the initiator should appear as follows REM Exception Log gt gt gt REMS Exception log empty Make a notation on the Network Test Data Sheet that the log is empty or record the values if any reported in the log response message The TALLY L response from each Ethernet Interface should appear as follows REM lt lt lt Data Link Tallies gt gt gt REM Unreg REM MacErr REM TstResp REM REM lt lt lt MAC Tallies gt gt gt REM gt SQEErr 0000H MisdPack 0000H FrameErr REM CrcErr 0000H RbufErr 0000H LateColl REM BsyCar 0000H NoRtry 0647H SuccMore 0000H LsapO0 0000H BufProb 0000H 0000H LsapOfl 0000H UnrecPdu 0000H Eth Unreg 0000H 0000H TstRcvd 0000H 0000H SuccOne 0000H 0000H LostCarr 0000H 0000H FRtry 0000H The TALLY L report provides more detailed information about faults than the TEST ALL command Acceptable tally rates are indicated on the Network Test Data Sheet Note that certain tallies should always be 0 while other tallies are acceptable if their average rate is not excessive Record the LOG and TALLY L results for each In
378. om Table 7 5 The following table contains the names of the tallies and their associated offsets Each tally entry is 2 bytes in length 7 4 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table 7 5 Tallies Structure and Offsets Tally Offset Tally Offset Tally Offset System ACSE Network TimReset 0 RejRcvd 43 DscGen 81 Restart 1 RejSent 44 DscCong 82 MAC ARejRcvd 45 DscAddr 83 SOEErr 3 ARejSent 46 DscLife 84 MisdPack 4 AbrtRevd 47 DscUnsp 85 FrameErr 6 AbrtSent 48 DscReasm 86 SuccOne 7 PAbort 49 PduRcvd 87 CrcErr 8 PReject 50 PduSent 88 RbufErr 9 Presentation OctSent 89 LateColl 12 PCprRevd 51 OctRcvd 90 LosyCarr 13 PCprSent 52 EsEsSent 91 BsyCar 14 CprTRevd 53 EsIsSent 92 NoRtry 15 CprPRcvd 54 EsEsRcvd 93 SuccMore 16 CprTSent 55 EsIsRevd 94 FRtry 17 CprPSent 56 EsEsErr 95 Data Link ArpSent 57 Distributed Directory Protocol UnReg 18 ArpErr 58 RegSnt 107 LsapO 19 Session UnregSnt 108 LsapOfl 20 RfRcvd 59 RegRcv 109 EthUnReg 21 RfSent 60 UnRegRcv 110 MacErr 22 RfPRcvd 61 RslvSent 111 Llc3Nak 133 RfPSent 62 RslvRevd 112 mmImpRej 134 RfTRevd 63 RslvRsp 113 TstRcvd 25 AbRcvd 64 NameConf 114 TstResp 26 AbSent 65 BrwseSnt 115 PLC Driver AbPSent 66 BrwseRcv 116 PlcQFull 29 Transport MMS Provider PlcSweep 30 CrCong 67 MsgSent 137 MsgRcv 31 CrConfg 68 MsgRcvd 138 PlcReq 32 CrRefCfg 69 RejSent 139 PlcAbt 33 CrProErr 70 RejRevd 140 MsgSent 34 C
379. on Entry 5 contains the trans fer state when the timeout occurred CPU completed program download before Ethernet Interface wasready CPU still wants program upload data when Ethernet Interface finished QCreate call failed PoolAlloccallfailed QAlloc call failed Entry 4 contains the byte size requested BuffAlloc call failed Entry 4 contains the byte size requested Circular mail queue is full and incoming message was lost Entry 4 contains the number of lost entries so far LANI FCapacityExceeded Discarded Request A Dual Port Memory allocation attempt for a given length failed Entry 4 contains the length of the allocation LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Anattempt was made to free a Dual Port Memory buffer that is out of range LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming An attempt was made to free a Dual Port Memory buffer that is not allocated MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 9 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event 8 30 Could not generate work queue entry Entry 4 contains the event PLC Driver that was trying to be scheduled which is one of the following events Continued Entry 4 Description 1 Mail message received from PLC 2 Ethernet Interface timed out waiting for a response from the CPU 3 Received mail message for diagnostics task 4 Circular queue full mail messa
380. on miniMAP is available only on an 802 4 net work miniMAP Application DIB Directory Information Base A directory of 3 Layer mini MAP Application Processes which supplies all addressing information needed to communicate with each 3 Layer miniMAP Application Process The GSM maintains a3 Layer miniMAP Application DIB containing the miniMAP Application Processes defined by each configured station Each MAP 3 0 station contains a Local mini MAP Application DIB which defines those miniMAP Application Processes with which the station willinitiate miniMAP communications Medium Access Control Protocol In a Local Area Network the protocol that governs access to the transmission medium taking into account the topological aspects of the network to enable the exchange of data between data stations MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Medium Attachment Unit MAU Ina data station on a Local Area Network a device used to couple the data terminal equipment to the transmission medium Often called transceiver MMS Ethemret Interface A term used in this manual to identify a GEnet Ethernet In terface loaded specifically with MMS software Multicast Address A LAN group address that identifies a subset of the data stations on a Local Area Network Network An arrangement of nodes and interconnecting branches Network Layer Layer 3 of the OSI Model This layer controls the flow of messages be
381. on Block MDB COMM REQ Status Word CRSW and timing for the COMM REO The table below shows the Device Independent Area format Table 5 1 Format of the COMM REO Device Independent Area Word Description Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 1 128 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Below CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 Word Length of MDB The first word of the Device Independent Area indicates the word length of the MDB An MDB with a command word and no parameters has a word length of one 1 Wait No Wait Flag This word must be set to 0 2 No Wait There is an internal proto col between the Series 90 70 CPU and the Ethernet Interface Setting this flag to Wait would cause additional overhead an extra message sent from the Ethernet Interface to the CPU to assure the CPU that the MDB got to the Ethernet Interface within a certain time limit A conscious design decision was made to avoid this overhead The COMM REO will not work properly with an ethernet Interface unless the No Wait flag value of zero is specified CRSW Memory Type The CRSW Memory Type and Offset fields of the Device Inde pendent Area define the location of the COMM REO Status Word The CRSW is a 16 bit field used by the Ethernet Interface to provide the status of its associated COMM REO instruction to the ladder logic program The CRSW Memory Type
382. on DIB may be examined using the Up Arrow Down Arrow PgUp PgDn Home and End keys SELECTED specifies whether that 7 Layer Application DIB entry has been selected for inclusion in the Local Application DIB Valid values are Y and N Defaults to N Value toggled by the Tab and Shift Tab keys The details about a specific DIB entry can be examined by pressing the Alt V key When the Alt V key is pressed the operator is prompted for which DIB entry to examine If no COMMON NAME is entered the top entry in the list is displayed The Alt S key is used to search the DIB for a specific entry When the Alt S key is pressed the user selects the data field and a value to seek and selects the search direc tion The Alt S key is pressed again to initiate the search or the Esc key is pressed to abort the search The remaining parameters need not be modified for basic networks Refer to Chapter 8 for descriptions of other parameters MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 MMS Parameters Menu The MMS Parameters Menu selection is used to modify the MMS parameters The MMS Parameters Menu is shown below CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CGO 400 SERIES_96 76 150882 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MMS Parameters MMS Parameters Variable Names Maximum MMS Message Size Press lp Dn Arrow to move the cursor then press Enter to select
383. on Manager allows you to monitor the operation of the local station and the network If a problem occurs at the local station or on the network the Station Manager may be used to pinpoint the source of the problem through the various Monitor com mands GFK 0868 4 1 Section 1 Accessing the Station Manager The Station Manager on the Ethernet Interface can be accessed in three primary ways 1 Through the 9 pin serial port on the Ethernet Interface by a GEnet System Manager GSM in Local Station Manager Mode or by an ASCII terminal See Figure 4 1 Directly over the Ethernetnetwork by a GSM in Network Station Manager Mode See Figure 4 2 Remotely over the Ethernet network via another Ethernet Interface with an attached GSM in Local Station Manager Mode or by an ASCII terminal This method requires the use of the REM Remote command to access the remote station See Figure 43 A limited access to the Station Manager is also provided to the local PLC ladder program 845345 TRANSCEIVER RS 232 ETHERNET INTERFACE SERIA EINE STATION MANAGER SOFTWARE GEnet 802 3 LAN SERIES 90 70 PLC GEnet SYSTEM MANAGER in Local Station Manager Mode or an ASCII Terminal Figure 4 1 Station Manager Accessed Locally through the 9 pin Serial Port by a GSM in Local Station Manager Mode or an ASCII Terminal GEnet 802 3 LAN a946 ETHERNET INTERFACE STATION MANAGER SOFTWARE EN iia dca Pd GEnet SYSTEM MANAGER in Local
384. ons to these applications will need the addressing informa tion shown on this screen in order to properly set up connections to one of these applica tions Depending on your network configuration this information will either be entered directly into the other device or will be available through a directory server on your net work For a basicnetwork if you are not using the default parameters the only information you need to enter is m MMS RESPONDER Common Name PSAP SSAP m APPLICATION_INTERFACE Common Name PSAP SSAP The Application Processes screen is shown below CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CGO 400 SERIES_96 76 HEREDES Config Edit Version 3 22 Application Processes gt MMS_RESPONDER COMMON NAME Goma APT OBJ ID 3 AE_QUAL MENEZ PSAP CEECEELET HEX SSAP GIL HEX gt APPLICATION_INTERFACE COMMON_NAME EIIZEZEDDEEELEELLI APT OBJ ID H AE_QUAL MENNZ PSAP CECECECECA HEX SSAP CECH HEX gt MMS ACN ISO MMS ACN_OBJ_ID MEENE 3 gt ALTERNATE_MMS Application Common Name 1 64 characters Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update then CAlt U Update Parameters gt CAIt K KEY HELP gt CA1t H PROCEDURE HELP gt Figure 3 9 Application Processes Screen The Application Processes parameters are defined as follows COMMON_NAME The Common Name of the Application Process Each Common Name should be unique on the network Consists of 1 to 64 character
385. onse to the client to provide the results of processing the indication The time sequence of MMS processing is shown in the following figure where xxx is used to denote an arbitrary MMS acknowledged service a42791 TIME CLIENT SERVER XXX REQUEST QUES a XXX INDICATION LAN PERFORM SERVICE XXX RESPONSE A w XXX CONFIRMATION 4 amp 7 Figure B 10 Acknowledged MMS Service Some MMS services are unacknowledged In these services only the request and indication parts of the figure are present The MMS Unsolicited Status and Information Report services are examples of unconfirmed services Responses and confirms can be of two kinds successful completion of the requested service or an error These two services are often denoted response and response respectively Positive responses contain any results of performing the service Fora request that asks for a list of defined names the positive response contains the list of names For some requests the positive response contains no data except the fact that the requested service was completed successfully Negative responses include codes to specify why the requested service could not be completed In the discussion which follows it is sometimes necessary to distinguish between the software which requests MMS services called the MMS User and the software which actually encodes the MMS Services and enforces the MMS protocol called the MMS Provider MMS Obj
386. or and downloaded to the station A variable name may identify either a scalar only a single element in the variable or an array variable which has one or more elements Variable Names are used to simplify host application and ladder programs and make them portable A Variable Name can consist of up to 32 characters These characters may be any of the following A Z a z 0 9 and Variable names are case sensitive and TEMPI and temp1 will not be treated as the same variable name The first character of the variable name must be alphabetic The Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface allows up to 64 Named Variables to be defined for the VMD Specific scope These variables are known to i e accessible to all associations in the Series 90 70 VMD The Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Interface software does not support domain or Applica tion Association specific variables Unnamed Variables Unnamed variables can be identified in any of three ways numeric addresses symbolic ad dresses and unconstrained addresses For all three forms of identifying unnamed variables the way addresses are mapped onto objects for example register and I O tables in the device is device dependent i e defined uniquely for the Series 90 70 PLC Unnamed variables are not configured on the GSM Instead the Series 90 70 PLC pro vides a default variable definition based on the target memory address This default def inition is described below f
387. or each unnamed variable type This definition can be used or superceded by individual MMS requests that access these variables Unnamed vari ables may be scalar or array Numeric Addresses A Numeric Address contains an absolute address of data as it maps into the Series 90 70 PLC memory This numeric address must consist of an unsigned 32 bit integer which specifies the address information when sent to the Ethernet Interface Unless specified otherwise in the MMS request data from the Register Table and Analog I O tables are returned as unsigned 16 bit integer scalar from all other tables as Boolean scalar The Series 90 70 Ethernet Interface interprets the unsigned integer as two word values The least significant word of the integer is the code that identifies which memory type is being accessed This is referred to as the memory type The most significant word of the numeric address is the unit offset into that table For example R4 should be encoded as 00030008 hexadecimal The table below gives the memory type codes available through the Ethernet Interface MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table 6 16 Series 90 70 PLC Memory Organization s Decimal Code Hexadecimal Code Memory Type Unit Size 8 08 Register Table R word 10 0A Analog Input Table 76AT word 12 0C Analog Output Table AQ word 16 10 Discrete Input Table I byte 18 12 Discrete Output Table
388. or networks is the or der of address bit transmission on the physical medium MAC Addresses are trans mitted in ascending octet order with the least significant bit of each octet transmitted first The example above is shown including bit transmission order as follows Octet 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex 0 8 0 0 1 9 0 0 5 3 1 2 Binary 0000 1000 0000 0000 0001 1001 0000 0000 0101 0011 0001 0010 Bit Order 8765 4321 weed l MSB of the MAC LSB of the MAC Address first bit transmitted Address last bit transmitted If you assign your own MAC Addresses there are 2 bits of the 48 bit address that you must set according to the instructions that follow m Bit 1 in Octet 1 must always be a 0 to indicate an individual station rather than a Group address m Bit 2 in Octet 1 must bea 1 to indicate that the address is locally administered In the typical default MAC Address shown above bit 2 in octet 1 is a 0 indicating that it is a globally administered address m All other bits can be set as desired as long as all stations on the network have unique addresses An example of a locally administered MAC Address is shown below Octet 1 2 3 4 5 6 Hex 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Binary 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 Bit Order 8765 4321 i59 l MSB of the LSB of the MAC Address first bit transmitted MAC Address last bit transmitted If you must change the Station MAC Address check with the person administering your networ
389. ord the 12 digit default station address MAC address from the printed label on the Ethernet Controller board A Station Configuration Data Form is provided in Appendix I for your convenience in recording the station configuration information 2 Be sure the Series 90 70 PLC rack power is OFE 3 Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the controller board 4 Slide the Ethernet Controller into the Series 90 70 PLC slot for which it was configured in the system normally the first available slot to the right of the CPU Bus Transmitter Module BTM or Bus Receiver Module BRM GFK 0868 Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 5 Press firmly to lock the board in place but do not force the board See Figure 2 2 for PLC rack and Figure 2 3 for expansion rack layout Note The Ethernet Controller board will not operate properly if there are empty slots to the left of the slot you select 5 Connect the free end of the safety wire 18 inch long green wire attached to the Ethernet Controller board to the ground lug at the side of the Series 90 70 PLC rack See Figure 2 2 The ground wire must be securely fastened to the chassis of the Series 90 70 PLC rack and the rack must be properly grounded Failure to do so may cause personal injury 6 Connect the transceiver cable into the 15 pin AUI Port of the Ethernet Controller board Secure the cable with the slide latch mechanism The other end of the transceiv
390. ore exiting the Configuration Editor Typically after you have entered the Configuration Editor you will go into sub screens and enter or change values for the parameters included in them After you have made changes in a sub screen you must press Alt U to save them temporarily while you go to other sub screens After you have finished making changes in the sub screens and back out to the Configu ration Editor Main Menu you must press Alt U again to permanently save the changes to disk If you press Esc to exit the Configuration Editor Main Menu a prompt will appear requesting you to confirm the exit without saving to disk if you confirm exit your changes are discarded Note The first time you create a station configuration you must enter Alt U to save the file even if you make no changes to default configuration parameters MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 ISO Parameters Menu The ISO Parameters Menu lists the communications parameters that may be changed The ISO Parameters Menu is shown below CONFIGURE STAL Configuration File Name C 868CGO 400 SERIES_96 76 IS0862 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 ISO Parameters MMS ISO Parameters Syst Network Layer Parameters Network Layer RIB Table Transport Session Layer Parameters Application Processes Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes Association Parameters Local Application DIB Prin
391. ormation Certain areas of the screen are reserved for error warning or help messages while the center is typically used to display the menus The GSM uses monitor display lines 1 through 25 with line 1 at the top The lines dis play the following type of information Line 1 displays error messages For example if you enter an invalid character in a field or if the field value is out of range an error message is displayed on line 1 to indicate the nature of the problem Lines 2 22 displays the current GSM menu and its related set of fields For exam ple there is a Transport Layer menu which is used to display and modify the various parameters that are used by the Transport Layer software Line 23 displays a help line for the current field that is being examined or modi fied This line gives a description of the field along with the field value ranges and the field s default value Line 24 provides instructions for using the screen in general Line 25 displays important function keys for the current menu Always present are the keys Alt K for Key help and Alt H for Procedure help When a sub menu is displayed the parent menu s are overlaid by the sub menu This gives a visual indication of where you are located in the GSM menu hierarchy Fields on the GSM screen have a field name and a field value A sample field name is FIELD 1 1 Field entries which are marked by reverse video are input display fields You may modify
392. orrect 002E Insufficient DOS memory for PROTMAN DOS to run 002F Cannot access PROTOCOL INI image GFK 0868 Appendix J GEnet System Manager Data Link Error Codes H3 GFK 0868 A Abbreviations and Acronyms Abort Indication Service Abort Request Command 8207 MMS COMM_REQ Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes Screen b 18 ACB See Association Control Block ACB Command Station Manager 4 17 Access Station Manager Function in the GSM 2 8 Access Station Manager Screen Access to the Station Manager on the Ethernet Interface 1 4 Accessing the Station Manager Accessing the Station Manager from the Local PLC f 5 Accessing the Station Manager Using an ASCII Terminal Accessing the Station Manager Using the GSM 4 3 ACK_DELAY_TIME ACN E17 ACN OBJ ID Acronyms and Abbreviations A 1 ACSE Services ACSE Tallies Tally e Advanced Network Definition AE QUAL B 37 ALL END SYSTEMS ES MAC AD DRESS 8 11 ALL END SYSTEMSLSAP ALL INTERMEDIATE SYSTEMS IS MAC ADDRESS 11 ALL INTERMEDIATE SYSTEMSLSAE 11 1 alsap Alt H Alt K applaequal 4 34 applapt B 16 Index applcnam b 28 4 34 8 16 Application Entities B 7 Application Interface Application Layer Parameters Application Layer Tallies Tally a ApplicationProcess B 7 Application Processes Application Processes Screen 58 ApplicationService Elements applpsap 3 29 4 34 B
393. ory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Reset Response command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Positive or Negative Response A value of 0 indicates that a positive response should be generated A value of 1 indicates that an error response should be issued Problem Code An encoded value of the problem as specified in the MMS service speci fication This field is ignored if a Positive Response is being sent GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 47 L5 Resume Request Command 8313 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use a Resume Request command to initiate a Resume MMS message Resume transitions the MMS Server ProgramInvocation from a STOPPED state into a RUNNING state The COMM REO format for the Resume Re quest is shown in the table below Table 6 36 Resume Request COMM REG 6 48 Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 41 Wait NdWNait Flag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8313 2079H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Length of ProgramInvocationName 11 1 32 ProgramInvocationName 12 27 characterstring Length of Resume Argum
394. otman xxx device specification in the CONFIG SYS file Make sure the network card driver parameters match the settings for your network card Refer to Table 3 2 for default settings The sample PROTOCOL GSM file shown below is created if you selected the 3Com EtherlinkII network card during software installation protocol manager DRIVERNAME PROTMANS GEFNDIS DRIVERNAME GEFNDIS BINDINGS ETHERLINKII MAX RX SIZE 560 NUM_RX_BUFS 8 Caution Interrupt conflicts may arise when using default hardware configurations for many Ethernet Adapters For example interrupt IRQ3 is commonly used for the COM2 serial port and most Ethernet adapters The following information must match the hardware configuration of the Ethernet Adapter as installed on your computer Please modify this information as necessary NENN SeSe Sene ne ETHERLINKII DRIVERNAME ELNKII DMACHANNEL 1 INTERRUPT 3 IOADDRESS 0x300 MAXTRANSMITS 8 You must add the device definition sections for only the GEFNDIS device and any new net work card name varies device from the PROTOCOL GSM file into your existing PROTO COL INI file 5 Restart the PC so that the modifications to the AUTOEXEC BAT CONFIG SYS and PROTOCOL INI files will be used GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 11 Unusual Procedures Updating or Adding to Existing GSM Software Whenever you purchase the GEnet LAN Interface Software whether for t
395. ow d The Distributed Directory Protocol in the DUA receiveda Name Conflict Advise indication from another node on the network This means that a remote DDP device is already using the name that the local node is trying to register MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 9 Extended Status Buffer Negative Values The following negative values may occur either in the Extended Status Buffer Error code field or in the Association Control Block Problem Code field Table 9 11 Negative Extended Status Buffer Values Error or Problem Code Interpretation of Code Decimal Hexadecimal 1 FFFF Data received is in an unexpected notin formatrequested or bad format 2 FFFE Could not transfer the data to the PLC 3 FFFD Encounteredbufferresource problems Extended Status Buffer Errors The error codes below appear in the Extended Status Buffer when a ladder logic com mand to the Ethernet Interface cannot be processed To view the Extended Status Buff er issue the EXS command from the Station Manager Table 9 12 Extended Status Buffer Error Codes and Definition Error Code Description dec hex PLC Backplane Driver Errors 74 4A Bufferallocationproblems 75 4B Invalid COMM_REQ command code 76 4C Bad system type network test Soft Switch editor etc for COMM_REQs 77 4D No COMM REOs allowed Backplane Online soft switch is set to NO
396. parated by spaces and delimited by brackets An example of object identifier output is shown below mmsacnobj 1 0 9506 2 1 Note The Ethernet Interface has a limited output buffer for storing Station Manager command results If a command s output exceeds this size part of the command output will be lost and will not be displayed GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 11 Station Manager in Utility Programs The Ethernet Interface has two utility functions provided as a part of the PROM based software These utilities allow selected station management functions to be performed even when no operating software is loaded This allows the Ethernet Interface hard ware and the network to be verified without requiring that any software be loaded into the Ethernet Interface Soft Switch Entry Utility 4 12 The Ethernet Interface stores its Soft Switch data in an EEPROM If Soft Switches have not been configured through Logicmaster 90 70 and the values in the EEPROM are in valid the Soft Switch Entry Utility is entered Also when certain other faults are de tected control will revert to the Soft Switch Entry Utility The Soft Switch parameters are critical to proper startup of the Ethernet Interface Improper settings of Soft Switch values can prevent the station from functioning with the PLC from being loaded or from being accessible to other stations on the network The Soft Switch Entry Utility is entered if the d
397. pecified in the Maximum Length of Status Buffer parameter will be used The Status Buffer contains information regarding the remote VMD status as shown in Table 6 43 GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 53 L6 Status Indication Service The Status Indication Service uses the Status Indication bit bit 11 of the Association Sta tus Word to indicate that the remote application requested status of the local PLC When indicated the ladder program should issue the Status Response command Status Response Command 8251 6 54 The Status Response command is used to respond to a request for status information The reception of a Status Indication is indicated by the Status Indication bit 11 of the ACB Association Status Word The response to the indication may be either positive or nega tive in nature The COMM REO format for the Status Response command is shown in the table below Table 6 42 Status Response COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 14 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8251 203BH Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Positive or Negative Response 9 0 1 Problem Code 10 See Table 6 60 Length of Status Local Detail 11 0 16 Status Local Detail 12 19 Appl
398. ponse Command 8315 6 50 Set Local ProgramInvocation Processing 8356 Set Local ProgramInvocation State Command 8355 Set Local VMD Status Command 8353 6 57 Start Request Command 8304 Start Response Command 8306 Status Request Command 8250 re Command 8251 6 54 Stop Request Command 8307 6 43 Stop Response Command 8309 Transfer InformationReport Indication Data Command 8330 6 37 Unsolicited Status Request 8252 6 55 Write Request Command 8323 6 31 MMS COMM unications REQuests 6 1 MMS Error Encodings 6 68 MMS Objects and Their Attributes B 11 MS Parameters MS Parameters Menu B 23 F M M MMS Provider Tallies Tally m M M MS Responder m MS Variable Mapping B 27 mmsacn 14 34 mmsacnobj 4 34 8 17 Modify Commands Station Manager AE MODULE OK LED P3 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Monitor Commands Station Manager 4 7 Monochrome_Monitor Mode CO80 Com mand N Named Variables Naming and Addressing ncfgtime 1 35 8 10 nchksum 4 35 8 11 NDIS Error Codes 3 NDIS compliant neslsap 4 35 8 11 nesmac 4 35 NET Command Station Manager 4 28 Network Downloading 2 16 Network Layer Parameters Network Layer Parameters Screen 3 26 Network Layer RIB Table Screen 8 12 Network Layer Tallies Tally n l 41 Network Load Address E 2 Network W ide Parameters 8 29 Network W ide Parameters Menu nh
399. pt or the Modify prompt To display a list of the Monitor commands on the screen type HELP lt RET gt or RET The following table provides a brief description of the Monitor commands Table 4 1 Monitor Commands Command Description acb bps cap date exs help log login time mdib node pi rib show SOSW stat tally time var vmd Displaylist of commands Display listofactive Association Control Blocks Display serial port data rate DisplayCapabilities Displaycurrent date Display Extended Status buffer Display list of commands Display Error log Login for Modify mode Display login timeout Display 7 Layer Application DIB Displaysign on message Display ProgramInvocation Display Routing Information Base Display aconfiguration parameter s value or list the configuration parameters for a task s Displaycurrent Soft Switch data Display task s status Display task s tallies Displaycurrent time Display VMDspecificvariablenames Display VMDstate For most commands simply enter the command and press Enter Some commands re quire additional information to be entered along with the command Those arguments should be separated from the command and from each other by one or more spaces The Command Descriptions section in this chapter provides a complete description of each command The LOGIN command is required to access the Modify commands To execute the
400. qual to or lower than the events proposed versionnumber Entry 5 contains the version Continued number that was proposed on the outgoing initiate request and Entry 6 contains the received negotiated versionnumber 4 Nesting level was negotiated upwards The negotiated nesting level must be equal to or lower than the proposed nesting level Entry 5 contains the nesting level that was proposed on the outgoing initiate request and Entry 6 contains the received negotiated nesting level 5 Maximum outstanding messages calling wasnegotiated upwards The negotiated value must be equal to or lower than the proposed value Entry 5 contains the value that was proposed on the outgoing initiate request and Entry 6 contains the received negotiated value 6 Maximum outstanding messages called wasnegotiated upwards The negotiated value must be equal to or lower than the proposed value Entry 5 contains the value that was proposed on the outgoing initiated request and Entry 6 contains the received negotiated value 18 InvalidInvoke ID Must not be a duplicate of Invoke ID used in any outstanding transaction for this association It may also indicate that the maximum number of transactions for this association has been exceeded Event 10 This event is logged by the Directory User Agent when an unexpected event Directory occurs UserAgent Entry 2 is an exception code that indicates what error has occurred Each events event is described bel
401. quest 08101 1FA5 Retrieve Log Events Request 08102 1FA6 Restart Ethernet Interface 08103 1FA7 GFK 0868 7 1 Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request 8100 7 2 The Retrieve Extended Status Buffer request copies the current value of the Extended Status Buffer maintained by the Ethernet Interface software into a set of words in the requesting PLC The Extended Status Buffer contains diagnostic information about re quests which receive a COMM_REQ Complete With Error status This information can be used to help find the reason for the error status returned The COMM REO for the Retrieve Extended Status Buffer is described below Table 7 2 Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 4 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Table 5 21 CRSW Offset 3 Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8100 1FA4H Data Buffer Memory Type 7 See Table 6 42 Data Buffer Offset 8 Maximum Word Length 9 1 14 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q Decimal Value 8 10 12 70 72 Command Number Identifies this as a Retrieve Extended Status Buffer Request com mand Data Buffer PLC address of where the Extended Status data is to be put Maximum Word Length The maximum number of words to be transferred It requires 14 words to hold all the data A maximum length greater than 13 will ca
402. r Downloade Network Serial not on Network ron Port Network MODULE ON ON ON ON ON OK ONLINE OFF OFF ON Fast Blink OFF STATUS OK Slow Blink Slow Blink Slow Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink Slow Blink Blink ON every 2 seconds Fast Blink Blink ON every 1 second GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 7 9 The Operational State The Operational State is the state of normal operation of the Ethernet Interface This section identifies the possible symptoms of problems which may occur while the module is operating During normal operation of the Ethernet Interface the MODULE OK LED is ON The other two LEDs ONLINE STATUS OK provide information about the health of the Ethernet Interface and activity on the LAN The table below shows the LED patterns you might see and their possible meanings In the Operational State no Utility message follows the station ID in the NODE com mand The prompt character at the local Station Manager terminal is a greater than symbol gt or if you have logged in to the MODIFY level of access Table 9 6 Operational State Connected to LAN Not Connected to LAN LED Operating An Exception Since Last After Being w o has Occurred Restarted Connected Exceptions MODULE OK ON ON ON ON ONLINE ON Blink ON Blink OFF OFF STATUS OK ON OFF ON OFF Slow Blink Blink ON every 2 seconds Fast Blink Blink ON every 1 second 1 ONLINE b
403. r local GSM operation Altematively the GSM can reside at a central location on the network and logically connect to any station over the Ethernet network We refer to this method of connection as network communications mode or network GSM operation You must choose which mode of operation you desire When using local communications mode the serial cable is connected between the LAN Interface 9 pin connector and the personal computer COM1 port To connect to LAN Interfaces over the network you must have an appropriate network card for your PC Compatible computer See Table 3 1 for a list of supported interfaces Figure 3 1 illustrates these alternative connection means of the GSM The GSM may use either an internal or external modem or transceiver or none if used exclusively for local operation Note Typically there will be only one GSM on the network It will contain configuration information and communications software for all the GEnet stations on the network GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 3 Section 1 Installing and Starting Up the GSM This section describes the hardware requirements for running the GEnet System Manag er GSM software and tells you how to install the GSM on the hard disk of your per sonal computer Topics covered are m Hardware Requirements m Installing the PC Network Interface Card for Network GSM Operation m Installing the GEnet System Manager Sof
404. r PC so the GSM software will run you must ensure that your CONFIG SYS file and AUTOEXEC BAT file contain certain commands The commands needed have been included in the sample files You may enter these commands individually into your existing CONFIG SYS and AUTOEXEC BAT files using an editor or you may use DOS commands to copy the GSM files CONFIG GSM FILES 20 BUFFERS 48 AUTOEXEC GSM SET GSMCFG C GSM CFILES The statement above defines the environment variable GSMCFG There must be no spaces Hu nm on either side of the sign 2 If installing the GSM software on a PC with a monochrome monitor add the following command to the AUTOEXEC BAT file MODE CO80 3 Restart the PC so that the modifications to the AUTOEXEC BAT and CONFIG SYS and will take effect Network GSM Operation or Both Local and Network For network operation the GSM uses an NDIS compliant PC network card for connec tion to the 802 3 network NDIS related files will be installed in a C GEFNDIS directory created by the install program NDIS Network Driver Interface Specification defines the interconnection between a PC network card and the PC application software GSM in this case During GSM installation for network operation sample DOS system configuration files will be created in the GSM directory 3 6 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 These files are CONFIG GSM AUTOEXE
405. r more download multicast addresses This mes sage contains network data needed by a station to enter the network and request a download Each station recognizes a network GSM downloader at only one specific download multicast address the address specified in the Network Download Address parameter The Network Load Address must be a valid MAC multicast address the Individual Group address I G bit must be set to 1 That is the first byte of the address must have its least significant bit ON If you are not familiar with address formats refer to Structure of the MAC Address in Chapter 3 Note The Network Load Address parameter should be changed ONLY if there is a GEnet System Manager GSM which is configured to use this ad dress Changing the Network Load Address to an address not used by some GSM on the network will cause the station to be unable to receive a network download E 2 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Modify Soft Switch Settings Refer to the table below for the default Soft Switch settings and Soft Switch modification information Table E 1 Soft Switch Settings Parameter Description Station Address The station address parameter is the Medium Access Control MAC address of the station being configured The MAC address is a 12 digit hexadecimalnumber which is organized as 6 octets each represented by a pair of hexadecimaldigits DefaultSetting The
406. r provides commands to examine the date and time Any time the Ethernet Interface is restarted or power to it is cycled it will attempt to read the date and time from the PLC If this fails the time reverts to midnight and the date to January 1 1989 If accurate time stamp information is to be generated in the Exception Log the system date and time must be set using the Station Manager GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 9 Station Manager Command Syntax The Command Descriptions section which follows provides an alphabetical listing of the commands Each entry describes the input and output for each command All commands have the format of a command followed by a variable number of argu ments separated by spaces Details about the arguments are discussed with each com mand All arguments to the commands will be automatically converted to all lower case characters unless they are enclosed in double quotation marks e g A Task Identification Several commands refer to tasks or subsystems of the operating software Each task has a unique identifying letter which is used to select the desired task or tasks The fol lowing table shows the task identifiers and their associated tasks Table 4 3 Task Identifiers Identifier Task Identifier Task a ApplicationLayer b System Memory c PLC Driver d DistributedDirectory Protocol DDP e ACSE l Data Link Layer m MMS Provider n NetworkLayer p PresentationLayer s Sess
407. r the accuracy completeness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply Thefollowing are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master CIMSTAR Helpmate PROMACRO Series Six CIMPLICITY GEnet Logicmaster Series One Series 90 CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Genius Modelmaster Series Three VuMaster CIMPLICITYPowerTRAC GeniusPowerTRAC ProLoop Series Five Workmaster Copyright 1992 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Preface Content of This Manual GFK 08665 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Introduction Discusses the Ethernet Interface the communications soft ware and the GEnet System Manager Installing the Ethernet Interface Describes the basic features of the Ethernet Interface the installation and power up of the Interface and a procedure for the initial checkout of the Interface on your Ethernet cable The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration Describes the instal lation and operation of the GEnet System Manager and how to configure a Series 90 70 PLC Ethernet Station for a Basic Network The Station Manager Describes how to use the Station Manager to pro vide interactive supervisory access to the Ethernet Interface General PLC Application Programming Explains fundamental features of the interface betw
408. rUnsuc 71 RegFail 141 MyAbt 35 PduProEr 72 BldFail 142 Write 36 PduRefP 73 Application Read 37 ChkFail 74 UncSvSnt 145 Timeout 38 Timeout 75 UncSvRcd 146 Regs 39 PduSent 76 CanSent 147 AnInput 40 PduRcvd 77 CanRcvd 148 AnOutput 41 ReTrans 78 uCode 42 CrdtZero 79 OpenCon 80 Chapter 7 Station Manager COMMunications REQuests Retrieve Log Events Request 8102 7 6 The Retrieve Log Events request copies portions of the system Exception Log for the lo cal station into a block of words specified in the request This request provides access by the ladder program to the Log events The COMM_REQ for the Retrieve Log Events Request is described below Table 7 6 Retrieve Log Events Request COMM_REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 5 Wait NOWNait Flag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Table 5 21 CRSW Offset 3 Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8102 1FA6H Data Buffer Memory Type 7 See Table 6 42 Data Buffer Offset 8 Log Event Structure Offset 9 0 15 Log Event Length 10 0 16 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ I Q Decimal Value 8 10 12 70 72 Command Number Identifies this as a Retrieve Log Events Request command Data Buffer PLC address of where the log event data is to be put Log Event Structure Offset The beginning offset into the system exception log to be retrieved An offset of 0 marks the most recent event The higher th
409. re 1 Installing the Ethernet Interface in the PLC 2 5 Equipment Required to Perform the Installation Procedures 2 5 Ethernet Interface Installation eee 2 5 Procedure 2 Verifying Proper Power Up of the Interface 2 8 Using the GSM Access Station Manager Function 55 2 8 States of the Ethernet Interface 00 6 ccc 29 Powering Up the Interface 0 0 cee eens 2 10 Problems During Power Up 6 nee eens 2 11 Procedure 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface with Logicmaster 90 70 PLC Module Configuration 2 12 Procedure 4 Configuring and Downloading a Station 2 13 Configuring a Station nsnsi hE rectal vb dea ated beats des vie en are d 2 13 Downloading a Station 0 6 6 eee eens 2 14 Initiating the Download 0 666 c cee ee 2 15 Problems During the Download 6 000 c cece eee eee 2 16 How to Issue the LOAD Command from the Station Manager 2 16 Procedure 5 Testing the Interfaces on the Network 2 17 Field Network Test Utility uier cee eee 2 17 Invoking the Field Network Test Utility 000000 2 17 Running Field Network Test 6002s 2 18 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May v 1994 Contents Procedure 6 Using the Example PLC Ladder Program 2 22 Loading the Example Station Configurations 0 0 0 2 e eee 2 22 Loading
410. re are no conference calls However each GEnet node may have up to a total of eight separate associations active at one time The parties connected by an association are called Application Processes APs Each AP has a name called an Application Common Name The Series 90 70 Ethernet Inter face defines two APs which are used to perform communications services m MMS Responder m Application Interface Both the MMS Responder and Application Interface use the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS to define the communication services available for the Series 90 70 PLC MMS is an international standard for defining the communication services used by manufacturing devices GFK 0868 6 1 L5 Message Flow in the OSI Model The OSI model uses four types of messages to describe the flow of data into and from the Ethernet Interface They are request indication response and confirmation Figure 6 1 is a time sequence diagram showing the relationship of the message types As time progresses Station A sends a request message This same message is carried by the LAN to Station B where it is received as an indication Station B then formulates and sends an appropriate response message This message is carried by the LAN to Station A where it is received as a confirmation 242234 TIME STATION A STATION B REQUEST QUEST Sees P INDICATION LAN RESPONSE A CONFIRMATION 4 lt v Figure 6 1 Message Types Time Sequ
411. re shown in Table D 2 Table D 2 Pinouts of the AUI Port Pin Number Signal Description 1 GND Signal Ground CP CollisionPresence 3 TX Transmit 4 GND Signal Ground 5 RX Receive 6 GND Signal Ground 7 NC Not Connected 8 GND Signal Ground 9 CP Collision Presence 10 TX Transmit 11 GND Signal Ground 12 RX Receive 13 12 12 Volts 14 GND Signal Ground 15 NC Not Connected SHELL Chassis Ground D 4 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 2 AUI Transceiver Cable The figure below shows a typical cable configuration to connect the AUI port of the Ethernet Interface to an external transceiver PIN PIN a44668 pr 9 OSI CN CN TOND o5 0 2 2 CP 0 09 3 3 TX o o9 4 4 GND o9 09 5 5 RX 0 0 S 6 6 GND 0 oo 7 7 0 MMS ETHERNET 9 0 8 3 GND o TRANSCEIVER 0 e 9 9 cP 05 o6 95 10 10 TX M 05 94 11 11 GND 0 00 12 12 RX 05 ol 13 13 12V 05 06 S 14 14 GND 05 055 15 15 05 0 jS SHELL o le SHELL 0 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN FEMALE MALE FEMALE MALE Figure D 3 Transceiver Cable Connection Note Pinouts are provided for troubleshooting purposes only Cables are readily available from commercial distributors GE Fanuc reco
412. reStatus ReportPoolSemaphoreStatus ReportSemaphoreEntryStatus AttachToSempahore InitiateDownloadSequence DownloadSegment TerminateDownloadSequence InitiateUploadSequence UploadSegment TerminateUploadSequence RequestDomainDownload RequestDomainUpload LoadDomainContent StoreDomainContent DeleteDomain GetEventActionAttributes ReportEventActionStatus DefineEventEnrollment DeleteEventEnrollment AlterEventEnrollment ReportEventEnrollmentStatus GetEventEnrollmentAtributes AcknowledgeEventNotification AttachToEventCondition EventNotification GetAlamSummary GetAlamEnrollmentSummayy ReadJoumal WriteJourmnal InitializeJoumal CreateJoumal DeleteJournal ReportJoumalStatus FileOpen FileRead FileClose FileRename FileDelete FileDirectory MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Table C 3 PICS Supported Parameters Description Supported Value STR1 Yes STR2 NEST gt 0 Give integer value 1 VNAM Yes VADR Yes VAIT Yes VSCA TPY Table C 4 PICs Range of Values Description Value Rangeof values for floating point numbers Supported values of the floating point exponent width Supported values of the floating point mantissa width Range of values for signed integer Range of values for unsigned integer Maximum length for the A5string in octets Maximum length for VisibleS
413. received in the Examine Initiate Indication MDB or if zero is used the suggested value will be accepted Initiate Confirmation Service 6 16 The Initiate Confirm Service uses the Positive and Negative Confirm bits in the Association Status Word of the ACB The bits indicate whether the responding application accepted the Initiate Request When the Negative Confirm bit is set the Problem Code in the ACB is updated with the reason for the negative confirm If the Positive Confirm bit is set the association will be established and the Association OK bit in the ACB will be 1 Information about the Positive Initiate Confirm may be ex amined using the Examine Positive Initiate Confirm command MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Examine Positive Initiate Confirm Command 8204 GFK 0868 The COMM REO format of the Examine Positive Initiate Confirm command is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8204 200CH The result of this command is that 6 octets of data will be placed at the Data Buffer specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 8 Examine Positive Initiate Confirm Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value MaximumMessage Size 0 64and up MaximumgServicesOutstanding Calling 1 0 6 MaximumsServices Outstanding Called 2 0 6 Maximum Message Size The final negotiated maximum message size
414. rence timer Transportmaximumnumber ofretransmissions Transportretransmissiontimer Transport window timer Transport receive window size vtsap vdpdisab vdptmout vdpretry SRTP Service Agent Parameters TSAP for SRTPcommunication Disable DDP operation Timeout for DDP duplicate name conflict Max DDP reslove retries GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 35 SOSW Command This command displays the current setting of the Ethernet Interface Soft Switches or a message indicating that no Soft Switch values are defined If not defined the operator must set Soft Switch values using the CHSOSW command before the Ethernet Interface can proceed to any state beyond the Soft Switch Entry Utility The SOSW command has the form SOSW A typical SOSW command is shown below gt sosw lt lt lt Soft Switch Data gt gt gt MAC address 080019010177 Using default Load source Serial Network Online Online after powerup Backplane Online Online after powerup Networkload addr lt lt 090060000000 gt gt using default MMS Enable Don t care Pgmr Enable Don t care STAT Command The STAT command has the form STAT task s where lt task s gt is one or more task identification letters from Table 4 3 This command causes the current status of the task or tasks specified by the task identifi cation letters to be displayed An example STAT command is shown below stat b lt lt lt
415. resource problem i e lack of data memory Once set to 1 this bit is not cleared until the Ethernet Interface is restarted The Ethernet Interfacemay or may notbe able to continue functioning depending on the severity of the problem Use the Station Manager STAT B and LOGcommands to understand the problem See Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for furtherinformation 13 LANOK This input will be held at the value 1 as long as the Ethernet Interface software is able to communicate on the network If the network should become inaccessible from this station due either to local or network problems this input will be set to 0 12 Network Memory Access This input is set to 1 when a remote station on the network reads or writes data in the memory of the local PLC using theMMS Responder communication services This input will be held high for at least one full PLC scan and then it will be set to 0 Reserved 5 8 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 General Tips on Ladder Programming 1 Make sure LISW bit 16 is ON before issuing a COMM REQ 2 Ifyou issue a COMM REO to communicate on the network make sure LISW 13is ON 3 Check the COMM REQ OK FT bits to make sure the command arrived at the Ethernet Interface 4 Waitfor the COMM REQ Status Word to be set to 0x20 or 0x40 to know if the Ethernet Interface was capable of processing the command 5
416. rial no 01393790 MAC default 08001901001f lt lt lt Field Network Test Utility gt gt gt Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each Ethernet Interface to be tested Running Field Network Test Once all stations are running the Field Network Test Utility you will use the Station Manager to run tests to verify that the cable plant is operating correctly and to examine statistics about network performance The procedure below describes the steps to be performed for the Field Network Test 1 Select a station to be the test initiator and connect the GSM to this station This may be any GEnet LAN Interface CNC or PLC If your application uses a particular node to communicate with most others we suggest you designate this node as the test initiator Note All commands described in this procedure are issued from your test initiator 2 18 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 2 Enter the command test all Lists all nodes on operating network or test 010000000000 Listsall GE Fanuc nodes on operating network The response to test all will return a list of the MAC addresses of all nodes attached to the network and presently operating This list may include other vendor s nodes since the standard IEEE 802 2 test response mechanism is used Testing other vendor s nodes is however beyond the scope of this procedure Ignore responses from these nodes
417. ries with corresponding screens The ISO ParametersMenu selection is used to modify most of the communications pa rameters For a basic network this menu selection is used to examine and modify the parameters for the Link Layer Network Layer Transport Sessionl ayer Application Pro cesses and Local Application DIB Directory Information Base The MMS ParametersMenu is used to modify the MMS parameters For a basic network this menu selection is used to examine and modify Variable Names Maximum MMS Message Size Domains and Program Invocation and to list all declared variables Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 23 The System Parameters Menu not used to configure a station for a basic network is used to modify parameters which determine how the Ethernet Interface allocates its available buffer memory This menu is also used to modify the Station Manager parameters and Distributed Directory Protocol parameter Use of the System Parameters screen is de scribed in Chapter 8 Finally the Print File Menu is used to name and create a DOS file which contains a copy of the Ethernet Interface configuration From this menu select the appropriate category of parameters you want to configure and press Enter Saving Changes Before Exiting the Configuration Editor Main Menu 3 24 The Configuration Editor Main Menu is the first screen displayed when entering the Con figuration Editor and is the last displayed bef
418. rk Test Utility described in Installation Procedure 5 the GSM must be connected locally and put in the Local Station Manager Communications Mode A GSM Using Local Connection Connect the COMI RS 232 serial port on the device running the GSM to the 9 pin connector on the Ethernet Interface Refer to Appendix D for instructions on how to make the RS 232 cable B GSM Using Network Connection Connect the Ethernet Interface on the device running the GSM to the Ethernet Network For now use the Local connection 2 Power up the computer running the GSM into DOS MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 3 Set the PC default directory to the GSM directory by typing C gt cd gsm 4 Start up the GSM by typing C GSM gt gsm 5 At the password screen type in the password The default password is gsm 6 Once the GSM Main Menu appears go into the Setup GSM functions to set the Station Manager Communications Mode to Local exiting with lt ALT U gt 7 From the GSM Main Menu cursor to the Station Manager function and press Enter to select If you selected Local Communications Mode in step 6 the GSM will automatically access the Station Manager of the locally connected Ethernet Interface If you are prompted for Station Name you did not select Local Station Manager mode Repeat step 6 States of the Ethernet Interface GFK 0868 The figure below shows the 5 possibl
419. ror Codes 54 64 NDIS codes 0001 0005 are returned to the MAC These codes should never be indicated by the GSM 0000 Success or no additional error information 0001 ReceiveChain is keeping RX buffer 0002 Request was queued 0003 Frame was not recognized 0004 Frame was rejected 0005 Forward RX frame to other protocol s 0006 MAC out of resources 0007 Invalidparameter 0008 Invalid function code 0009 Function is not supported 000A Hardwareerror during request non fatal may indicate network disconnection 000B Transmiterror frame was notsent may indicate network disconnection 000D Buffer was too small OOFF General failure non fatal may indicate network disconnection F1FF GEFNDIS resource error F2FF GEFNDIS duplicate LSAP error F3FF GEFNDIS LSAP not found error NDIS Error Codes 0020 002F may be indicated during ProtocolManagerinstalla tion as PC is started or when running Netbind utility The erroris displayed as PROnnnnE where nnmn is the NDIS error code 0020 Driveralreadystarted 0021 Binding was not complete 0022 Driver was notinitialized 0023 Interface hardware was not found 0024 Interfacehardwarefailure 0025 Configurationfailure 0026 Hardwareinterruptconflict 0027 IncompatibleMAC 0028 Initializationfailed 0029 Binding did not occur 002A Network might not be connected 002B Incompatible DOS version 002C Driveris already registered 002D PROTMAN DOS pathname inc
420. ry There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the Configuration Editor main menu m Esc key exit without saving changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 27 Print File Screen 8 28 The Print File Screen selection is used to create a file which contains a copy of the Ether net Interface s configuration The file created can be printed to produce a hard copy of the configuration The Create Print File Screen is shown below Configuration File Name C8888CGO8 400 SERIES 96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 ISO Parameters MMS Parameters System Parameters Print File Create Print File PRINT FILE NAME EELISE Name of file to store print data Default Pxxxxxx xxx in config directory Edit parameter on screen and press Alt P to create print file CAIt P Create Print File CAlt K KEY HELP CAI1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 17 Print File Screen The Print File Screen Parameter is defined as follows PRINT FILE NAME the name of the file to be created Consists of 1 to 14 characters Defaults to Pxxxxxxx xxx where xxxxxxx xxx is an ASCII encoding of the station s 48 bit MAC address The location of the print file defaults to the C GSM CFILES directory May reference another disk drive for example A WC47 LIS There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the Configuration
421. ry 2 of the event log is an exception code which indicates what event oc curred Entry 2 may have the following values 1 Attempt to activate a User Element UE failed Entry 4 contains the UE ID Entry 5 contains the status returned from the MMS Provider The possible error values are 5 Maximum number of pending transactions exceeded Maximum number of associations exceeded Noandications confirms to receive Interface unable to receive information 10 Invalidservice to send with this function call 11 Variable name too long 6 b Internalresourcesunavailable c e 12 Variable name too short 17 Invalid datatype 1d Character string too long le Character string too short 29 Mandatory field is missing 2a Invalidcountfield 31 Invalidservice primitiveombination 50 Cannot register with server below 51 Specified Application Entity is already active 52 Atleast one association still exists 5a Cannot deregister from server below 5f Cannot get system ID from server below 61 Maximum message size is larger than the maximum value 96 Invalid User Element ID specified 97 InvalidassociationIDspecified 98 Specified Application Entity is not active 99 Specified association does not exist 9a Parameter buffer not NULL when it should be 9b Servicenegotiated off 9c Attempttobuild message failed a0 NULLevent procedure not allowed on activate al NULL APT notallowed on activate a2 UnsupportedACN used
422. ry into the Soft Switch Entry Utility System Error 08 Soft Switch values are not defined This fault causes entry to the Soft Switch Entry Utility Entry 3 distinguishes the reason for reporting Soft Switches not defined 0 CLSOSWStation Manager command was issued 1 EEPROM checksum was incorrect System Error 09 Unable to set the Ethernet Interface date and time to the same values as the PLC CPU This error may occur at system startup The Ethernet Interface time and date are initialized to 00 00 00 01 JAN 1989 Entry 3 indicates the reason for this error 0 Unable to retrieve information from the PLC CPU This error will occur if the Ethernet Interface is not configured in the PLC CPU via the LM90 Configuration Software 1 Invalid date time value retrieved from the PLC CPU The Ethernet Interface cannot accept dates prior to 01 JAN 1989 Check that the current date and time are established in the PLC CPU via the LM90 Configuration Software 9 12 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Code Possible Cause and Resolution Event 2 System events Continued System Error 190 This error occurs when the MMS provider is unable to attach to system association channels This is an internal software error and should be re ported to GE Fanuc NA System Error 1f4 This error occurs when the Tra
423. s Application Processes AP The parties that are connected by an association An ele ment within a system which performs the information processing Application Program The ladder logic program executing in the PLC ASCII Code The American Standard Code for Information Interchange is an informa tion code standard by which numbers letters symbols and control characters can be formed for serial transmission Association A logical connection which must be established between two Application Processes so that they may communicate with each other Analogous to a telephone connection Association Control Block ACB A block of five words which is used to communicate between the Series 90 70 PLC ladder logic and the LAN Interface Association Services Communication services which allow the initiation orderly con clusion and abrupt conclusion of the association between the local and remote ap plications processes Attachment Unit Interface Ina data station on a Local Area Network the interface be tween the medium attachment unit and the data terminal equipment Often called transceivercable Appendix A Glossary of Terms A 3 A 4 Baseband LAN A local area network LAN in which data is encoded and transmitted without modulation of a carrier Bit Contraction of Binary Digit The smallest unit of memory Can be used to store one piece of information that has only two possible states or values e g One Zero On Off Yes No
424. s m For MMS RESPONDER defaults to RESP MAC ADDRESS For MMS RESPONDER corresponds to Station Manager Parameter arespcnam m ForAPPLICATION INTERFACE defaults to APPL MAC ADDRESS For APPLICATION_INTERFACE corresponds to Station Manager Parameter applcnam MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 PSAP The Presentation Service Access Point PSAP of the Application Process Each PSAP within a given station must be unique Entered as a string of hexadecimal oc tets m For MMS RESPONDER defaults to 01 hexadecimal For MMS RESPONDER corresponds to Station Manager Parameter aresppsap m For APPLICATION_INTERFACE defaults to 02 hexadecimal For APPLICATION_INTERFACE corresponds to Station Manager Parameter applpsap SSAP The Session Service Access Point SSAP of the Application Process Each SSAP within a given station must be unique Entered as a string of hexadecimal octets m For MMS RESPONDER defaults to 01 hexadecimal For MMS RESPONDER corresponds to Station Manager Parameter arespssap m For APPLICATION_INTERFACE defaults to 02 hexadecimal For APPLICATION_INTERFACE corresponds to Station Manager Parameter applssap The remaining parameters need not be modified for basic networks Refer to Chapter 8 for descriptions of other parameters GFK 0868 Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 29 Local Application
425. s Tally e Tally Meaning RejRcvd A Associate Respons AARE APDUsreceived indicating the association request was rejected with no reason specified or due to no common ASCE version RejSent AARE APDUS sent rejecting an association request with no reason specified or due to no common ACSE version ARejRcvd Total number of AARE APDUs received that rejected an association request ARejSent Total number of AARE APDUS sent that rejected an association request AbrtRcvd Number of Providerabortindicationsreceived AbrtSent Number of Provider abort requests sent PAbort Numberof A P Abortindicationssent PReject Number of Presentation connections rejected by the Presentationservice provider Table 4 16 Data Link Tallies part of Tally l Tally Meaning Unreg Numberof 802 3 frames received and discarded because the destination LSAP was not configured in the node Lsap0 Number of frames received and discarded because the destination LSAP had the value zero LsapOfl Number of LLC service requests rejected due to lack of LSAP table space A non zero value in this tally indicates a Ethernet Interface system software error and should be reported to GE Fanuc Automationimmediately EthUnreg Number of Ethernet frames received and discarded because the destination Protocol was not configured in the node MacErr Asevere network fault prevented transmission of a frame for more than one second See Exception Log Eve
426. s contained in the Inter face as it is shipped from the factory You do not need to download the communications software from the GSM for these tests however you may optionally change Soft Switch parameters as described previously However if you have loaded communications soft ware the Field Network Test Utility will still operate properly and the software you loaded will be preserved The default parameters provided will work on any network with up to 50 nodes For larger networks consult GE Fanuc Automation NA if you need assistance to determine how to test your network Note After you have established confidence in your particular application and configuration parameters you can periodically re test your physical network while the application is running This is done by using the TEST Station Manager command but without invoking the Field Network Test Utility All the Station Manager commands available in Field Network Test Utility are also available when the Ethernet Interface is fully operational Invoking the Field Network Test Utility GFK 0868 To invoke the Field Network Test Utility you need to connect the GSM locally to one of the Interfaces on the network m Refer to Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager for instructions on installing the GSM software on a user supplied WorkmasterorIBM PC Compatible computer m SeeInstallation Procedure 2 in this chapter for instructions on using the terminal emulation feature of
427. s have been updated more recently than the configuration file the Downloader displays the following mes sage System files integrated for Station Station Name Note The DOS time and date on the PC must be correct whenever the GSM is run as the GSM uses the date and time associated with each file to determine if configuration files need to be updated The Network Downloader can also be entered directly from the DOS prompt by typing C NGSM gsm dnld This can be used to invoke the Network Downloader from a batch file This can be used to automatically run the Network Downloader after a power outage of the PC The Alt F and Alt P keys are used to enable and disable the logging of downloader activ ity to a user specified file The log file is automatically closed when returning to the GSM main menu The Esc key is used to exit the Network Downloader and to return to the GSM main menu Notes 1 ALAN Interface MUST be configured on the GSM before it can be downloaded 2 TheLAN Interface Soft Switch Network Load Address LDMAC must match one of the LOAD MUITICAST ADDR parameters on the GSM in order for a Network download to take place for the LAN Interface 3 TheMAC Address of the Station selected MUST match the LAN Interface MAC Address Soft Switch parameter MAC in order for the LAN Interface to be fully operational after loading Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration 3 41 Section 4 Accessing the S
428. s less than or equal to 32 characters in length or an address Alternate Access Index Specifies the beginning index of an alternate access for variable types 8 through 11 Number of Elements Specifies the number of items which will be read If the number of values in the read response does not match the Number of Elements parameter an error will be generated Variable Scope Specifies the scope of the variable to be read from the remote station If the scope parameter specifies Domain Specific Scope the Domain Name parameter should specify the domain in which the desired variable access is defined Length of Read Data Buffer The Read Data Buffer parameter specifies where the re turned data from the read are to be stored If this buffer is not large enough to permit storing the requested amount of information the request receives a COMM_REQ Com plete with Error The buffer length is expressed in units appropriate to the Read Data Buffer s memory type Read Data Buffer Specifies the location where the returned read data is to be stored Length of Domain Name Unless the Variable Type parameter is specified as 0 4 or 8 and the Variable Scope is specified as 1 this parameter is ignored The Length of Do main Name parameter specifies the number of characters in the name of the domain in whose scope the variable to be read is defined Domain Name Used to specify the name of the domain in the remote application associated
429. s not need to be enclosed with double quotes to achieve case sensitivity The factory default password is system lower case Note There is a special variation of the LOGIN command that can only be used in conjunction with the REM remote command to login on a remote system Refer to the REM command for a discussion of this variation MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 LOGOUTCommand The LOGOUT command has the form LOGOUT This command causes the secure login to be terminated Any Modify commands en tered after the logout will receive an error message Logging out causes the login time out value to return to 10 minutes A typical LOGOUT command is shown below logout Logged out LTIME Command The LTIME command has the form LTIME This command causes the current login timeout value to be displayed A typical LTIME command is shown below gt ltime Login timeout 10 min The login timeout value can be changed using the CHLTIME command Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 27 MDIB Command The MDIB command has the form MDIB lt page gt where lt page gt is an optional page number which defaults to 1 This command displays one page of information from the Local Application DIB Direc tory Information Base These are entries which have been configured for the station Repeat the command for other pages if an expected entry is not found A typical MDI
430. s the UEID This exception log event will be generated when an MMS message would exceed the negotiated Maximum MMS Message Size value The initiator should reduce the amount of data to be transferred or increase the Maximum MMS Message Size and possibly the System Buffer Size and Allocation parameters 9 Type mismatch on a Read confirm Entry 4 contains the received data type Entry 5 contains the received data type length A MMSResponder received an unsolicited data indication Entry 4 contains the MMS command code received B ABuffAllocrequestfailed Entry 4 contains the number of bytes requested C AQAlTloc request failed Entry 4 contains the number of bytes requested D Aninternaldata formattingerroroccurred tH Received abad start stop response from the CPU F Received a start stop response from the CPU for an unknown PI 10 Received a start stop response from the CPU for a non existent association 11 Incoming indication could not be made to ladder program because maximum number of indications has already been met If the indication is a confirmed service a Negative Response will besentback If the indication is an unconfirmed service the association willbe aborted 12 Attemptto update the Association Control Block failed GFK 0868 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 17 9 18 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event 8 This e
431. seeeeee B 21 Variable Objects suain eea ei ee enn nes B 24 Operator Station Objects CNC Only 000 c cece eee eee ee B 25 MMS Variable Mapping Series 90 70 PLC Only 00000 B 27 Bool an Data hea Selvin genes S estere E E eas B 27 Bit String Data ce hh eda hae nee adler ete ada sies B 28 Signed and Unsigned Integers ununuran nrnna rraren B 29 Floating Point ua cene oL ea eer EPI nat ME eee REO edad B 29 Octet Strings and VisibleStrings ssseeellesees B 29 Object Scope serer S bne ey Sees Eu P a E bebe e eeu B 29 Series 90 70 PLC Application 6 6 66 cece B 30 Naming and Addressing aesa ne uro iao eane AE AEREE e E A B 30 AppendixC ProtocolImplementation Conformance Statement PICS C 1 PICS for the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS C 1 AppendixD Communication Ports Characteristics 00sec e enone D 1 Serial Port for Local GSM Communications 06 cece ee eee D 2 Serial Port Settings rete bee tI Hea ae doa dee t e tunes D 2 Serial Port Pino lts osc cine ES dee Ee eer e bere Oe D 2 Serial Cables esee sss naan aris tete eee Cete b etel D 2 Display Terminal Settings 0 cece D 3 The AUI Port for the Ethernet Interface 0 e eee eee D 4 Ethernet AUI Port Pinouts 0 cee eee D 4 AUI Transceiver Cable ose eee eee se ds e Ce e pow D 5 Transceiver Description persint aes pitinata e
432. ser s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table 4 10 Configuration Parameters Continued Parameter nchksum ncfgtime neslsap nesmac nhldtime nislsap nismac nmaxpdu noptmiz npdulife npriority nqwtime nsap ntick Description NetworkLayer Configuration Parameters Checksumoption Configurationtimer LSAP for ALL ES traffic MAC address for ALL ES traffic Holdtimer LSAP for ALL IS traffic MAC address for ALL IS traffic Maximum NPDU length Optimizationoption NPDUliftimetimer Priorityfor NPDUs Queue wait time Station NSAP value Timertick count pacsepci pacsesynnam pacsesynobj pmmspci pmmssynnam pmmssynobj pxferpci pxfersynnam pxfersynobj PresentationLayerConfiguration Parameters ACSE Presentation ContextIdentifier ACSE AbstractSyntax name ACSE AbstractSyntax object identifier MMS Presentation ContextIdentifier MMS Abstract Syntax name MMS Abstract Syntax object identifier Transfer Syntax Presentation ContextIdentifier Transfer Syntax Abstract Syntax name Transfer Syntax Abstract Syntax object identifier stime stsap Session LayerConfiguration Parameters Session timer TSAP tchksum tflowctrl tgiveup tinactive tleack tmaxpdu treftime trtrancnt trtrantime twindow twindsize TransportLayerConfiguration Parameters Checksumoption Flow control timer Give up timer Inactivitytimer Transport time between receiving TPDU and 2nd ack Transportmaximum TPDUsize Transport refe
433. set for a minimum of one PLC scan each When the Confirm bit is set the Invoke ID of the message being confirmed is also updated in the ACB Note Itis possible that a confirm message will never be received if the remote device does not respond In this case a CANCEL Request may be issued to cancel the outstanding request This is an allowed exception to the rule regarding duplicate Invoke IDs Until either the corresponding response is received or a CANCEL Request is issued it will not be possible to reuse the same Invoke ID nor to CONCLUDE the association 6 8 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s When multiple confirmation messages are outstanding the ACB is updated in the order confirmation messages are received These confirmations are queued so that no mes sage responses are missed The occurrence of a Confirm should be detected by looking for the low to high transition of the Confirm bit This can be readily accomplished by using the Confirm bit as input to a one shot in the PLC ladder program The ACB Read and Write Indication bits will be turned on and off to reflect successful read and write of local PLC memory by the remote Application Process The other ACB Indication bits will be set until some action is taken by the local ladder program or until the message request is cancelled by the remote AP Usually the action required of the local ladder program is the issuing
434. sociation Control Block Pointer Offset 8 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Abort Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Abort Indication Service The Abort Indication Service is used to indicate that the remote application abruptly termi nated the association This indication is shown in bit 5 of the ACB Association Status Word When the Abort Indication bit is set to 1 bit 0 Association OK will be reset to 0 6 20 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Examine Association Options Command 8300 GFK 0868 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use an Examine Association Options command to re trieve the MMS negotiable parameters in effect for the association The format of the Examine Association Options COMM REO is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8300 206CH The result of this command is that 26 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 13 Examine Association Options Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value MaximumMessage Size 0 64and up MaximumsServices Outstanding Local 1 0 6 MaximumsServices Outstanding Remote 2 0 6 Data Structure Nesting Level 3 0 1
435. sponse destructive 18 Reset Response Reusable False 5 Stop Indication 19 Reset Response Non destructive 6 Stop Response 20 Reset Response Destructive 7 Stop Response non destructive 21 Program Stop 8 Stop Response destructive 22 CreateProgramInvocation Indication 9 Resume Indication 23 CreateProgramInvocation Response 10 Resume Response 24 CreateProgramInvocation Response 11 Resume Response non destructive 25 DeleteProgramInvocation Indication 12 Resume Response destructive 26 DeleteProgramInvocation Response 13 End of Program Reusable True 27 DeleteProgramInvocation Response 14 End of Program Reusable False MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table B 7 Program Invocation States Program Invocation Definition IDLE The IDLE state denotes the condition of a ProgramInvocation at a time before it is placed into operation RUNNING The RUNNING state denotes the condition of a Program Invocation during its execution STOPPED The STOPPED state denotes the condition of a Program Invocation in which execution has ceased and no changes are being made to the contents of the Program Invocations constituent domains UNRUNNABLE The UNRUNNABLE state denotes a condition in which the Program Invocation can no longer be executed STARTING The STARTING state is a transitio
436. ssing 8356 eens 6 51 Set Local ProgramInvocation State Command 8355 Luuu 6 52 Status Services cc sei ads cues egt ecd eh RR dece ne Race ee te 6 53 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xi 1994 Contents Status Request Command 8250 6 6 eee 6 53 Status Indication Service 6 eee eee eee 6 54 Status Response Command 8251 1 6 0 eee 6 54 Status Confirm Service 2 6 6 eee eee 6 55 Unsolicited Status Request 8252 6 6 cece nee 6 55 Unsolicited Status Indication Service 6c eee eens 6 56 Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication Command 8253 6 56 Set Local VMD Status Command 8353 1 eee 6 57 Miscellaneous OSI Services 2 2 0 eee eens 6 59 Identify Request Command 8240 2 eee 6 59 Identify Confirm Service 6 6 60 Cancel Request Command 8290 66 6 c cece eee eee 6 61 Get Remote Name List Command 8301 00 e ee eee eee 6 62 Error Request Command 8350 6 6 cee ee 6 64 Reject Indication Service 0 eee E eee 6 65 Examine Reject Indication Command 8351 0 c eee eee 6 65 Error Indication Service eee eee eee 6 65 Examine Last Error Information Command 8352 iuuuu 6 66 Define Application Command 8200 6 6 cece eee eee 6 67 MMS Error Encodings 6 6 eee eee ees 6 68 Chapter 7 Station Manager COMMunications REQuests
437. stance GFK 0868 Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 25 Resuming Normal Operation After Using the Example Program If a previous version of the GSM had been installed before the installation of the example PLC ladder program enter the following DOS commands C gt cd c gsm C GSM gt copy bak gsm This will restore the list of station names and the Directory Information Bases DIBs that existed before the example program was installed Change the default directory to C LM90 the directory where Logicmaster software has been installed Use the Logicmaster 90 70 configurator to select the PLC ladder program you plan to use for your application Then store this configuration into the Series 90 70 CPU This step must be performed to restore the application soft switches in particular the default station address Reload the Ethernet Interface from the GSM to get correct DIB information for your application Making the Ethernet Interface go through diagnostics will also allow it to obtain the latest soft switch information just stored from Logicmaster 90 70 software MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Chapter The GEnet System Manager Station 3 Configuration This chapter describes how to install the GEnet System Manager GSM and how to use it to configure your GEnet LAN Interface The chapter includes an overview of the GSM and a detailed guide to the basic
438. stations are each connected at a point along a common continuous cable which has no loops and only two endpoints Link Service Access Point LSAP A Data Link layer SAP A single octet that identifies the routing of data received by the station Local Address Administration Address administration in which all LAN individual ad dresses are unique within the same Local Area Network See also Global Address Administration Local Area Network LAN A computer network located on a user s premises within a limited geographical area Local Station The station at your immediate location i e here See also Remote Station GFK 0868 Appendix AGlossary of Terms A 7 A 8 Log Events System exception log for the LAN Interface The maximum number of events in the exception log is 16 Logical Link Control LLC Protocol Ina Local Area Network the protocol that gov erns the exchange of frames between data stations independently of how the trans mission medium is shared Logical Ring The abstract representation of a token bus network that is passing a to ken between data stations in a manner that simulates the passing of control in a ring network MAC Address The Medium Access Control MAC address is a 12 digit hexadecimal number that identifies a station on a network Each LAN Interface has its own unique MAC address Manufacturing Automation Protocol MAP MAP communication protocol is specified by the Manufacturing Auto
439. sub menus are described below GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 21 Variable Names Screen 8 22 The Variable Names Screen selection is used to modify the Variable Name Table used by the MMS Ethernet Interface In order to make applications simpler data in the Series 90 70 PLC can be accessed through a symbolic name called a Variable Name The names defined in this menu are in the Virtual Manufacturing Device VMD Specific scope of MMS This means that the names are available without regard to what program is executing in the Series 90 70 PLC The Variable Names Screen is shown below CONFIGURE GEFO018068b Configuration File Name C 8 0CGZ 1GB 3o SET 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 3 22 Variable Names TYPE MEREFERENCE ENTRY UARTABLE_NAME DATA_TYPEBSIZE aa dte E 09825 BOOLEAN LH Eas CELER BOOL REG 1 BOOLEAN 881 ZR 88881 BOOL IO BOOLEAN 881 ZI 88865 BOOL_I01 BOOLEAN 8801 I 808865 BIT REG BIT STR ZR 88881 BIT REG 1 BIT STR XR 88881 BIT REG Z BIT STR ZR 88881 BIT STR I 88865 INTEGER ZR 88881 INTEGER R 80881 INTEGER ZR 08881 UNSIGNED R 880881 UINT1 amp 5 UNSIGNED 618 ZR 88881 zzzzzzzzzzzzrrk Variable Name 1 32 characters Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update Pg Up Dn to change entry tt KAlt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEV HELP CAI1t H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 14 Variable Names Screen The PgUp and PgDn keys are used
440. sued by the MMS Provider in the local Ethernet Interface Error Indication Service The Error Indication Service uses the Error Indication bit bit 4 of the ASW Extension to indicate that the remote application was able to parse understand but could not pro vide the service requested in a Request issued by the ladder program GFK 0868 Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 65 6 Examine Last Error Information Command 8352 The Series 90 70 PLC ladder program can use an Examine Last Error Information command to look at the details of the last MMS error received on the association The error in formation will be saved any time either the Negative Confirm bit of the ASW or the Er ror Indication bit of the ASWE are set to the value 1 The format of the Examine Last Error Information COMM REO is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8352 20A0H The result of this command is that 184 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 58 Examine Last Error Information Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value Invoke ID 0 1 0 65 535 ErrorClass 2 See Table 6 60 Error Code 3 See Table 6 60 AdditionalError 4 5 Application specific Length of Description Buffer 6 0 170 DescriptionBuffer 7 91 Application specific Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID of the Request in error Error Class Specifies the gen
441. t where lt HH gt isan hour in the range 0 23 MM is an optional minute in the range 0 59 which defaults to 0 5S is an optional second in the range 0 59 which defaults to 0 This command sets the current system time to the value specified If an invalid time is entered the current time is not changed Leading zeros do not need to be entered when entering the new time value Time changes remain in effect until the Ethernet Interface is powered up or restarted A typical CHTIME command is shown below chtime 8 03 Time 8 03 00 0 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 21 CLEARCommand The CLEAR command has the form CLEAR EXS LOG TALLY HEAP The CLEAR command sets various Ethernet Interface data structures to initial values usually zeros m If the CLEAR EXS command is entered the Extended Status Buffer is cleared to an initial state where only the 2 software versions are non zero m If the CLEAR LOG command is entered all log entries are discarded and the log is set to an empty state The CLEAR LOG command also turns on the STATUS OK LED on the Ethernet Interface m If the CLEAR TALLY command is entered all tallies are set to a value of zero with the exception of the System Memory Tallies TimReset and Restart and the PLC Driver Tallies Regs KbLogic and uCode m If the CLEAR HEAP command is entered the minimum system buffer free count values maintained by the STAT B command are reset to the current free coun
442. t PLC Driver Tallies gt gt gt PlcQFull 0000H PlcSweep 03c9H MsgRcv 0038H PLCReq 001aH PlcAbt 0000H MsgSent 0036H MyAbt 0000H Write 0023H Read 0010H Timeout 0000H Regs 0400H AnInput 0040H AnOutput 0040H uCode 0300H Table 4 11 Application Layer Tallies Tally a Tally Meaning UncSvSnt Numberof MMS unconfirmed services sent UncSvRcd Number of MMS unconfirmed servicesreceived CanSent Number of MMS Cancels sent CanRcvd Number of MMS Cancels received GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 37 4 38 Table 4 12 System Memory Tallies Tally b Tally Meaning TimReset Count of the number of times that the internal time and date have been changed This tally is preserved over system restarts and software loads Restart Count of the number of times that the Ethernet Interface has been re started This tally is preserved over the system restarts and software loads Table 4 13 PLC Driver Tallies Tally c Tally Meaning PlcQFull Count of the number of times an MMS request of the PLC was retried be cause of congestion in the PLC PlcSweep Count of the number of executive windows received by the Ethernet Inter face MsgRcv Count of the number of messages received from the CPU PlcReq Count of the number of COMM REOs received from the application pro gram PlcAbt Count of the number of times the CPU aborted a data transfer MsgSent Count of the nu
443. t and Restart and Reload The Restart button is inaccessible when the door to the Ethernet Interface is closed Restart Pressing the Restart button for fewer than 5 seconds forces a restart of the Ethernet Interface The power up diagnostics run and the software on the module is restarted when the pushbutton is released Restart and Reload Pressing and holding the Restart button for 5 seconds or more forces a restart and requests a reload of the Ethernet Interface When the Restart button is pressed all LEDs go out After 5 seconds have elapsed the STATUS OK LED comes ON to indicate that the Ethernet Interface will request a reload After the Restart push button is released the power up diagnostics run and the Ethernet Interface requests to be loaded Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 3 Battery Serial Port Notes In either case any data being transferred by the Ethernet Interface at the time of the Restart will be lost The Restart Pushbutton will not be operable during the Ethernet Controller board diagnostic phase The Ethernet Controller board is in diagnostic phase when the BOARD OK LED is BLINKING and the ONLINE and STATUS OK LEDs are off When connected the battery preserves the contents of RAM when there is no power to the board The battery will maintain RAM contents for a minimum of six months The lithium battery presents a fire explosion or severe burn risk Do NOT recharge it remove its polariz
444. t values Atypical CLEAR TALLY command is shown below clear tally Tallies cleared CLSOSW Command 4 22 Notes The changes made with either the Logicmaster 90 Configurator or the CLSOSW command will not take effect until the next Ethernet Interface restart The CLSOSW command clears the SOSW valid bit in the soft switches stored in the Ethernet Interface EEPROM This ensures that the LAN controller board must receive new soft switch values before it can be restarted and put into service On the next re start if the Ethernet Interface is configured in the Series 90 70 PLC CPU then new soft switch values will automatically be accepted and saved in EEPROM If the Ethernet In terface is not configured in the CPU the Ethernet Interface will go into the Soft Switch Entry Utility after the completion of diagnostics Refer to Appendix E for more discus sion of the Soft Switch Entry Utility The CLSOSW command is shown below clsosw Updating please wait MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 DATE Command The DATE command has the form DATE This command causes the current system date to be displayed This date is used in gen erating time stamps for MMS messages which require them The initial value of the date is read from the PLC on Restart or if unavailable is set to 1 JAN 1989 on restart or pow er up The Modify command CHDATE can be used to set the date The
445. t Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager Continued Parameter Format Default Description SessionLayer Parameters stime dec 2500 Session Timeout for the Session Layer This timer establishes the maximum interval to wait before disconnecting the Transport connection It allows time for a connection ending Session PDU to reach its destination This parameter is in units of 10 milliseconds The default value for this pa rameter is 25 seconds Range 1 65535 stsap hex 0001 Transport Service Access Point TSAP This parameter speci fies the TSAP to be used for the ISO communications services Transport Layer Parameters tchksum dec 0 Checksum Negotiation for the TransportLayer This parameterdetermines whether or not the Transportcheck sums are negotiated during Transportconnectionestablish ment 0 for this parameter specifies that checksums are notnegotiated 1 for this parameter specifies that check sums are negotiated Range 0 1 tflowctrl dec 0 Flow Control Timeout for the TransportLayer This timer is reserved for future use tgiveup dec 1500 Give up timeout for the TransportLayer This timer is started when a TPDU has been re transmitted the maximum number of times If ittimes out before an acknowledgement is received for the TPDU the Transport connection is broken This parameter is in u
446. t Indication Variable COMM REQ is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8321 2081H The re sult of this command is that 82 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 24 Examine InformationReport Indication Variable Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value Data Type Code 0 See Table6 19 Data TypeSize 1 See Table6 19 Variable Type 2 See Table6 20 Length of Variable Name or Address 3 1 32 Variable Name or Address 4 19 Characterstring FirstIndex 20 21 0 or more Number of Elements 22 1 or more VariableScope 23 See Table 6 54 Length of Domain Name 24 0 32 Domain Name 25 40 Characterstring Data Type Code The type code for the variable Data Type Size The type size information for the variable if it is available Variable Type A code which specifies the kind of variable access that was reported Length of Variable Name or Address The name or address information which defines the variable Variable Name or Address The variable name or address being described First Index The beginning index of an Alternate Access if an alternate access was received Number of Elements The number of data elements present in the InformationReport data Variable Scope The scope of the Variable Access if it is a Named Variable Length of Domain Name The actual number of octets in the Domain Name Domain Name
447. t NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8253 203DH Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Maximum Length of Status Buffer 9 4 20 Status Buffer Memory Type 10 See Table6 16 Status Buffer Offset 11 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Examine UnsolicitedStatus Indication com mand Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Maximum Length of Status Buffer Should be set to the maximum number of octets that can be used to hold the status information Status Buffer The PLC address of a buffer of two or more words where the octets of the status are to be stored No more octets than are specified in the Length of Status Buffer parameter will be used The format of the data returned by this command is shown in Table 6 43 6 56 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Set Local VMD Status Command 8353 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use a Set Local VMD Status command to change the state of the VMD Logical Status and the VMD Physical Status as reflected in the MMS provider This service should always be used to update the VMD status whenever it
448. t Responses received Responses with er ror and No Responses Responses received is the total number of responses received from that node Frames containing CRC or other communication errors are not received but are discarded Response with error refers to frames that were received ie they were included in the count of Responses received The initiating node compares the test data of all re sponses to the current test data which always varies from the preceding frame because of the sequence number in the first byte position Any received frame that does not compare is counted as a Response with error The most common cause of this indication is that the lt sch gt parameter in the TEST command is set to too short an interval This should be avoided by increasing lt sch gt Also some manufacturers products while re plying to the test command do not return the data field this will cause all their Re sponses received to also tally a Response with error No Response is computed as the difference between the number of test commands sent by the initiating node minus the number of Responses received from the subject node This number of frames were lost either outbound from the initiator inbound to the initiator or internally eg lack of buffers to either the initiator or responder Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 31 RESTARTCommand The RESTART command has the form RESTART The RESTART command
449. t events COMM REQ MDB events MMS Service Agentevents LLCevents MMS Providerevents Directory User Agent events 9 10 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Log Event Possible Cause and Resolution Code Event 1 This is an event logged on every initialization of the Ethernet Interface This Powerup event is meant to indicate the boundaries between Restarts By checking the count for this event you may find how many Restarts are occurring This event never causes the STATUS LED to go OFE Entry 2 indicates the type of system initialization as described below 0 NormalEthernet Interfacestartup operational state 1 Soft Switch Entry Utility 2 Factory Network Test Utility 3 Field Network Test Utility Field Network Test has been explicitly requested 4 Software Load Utility selected Entry 3 indicates the event that caused the system initialization to occur 0 Normal powerup 1 Restart request through pushbutton 2 Load request through pushbutton 3 Station Manager restart request 4 Station Manager load request 5 Automatic restart due to system error see preceding log event 2 6 Automatic load due to system error see preceding log event 2 7 Entry from loader Entry 4 shows the state of Soft Switches that may limit the extent of operation of the Ethernet Interface Entry 4 LAN Online BPOnline 0 YES YES 1 YES NO
450. t of a circuit board with processor and Ethernet or MAPcircuitry loaded with configuration information and communications software The power up diagnostics and loader software reside in Programmable Read Only Memory PROM on the board and cannot be changed without physically disassembling the LAN Interface Some very basic parameters known as Soft Switch Parameters are stored in another kind of memory Electronically Erasable PROM EEPROM These Soft Switches are set to default values during manufacture of the LAN Interface and are retained indefinitely until changed by the user normally via the Logicmaster 90 Configurator For a LAN Interface the Logicmaster 90 Configurator has access only to these Soft Switch parameters All other parameters of the LAN Interface are set using the GSM The communications software along with all other configuration information is set and main tained on the GSM and must be downloaded to the LAN Interface when a software or configuration change is required This information is stored on the LAN Interface in ei ther battery backed RAM or Flash Memory Both these memory technologies permit ready change of the memory content via downloading from the GSM but retain their content when power is removed Connecting the GSM to the LAN Interface The GSM may be carried to the station and connected to the LAN Interface with an RS 232 cable We refer to this method of connection as local communications mode o
451. t string which represents a valid multicast address Individual sta tion addresses or the broadcast address lt lt FFFFFFFFFFFF gt gt are not permitted Entry 0 defaults to lt lt 09002B000004 gt gt which is the All ES MAC address Entry 1 defaults to lt lt 090019000001 gt gt which is the Group Address used when a Logic master 90 70 Ethernet station is browsing for PLCs on the network All other entries default to zero lt lt 000000000000 gt gt to indicate that the entry is not used Corre sponds to Station Manager Parameter lgrpmsk0 lerpmsk7 There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the ISO Parameters Menu m Esckey exit without saving changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 9 Network Layer Parameters Screen The Network Layer Parameters Screen selection is used to modify the Network Layer communications parameters The Network Layer Parameters Screen is shown below Configuration File Name CO 8 CG 600 SERIES_96 78 IS08 2 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 l Network Layer Parameters NSAP CEE HEX PACKET_PRIORITY MAX_NPDU_SIZE EER NPDU_LIFETIME CONFIG_TIME HOLDING_TIME QUERY_WAIT_TIME CHECK_TIME USE_CHECKSUMS J OPTIMIZE ALL_END_SYSTEMS CES MAC_ADDRESS CELDLENTLLELLE HEX LSAP HEX ALL_INTERMEDIATE_SYSTEMS CIS MAC_ADDRESS GELD Ad HEX LSAP HEX LSAP jj HEX Network Service Access Poi
452. t the ISO Stack B 6 Figure B 6 Application Process Concept 6 660 n B 8 Figure B 7 Series 90 70 PLC Application Process Implementation 606 00 ce cece B 8 Figure B 8 CNC Application Process Implementation 0 cece eee eee eee B 9 Figure B 9 MMS Object Identifier 0 0 eee eens B 10 Figure B 10 Acknowledged MMS Service 0 066 eee B 11 Figure B 11 MMS VMD Attributes and Contained Objects 06 66 eens B 13 Figure B 12 Domain State Diagram 1 0 nee lee B 18 Figure B 13 Program Invocation State Diagram PI State o n unasu snua eee eee B 22 Figure B 14 Operator Station State Diagram 0 0 0 000s B 26 Figure B 15 MMS Boolean Data Memory Mapping 00 0 B 28 Figure B 16 MMS Bit String Data Memory Mapping 6 eh B 28 Figure B 17 MMS Object Identifier 0 n B 30 Figure D 1 Serial Cable to Connect GSM 25 Pin Connector to Ethernet Interface D 2 Figure D 2 Serial Cable to Connect GSM 9 Pin Connector to Ethernet Interface D 3 Figure D 3 Transceiver Cable Connection 00 0000 cece n D 5 Figure D 4 10Base2 Transceiver Configuration 0 0 0 666 eee eens D 6 Figure D 5 10Base5 Transceiver Configuration 6660 eens D 6 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 Contents Table 2 1 Ethernet Controller Board Indicators 0 0 00 00 ee
453. tFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8322 2082H Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Data Type 11 See Table 6 19 Data Type Size 12 See Table 6 19 Variable Type 13 See Table 6 20 Length of Variable Name or Address 14 1 320r1 16 Variable Name or Address 15 30 Altemate Access Index only used if Variable Type 31 32 0 or more 8 11 Number of Elements 33 See Table6 20 VariableScope 34 See Table6 54 Length of Read Data Buffer 35 1 to 2048 Read Data Buffer Memory Type 36 See Table 6 16 Read Data Buffer Offset 37 See Table 6 16 Length of Domain Name 38 0 32 Domain Name 39 54 characterstring 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M Decimal Value 8 10 70 72 74 Command Number Identifies this as a Read Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Data Type Specifies the expected type of the returned data for the read If the data on the read response does not match this type an error will be generated Valid Data Type values are given in the table below 6 28 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 6 19 Data Type Values
454. tarted when a TPDU has been retransmitted the maximum number of times If it times out before an acknowledgement is received for the TPDU the Transport connection is broken Valid range of 0 to 300 seconds Defaults to 15 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter tgiveup 8 14 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 INACTIVE_TIMEOUT Establishes the maximum time that the Transport connection will be maintained without receiving a TPDU Valid range of 0 to 300 seconds De faults to 60 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter tinactive RETRAN_TIMEOUT Retransmission Timeout for the Transport Layer When it expires it causes re transmission of unacknowledged Connect Request CR Connect Con firm CC Data Transfer DT Expedited Data ED and Disconnect Request DR TPDUs Valid range of 0 to 300 seconds Defaults to 15 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter trtrantime WINDOW_TIMEOUT Window Timeout for the Transport Layer When this timeout expires an Acknowledge AK TPDU is transmitted Should be less than the value for the Transport Layer inactivity timer INACTIVE TIMEOUT Valid range of 0 to 300 seconds Defaults to 25 seconds Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter twindow USE CHECKSUM Determines whether or not the Transport checksums are negotiated during Transport connection establishment A Y specifies that checksums are used
455. tation Manager This section describes how to access the Station Manager software that resides on the Ethernet Interface Access Station Manager Screen 3 42 The Access Station Manager Screen is used to access the Station Manager on the Ether net Interface This access will occur over either the serial port or the network depend ing on the selection in the System Network Parameters Menu If you are using network access you will be prompted for the name of the station you wish to access Local Station Manager Terminal You are now communicating with the attached device Enter Esc to return control to the host computer Figure 3 17 Access Station Manager Screen Once you are in the Access Station Manager screen the PC acts like a dumb terminal connected to the Ethernet Interface The GSM sets up the screen to display the interac tions with the local Ethernet Interface Station Manager The logging of Station Management activity can be started or stopped from this menu To request logging to start press Alt E You will be prompted for the log file name The log file is automatically closed when leaving this menu or when you press Alt P MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Section 5 Using the GSM Support Functions GFK 0868 This section describes the GSM support functions The GSM Menu topics discussed in this section are m List All Stations m List all Configure
456. te DATE Command Station Manager DDP CONFLICT TIMEOUT DDP DISABLE B DDP RESOLVE RETRIES Debugging See Troubleshooting Default Station Address Label 2 4 m Define Application Command 8200 MMS COMM REQ 6 67 Defining a Station 8 3 Deleting a Station Deleting a Station Configuration File 3 21 DESTINATION NSAB DISAB TX RTRY Discard InformationReport Indication Data Command 8339 MMS COMM REQ Display Data Representation Display Terminal Settings Distributed Directory Protocol DDP Tall ies Tally d DomainObjects B 17 DOS System Files ior Network Operation of the GSM B DOS VERSION B Download Mode Load Source 2 15 Download Station Screen Downloader Index Downloading a Station 2 14 3 39 Downloading a Station Conditions 2 14 Downloading Locally Over the Serial Port Downloading Over the Network E Error Codes Data Link GEnet System Manager J 1 Error Codes Exception Log Event 9 10 Error Codes Extended Status Buffer 9 27 Error Codes NDIS Jj 3 Error Indication Service 6 65 Error Request Command 8350 MMS COMM REQ EtherCard PLUS EtherCard PLUS Elite 16 EtherCard PLUS A H 5 Etherlink MC H 4 Etherlink ies Etherlink ii Ethernet Hardware Overview 2 2 b 2 Ethernet Interface 3 2 Attachment to the LAN Operational States 2 2 9 Powering Up Capabilities I2 Ethernet Interface Installation 2 5 Ethernet Interface Pow
457. te 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Positiveor Negative Response 9 0 1 ProblemCode 10 See Table 6 17 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI AQ Il Q T M Decimal Value 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Start Response command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Positive or Negative Response A value of 0 indicates that a positive response should be generated A value of 1 indicates that an error response should be is Problem Code An encoded value of the problem as specified in the MMS service speci fication This field is ignored if a Positive Response is being sent 6 42 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 sued GFK 0868 s Stop Request Command 8307 The Series 90 70 PLC ladder program can use a Stop Request command to initiate a MMS Stop message Stop transitions the MMS Server ProgramInvocation from a RUNNING state into a STOPPED state The COMM REO format for the Stop Request is shown in the table below Table 6 31 Stop Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 24 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8307 2073H Association Control BlockPointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Associ
458. te node If the value in R500 now matches the value in R354 the two nodes are successfully passing application data What to Do if the Program is Not Working m If you perform step 6 above and find that not all of the specified bits are on the association did not come up If 116 is off the Ethernet Interface is not operating If 76113 is off there is a problem with the connection to the network These two problems should be dealt with by consulting Chapter 9 Troubleshooting m If the problem in step 6 is that I17 is off then the LAN and the Ethernet Interface are operating properly but the COMM REO did not perform its function Examine R250 This register should have the hexadecimal value 40 meaning COMM_REQ has completed without error If there is some different value there then the COMM_REQ was not successfully delivered to the Ethernet Interface Check R99 for being an accurate reflection of the rack and slot location of the Ethernet Interface m If R250 contains a hexadecimal 40 then the COMM REO was successfully delivered to the Ethernet Interface Check R214 through R217 for accuracy in specifying the Application Common Name If the name is correct make sure that the remote node has been configured downloaded and is operating correctly m If you continue to have difficulty contact a GE Fanuc Automation NA representative for further assi
459. ted to the Interface The Default Station MAC Address is a globally administered address the global administration process assures that each default MAC address is unique Your orga nization may have its own scheme of how addresses are administered In this case you will not use the default address but will assign a different address from a set of numbers established by your address administrator LOAD GROUP The number of the selected download group for the station The Load Group selects which multicast address is used when loading the station The multi cast addresses and slot times are assigned to the Load Groups via the System Net work Parameters menu Value may be 0 to 4 default is 0 MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 COMMENTS This field is optional but may be used to insert a comment line up to 40 characters long for the station being configured These comments will be displayed on the List All Stations Screen Selecting a Station Configuration File Select a station by filling in the STATION_NAME field in one of three ways m Type in the Station Name or m Type in a lt lt MAC Address gt gt specified as exactly 12 hexadecimal digits within a double set of brackets for example lt lt 08001901001d gt gt The GSM will convert the MAC address into the corresponding station name or m Select a station from a list of stations Press Alt L for the
460. ted with the objects Domain Name Is used to specify the name of the domain associated with a request us ing the Domain Specific value for Object Scope Unless a Domain Specific scope is speci fied this parameter is ignored Name Buffer The PLC address of a buffer of one or more words where the octets of the Name Buffer parameter are to be stored No more octets than are specified in the Maxi mum Length of Name Buffer parameter will be used The data written into the specified Name Buffer PLC address will actually contain 4 oc tets more than the Maximum Length of Name Buffer parameter indicates The format of the data returned is shown in the table below Chapter 6 MMS COMMunications REQuests 6 63 Table 6 55 Get Remote Name List Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value Number of Object Names 0 non negative Object Name List Length 1 0 1 020 Object Name List 2 511 characterstrings Number of Object Names A count of the number of Object Names returned from the remote peer application Object Name List Length Octet length of the Object Name List This value will not exceed the amount in the Maximum Length of Name Buffer parameter in the COMM_REQ Object Name List A list of NULL terminated ASCII character strings Each string is the name of an object of the specified type No partial names will be returned If the data is being put into Word Memory R AI AQ an even number of bytes will be writ
461. tem Each process identified in a real open system that performs information processing is called an Application Process AP Application Process Agiven Application Process may have many communication requirements and therefore may require many different types of communication services In the Series 90 70 PLC there are two separate Application Processes m The MMS Responder Application Process m The Application Interface Application Process In the CNC there are also two separate Application Processes m The CNC Responder Application Process m The PMC Application Process requires C language For GE Fanuc devices there are separate Application Processes since their information processing functions are different Application Entities Those parts of the Application Process that process a particular set of OSI communication services are known as Application Entities AEs Each AE is uniquely addressable in the network This address consists of an AE title an AE qualifier a Presentation Address and an Application Context Name ACN It is the function of the Application Layer directory service to map from the Application Common Name which describes the application and ACN to the application address Application Service Elements Associated with each AE are one or more Application Service Elements ASEs such as the Association Control Service Element ACSE An ASE is that part of the AE that provides an OSI environment capabi
462. ten Error Request Command 8350 6 64 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use an Error Request command to cause an MMS Confirmed Error service to be sent to the remote peer This service may be used as a gen eral Negative Response for any MMS indication for which a xxx Response COMM REQ command exists The COMM REO format of the Error Request is shown in the table below Table 6 56 Error Request COMM REG Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 6 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8350 209EH Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Problem Code 11 See Table 6 60 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as an Error Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Problem Code An encoded value of the problem as specified in the MMS service speci fication MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 s Reject Indication Service The Reject Indication Service uses the Reject Indication bit bit3 in the ASW Extension
463. ter Routing RX RING LEN S Sample DOS System Files GFK 0868 GFK 0868 SAP Saving Changes Before Exiting the Con figuration Editor Main Menu 8 Scalar Variables Selecting a Station Selecting the Application Process 6 4 m GSM to Ethernet Interface D 2 Serial Number Label 2 4 Serial Port D 4 Serial Port for Local GSM Communica tions D2 Serial Port Pinouts Serial Port Settings 3 PLC AP Implementation B 8 Service Access Point B 5 Session Layer Parameters Session Layer Tallies Tally s SESSION_TIMEOUT Set Download Mode Screen 3 47 Set Local ProgramInvocation Processing 8356 MMS COMM_REQ Set Local ProgramInvocation State Com mand 8355 MMS COMM REO 6 52 Set Local VMD Status Command 8353 MMS COMM REQ Set Station Manager Mode Screen B 47 Setup GSM Menu 7 Layer Application DIB Screen SHOW Command Station Manager 1 35 Soft Switch Default Values for the Ether net Interface Soft Switch Entry State 9 5 Soft Switch Entry Utility 4 12 Soft Switch Entry Utility Commands 4 13 Soft Switch Parameters Soft Switch Settings Soft Switches SOSW Command Station Manager 4 36 Index sos Ed rid SRTP Parameters SRIP Service Agent Tallies Tally v SSAP 5 29 Start Indication Service 6 41 Start Request Command 8304 MMS COMM REQ Start Response Command 8306 MMS COMM_REQ Starting Up the GSM STAT Command St
464. ter on screen and press Alt U to update it CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEV HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 15 Maximum MMS Message Size Screen The Maximum MMS Message Size Parameter is defined as follows MAX_MMS_MESSAGE_SIZE The maximum length of a MMS message that can be sent or received Determines the maximum message size which is negotiated between two application processes Valid range from 128 to 8192 octets Defaults to 992 oc tets Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter mmaxmsgsz Should be at least 150 less than the Maximum Buffer Size There are two ways to exit this screen and return to the MMS Parameters menu m Esc key exit without saving changes m Alt Ukey save changes and exit 8 24 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 System Parameters Screen The System Parameters Screen selection is used to modify parameters which determine how the Ethernet Interface allocates its available buffer memory This screen is also used to modify Station Manager parameters The System Parameters Screen is shown below CONFIGURE GEFO01868b Configuration File Name 5L 1GB SERIES_96 78 1S08 2 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 System Parameters Memory Pool Allocation ISO Parameters MMS Parameters SIZE ALLOCATION BUFFER_POOL_1 28 E BUFFER PO0L 2 7 7 Print File BUFFER POOL 3 380 45 BUFFER_POOL_4 1569 E
465. terface is executing the Soft Switch Entry Utility the rea son that the utility was entered is also displayed A typical NODE command is shown below gt node IC697 PLC Factory LAN Interface Copyright c 1990 1994 All rights reserved PROM version 1 14 Software version 1 13 MMS Ethernet MAC address lt lt 080019010177 gt gt Serial no 01913826 MAC default lt lt 080019010177 gt gt OK Command This command causes the STATUS OK LED to turn ON It has no effect on the contents of the exception log The OK command has the form OK A typical OK command is shown below ok Display modified PI Command The PI command has the form PI This command displays the information regarding the MMS Program Invocation PI object currently defined for the station A typical PI command is shown below gt pi lt lt lt Program Invocation gt gt gt Pi PLC_Application Deletable 0 State RUNNING GFK 0868 Chapter 4 The Station Manager 4 29 REM Command 4 30 The REM command has the form REM lt node gt lt cmd gt lt cmd parms gt where node is the MAC address of a remote GEnet Ethernet Interface lt cmd gt is any station manager command except REM cmd parms gt is a list of any parameters required by cmd The REMote command sends the Station Manager command which is its argument and any associated parameters to the node whose address is specified The Station Manager on
466. terface under test 8 Atthis point you have completed your initial checkout of the Ethernet Interface and its operation on the network If the acceptance criteria is met your Interface and network meets requirements and no further testing is necessary If the criteria is not met refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for the meaning of the log data and refer to Chapter 4 The Station Manager for meaning of the tally data GFK 0868 Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 21 Procedure 6 Using the Example PLC Ladder Program The GEnet software diskette contains GSM data files and a Series 90 70 PLC folder for three pre configured stations These files are loaded into GEnet LAN Interfaces and the Series 90 70 PLCs which contain them to perform various tests between stations This example program allows the user to m Demonstrate that your network is transferring application data m Write new ladder programs using the example ladder as a template Loading the Example Station Configurations If you have not already installed the GSM and Series 90 70 Configuration Editor into the PC refer to Chapter 3 Section 1 Installing and Starting Up the GSM at this time Install the Example Stations into the GSM as follows 1 Set default directory to GSM by typing C NV cd gsm 2 With the GSM directory as the default insert the GEnet Ethernet Interface software diskette into the A drive and type C GSM gt a install d1
467. th the MMS communication aspects of the real manufacturing device changes in the real device which are not visible by MMS communication have no significance to the VMD VMD Attributes Each MMS object including the VMD has attributes The attributes of an object are the distinguishable parts of the object when viewed from outside making the services of MMS Some of the attributes of a VMD are the vendor name the model name and the revision of the VMD executive function The following figure shows the attributes of an MMS VMD MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 VMD ATTRIBUTES a45179 PROGRAM PROGRAM EXECUTIVE FUNCTION gt INVOCATION NVOSATIOR eee VENDOR NAME MODEL SAM DOMAIN DOMAIN DOMAIN DOMAIN gt 1 gt 2 Tica 1 2 REVISION v v v LOGICAL VARIABLE DOMAIN STATUS 1 2 PHYSICAL STATUS v T __ VARIABLE LIST OF PROGRAM 2 INVOCATIONS LIST OF T DOMAINS ES LIST OF VARIABLE VARIABLE VARIABLES 1 gt 2 Ei LIST OF CAPABILITY CAPABILITY CAPABILITIES 1 gt 2 press Fora OPERATOR STATIONS gt STATIONS Figure B 11 MMS VMD Attributes and Contained Objects As can be seen from this figure MMS objects can have attributes which consist of lists of other MMS objects These lists form a hierarchy of objects which as a whole form the
468. th the Series 90 70 PLC If the PLC is accessible and running the status values will be STATE CHANGES ALLOWED and OPERATIONAL If the PLC is accessible and stopped the status values will be STATE CHANGES ALLOWED and PARTIALLY OP ERATIONAL If communication with the PLC cannot be established the values will be LIMITED SERVICES PERMITTED and INOPERABLE Anytime the PLC transitions be tween running and stopped states the VMD status is updated to reflect the PLC s current state Using the Set Local VMD Status command overrides the VMD statuses as main tained by the MMS provider 6 58 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 CO Miscellaneous OSI Services The Identify Services are used to interrogate the identity of a remote MMS VMD The two Identify services are Identify Request and Identify Confirm Identify Request Command 8240 The PLC ladder program requests identifying information from a remote application by using the Identify Request command The COMM REO format for this command is shown in the table below Table 6 49 Identify Request COMM REQ Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 7 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8240 2030H Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Associ
469. the network or bypassing it Universal Address Administration See Global Address Administration MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Variable Name A symbolic name which references a unique entry in a Variable Name Table Used to simplify application programs and make them portable Versa Module European VME An electrical and mechanical bus specification based on Eurocard board size Virtual Manufacturing Device VMD A VMD is an abstract representation of a specific set of resources and functionality at the real manufacturing device and a mapping of this abstract representation to the real manufacturing device Word A measurement of memory length usually 4 8 16 or 32 bits long Write Services Communication services used to write information to a remote applica tion GFK 0868 Appendix AGlossary of Terms A 13 Appendix ISO Networking Concepts B This appendix explains how communications takes place from the perspective of a GE Fanuc Automation control device in an OSI network The discussion is based on the Manufacturing Message Specification MMS which details how application information is transferred from one application process to another This discussion includes examples of how applications in GE Fanuc CNCs and Series 90 70 PLCs relate to the Application Layer of the International Standards Organization ISO Open System Interconnection OSI model Concepts introd
470. the Backplane driver LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Unrecognized PDU wasreceived LANSystem SoftwareFault Resuming Invalid binding for the received PDU Backplane Communications with PLC Fault Lost Request Backplane driverreturned bad status Entry 3 provides the list of status s that can be returned from the Backplane driver 2 The Backplane driver could not access the PLC 3 Invalid binding on the PDU sent to the Backplane driver 4 The message could not be sent to the CPU because the VME mailbox was not open an ol Maximum number of this transfer type are already taking place Cannot obtain a Dual Port RAM buffer Cannot obtain resources other than Dual PortRAM Connection ID or block transfer id is not valid Timed out waiting for CPU response The CPU aborted the request Invalid message type was specified Specified task is not registered Mailbox offset specified is invalid 00 0 9 2 v o Argument msg rsp maynotbe NULL A e Argument unsol_rsp may notbeNULL QA Parameter pointer unexpectedlyNULL A N More than allowable byte length on one transfer A es Bad sequence number in the request a B Invalid commandin request TheMaximum transfers to the CPU are already taking place 9 20 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued
471. the GSM Chapter 2 Installing the Ethernet Interface 2 17 Note Altematively you can use a dumb terminal or another terminal emulation product on a PC However you will probably find it most convenient to use the GSM terminal emulation feature since you will be using the GSM for other configuration purposes Configure the terminal for 9600 bps 8 bits no parity and 1 stop bit Perform the following steps to invoke the Field Network Test Utility 1 2 4 Connect the GSM locally to one of the Interfaces on the Network you are testing Power up the PLC if power is already on you need to cycle power or press the Restart push button on the OSI Ethernet Interface After step 7 of the power up diagnostic is complete the symbol will appear on the terminal device After the symbol appears you have 3 seconds to enter the single character F or f to invoke the Field Network Test Utility The F will not be echoed back Any characters other than f or F are ignored If you do not see a startup message displayed like the one shown below press the Restart button on the Ethernet Interface or cycle power on the station and repeat this step The expected startup message upon entering the Field Network Test Utility is similar to the one shown here IC697 PLC Factory LAN Interface Copyright c 1990 1994 All rights reserved PROM Version 1 14 Ethernet MAC address 08001901001f Se
472. the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator software Refer to Chapter 11 of GFK 0263 Logicmaster 90 Programming Software User s Manual for information on configuring your Ethernet Interface using Lo gicmaster 90 70 Configurator software To configure your Ethernet Interface using the GEnet Station Manager CHSOSW com mand refer to the following information Configuring Soft Switch Parameters Using the GSM Perform the steps described here to set the Soft Switch values using the GEnet Station Manager when m You wish to change the default Software Switch values and do not have the Logicmaster 90 configurator software m AnEthernet Interface is in the Soft Switch Entry Utility as indicated by the Soft Switch LED pattern display module OK LED blinking slowly other LEDs OFF 1 Connecta serial cable as shown in Appendix D from the 9 pin port on the Ethernet Interface Controller board to a GSM or other terminal device 9600 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity If using the GSM proceed to step 2 otherwise skip to step 5 2 Power up the personal computer into DOS and select the proper drive and directory by typing the following command C N cd gsm 3 To initiate the GSM from the DOS prompt type GSM gt gsm term 4 The screen will display the GSM Local Station Manager Terminal menu 5 Press the Ethernet Interface Restart button MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 6
473. the data in these fields A field may require the entry of an alphanu meric hexadecimal or decimal value Fields that display an require you to press the Tab key to cycle through the possible selections For systems which have color graphics hardware the GSM menus are displayed in color Selection menus like the main menu are displayed as WHITE text on a RED back ground Menus with data input display fields are displayed as WHITE text on a BLUE background MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GSM Keyboard Functions The functions of the GSM keys are shown in the table below In each screen pressing the Esc key will return you to the previous screen without saving changes Note If you change the value of a field or fields you must press Alt U to save the changes Pressing Alt U after a field change will also cause you to return to the previous screen If you press Esc from a screen in which you have made field changes those changes will be lost and you will return to the previous screen On all screens pressing Alt K will display a table describing the special keys used with the GSM Pressing Alt H displays a help screen or a series of help screens describing how to use the screen that is currently displayed Table 3 3 GSM Keyboard Functions Alt K GSM Keyboard Keys Function Esc or F1 Enter Backspace Del Delete AltA Alt C Alt D or F3
474. the remote node acts on the command as if it had been entered at its local serial port but directs all output from processing the command back over the network to the station where the REM command originated The results are displayed at the local station with the notation REM along with the prompt from the remote station to denote that the data was returned from the remote station A REM command cannot be issued to the node on which it is entered A typical REM command is shown below rem 08001901001f node REM IC697 PLC Factory LAN Interface REM Copyright c 1990 1994 All rights reserved REM PROM version 1 14 Software version 1 13 MMS Ethernet REM MAC address 08001901001f REM Serial no 01393790 MAC default 08001901001f REM gt The LOGIN command is treated as a special case when it is specified in the REM com mand The following command is used to login to a remote device REM node LOGIN password Note that this prevents the prompt for the password value and displays the remote password in a readable form Note When using the REM command the password should be placed in double quotes if it contains any uppercase letters because the password is case sensitive Security is enforced on the remote system just as if the command had been entered lo cally Thus the remote user and any local users of a given node all see the same security level MMS Ethernet Communications for the
475. the values of variables from a remote application Remote Station Station located elsewhere on the network See also Local Station Repeater In a Local Area Network a device that amplifies and regenerates signals to extend the range of transmission between data stations or to interconnect two or more segments Request In the OSI Reference Model one of four primitive types of interchange be tween entities of adjacent layers A Request is initiated by the higher layer to acti vate a particular service Responder The Responder services respond to requests from remote application pro cesses without further aid from the ladder logic program See also Hands Off Ser vice Responding Station A station which generates a message in response to a command that was directed to the station Response In the OSI Reference Model one of four primitive types of interchange be tween entities of adjacent layers A Response is initiated by the higher layer in re sponse to the Indication primitive Response Window In a token bus network a controlled interval of time equal to one slot time during which a data station having transmitted a medium access control frame pauses and listens for a response Reverse Channel In a broadband LAN the channel assigned for data transmission from the data stations to the headend Ring Topology A network topology in which stations are connected serially in a closed loop Round Trip Propagation T
476. thernet Interface to the LAN The AUI port provides the electrical and mechanical interface to the user provided IEEE 802 3 transceiver cable which connects the AUI port to an external user provided transceiver The external transceiver is directly connected to the Ethernet cable Various Ethernet baseband media 10 Base can be interconnected by appropriate repeaters Capabilities and limitations are defined in IEEE 802 3 Chapter 13 System Considerations for Multi Segment Networks The Ethernet Controller can operate on any of the following media with the appropriate user supplied transceiver cable and transceiver IEEE 802 3 specifies the definitive requirements of each medium 10Base5 Coax 10Base5 uses a 0 4 inch diameter 50 ohm coaxial cable The maximum length of a cable segment single span of cable is 500 meters The distance between any two stations must be a multiple of 2 5 meters A maximum of 100 stations is allowed on a thickwire Ethernet segment 10Base2 Coax 10Base2 uses a 0 2 inch diameter 50 ohm coaxial cable The maximum length of a thinwire cable segment is 185 meters A maximum of 30 stations is allowed on a thinwire Ethernet segment 10BaseT 10BaseT uses a twisted pair cable of up to 100 meters in length between each node and a hub or repeater Typical hubs or repeaters support 6 to 12 nodes connected in a star wiring topology 10BaseF 10BaseF has two variations that both use the same type of fiberoptic cable 1
477. tly cleared by using the CLEAR LOG command or until they are overwrit ten by more recent data The log is maintained as a circular list where new data over writes the oldest data in the list An arrow on the left points to the most recently logged event The LOG command has the form LOG A typical LOG command is shown below gt log lt lt lt Exception Log gt gt gt Date Time Event Count 01 FEB 1991 00 00 00 0 1H 1H 00H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H 01 FEB 1991 04 37 15 3 CH 14H 00H 000CH 0000H 0000H 0000H 0000H The Date and Time columns contain a time stamp of the last occurrence of the logged event The Event column identifies the internal software component that reported the exception The following table lists the possible values for events The Count column contains a repetition count for the event If events which are identical occur regularly they can easily flood the log and the PLC Fault Table with useless entries Instead of re cording each such repeated event in detail the log simply keeps the time stamp of the latest and a count of the number of repetitions of the repeated event The log Entry con tains detailed information about the event Refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting for in formation on interpreting the logged events Note The timestamp used is the current day and time of day as known by the Ethernet Interface This is the same time that is displayed by the DATE and TIME commands and changed by the
478. to indicate that either the local Ethernet Interface or the remote application could not parse understand a Request issued by the ladder program i e the Request was not constructed properly The ladder program may but need not use the Examine Reject Indication command to learn more about the complaint Examine Reject Indication Command 8351 The Series 90 70 PLC application can use an Examine Reject Indication command to look at the details of the last MMS Reject received on the association This COMM REO will receive a Complete With Error code in the CRSW unless ASWE bit 3 is ON The format of the Examine Reject Indication COMM REQ is shown in Table 6 9 The command number for this command is 8351 209FH The result of this command is that 10 octets of data will be placed at the address specified in the MDB The format of this data is shown in the table below Table 6 57 Examine Reject Indication Data Parameter Description Word Offset Value Invoke ID 0 1 0 65 535 RejectClass 2 See Table6 62 Reject Code 3 See Table 6 62 GeneratedLocally 4 0 or not Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID of the Request that was rejected Reject Class Specifies the general category of the problem that was detected Reject Code Identifies the specific problem given the Reject Class Generated Locally If set to 0 the MMS Reject was received from the remote peer ap plication If not set to 0 then the reject was is
479. tring in octets Maximum length for BIT STRING in bits Maximum length for OCTET STRING in octets Addressformats for VADR horizontal CBB Maximum Input Time Out in seconds Level of support for time Granularity of time in milliseconds Uninterruptible access to variable Priority processing forsemaphores Capabilities of VMD Local Detail File Name Syntax Range of Acceptable Segment Sizes Range of Maximum Services Outstanding Calling Range of Maximum Services Outstanding Called StartArgument Additional Code in Error Type Additional Detail in Error Type 8 x 107 97 to 3 x 1038 8 bits 16 bits 2 2 to 231 0 to 231 4096 4096 16384 4096 Numeric Symbolic Unconstrained N A See Note 1 1000 All up to 256 octets N A See Note 2 See Note 3 N A 64 512 octets 0 to6 1to6 See Note 3 N A See Note 4 Time sequence identifier is supported Capability BASEADDR lt symbolic address gt can be used to specify the load address of adomain All other capabilities are matched with no other semantics assigned These parameters are provided and processed by the PLC application with no semantics assigned by the MMS provider Additional Detail in errors are visible strings containing descriptive errormessages Appendix C Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement PICS C 3 Appendix Communication Ports Characteristics GFK 0868 D This appendix describes the Ethernet I
480. trings must begin on a word boundary i e the bit offset must be zero String arrays may have an element size which is odd Only those octets which comprise an array element are accessed when indexing a string array The notion of object scope has been mentioned several times The scope of a name is the range of visibility of the name MMS defines three scopes VMD wide scope domain wide scope and Application Association wide scope A name with a VMD wide or VMD specific scope can be seen by all objects in the VMD It exists for as long as the VMD exists A name with a domain wide or domain specific scope can be seen by all objects in a domain but not by objects outside the domain It exists for as long as the domain that contains it exists and ceases to exist when its containing domain is destroyed Similarly a name with an Application Association wide or AA specific scope can be seen by all objects defined on that association It exists for as long as the defining association exists and is destroyed when the defining association is destroyed Each object reference in MMS includes the scope in which the name should be sought This allows scope information to become part of resolving the name so that identical names in different scopes can be unambiguously accessed Objects of the same kind in the same scope must have different names in order to be accessible Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 29 Series 90 70 PLC Application The funct
481. ts for network GSM operation If you wish to access stations from the GSM across the network you must have a network card in your PC The PC network card must support NDIS Network Driver Interface Specification Table 3 1 802 3 Ethernet Cards for the PC Vendor Model Size PC Bus Width 3Com EtherlinkII 3C503 Halfslot XT AT 8 bit 3Com Etherlink 16 3C507 1slot XT AT 8 bit 3Com Etherlink MC 3C523 1slot Micro Channel 8 bit SMC V stern Digital EtherCard PLUS Halfslot XT AT 8 bit SMC W stern Digital EtherCard PLUS Elite 16 1slot AT 16 bit SMC W stern Digital EtherCard PLUS A 1slot Micro Channel 16 bit Intel Intel 82593 Interface is built in to Zenith Z note PC Xircom Xircom Pocket Adapter External Enhanced Printer N A Port Etherlink IL Etherlink 16 and Etherlink M C are trademarks of 3Com Corporation EtherCard PLUS EtherCard PLUS Elite16 and EtherCard PLUS A are trademarks of Western Digital Corporation Z Note is a trademark of Zenith Data Systems 9 Intel is a Registered Trademark of Intel Corporation 9 Xircom is a Registered Trademark of Xircom Incorporated 9 SMCisa Registered Trademark ofStandard Microsystems Corporation Note The PC can lock up if you make setup errors when installing PC network cards and device drivers in a PC Be sure you have a system boot diskette to recover from possible setup errors When installing the
482. ttribute Attribute Attribute Attribute Program Invocation Name State IDLE STARTING RUNNING STOPPING STOPPED RESUMING RESTARTING UNRUNNABLE List of Domain References MMS Deletable TRUE FALSE Reusable TRUE FALSE Monitor TRUE FALSE Monitor TRUE Event Condition Event Action Event Enrollment Execution Argument Initially empty Additional Detail ProgramInvocations have names which are used to identify them and internal states which describe what they are capable of doing Figure B 13 shows the possible transition states for the Program Invocation GFK 0868 Appendix BISO Networking Concepts B 21 26 NON EXISTENT lt q P4 AMO 264 22 Y n 264 25 4 y m ne RS UNRUNNABLE 25 27 23 Y 25 4 YE 13 15 m L3 e IDLE 1 hr 3 F STARTING 105 po 2 Y e RUNNING Hoe e 15 5 7 10 4 815 18 20 17 12 15 STOPPING RESUMING L gg RESETTING 6 Y 21 9 4 v 16 19 vy 15 STOPPED Figure B 13 Program Invocation State Diagram Pl State Transitions for the Program Invocation State PI State are as follows Line Description Line Description 1 Start Indication 15 Kill Response 2 Start Response 16 Reset Indication 3 Start Response non destructive 17 Reset Response Reusable True 4 Start Re
483. tware m Setting Up the DOS System Files For Local GSM Operation Exclusively For Network GSM Operation or both Local and Network Unusual Procedures m Starting Up the GSM GEnet LAN Interface Software is licensed separately from your GEnet LAN Interface hardware For PLC LAN Interfaces this software is provided in both 3 1 2 inch and 5 1 4 inchhigh density diskette formats for CNC 3 1 2 inch high density diskette format only The GSM software is part of this GEnet LAN Interface Software These diskettes do not contain the MS DOS operating system You must boot your com puter from your hard drive or another diskette containing this operating system soft ware MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Hardware Requirements The following hardware is required in order to support the GSM software on the PC m PC Compatible DOS Version 5 0 or later m RAM Minimum of 524288 bytes free largest executable program size on DOS MEM command m 2 MBytes of hard disk space m 31 2inchhigh density diskette drive for PLC 5 1 4 inch also supported Color or monochrome monitor m For network GSM operation an NDIS compliant 802 3 Ethernet card installed in the PC A list of supported cards is shown in the next section Installing the PC Network Card for Network GSM Operation GFK 0868 The table below lists the 802 3 Ethernet cards that GE Fanuc suppor
484. tware for all the GEnet stations on the network The Configuration Editor The Configuration Editor is a menu driven software package that is part of the GSM It is used offline to examine and modify configuration parameters for all the GEnet Ethernet In terfaces on your network These configuration parameters are stored in files on the PC hard disk and subsequently downloaded to the interface using the GSM Downloader The Downloader The Downloader is a utility which transfers the Communications Software and the Con figuration File to the Ethernet Interface The Downloader operates in two modes local RS232 and network The Downloader and the download mode are selected in the main screen of the GSM Access to the Station Manager on the Ethernet Interface The Ethernet Interface provides an interactive maintenance interface called the Station Manager described in Chapter 4 The Station Manager allows you to view current and historical information about the operation of the Ethernet Interface The GSM provides access to the Ethernet Interface and Station Manager in both local and network modes MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Access to the Station Manager and the access mode are selected in the main screen of the GSM How to Make it Work There are a number of tasks required to get your Ethernet Communications System working These tasks involve not only the Ethernet Interface a
485. uced in this appendix are somewhat abstract since they are intended to describe a wide variety of communications These concepts come from the Open System Interconnection OSI model and define terms which are used in configuring and managing the network and MMS Objects This appendix discusses m The OSI Reference Model m OSI Addressing m Protocol Data Transfer m OSI Application Layer m Locating Applications m The Client Server Model m MMS Service Mapping m MMS Objects and Their Attributes and States Note It is not necessary to understand all of the material presented in this appendix in order to use LAN communication successfully However many terms and concepts used throughout this manual are described only in this section GFK 0868 B 1 OSI Reference Model The Ethernet Interface communications software and hardware are based on the Open Systems Interconnection OSI reference model developed by the International Standards Organization The OSI model specifies a layered communications architecture see Figure B 1 Each layer specifies functions necessary to provide a defined set of services to the layer above it Each layer in turn requests and uses the services of the layer below it Each layer therefore effectively isolates the details of implementation in the layers below it This isolation permits the characteristics of a layer to change without impacting the rest of the layers LAYERS USER PROGRAM
486. ucts provides high performance solu tions for interconnecting automation controllers and for integrating them into multi vendor networks This chapter provides an overview of the product and covers the following topics m The Ethernet Communications System m How to Make the System Work m Quick Guide to the Manual The Ethernet Communications System The Figure 1 1 shows the major components of the GEnet Factory LAN along with a third party compatible device together on one Ethernet cable Note especially the two main parts of the Ethernet Communications system the Ethernet Interface and the GEnet System Manager Software and the separation of functions between them Ethernet Cable 245339 Transceiver Transceiver Transceiver Network Connection Y Local L _RS 232 Connection lel Z Series 90 70 P NSS Etherhet PLC SSS Interface SSN SSD Workmaster or Host Computer or IBM PC Compatible Control Device GEnet SYSTEM MANAGER Software Loy GEnet SYSTEM MANAGER Ethernet Interface Other Ethernet Devices Creates Configuration Files Direct Network Attachment GE Fanuc CIMPLICITY for Stations on the Network of PLC GE Fanuc CNC Downloads Configuration On board Diagnostics and Third Party Hosts Files and Executive Software Communication Software to Interface Do
487. ue is 5 500 ms Range 1 600 vdpretry dec Maximum DDP Resolve Retries This parameter is reserved for future use MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Appendix Ladder Programs for Network Testing The following ladder logic program is a printout of the program included on the Configuration Diskette The program is referenced in Chapter 2 Installation Procedure 6 Using the Example PLC Ladder Program Sample Ladder Program GFK 0868 KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK PROGRAM BLOCK MAIN PROGRAM REGISTER P MEMORY SIZE BYTES 0 PROGRAM BLOCK SIZE BYTES 360 DECLARATIONS ENTRIES 18 HIGHEST REFERENCE USED OUTPUT INTERNAL TEMPORARY LOCAL REGISTER PROGRAM REGISTER REGISTER ANALOG INPUT AI ANALOG OUTPUT AQ OoO0O0O0C0OCCO Ed Dd Ed Dd Ed Dd Co Co Ed KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK START OF LD PROGRAM 2x s x nd e GE s E Ce y A s E e 2 s y A s hj er 5 t ud x Cx E C 2 s A s tj ey IE z VARIABLE DECLARATIONS VARIABLE DECLARATION TABLE REFERENCE ICKNAME REFERENCE DESCRIPTION 5100012 MEM ACC Network memory access LISW bit 5100013 LAN O LAN OK bit in LISW 100014 RSRCPRB Resource problem
488. ueue on the Ethernet Interface is full MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 The LAN Interface Status Word The status of the Ethernet Interface and the LAN is reflected in sixteen 16 dedicated bits which are updated by the Ethernet Interface once per scan These sixteen bits are collectively referred to as the LAN Interface Status Word LISW Table 5 7 defines each of these bits More detailed information about the status of the Ethernet Interface soft ware can be requested by the ladder logic program using the Station Manager com mands described in Chapter 7 Note The LAN Interface Status Word and the COMM_REO Status Word CRSW are not the same The CRSW status area indicates whether the COMM REO completed successfully The LISW provides status information about the Ethernet Interface and the attached network Location of the LAN Interface Status Word Each Ethernet Interface must be assigned a unique location for its LAN Interface Status Word LISW The location of the LISW for a given Ethernet Interface is determined in the Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator package The LISW location is set when you config ure the slot for an Ethernet Interface The Logicmaster 90 70 Configurator will default to the lowest numbered 16 bits in the discrete input table I that have not already been claimed Bits within any table are allocated in the order the slots are configured For example if a
489. uld resume within 10 seconds after repair LANControllerUnderrun Overun Resuming During receiving the MAC was unable to write data into memory quickly enough This indicates a LAN Controller design flaw it should notoccur The frame being received is discarded Online operationcontinues LANNetworkProblem Exists PerformanceDegraded Excessive backlog of transmission requests due to excessive traffic on the network For a sustained period the MAC was unable to send frames as quickly as requested Bad Local Application Request Discarded Request The LLC rejected a local application request to send a frame because the frame length was invalid IEEE 802 3 frames must not exceed 1497 bytes of LLC data Ethernet frames must contain 46 1500 bytes of LLCdata LANDuplicateMAC Address Resuming A frame was received in which the Source Address was the same as thisstation s MAC Address All stations on a network must havea uniqueMAC address Immediately isolate the offending station it may benecessary to turn it off or disconnect it from the network This station remains Online unless you intervene to take it Offline a Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 9 23 Table 9 10 Exception Log Event Codes Continued Log Event Code Possible Cause and Resolution Event c LLCevents Continued 120 LAN Controller Fault Restarted LANI F or 121 LAN Interface Hardware Failure Switched Off Network
490. umber of SRTP Data response PDU s sent DataErr Number of SRTP Data error PDU s sent AsyncReq Number of SRTP Asynchronous request PDU s sent BadPDU Number of UnrecognizableSRTP PDU s sent DiscPDU Number of SRTP PDU s that were discarded MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 TESTCommand The TEST command has the form TEST lt node gt ALL lt cnt gt lt sch gt lt len gt lt pat gt where node is a destination MAC address and ALL is a synonym for the broadcast address ffffffffffff cnt is an optional number specifying the number of test frames to be sent which de faults to 1 sch is an optional number of 10 millisecond time intervals between consecutive test frame outputs The default value for this parameter is 50 500 milliseconds or 1 2 se cond This parameter s value can range from 0 to 7fffH 32767 or about 6 minutes A value of 0 for this parameter results in the default value of 50 being used len is an optional length of user data in the test frame which defaults to 0 no data in the test frame The range of values for this parameter is from 0 to the value of configu ration parameter maxdb 16 The test frame data length may be further modified by the pat parameter as described below pat is an optional value to be used as the data pattern in the user data This parame ter s value can ran
491. uning and Configuring Stations for an 8 Advanced Network This chapter is designed for those who are configuring stations for an advanced network Before using this chapter you should be completely familiar with Chapter 3 The GEnet System Manager Station Configuration The GSM is the tool used to configure all sta tions for both basic and advanced networks Chapter 3 describes how to install and use the GSM and how to configure stations for a basic network Definition of an Advanced Network An advanced network is one in which one or more of the following conditions exist m Communications is between both 802 3 and 802 4 devices through a bridge m A router or gateway is used to interconnect networks A host does not support the network layer ES IS protocol m Large message sizes are used m Extreme high performance is demanded such as with multiple hosts communicating to a node simultaneously Using this Chapter This chapter contains all the screens in the GEnet System Manager GSM Configuration Editors in addition to the Configure Network Wide Parameters Screens Make sure you have installed the GEnet System Manager and know how to use it see Chapter 3 before attempting to use the information in this chapter The chapter is divided into 3 sections m Section 1 Configuring GE Fanuc Series 90 70 Stations m Section 2 Configuring LAN Communications with Foreign Devices m Section 3 Configuring Network Wide Parameters GFK 086
492. us that can be entered in order to configure the various com munications parameters The ISO ParametersMenu selection is used to modify most of the communications pa rameters This menu selection is used to examine and modify the parameters for the Network Layer Network Layer RIB Table Transport and Session Layer Application Pro cesses Association Abstract Syntaxes and Local Application DIB Directory Information Base The MMS ParametersMenu is used to modify the MMS parameters This menu selec tion is used to examine and modify Variable Names and Maximum MMS Message Size The System ParametersMenu is used to modify parameters which determine how the Ethernet Interface allocates its available buffer memory This menu is also used to modify the Station Manager parameters Finally the Print File Menu is used to name and create a DOS file which contains a copy of the Ethernet Interface s configuration 8 6 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GFK 0868 ISO Parameters Menu The ISO Parameters Menu lists the communications parameters that may be changed The ISO Parameters Menu is shown below Configuration File Name C 8 CG 400 SERIES _96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 ISO Parameters MMS ISO Parameters Syst Network Layer Parameters Network Layer RIB Table Transport Session Layer Parameters Application Processes Abstract
493. use 14 words to be transferred The format of the Extended Status Buffer data is shown below Table 7 3 Extended Status Buffer Data Entry Use 1 LastCommand 2 Reserved 3 LastStation Manager Command 4 Software Version 5 PROM Version 6 Error Code 7 14 Last MDB in error Last Command The Last Command word contains the command value of the last com munication command that was issued MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Last Station Manager Command The Last Station Manager Command word contains the command value of the last Station Manager command that was issued from the lad der program Software Version The Software Version word contains a two byte value which identi fies the version of system software running in the Ethernet Interface This value will change on every release of Ethernet Interface software PROM Version The PROM Version word contains a two byte value which identifies the version of PROM software running in the Ethernet Interface Error Code The Error Code word contains a descriptive diagnostic code which gives a more detailed reason for the COMM_REQ Complete With Error status returned for the last command in error Refer to Chapter 8 for a complete list of error codes Last MDB In Error The Last MDB in the Error field contains the first eight 8 words of the Message Definition Block MDB associated with the last COMM_REQ which re c
494. uting 0 eee eee 8 13 Figure 8 8 Transport SessionLayerParameters Screen 6 6 cece eee eee 8 14 Figure 8 9 Application Processes Screen 0 eene 8 16 Figure 8 10 Abstract and Transfer Syntaxes Screen esee 8 18 Figure 8 11 Association Parameters Screen sssssseeeeeeeeee eee eee ee eee 8 19 Figure 8 12 Local Application DIB Screen ssssssssessl ee 8 20 Figure 8 13 MMS Parameters Menu sssssssssssselsee e 8 21 Figure 8 14 Variable Names Screen A aae o aaen E eee 8 22 Figure 8 15 Maximum MMS Message Size Screen 2 6 eens 8 24 Figure 8 16 System Parameters Screen 000 8 25 Figure 8 17 Print File amp Screen i sien etr hee te a e ed ARR ORG e I UR AG AH ROS OR GR el oet dn 8 28 Figure 8 18 Configure Network Wide Parameters Menu ssssssss eee 8 29 Figure 8 19 Load Group Parameters Screen 0 0 0000s 8 30 Figure 9 1 Determining the State of the Ethernet Interface 0 eee 9 4 Figure 9 2 Meaning of GEnet LAN Interface Status Inputs 0 6666 9 30 Figure B 1 OSI Reference Modelki sdua e ede E e e lee B 2 Figure B 2 Relationship between Tasks and Layers of GE Fanuc Control Devices B 4 Figure B 3 Service Access Points for the OSI Layers eese B 5 Figure B 4 Attachment of Protocol Control Information to form the Protocol Data Unit B 6 Figure B 5 Attachment of Protocol Control Information throughou
495. utive words the Word Offset entry in the COMM REO description will show the range of word offsets covered by this parameter The lower and upper end of this range will be separated by a dash For example refer to Table 6 4 Initiate Request COMM REO the Length of Application Context Name parameter m The Invoke ID parameter is a number provided by the ladder program and used by the local and remote APs to be sure they are talking about the same request No two outstanding messages on a given association may have the same Invoke ID or an error will result wm The COMM REQ command description tables have been sectioned into seven word increments as indicated by a horizontal line across the word number and value fields This shows the words that would appear together in a block move instruction in building the COMM REQ This indicator is provided as a programming convenience only and does not have any significance to the parameters m Character strings must be packed into Series 90 70 PLC words in reverse order This will allow the character string to be displayed properly in the character Register Reference Table display of the Logicmaster 90 Programmer Example ASCII characters GE would correspond to a register having the contents 17735 4547H or EG ASCII This chapter describes the specific commands available for programming the Manufac turing Message Specification MMS services used by the Application Interface AP The MMS s
496. vent is logged by the PLC Backplane Driver when an unexpected event PLC Driver occurs Entries1 and 6 of the event log will be zero For some events Entries events 3 4 and 5 will give more information on the event Entry 2 of the event log is an exception code which indicates what error oc curred In general Entry 2 codes 1 1F are PLC backplane communication faults codes 20 2F are resource errors and codes 30 and up are miscellaneouserrors Entry 2 may have the following values 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Could not open VME mailbox Entry 4 contains the status returned from the MBU_OPEN routine Entry 5 contains the number of open attempts we made Could not enable interrupt capability for incoming mail Entry 4 contains the returned status from theMBU ENAB INT routine Mail packets from PLC for a read response are out of order Entry 4 contains the received packet sequence number Entry 5 contains the expected packet sequence number PLC completed a response earlier than expected Entry 4 contains the current transfer state Message from PLC for unknown Ethernet Interface task Entry 4 contains the task ID received from the PLC Received PLC response for unknown request Entry 4 contains the mailbox sequence number of the stray response Bad message type from PLC Entry 4 contains the message type codereceived Timed out waiting for PLC response Entry 4 contains the mailbox sequence number for this transacti
497. vocation Attributes ssssssssslleels e B 21 Table B 7 Program Invocation States 6 e lee B 23 Table B 8 Variable Access Attributes 2 0 0c e B 24 Table B 9 GE Fanuc Control Device Data Types 6666s B 25 Table B 10 Operator Station Attributes 0 n B 25 Table B 11 MMS Variable Types and Size 0 eee eens B 27 Table C 1 PICS Series 90 70 PLC System ID Information 0 6666 C 1 Table C 2 PICS Supported Services en oita era E E A le C 2 Table C 3 PICS Supported Parameters meioosi ynne a nee teens C 3 Table C 4 PICs Range of Values treier eiee E or nee eens C 3 Table D 1 Pinouts of the Serial Port 0 0 0 n D 2 Table D 2 Pinouts of the AUI Port 0 en D 4 Table E 1 Soft Switch Settings sisse eme e RE eee a e RP ed rd nee E 3 Table F 1 Configuration Parameters via the Station Manager 6 6 66 F 1 Table I 1 MMS Ethernet Station Configuration Data 0 ccc eee I2 Table I 2 Foreign Device Station Configuration Data 0 eens r3 GFK 0868 MMS Ether net Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May xxi 1994 Chapter Introduction This manual describes the Ethernet Interface and the GEnet System Manager Software GSM which together form a complete Ethernet Communications System for the Series 90 70 PLC These products are members of the GEnet Factory LAN family of hardware and software products The GEnet family of prod
498. which can be performed are Abort Conclude Status and Identify When the Logical Status has the value SUPPORT SERVICES ALLOWED ISO IS 9506 only all services are available except Start Stop Reset and Resume Initially the Series 90 70 MMS Provider sets the VMD Logical Status attribute to the value STATE CHANGES ALLOWED so long as the Ethernet Interface hardware can communicate to the Series 90 70 PLC and to LIMITED SERVICES PERMITTED if no access to the Series 90 70 PLC is possible refer to the discussion in Chapter 6 for the method used for communicating between the Ethernet Interface hardware and the Series 90 70 PLC The Series 90 70 application has the ability to explicitly set the status values of the VMD based on its knowledge of the VMD using explicit application service requests Possible values of the VMD Physical Status are OPERATIONAL PARTIALLY OPERATIONAL INOPERABLE and NEEDS COMMISSIONING Initially this status is set to OPERATIONAL by the Series 90 70 MMS Provider The Series 90 70 ladder logic can set this status to any valid value based on its knowledge of the real device status MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 GE Fanuc CNCs Only Possible values of the VMD Logical Status attribute are STATE CHANGES ALLOWED NO STATE CHANGES ALLOWED LIMITED SERVICES PERMITTED and SUPPORT SERVICES ALLOWED When the Logical Status has the value STATE CHANGES ALLOWED all availa
499. which multicast address is used when loading the station The multicast addresses and slot times are assigned to the Load Groups via the System Network Pa rameters menu Value may be 0 to 4 default is 0 COMMENTS This field is optional but may be used to insert a comment line up to 40 characters long for the station being configured These comments will be displayed on the List All Stations Screen GFK 0868 Chapter 8 Tuning and Configuring Stations for an Advanced Network 8 3 Selecting a Station Select a station by filling in the STATION_NAME field in one of three ways m Type in the Station Name or m Type in a lt lt MAC Address gt gt specified as exactly 12 hexadecimal digits within a double set of brackets for example lt lt 08001901001d gt gt The GSM will convert the MAC address into the corresponding station name or m Select a station from a list of stations Press Alt L for the list From this list you select the desired station which is then displayed on the Configure a Station Menu The Up Arrow Down Arrow Pg Up Pg Dn Home and End keys may be used to move within the list You may also begin a search by pressing Alt S When the desired station is displayed at the top of the list press the Enter key to select that station The selected station name is then displayed on the Configure a Station Screen After selecting a station you may press Alt E to enter the Configuration Editor Deleting a Station 1
500. will not see the modify command listing A typical HELP command when you are not logged in ie you are in Monitor level is shown below gt help lt lt lt Monitor Commands gt gt gt acb bps exs help log node pi rib time var vmd cap login show date ltime SOSW mdib stat tally A typical HELP command when you are logged in is shown below help lt lt lt Monitor Commands gt gt gt acb bps exs help log node pi rib time var vmd lt lt lt Modify Commands gt gt gt chbps chdate chltime load logout net stopt test trace cap login show chsosw ok date ltime SOSW chtime rem mdib stat tally clear clsosw report restart MMS Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 LOADCommand The LOAD command has the form LOAD The LOAD command causes the Ethernet Interface to enter the load state as described in Chapter 2 Installation Procedure 4 Configuring and Downloading a Station After the LOAD command is entered the module must have its software reloaded and reinitial ized before any further processing may take place Any data transfer between the Series 90 70 PLC and the network when the LOAD command is issued is permanently lost Atypical LOAD command is shown below load Forcing software load LOG Command This command prints entries from the exception log Log entries remain in the log until they are explici
501. wnloaded from GSM Accesses Station Manager Software on Interface Network and Local Connections Figure 1 1 Major Components of the GEnet 802 3 LANN GFK 0868 1 1 The Ethernet Interface allows you to directly attach the Series 90 70 PLC to an Ethernet LAN via a user supplied transceiver and AUI cable and to access hosts and other con trol devices on the network Using standard OSI Communications including MMS Manufacturing Message Specification this interface is compatible with other products from within GE Fanuc as well as from other vendors The communications services most important to your application are supported includ ing m Data transfer and m Status indications The Ethernet Interface 1 2 An operational Ethernet Interface consists of the controller board with resident firmware and the software downloaded from the GEnet System Manager The controller board provides a physical connection from the PLC to the Ethernet LAN It also is shipped with on board diagnostics a download program to complement the downloader on the GEnet System Manager and a utility program that permits testing the cable plant The controller board becomes a fully functional communications interface only after down loading additional software from the GEnet System Manager Capabilities of the Ethernet Interface The Ethernet interface brings to your PLC a great deal of capability It will allow you to m Directly attach your
502. wo Read requests will be dif ferent if the Write request is transferring different data than was already there and the network is correctly passing application data To perform this procedure do the follow ing 1 Invoke the Logicmaster 90 70 Programmer and put the programmer On Line Enter 99R on the display line and enter SHIFT F2 Reference Tables This will display part of the Register table with the cursor pointing to R99 2 Enter the rack and slot number of the Ethernet Interface that is to receive the COMM_REQs For example hexadecimal 0002 would be rack 0 slot 2 and hexadecimal 0103 would be rack 1 slot 3 3 Move to R214 In this register and the registers that follow enter the Application Common Name of the remote node with which you wish to communicate The possible Application Common Names are stn1 stn2 or stn3 The register initialization for those names are all values are hexadecimal Register stnl stn2 stn3 R214 7473 7473 7413 R215 316E 326E 336E R216 0 0 0 R217 0 0 0 4 Now press keys SHIFT F1 Program Display Edit to display the example ladder program on the screen Make sure the Programmer is in ONLINE mode First put the CPU into STOP mode then put the CPU into RUN mode 5 From the main program block you will see rungs with a Discrete Internal 70M reference which turns on a Discrete Output Q point represented as a nickname These are the lines that you may toggle the
503. work Valid values are 8 16 32 64 and 128 frames Defaults to 8 frames Value selected by Tab or Shift Tab keys Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter Itxringlen RX_RING_LEN The maximum number of incoming frames received by this station which can be queued for processing Valid values are 8 16 32 64 and 128 frames Defaults to 8 frames Value selected by Tab or Shift Tab keys Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter rxringlen MAX DATA BUF The maximum data size of Link Layer receive buffers This the larg est possible receive frame for the Link Layer Valid range of 128 to 8192 octets De faults to 1497 octets Should be at least 70 less than the Maximum Buffer Size see the System Parameters Menu on page 3 94 Corresponds to Station Manager Pa rameter Imaxdb DISAB TX RIRY Prevents the normal automatic TX retries when a frame collision oc curs during transmission Valid values are Y and N Y specifies that TX retries are disabled N specifies that each TX frame will be retried up to 16 times De faults to N Corresponds to Station Manager Parameter ldrtry 8 8 MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Up to 8 Receive data Group Addresses may be programmed for frame reception Multi cast receive frames are accepted if they match one of these Group Addresses ADDRESS One of 8 Group Addresses used for reception of multicast frames A 6 octet hexadecimal octe
504. work Layer ES IS protocol provides a means for each station on the net work to dynamically inform others of its NSAP and sub Network layer addressing There are some OSI implementations that do not dynamically provide this information In the unlikely event that your GEnet node must communicate with such stations this menu will allow you to statically provide the equivalent information thus allowing com munications that otherwise would not be possible For more information see the section Specifying Automatic or Static Routing following the parameter definitions The table you create here is known as the Network Layer Routing Information Base RIB Table it is shown below You may create up to 10 static routing entries in the RIB table Configuration File Name CO 8Q CG 400 SERIES _96 78 1S0882 3 Config Edit Version 43 22 MMS ISO Parameters Syst Data Link Parameters Netuork Layer Parameters Prin Network Layer RIB Table ENTRY DEST INATION_NSAP HEX FIRST_HOP_NSAP rs x FIRST_HOP_MAC_ADDR HEX FIRST_HOP_LSAP BS HEX Destination Network Service Access Point Chexadecimal gt Null for IS Edit parameters on screen and press Alt U to update Pg Up Dn to change entry tt CAIt U Update Parameters CAlt K KEY HELP CAlt H PROCEDURE HELP Figure 8 6 Network Layer RIB Table Screen The Network Layer RIB Table parameters are defined as follows DESTINATION_NSAP The Network SAP
505. y the variable The MMS Deletable attribute tells whether the variable may be removed using MMS services The type gives the representation and range for the data The valid types for GE Fanuc control devices are shown in the following table MMS Ethemet Communications for the Series 90 70 PLC User s Manual May 1994 GFK 0868 Table B 9 GE Fanuc Control Device Data Types Type Description Boolean Asingle binary value Integer A signed integer value Unsigned An unsigned integer value Real A signed floating point value Bit String A sequence of consecutive bits of arbitrary bit length Octet String A sequence of eight bit values of arbitrary length Character A sequence of printable ASCII characters String Operator Station Objects CNC Only GFK 0868 MMS Operator Station object represent a mechanism for displaying or entering or both information from an operator The GE Fanuc CNC Operator Console is an example of an operator station capable of both input and output The attributes for an operator station are shown in the table below Table B 10 Operator Station Attributes Key Attribute Operator Station Name Attribute Station Type ENTRY DISPLAY ENTRY DISPLAY Constraint Station Type Entry Attribute Input Buffer Attribute State IDLE WAITING FOR INPUT STRING INPUT BUFFER FILLED Constraint Station Type DISPLAY Attribute List of Output Buffer Attribute State IDLE OUTPUT BUFFERS
506. y us ing the Status Request command The COMM REO format for this command is shown in the table below Table 6 41 Status Request COMM REG Parameter Description Word Offset Value Word Length of MDB 0 8 Wait NOWaitFlag 1 0 No Wait CRSW Memory Type 2 See Footnote 1 CRSW Offset 3 0 Max Configured Idle Timeout Value 4 0 MaximumCommunicationTime 5 0 CommandNumber 6 8250 203AH Association Control Block Pointer Memory Type 7 See Footnote 1 Association Control Block Pointer Offset 8 Invoke ID 9 10 0 65 535 Maximum Length of Status Buffer 11 4 20 Status Buffer Memory Type 12 See Table 6 16 Status Buffer Offset 13 1 Quick Reference Memory Type R AI WAQ Q T M DecimalValue 8 10 12 70 72 74 76 Command Number Identifies this as a Status Request command Association Control Block The PLC address of the Association Control Block for this association Invoke ID The unique MMS Invocation ID Maximum Length of Status Buffer The Length of Status Buffer parameter should be set to the maximum number of octets that can be used to hold the returned status in formation If the length specified is insufficient to return all of the data only the speci fied number of octets is returned and a truncation indication most significant bit of the length is given Status Buffer The PLC address of a buffer of four or more words where the octets of a status buffer are to be stored No more octets than are s

4 - GE Intelligent Platforms: Support Home

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents